Billionaire businessman and former New York City Mayor Michael Bloomberg is warning that governments around the world are running out of time to address soaring public debt, arguing that today’s fiscal challenges are becoming one of the greatest long-term risks facing the global economy.

In an opinion article published Thursday, July 9, Bloomberg said advanced economies have allowed government borrowing to climb to levels not seen since the aftermath of World War II, leaving fewer options to respond to future financial crises.

His central argument is that governments rescued the private sector during the 2008 financial crisis and again during the COVID-19 pandemic, but may no longer have the financial capacity to provide similar support if another major economic shock occurs.

“The next crisis could be different,” Bloomberg argued, warning that governments themselves have become increasingly overleveraged.

According to Bloomberg, government debt across advanced economies has risen from roughly 70% of gross domestic product in 2007 to approximately 110% of GDP in 2025, driven by years of deficit spending that accelerated during the pandemic.

Higher interest rates have made the situation even more challenging by increasing the cost of servicing that debt.

The concerns extend well beyond a single country.

Many developed economies continue running substantial annual deficits despite relatively strong labor markets and economic growth, reducing their financial flexibility before the next recession arrives.

Bloomberg argues that delaying difficult fiscal decisions only makes future adjustments more painful.

He called for governments to gradually reduce spending growth, improve tax collections where appropriate and strengthen financial safeguards while economic conditions remain relatively stable rather than waiting until markets force more dramatic action.

His warning echoes concerns raised by several independent fiscal organizations.

The Congressional Budget Office projects that U.S. federal debt will continue climbing over the coming decades if current spending and revenue policies remain unchanged.

Some bipartisan lawmakers have proposed limiting annual budget deficits to approximately 3% of GDP, arguing that such a target could stabilize the nation’s long-term debt burden.

Economists generally agree that sustained increases in government borrowing eventually place upward pressure on interest rates as governments compete with businesses and consumers for available capital.

Higher borrowing costs can affect nearly every part of the economy, including mortgage rates, corporate financing, consumer loans and business investment.

For companies, persistent government borrowing may also reduce access to private capital as investors allocate more money toward government debt securities.

Bloomberg acknowledged that addressing large budget deficits is politically difficult because it often requires either reducing government spending, increasing taxes or some combination of both.

Those choices have historically proven unpopular regardless of which political party controls government.

Nevertheless, he argued that acting sooner allows policymakers to make gradual adjustments rather than being forced into severe spending cuts or tax increases during an economic emergency.

Financial markets have increasingly focused on long-term fiscal sustainability as government borrowing continues expanding across many developed nations.

Investors closely monitor debt levels because they influence inflation expectations, interest rates, currency values and sovereign credit ratings.

Bloomberg’s warning also comes as governments worldwide continue making significant investments in artificial intelligence, infrastructure, defense, energy security and industrial policy, increasing pressure on already strained public finances.

Although he stopped short of predicting an imminent debt crisis, Bloomberg argued that governments should use today’s relatively stable economic conditions to strengthen their fiscal positions before another major downturn arrives.

For businesses, the message is straightforward: government debt is no longer simply a public policy issue. Rising deficits increasingly influence borrowing costs, investment decisions, financial markets and long-term economic growth.

Bloomberg concluded that the opportunity for gradual reform remains available—but that window is steadily narrowing.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Stocks opened lower Monday after Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps declared over the weekend that the Strait of Hormuz “will be closed until further notice,” pushing oil sharply higher and reigniting fears the U.S.-Iran conflict could disrupt the waterway that carries roughly one-fifth of the world’s seaborne oil. The statement followed fresh U.S. strikes near the strait, confirmed by U.S. Central Command, and Iranian counterstrikes targeting U.S. allies including Kuwait, Jordan, and Qatar. President Trump said the ceasefire he had brokered was “over” while insisting negotiations to end the war were continuing, setting up a dangerous standoff over one of the world’s most critical shipping lanes.

By late morning, the Dow Jones Industrial Average was down about 198 points, or 0.4%, near 52,438. The S&P 500 slipped roughly 0.6%, while the tech-heavy Nasdaq Composite led the retreat, falling more than 1% as chipmakers and AI-related stocks absorbed the heaviest selling pressure.

The decline erased part of last week’s gains. On Friday, the S&P 500 closed at 7,575 and the Nasdaq finished at 26,281, while the Russell 2000 lagged, ending the week down 0.4% near 2,979.

Market Movers

The day’s biggest corporate story was SK Hynix’s Nasdaq debut. Shares initially surged as much as 13% after the South Korean memory-chip giant completed a $26.5 billion offering, the largest U.S. equity sale ever by a foreign company, before reversing sharply lower in volatile trading.

The company told investors it expects tight memory supplies to keep prices elevated through 2030, driven by continued demand for DRAM and high-bandwidth memory used in artificial intelligence systems.

U.S. rival Micron Technology fell about 3.9%. Overnight in Asia, SK Hynix’s decline rippled across regional markets, helping push South Korea’s Kospi down roughly 9% and triggering a market-wide trading halt as investors questioned whether AI-related valuations had climbed too far, too fast.

Big Tech provided little support.

Meta Platforms slipped after confirming plans to invest $50 billion in its Hyperion data center in Louisiana, another major commitment to AI infrastructure that investors increasingly want justified through future earnings.

Tesla traded near $408, leaving the electric-vehicle maker valued for years of anticipated earnings growth.

One bright spot came from Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., which reported second-quarter revenue of $39.63 billion, up 36% from a year earlier and above company guidance, reinforcing expectations that demand for AI chips remains exceptionally strong.

Elsewhere, Circle Internet Group jumped roughly 15% after receiving federal banking approval, while reports said AI developer Anthropic selected Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley to lead its planned initial public offering.

Analyst Calls

Wall Street research desks were active throughout the session.

Jefferies upgraded BeOne Medicines to Buy from Hold, raising its price target to $380 from $333. The firm also upgraded Deckers Outdoor to Buy with a $130 target and Shopify to Buy with a $160 target.

Truist Financial upgraded Biogen to Buy, citing upcoming clinical data, while HSBC raised Capital One to Buy with a $229 target.

Wells Fargo upgraded Humana to Overweight, more than doubling its target price to $502, and initiated coverage of Atmos Energy at Overweight with a $200 target.

Not all research was positive.

Citigroup downgraded ResMed to Neutral from Buy.

Bank of America cut Papa John’s International to Underperform.

Loop Capital lowered Best Buy to Hold, while RBC Capital Markets downgraded Kymera Therapeutics and initiated coverage of Costco Wholesale at Sector Perform with a $1,000 price target.

Commodities, Rates and Volatility

Oil remained the market’s biggest driver.

West Texas Intermediate crude climbed nearly 5%, while Brent crude advanced toward $80 a barrel after the Hormuz threat—a move that, if sustained, would feed directly into gasoline, diesel, freight, manufacturing, and shipping costs worldwide.

Gold unexpectedly declined about 1.2% to roughly $4,064 an ounce, extending its recent retreat after posting its weakest quarter since 2013.

Silver traded near $60 an ounce.

Bitcoin slipped about 1.7% to approximately $62,900.

U.S. Treasury yields moved modestly higher as rising energy prices fueled renewed inflation concerns and reduced expectations for near-term Federal Reserve rate cuts.

The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) hovered around 15, remaining relatively subdued by historical standards while edging higher as investors monitored developments in the Middle East.

The Week Ahead

Markets now turn to one of the busiest weeks of the quarter.

Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh is scheduled to make his first appearance before Congress on Tuesday, the same day the June Consumer Price Index is released. The Producer Price Index follows Wednesday, while retail sales arrive Thursday.

Together, the reports could reshape expectations for interest rates during the second half of the year as policymakers weigh inflation pressures intensified by rising energy prices.

Corporate earnings also move into full swing with reports from JPMorgan Chase, Goldman Sachs, Citigroup, Wells Fargo, and Bank of America, followed later in the week by Johnson & Johnson, UnitedHealth, Netflix, and Taiwan Semiconductor.

Analysts continue to forecast a second consecutive quarter of earnings growth exceeding 20%, a key pillar supporting U.S. equities despite mounting geopolitical uncertainty.

For all the earnings reports and inflation data ahead, Wall Street’s direction this week may ultimately hinge on a question no balance sheet can answer:

Will oil continue flowing freely through the Strait of Hormuz—or is this the beginning of a broader disruption that reshapes the global economy?

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New York City’s new tax on luxury second homes drew a wave of criticism from real estate attorneys and brokers at a Department of Finance hearing on Thursday, just days after the levy took effect, with critics arguing that property owners are being asked to comply with rules that remain unclear. Attorneys and industry professionals told city officials the guidance released ahead of implementation leaves major questions unanswered, raising concerns that confusion and legal challenges could follow.

The so-called pied-à-terre tax was included in New York State’s 2026–2027 budget, approved by the New York State Legislature in late May, and officially took effect on July 1. The measure grew out of Governor Kathy Hochul’s budget proposal supporting New York City Mayor Zohran Mamdani’s effort to generate additional revenue for the city.

Who Pays the Tax?

The surcharge applies to non-primary residences meeting certain value thresholds.

For condominiums and cooperative apartments assessed at $1 million or more, owners face a tax beginning at 4%, increasing to 5.25% for properties valued between $3 million and $5 million, and 6.5% for those above $5 million.

Separate rates apply to one-, two- and three-family homes valued at $5 million or more, with taxes ranging from 0.8% to 1.3%.

City officials estimate the measure could generate approximately $500 million annually, while estimates from the New York City Comptroller’s Office project annual revenue closer to $340 million to $380 million, affecting roughly 10,000 properties.

Lawyers Say Questions Outnumber Answers

Much of Thursday’s hearing focused less on the tax itself than on how it will actually be administered.

Under the current schedule, the Department of Finance must notify property owners by August 30 if they are subject to the tax. Owners will then have just 30 days to challenge the determination by providing documentation demonstrating that the property qualifies as a primary residence.

Attorneys argued that the timeline leaves little room to resolve disputes while guidance remains incomplete.

Co-op Buildings Face Unique Challenges

Real estate lawyers said cooperative apartment buildings could face some of the greatest uncertainty.

Unlike condominiums, where taxes are billed directly to individual owners, the law requires cooperative corporations to receive a combined tax bill for all affected units. Boards would then be responsible for collecting the appropriate amounts from individual shareholders.

Attorneys questioned how boards should proceed if shareholders cannot be located, dispute the assessment or fail to pay, warning that the statute offers little direction on those situations.

Law firms also raised concerns that the law’s valuation methodology may not accurately reflect how cooperative ownership is structured, potentially creating additional legal disputes.

Potential Court Challenges Ahead

Lawyers also pointed to questions surrounding ownership through trusts, limited liability companies and other entities, arguing that several provisions remain open to interpretation. Under the law, penalties for inaccurate filings can reach 50% of the tax owed.

Many attorneys expect litigation over residency qualifications, valuation disputes and implementation procedures as property owners seek greater clarity.

Luxury Market Remains Resilient

Despite criticism surrounding the rollout, New York City’s luxury housing market has shown little immediate impact.

According to Jonathan Miller, president and chief executive of appraisal firm Miller Samuel, luxury inventory has declined approximately 40% from a year ago, reaching its lowest level since 2004. Brokers say demand for high-end Manhattan properties has remained strong despite predictions that wealthy buyers would relocate to lower-tax states.

Whether the new tax ultimately changes purchasing behavior remains uncertain. For now, attorneys say the immediate concern is ensuring property owners understand how the law will be applied before the first tax bills arrive.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The White House removed all three sitting members of the U.S. Election Assistance Commission on Thursday, leaving the federal agency without a quorum just months before the November midterm elections.

According to individuals familiar with the decision and a White House official, Democratic commissioners Thomas Hicks and Benjamin Hovland were dismissed by email from the White House Presidential Personnel Office, while Republican Commissioner Christy McCormick was asked to resign. The White House confirmed all three commissioners would be replaced.

The termination notices informed the commissioners that their appointments were ending effective immediately. Hovland later said he learned of his dismissal while returning from an official visit to a Missouri election office.

Commission Left Without Leadership

The Election Assistance Commission (EAC) is an independent federal agency created to help states administer elections. The commission is structured as a bipartisan four-member panel, with commissioners confirmed by the U.S. Senate.

Its fourth seat had already become vacant earlier this year following the resignation of Republican Commissioner Donald Palmer.

With all remaining commissioners now gone, the agency currently lacks the quorum required to conduct official business until new nominees are confirmed by the Senate.

Election Operations Could Be Affected

The EAC oversees several key election-related responsibilities, including accrediting laboratories that test voting equipment, certifying voting systems used by state and local governments, administering federal election grants and maintaining the national voter registration form.

Without commissioners in place, approvals for voting equipment and other agency actions may be delayed until a new commission is confirmed.

Election officials and manufacturers of voting equipment are now watching closely to determine how quickly replacements can be nominated and approved.

Supreme Court Decision Changed the Landscape

The dismissals follow the U.S. Supreme Court’s decision in Trump v. Slaughter, issued in late June, which held that the president has broader authority to remove officials serving at certain independent federal agencies.

The administration cited that ruling in defending Thursday’s actions.

Political Debate Intensifies

The removals come amid continued debate over federal election policy.

Following Congress’s failure to approve the SAVE America Act, President Donald Trump signed an executive order directing the commission to pursue additional voter registration and election administration changes, including proof-of-citizenship requirements and updated voting system standards.

With no commissioners currently serving, questions remain about how those initiatives will proceed until the agency is reconstituted.

The decision immediately drew criticism from Democratic lawmakers and several state election officials, who argued the timing creates uncertainty ahead of the November elections. Supporters of the administration contend the president has the constitutional authority to appoint leadership that reflects his policy priorities.

Business and Government Impact

Beyond election administration, the leadership vacuum also affects companies that manufacture and certify voting equipment, along with state and local governments that rely on federal certification standards and grant funding.

Until new commissioners receive Senate confirmation, the agency’s ability to approve voting systems and carry out certain statutory responsibilities remains limited, shifting greater responsibility to state election officials during one of the busiest election cycles of the year.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The federal government’s push to run its own deportation airline is well behind schedule. Homeland Security Secretary Markwayne Mullin said in mid-May that the Department of Homeland Security expected to fold its new fleet into removal flights “in the coming weeks,” yet the roughly 10 aircraft the department bought early this year had spent much of 2026 parked at a maintenance facility in Louisiana, according to a person familiar with the matter and public flight-tracking data cited by CNN. None had carried a single deportee.

The plan began under Mullin’s predecessor, Kristi Noem. For decades, Immigration and Customs Enforcement, the agency inside DHS that handles removals, had leaned on charter operators to fly people out of the country. Noem’s team wanted to own the planes instead, a shift meant to help deliver President Donald Trump‘s goal of deporting 1 million people a year. DHS signed a contract worth nearly $140 million with Daedalus Aviation to buy up to six Boeing 737s, funded from the roughly $170 billion Congress approved over four years for immigration enforcement in last year’s tax-and-spending law.

A Fleet Waiting to Fly

The fleet grew to eight 737s and two Gulfstream jets. William Walters, chief executive of Daedalus Aviation, told CNN the aircraft were sold at cost plus overhead, including the expense of converting passenger aircraft for deportation operations. Neither Walters nor DHS disclosed a detailed cost breakdown.

When Markwayne Mullin became Homeland Security secretary, he ordered a review of contracts executed under the prior administration. DHS said the aircraft have been undergoing maintenance, safety inspections and operational modifications before entering service. Several of the planes were also used during evacuation missions tied to the conflict involving Iran, though they have not yet been deployed for deportation flights.

The Real Cost Comes After the Purchase

Industry experts say purchasing aircraft is only the first step.

Operating an airline requires ongoing spending for pilots, maintenance, insurance, fuel, flight crews and regulatory compliance. Former ICE officials told CNN that sustaining a government-owned fleet presents significant long-term operational challenges beyond the initial acquisition cost.

At least initially, DHS plans to rely on commercial operators to fly the aircraft, but charter companies must still receive regulatory approvals and train crews to operate the newly acquired Boeing 737 fleet before regular operations can begin.

Can It Save Taxpayers Money?

DHS has argued that operating its own fleet could eventually reduce deportation costs by as much as $280 million through more efficient scheduling and reduced reliance on outside charter companies.

According to ICE figures, charter deportation flights currently cost between approximately $7,000 and $27,000 per flight hour, depending on aircraft type and mission requirements. Officials argue that eliminating multiple layers of subcontracting could reduce long-term operating expenses.

For now, however, deportation flights continue to rely largely on private charter operators while the government-owned fleet awaits full deployment.

Removal Flights Continue to Increase

Despite delays involving the government fleet, deportation activity continues to rise.

Human Rights First, which tracks removal flights, reported 245 deportation flights during one recent month—the highest monthly total since the organization began monitoring flights in 2020.

Whether DHS ultimately achieves the projected savings will depend on how efficiently the government can operate and maintain its own aircraft over the long term. Until the fleet begins regular operations, the anticipated financial benefits remain projections rather than demonstrated results.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Trenton — New Jersey families can now claim the state’s refundable Child Tax Credit through a free online tool that Governor Mikie Sherrill unveiled on Friday, a move her administration says will put money worth up to $1,250 per child into the hands of lower-income parents who often miss out because they aren’t required to file a tax return. The platform, called SimpleFile, is live at SimpleFile.NJ.gov, works on mobile phones, and is offered in English and Spanish.

The benefit itself is not new, but the reach is the point. An estimated 200,000 families have already claimed the credit, and state officials say many more qualify and have never applied. State Treasurer Aaron Binder said the goal is for every eligible family to receive the money, calling tax season overwhelming for households that need a simpler path. Families that do not normally file a return have historically been the hardest group to reach, since the credit is claimed on a state tax filing they may never submit.

Here is the eligibility status families need to know. To use the SimpleFile shortcut specifically, an applicant must have been a full-year New Jersey resident in 2025, must have earned less than $20,000 if filing jointly or under $10,000 if filing individually, must have at least one dependent age 5 or younger who lived with them for most of the year, and must not otherwise be required to file a full federal or state return. Households above those income lines still qualify for the credit itself, but claim it the standard way on their New Jersey return rather than through the new tool.

The credit is tiered by income and available to families earning $80,000 or less. Under the fiscal 2027 budget, the maximum rises from $1,000 to $1,250. Households earning $30,000 or less receive the full $1,250. Families earning more than $30,000 but not more than $40,000 receive $1,000; those between $40,000 and $50,000 receive $750; those between $50,000 and $60,000 receive $500; and those earning more than $60,000 up to $80,000 receive $250. Each figure is a step up from the prior year’s amount, part of a 25% expansion the Legislature approved for the 2026 through 2028 tax years.

For the consumer economy, the timing matters. Sherrill framed the credit as one of the most direct affordability levers the state controls, money parents spend immediately on childcare, groceries, clothing, and other essentials rather than saving. That makes the program function less like a long-term tax break and more like a direct injection into local retail and service spending across the state’s 21 counties. Senate Majority Leader M. Teresa Ruiz, a sponsor of the 2018 law that created the credit and of the recent expansion, has argued the relief strengthens the financial stability of working families and helps them keep pace with rising living costs.

The tool was built through a partnership among the New Jersey Innovation Authority, the Treasury Department’s Division of Taxation, and the nonprofit Code for America, which has developed similar simplified-filing systems in other states. By stripping the process down to the few questions that determine eligibility, the state is betting it can convert awareness into actual claims, the gap that has left tens of thousands of qualifying families without money already set aside for them in the budget.

Families who have not yet filed for the current year remain eligible to claim the credit, and those who qualify for the streamlined path can complete an application at SimpleFile.NJ.gov. Households that want to confirm which tier they fall into, or that need the standard filing route, can find details on the New Jersey Division of Taxation’s Child Tax Credit page at nj.gov/treasury/taxation.

The broader question for the state is uptake. A credit only delivers economic relief when families actually collect it, and New Jersey has now removed one of the largest remaining obstacles: a filing requirement that quietly screened out the very households the benefit was designed to help. Whether the new site closes that gap will show up not just in claim totals but in the everyday spending of parents who, until this week, may not have known the money was theirs to take.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton, New Jersey © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Five ranking Senate Democrats on Friday, July 10, renewed their push for congressional hearings into President Donald Trump’s cryptocurrency businesses, pointing to a newly released federal financial disclosure that shows the president and his family took in more than $1 billion tied to digital assets in 2025 — much of it from ventures with foreign and unnamed investors.

The demand came in a joint statement from Elizabeth Warren of Massachusetts, ranking member of the Senate Banking Committee; Richard Blumenthal of Connecticut, ranking member of the Permanent Subcommittee on Investigations; Gary Peters of Michigan, ranking member of the Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs Committee; Dick Durbin of Illinois, ranking member of the Judiciary Committee; and Ron Wyden of Oregon, ranking member of the Finance Committee. All five wrote to the Republican chairs who control whether any hearing actually happens.

The trigger was paperwork. Trump’s 927-page annual financial disclosure, released by the administration on June 30, showed the president reported at least $2.24 billion in total revenue for 2025. Of that, more than $580 million came from crypto-related income, including roughly $515 million from World Liberty Financial token sales and about $65 million from selling equity in the venture’s holding company. Trump also reported $635 million in royalties from “Celebration Coins,” the disclosure line tied to his memecoin business. Add it together and the crypto-linked haul clears $1 billion, with some tallies putting it closer to $1.4 billion.

For the everyday reader, the money question is less about the size of the number and more about who is on the other side of these deals. The senators’ central worry is World Liberty Financial, the decentralized-finance and stablecoin project the Trump family launched in 2024. Public reporting has pegged a 49% stake in the venture to a group linked to the United Arab Emirates, purchased for roughly $500 million four days before Trump’s second inauguration, with about $218 million paid upfront to entities tied to the Trump family and to the family of Steve Witkoff, the U.S. special envoy to the Middle East. A separate chunk of the company — about 25%, according to the senators — is held by unspecified third parties the public cannot identify.

The lawmakers argue that foreign money flowing into a sitting president’s business, followed by favorable American policy, is a combination Congress cannot ignore. In their earlier June letter, the senators wrote that the arrangement “marked something unprecedented in American politics: a foreign government official taking a major ownership stake in an incoming U.S. president’s company.” They point to a run of decisions that followed the investment: administration approval of roughly $1.4 billion in arms sales to the UAE, authorization to sell 35,000 advanced AI chips to the Emirati firm G42 over national security objections, and moves to loosen crypto oversight, including disbanding the Justice Department’s National Cryptocurrency Enforcement Team.

There is also a live legislative angle that gives the fight real stakes. Trump is pressing Congress to pass the Clarity Act, which would build a federal regulatory framework for digital assets and split oversight between two financial regulators. He already signed the GENIUS Act into law last July, though that measure covered only stablecoins — dollar-pegged tokens like World Liberty’s USD1. The senators say it is a problem that the president is urging lawmakers to write the rules for an industry he is personally earning from. Senate Democrats have signaled they can slow or withhold votes on the crypto bills Republicans want, giving the minority a rare piece of leverage heading into a narrow pre-recess window.

The White House rejected the criticism flatly. Spokeswoman Anna Kelly called the joint statement “the same, tired narrative that Democrats have pushed against President Trump, his family, and his administration for a decade,” and said plainly, “There are no conflicts of interest.” Kelly has separately argued that the administration’s expanded AI cooperation with the UAE was built to strengthen American technology leadership, with safeguards to prevent U.S.-origin technology from being diverted. Trump, in a White House interview last week, said there was “nothing illegal” or “wrong” with his ventures and noted that his son Eric Trump oversees his assets while outside firms manage the investments.

The practical hurdle for Democrats is arithmetic. Republicans control both chambers, so committee chairs alone decide whether hearings occur. A spokesperson for the Judiciary Committee pointed to a July 9 letter in which Chairman Chuck Grassley of Iowa said he has “consistently held the same approach to my oversight during administrations of both political parties” and faulted Democrats for not scrutinizing former President Joe Biden and his family more closely. Spokespeople for the other committee chairs did not immediately respond. Barring a change of heart from the majority, the Democrats’ demand functions less as a scheduled proceeding than as a paper trail — one they can wave every time Republicans ask for votes on the crypto bills the White House wants passed.

JBizNews Desk | Washington © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Construction officially began Thursday on 2 World Trade Center, the final commercial tower planned for the rebuilt World Trade Center campus in Lower Manhattan. The building will become the new global headquarters of American Express, marking a major milestone nearly 25 years after the September 11 terrorist attacks destroyed the original towers.

A groundbreaking ceremony at 200 Greenwich Street marked the start of vertical construction on a project that had remained stalled for more than a decade. The 55-story tower, developed by Silverstein Properties on land owned by the Port Authority of New York and New Jersey, will rise 1,226 feet, encompass approximately 2 million square feet of office space and accommodate up to 10,000 employees. The project is expected to be completed in 2031.

American Express will own the building while leasing the land from the Port Authority and will occupy the tower as its sole tenant. The company will remain at its current headquarters at 200 Vesey Street until construction is complete. The headquarters project is being financed entirely with private capital, without public funding.

New York City Mayor Zohran Mamdani, speaking during the ceremony, described the World Trade Center site as hallowed ground and called the groundbreaking another important chapter in Lower Manhattan’s long recovery. He was joined by City Council Speaker Julie Menin, Comptroller Mark Levine, and other civic and business leaders. The tower, designed by internationally recognized architectural firm Foster + Partners, completes the original master plan for the 16-acre World Trade Center campus.

Beyond its symbolism, the project carries major economic significance. City officials estimate construction will generate approximately $11.4 billion in economic activity while producing about $250 million in tax revenue. More than 3,200 union construction jobs are expected to be created during the building phase, providing a substantial boost to New York’s construction industry over the next several years.

The project also represents an important vote of confidence in Manhattan’s office market. As many companies continue adapting to hybrid work arrangements, American Express is making a long-term commitment to Lower Manhattan by investing in a purpose-built global headquarters that will eventually house thousands of employees in one location.

Reaching this point took years of revisions. Earlier proposals envisioned a significantly taller tower, while several prospective anchor tenants, including News Corp., explored the project before ultimately walking away. The pandemic further delayed development as demand for office space weakened dramatically. American Express’s decision to become both the owner and sole occupant ultimately provided the certainty needed to move construction forward.

For Lower Manhattan, the benefits extend well beyond one corporate headquarters. Thousands of daily employees will eventually support local restaurants, retailers, transportation providers and small businesses throughout the neighborhood. Completing the final commercial tower also closes one of New York City’s longest-running redevelopment efforts, signaling that one of America’s most important financial districts continues attracting major corporate investment despite changing workplace trends.

With construction now underway, the final piece of the rebuilt World Trade Center campus is finally moving from decades of planning into reality, completing a project that stands as both an economic investment and a lasting symbol of New York City’s resilience.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A growing number of Americans are leaving the workforce, and economists remain divided over the reasons behind the trend. According to Bureau of Labor Statistics data released for June, the labor force participation rate—the percentage of working-age Americans who are either employed or actively looking for work—fell to 61.5%, its lowest level since March 2021 and, excluding the pandemic period, the weakest reading since 1976.

The labor force shrank by approximately 720,000 people during the month, while the number of Americans classified as not in the labor force increased by 832,000. Although the official unemployment rate declined to 4.2%, economists noted that much of the improvement reflected people leaving the workforce rather than finding new employment. At the same time, while the establishment survey showed employers added 57,000 jobs during June, the separate household survey indicated that the number of Americans actually employed declined by more than 500,000.

The demographics behind the decline are equally significant. Labor force participation among Americans 55 and older dropped to 37.1%, the lowest level in more than two decades. Participation also slipped among prime-age workers between 25 and 54, a group traditionally considered the core of the American workforce.

Economists have offered several explanations. Laura Ullrich of the Indeed Hiring Lab, formerly with the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond, argues that demographic changes are playing a growing role as baby boomers retire and slower immigration reduces the supply of available workers. Research she co-authored projects the U.S. labor force could shrink by approximately 5.9 million workers between 2025 and 2032. Strong stock market gains have also allowed many older Americans to retire earlier than previously expected.

Others believe a weakening labor market is discouraging workers from continuing their job searches. Michele Evermore of the National Employment Law Project said finding employment has become increasingly difficult for many job seekers, prompting some workers to step away temporarily while pursuing additional education or retraining as artificial intelligence changes employer hiring needs. Jasmine Tucker of the National Women’s Law Center pointed to another growing factor: return-to-office policies combined with high childcare and caregiving costs, which she says have disproportionately pushed women out of the workforce.

For businesses, the distinction is critical because each explanation carries different economic implications. If fewer people are working because employers are slowing hiring, it could signal weakening demand and a cooling economy. If workers are instead retiring, caregiving or otherwise unavailable, employers may continue facing labor shortages that keep wages elevated, complicate hiring and limit long-term economic growth.

The trend also presents another challenge for the Federal Reserve. A shrinking labor force can contribute to wage inflation by reducing the supply of available workers, even as slower hiring points toward broader economic moderation. Policymakers must weigh both dynamics as they determine future interest-rate policy.

The most likely explanation may be a combination of several factors occurring simultaneously. Demographic shifts, changing workplace expectations, caregiving responsibilities and the evolving impact of artificial intelligence are all reshaping the labor market. Regardless of the cause, the available workforce continues to shrink, creating challenges that employers, policymakers and the broader economy will likely face for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta Platforms closed Friday with its biggest one-day gain since April 2025, rising about 6% after the company detailed plans for a new AI cloud unit and its own data-center chip, and Wall Street began treating the social-media giant as a serious contender in cloud computing. The rally, driven by Meta’s disclosure of a business it calls Meta Compute and an in-house chip project code-named Iris, capped a week in which the stock climbed nearly 15%, its best five-day run since early 2024 and the top performance among the Magnificent Seven. It helped push the major indexes to weekly gains heading into Monday’s open.

The broad market ended Friday higher across the board. The S&P 500 rose 0.42% to 7,575.39, the Nasdaq Composite added 0.29% to 26,281.61, and the Dow Jones Industrial Average gained 149.60 points, or 0.29%, to 52,637.01. Both the S&P 500 and Nasdaq notched weekly wins after a choppy stretch dominated by renewed U.S.-Iran tensions and questions about how much investors should pay for anything tied to artificial intelligence. The Dow slipped about 0.5% on the week. Traders spent much of Friday watching ceasefire talks in the Middle East and the Wall Street debut of a major foreign chipmaker, but the session’s clearest signal was the market’s willingness to reward AI spending when a company can show a path to earning it back.

Market movers

Meta was the headline act. The company’s plan to sell excess computing power and hosted AI models through Meta Compute pushes it directly against Amazon Web Services, Microsoft Azure, and Google Cloud, turning what had been a feared cost center into a possible new revenue line. Iris, the company’s own AI chip, is slated to begin production in September, part of a build-out toward roughly 14 gigawatts of computing capacity next year. The move drew a wave of bullish analyst notes. Wolfe Research kept an Outperform rating and an $800 price target, estimating that every gigawatt of compute Meta monetizes at a $25 billion run-rate could lift earnings per share by about 20%, while cautioning that 2026 capital spending could approach $200 billion, well above the roughly $160 billion Wall Street had penciled in. Erste Group upgraded the stock to Buy from Hold, citing superior growth and margins. Bank of America maintained its Buy rating and pointed to an internal Meta memo, reviewed by Reuters, suggesting the company may be building AI capacity at a far lower cost per gigawatt than analysts expected. Citizens trimmed its target to $800 from $825 but stayed constructive.

The day’s other big story was SK Hynix, which made its Nasdaq debut Friday in the largest-ever U.S. listing by a foreign company, raising $26.5 billion. The South Korean memory-chip maker, a key supplier to Nvidia, opened at $170 a share, roughly 14% above its offer price, and finished up about 13%. Nvidia itself gained around 4%, helping lead the S&P 500 higher, though the new listing pressured domestic memory names like Micron Technology as investors weighed fresh competition for their dollars. Elsewhere, Circle Internet Group rose 8.2% after winning federal approval to operate as a trust bank, WD-40 climbed 11% on strong quarterly results, and EquipmentShare surged 17% after raising its full-year outlook. On the downside, Delta Air Lines fell 2.8% as rising fuel costs overshadowed an earnings beat, Ionis Pharmaceuticals dropped 7.6% after a late-stage heart-drug trial with partner AstraZeneca failed, and Brookdale Senior Living slid 7.4% on weak June occupancy.

Commodities and volatility

Oil prices eased Friday as traders parsed conflicting signals out of the Middle East, with President Donald Trump at one point declaring the U.S. ceasefire with Iran over before noting that talks would continue. Tankers have continued moving through the Strait of Hormuz despite renewed hostilities, keeping a lid on crude. Gold fell 0.47% to $4,112.62 an ounce, and the yield on the 10-year Treasury ticked up to 4.56%. Market volatility stayed relatively subdued through the week even as headlines whipsawed, a sign that investors are treating the geopolitical risk as a slow-burning backdrop rather than an immediate threat to earnings.

The week ahead

Monday opens the heart of second-quarter earnings season, with big banks leading off and investors hunting for evidence that consumer spending and corporate profits are holding up against sticky inflation and higher-for-longer rates. Meta itself reports on July 29, a date that now carries added weight given Friday’s re-rating. Traders will also keep watching the Middle East, where any breakdown in the U.S.-Iran ceasefire could send oil higher and rattle the AI-led rally that carried markets into the weekend. For now, Meta’s surge has handed Wall Street a fresh reason to believe the AI trade still has room to run.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

On Friday, Apple filed suit against OpenAI in the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California, accusing the ChatGPT maker of stealing confidential information to build its first consumer hardware device. In a statement, an Apple spokesperson said significant evidence had emerged that individuals employed by OpenAI wrongfully took the company’s secret information about unreleased technologies, processes, and products. The complaint names OpenAI, hardware startup io Products, and two former Apple employees now working at the AI firm.

The two named defendants are Tang Tan, now OpenAI’s chief hardware officer, and Chang Liu, a former electrical engineer. Tan spent 24 years at Apple, most recently as vice president of product design for the iPhone and Apple Watch, before leaving in early 2024 to work with designer Jony Ive. Liu worked at Apple for eight years as a senior systems electrical engineer and left for OpenAI in January 2026. Apple says the theft was not the work of a few rogue employees but a coordinated pattern of misconduct reaching senior leadership.

Apple’s filing lays out specific allegations against both men. It claims Liu kept a work-issued laptop after leaving, then exploited a software bug to reach Apple’s cloud file storage. According to the complaint, Liu downloaded a compilation of technical files running more than a thousand pages, including detailed manufacturing documents for the circuit boards used in Apple hardware. Apple also alleges Liu coached a colleague he was recruiting on which confidential materials to study before her own OpenAI interview.

The accusations against Tan center on hiring. Apple says he used internal project code names to draw information out of job candidates still employed at Apple, and directed them to bring actual parts to interviews for what the filing calls “show and tell” sessions. The complaint says Tan retained an internal Apple managers’ document marked “Need to Know” that describes departure security procedures, then shared it with new hires so they could evade Apple’s exit checks. Apple claims Tan advised recruits not to tell Apple they had accepted OpenAI jobs, so they could stay in place and keep gathering information.

Apple goes further, alleging the misconduct extended to suppliers. The filing says OpenAI approached Apple’s trusted manufacturing partners using confidential Apple information, and had one partner carry out a proprietary metal-finishing technique after misleading it into believing Apple had granted permission. Apple describes the conduct in the complaint as the tip of the iceberg, arguing that OpenAI’s young hardware business rests on shaky ground because of its reliance on stolen material.

The lawsuit marks a sharp break between two companies that were partners just two years ago. In 2024, Apple and OpenAI announced a deal to integrate ChatGPT into the iPhone, with OpenAI chief executive Sam Altman appearing at Apple’s headquarters for the reveal. Altman is referenced in the filing but is not a defendant, and Apple does not accuse him or Ive of wrongdoing. Notably, Apple states that the ChatGPT integration agreement is not at issue in the case, though the rupture raises obvious questions about whether that commercial relationship can survive.

Relations cooled after OpenAI moved into hardware. Last year the company acquired io Products, the venture co-founded by Ive, Tan, and other former Apple leaders, in a deal valued at roughly $6.5 billion. OpenAI has never said publicly what device it is building, describing it only as a new way to interact with AI beyond traditional products and screens. Reports have pointed to a smart speaker and a screen-free assistant aware of a user’s surroundings. Apple’s filing notes that more than 400 former Apple employees now work at OpenAI, a figure that underscores how aggressively the AI firm has recruited from Cupertino.

For both companies, the stakes are commercial as much as legal. Apple is preparing a revamped Siri for release later this year, built on Google’s Gemini models rather than OpenAI technology, and is fighting to stay central as customers shift toward AI assistants. OpenAI, meanwhile, faces the suit while exploring a public offering and fending off competition from Anthropic and Google. The complaint arrives two months after OpenAI won a jury trial brought by Elon Musk, and adds to a growing legal load for a company under pressure to ship its first physical product.

Apple is asking the court to bar OpenAI from using or disclosing its trade secrets, to order the return of confidential materials, and to award damages to be set at trial. It is also suing Tan and Liu for breach of their employment agreements. OpenAI had not responded publicly as of Friday.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

AUSTIN, Texas — Tesla’s second-quarter delivery report released on July 2, together with Thursday’s market close and the public filings surrounding SpaceX’s June 12 Nasdaq debut, show investors have largely maintained confidence in the electric-vehicle maker despite the arrival of Elon Musk’s newest publicly traded company. Tesla shares closed Thursday at $406.55, up 3.2% on the session and trading near the level they held before SpaceX made its record-setting public debut.

The performance has answered one of Wall Street’s biggest questions heading into the summer. With SpaceX becoming a publicly traded company, investors debated whether the new stock would siphon capital away from Tesla, long viewed as the primary publicly traded vehicle for investors seeking exposure to Elon Musk’s businesses. One month later, the market has shown little evidence of a meaningful rotation.

SpaceX, formally Space Exploration Technologies Corp., completed its initial public offering on June 12, pricing shares at $135 before beginning trading on the Nasdaq. The company raised approximately $75 billion, making it the largest initial public offering on record. Shares opened strongly, briefly pushing Musk’s net worth above the trillion-dollar mark before retreating from their early highs. By Thursday’s close, SpaceX shares finished at $152.16, reflecting a more measured valuation after the initial excitement surrounding the offering.

Ahead of the IPO, many market participants expected a different outcome. Because Tesla has long served as the primary publicly traded investment tied to Musk’s broader vision, analysts questioned whether retail investors would shift capital toward the rocket maker once it became available on public markets. Several firms cautioned that a second publicly traded Musk company could divide investor interest that had historically flowed almost exclusively into Tesla.

Instead, Tesla has remained remarkably resilient.

The company’s operating performance has also helped reinforce investor confidence. On July 2, Tesla reported delivering 480,126 vehicles during the second quarter while producing 451,758 vehicles, marking its strongest second quarter on record and its first year-over-year quarterly delivery growth since 2023. The results significantly exceeded Wall Street expectations and represented one of the company’s strongest operational performances in recent years.

Yet despite the strong delivery report, Tesla shares fell sharply on the day of the announcement. The decline reflected broader market dynamics rather than disappointment with the delivery numbers themselves. Investors who had accumulated shares ahead of the report took profits following the release, while continued competition in the global electric-vehicle market and Tesla’s premium valuation kept pressure on the stock despite the operational beat.

That disconnect continues to define Tesla’s investment story.

The company’s valuation is driven by far more than automobile sales alone. Investors increasingly view Tesla as a technology company whose long-term value depends on autonomous driving, artificial intelligence, robotics and future mobility platforms. Those expectations remain largely unchanged following SpaceX’s public debut, helping explain why both companies have attracted investor interest without materially weakening demand for either stock.

Analysts remain divided on how the relationship between the two companies could evolve. Some believe the growing public visibility of both businesses could eventually create strategic opportunities between them, while others argue each company is better positioned to pursue its own long-term objectives independently. Regardless of those differing views, the market has thus far demonstrated confidence that both companies can coexist as separate investments without one significantly undermining the other.

Investors are also monitoring several additional developments surrounding Tesla, including regulatory discussions involving autonomous vehicle operations, continued expansion of its artificial intelligence initiatives and increasing competition from global electric-vehicle manufacturers. While those issues remain important, they have not displaced the company’s ability to generate strong investor interest following the SpaceX listing.

The next major catalyst arrives on July 22, when Tesla is scheduled to report second-quarter financial results. While delivery figures provide insight into vehicle demand, the earnings report will reveal whether record deliveries translated into stronger profitability, healthier margins and updated guidance for the remainder of the year.

For now, one conclusion is becoming increasingly clear. The historic public debut of SpaceX has not diminished investor appetite for Tesla. Instead, Wall Street appears willing to view both companies as separate investments tied to different parts of Elon Musk’s long-term business strategy, allowing Tesla to maintain its footing even as one of the largest IPOs in history captured global attention.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Hugo Boss urged shareholders to reject a takeover offer from Britain’s Frasers Group, saying the approximately $2.2 billion proposal significantly undervalues the German luxury fashion company and its long-term growth potential.

In a unanimous recommendation, both Hugo Boss’s Management Board and Supervisory Board advised investors not to accept Frasers’ €38-per-share cash offer, describing the bid as financially inadequate despite Frasers already being the company’s largest shareholder.

A Strategic Battle for Control

Frasers Group, controlled by British retail billionaire Mike Ashley, already owns roughly 26% of Hugo Boss.

The latest offer comes as Frasers moves closer to the 30% ownership threshold that triggers Germany’s mandatory takeover rules, requiring an offer to remaining shareholders.

The €38-per-share proposal represents the minimum price required under German regulations based on Frasers’ previous share purchases.

Hugo Boss Says the Offer Falls Short

Chief Executive Daniel Grieder said the offer “fails to capture the company’s intrinsic value and long-term potential.”

Supervisory Board Chairman Stephan Sturm echoed that conclusion, saying the proposal does not adequately reflect the value expected to be created through Hugo Boss’s ongoing transformation strategy.

The company said independent financial advisers, including Bank of America and Goldman Sachs, supported the board’s assessment.

Turnaround Plan Drives Confidence

Hugo Boss continues executing its Claim 5 strategic plan, which aims to strengthen profitability through store modernization, expanding its women’s business, simplifying product offerings and improving operational efficiency.

Management is targeting an operating margin approaching 12% while generating approximately €300 million in annual free cash flow over the coming years.

Executives argue shareholders will realize greater value by allowing the turnaround strategy to continue rather than accepting the current offer.

Frasers Remains a Long-Term Investor

Despite rejecting the bid, Hugo Boss welcomed Frasers’ continued investment in the company.

Frasers said it has no plans to change Hugo Boss’s management team or strategic direction and described itself as a long-term shareholder committed to supporting the business.

The retailer owns several major brands, including Sports Direct, Flannels, and significant stakes in companies such as Puma and ASOS.

What Investors Are Watching

Hugo Boss shares have traded just below Frasers’ offer price, suggesting investors expect the current proposal to face resistance while remaining uncertain whether a higher bid will emerge.

For Hugo Boss management, the challenge now shifts from defending the offer to delivering the financial improvements promised under its turnaround strategy.

For Frasers, the move represents another step in expanding its influence over one of Europe’s best-known luxury fashion brands without paying a significant acquisition premium.

Whether the retailer ultimately increases its offer or continues building its ownership stake under existing regulations will likely determine the next chapter in one of Europe’s most closely watched retail takeover battles.

JBizNews Desk | London
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

OpenAI is undergoing another major leadership change after Fidji Simo, one of the company’s top executives, announced she is stepping down from her full-time role because of a chronic health condition.

Simo, who oversees much of OpenAI’s business operations, product strategy and commercial deployment, said she will transition into a part-time advisory role while focusing on her health.

The move comes as OpenAI continues expanding globally and prepares for what many analysts expect could become one of the largest technology public offerings in history.

A Key Leader Departs

Simo joined OpenAI’s Board of Directors before later assuming responsibility for much of the company’s commercial operations.

Prior to OpenAI, she served as Chief Executive Officer of Instacart, leading the grocery delivery company through its public offering, and previously spent more than a decade at Meta, where she led the Facebook app.

OpenAI Chief Executive Sam Altman thanked Simo for her leadership, saying she helped build many of the systems supporting ChatGPT’s rapid global growth.

Leadership Responsibilities Shift

OpenAI said Simo’s responsibilities will now be distributed among several senior executives, including:

  • Greg Brockman, President
  • Sarah Friar, Chief Financial Officer
  • Jason Kwon, Chief Strategy Officer

The company said the transition is designed to maintain continuity while continuing to expand its enterprise and consumer businesses.

A Critical Moment for OpenAI

The leadership change comes during one of the most important periods in OpenAI’s history.

The company continues investing heavily in enterprise AI products while competing aggressively with rivals including Anthropic, Google, Microsoft, Meta, and xAI.

OpenAI has also continued releasing new generations of its AI models while expanding business-focused automation tools designed for corporations worldwide.

Reports indicate the company recently filed confidential paperwork that could eventually lead to an initial public offering, although OpenAI has not publicly confirmed timing.

Competition Continues to Intensify

The AI industry remains one of the fastest-growing sectors in technology.

Companies are investing hundreds of billions of dollars in infrastructure, data centers and advanced AI systems as demand continues accelerating across nearly every industry.

Leadership stability has become increasingly important as investors closely monitor the sector’s largest companies.

Health Comes First

In her message to employees, Simo said worsening symptoms from a long-term medical condition made the decision unavoidable.

She said she plans to remain connected to OpenAI in an advisory capacity while focusing on treatment and recovery.

For OpenAI, the transition represents another significant leadership change during a period of extraordinary growth and increasing competition.

As the company continues expanding its commercial operations and developing next-generation AI systems, investors and customers will be watching closely to see how the leadership team executes its long-term strategy.

JBizNews Desk | San Francisco
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JPMorgan Chase has developed a series of artificial intelligence agents that make investment allocation decisions, and in historical testing the systems outperformed the traditional 60/40 portfolio while producing lower volatility, according to research released by the bank.

The research team, led by Thomas Salopek, found that its best-performing AI model exceeded the annual return of the classic portfolio—comprised of 60% stocks and 40% bonds—by approximately 0.7 percentage point over two decades of back-tested market data. The AI systems also outperformed JPMorgan’s own rules-based investment allocation model on a risk-adjusted basis.

How the AI Agents Work

Rather than simply analyzing market data, the AI agents are designed to make asset allocation decisions.

Using large language models developed by OpenAI and Anthropic, the system evaluates economic conditions and classifies markets into four primary environments: Goldilocks, Reflation, Stagflation and Risk-Off.

The agents then determine how to allocate investments between stocks, bonds and other asset classes based on those changing conditions.

According to JPMorgan, all eight AI agents tested exceeded the performance of both the traditional 60/40 portfolio and the firm’s existing quantitative allocation framework when measured on a risk-adjusted basis.

Back-Tested Results, Not Live Investing

JPMorgan cautioned that the findings are based entirely on historical simulations and should not be interpreted as proof the strategies will outperform in future markets.

The bank noted that back-testing carries well-known limitations, including the risk of overfitting, where models perform exceptionally well using historical data but fail under future market conditions.

Researchers also warned that investment strategies can lose effectiveness as more investors begin using similar approaches.

A New Direction for Wall Street

While investment firms have increasingly used artificial intelligence to summarize research, analyze earnings reports, screen securities and identify investment opportunities, allowing AI to make actual portfolio allocation decisions represents a significant next step.

Because the traditional 60/40 portfolio serves as the foundation for countless retirement accounts, pension funds and institutional investment strategies, even modest improvements in long-term performance could have meaningful implications across trillions of dollars in managed assets.

The Next Phase of AI Investing

Industry analysts say the research highlights how artificial intelligence is evolving from a decision-support tool into a potential decision-maker.

Whether AI can consistently outperform experienced portfolio managers in live markets remains an open question. Real-world investing introduces transaction costs, changing market conditions and investor behavior that cannot be perfectly replicated through historical simulations.

Still, JPMorgan’s research provides another indication that major financial institutions are moving beyond using AI simply to assist investment professionals and are beginning to explore how intelligent agents may eventually participate directly in investment management.

If future live-market performance mirrors even a portion of the historical testing, the technology could reshape portfolio management across the investment industry over the coming years.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Manhattan’s office market turned in its busiest first half of leasing in nearly a quarter century during 2026, according to a second-quarter report released July 1 by commercial brokerage Colliers, and three marquee developments that advanced last week gave the data a physical face. Franklin Wallach, Colliers’ executive managing director of research and business development, said tenants signed 22.8 million square feet of leases across the first six months of the year, the strongest first-half showing since 2002, undercutting predictions that Mayor Zohran Mamdani’s tax agenda would drive business out of New York.

The numbers landed amid an intensifying fight over whether Mamdani, a democratic socialist who campaigned on raising taxes on corporations and the wealthy, would push companies to cheaper states. Instead, landlords spent the spring gaining leverage. Colliers put second-quarter leasing at 11.02 million square feet, down about 6.5 percent from the first quarter but up roughly 19 percent from a year earlier, the first time since 2002 that quarterly demand topped 11 million square feet for three straight quarters. Net absorption came in at a positive 3.51 million square feet.

Rents moved with the demand. The average asking rent climbed to $78.03 per square foot, its highest since July 2020, up 5.7 percent over the year in the sharpest midyear increase since 2016, per Colliers. Availability fell to 13 percent, down from 13.7 percent in March and the lowest since October 2020, well off the 18.2 percent peak of February 2024. Class A space captured nearly 69 percent of leasing, and artificial intelligence firms leased roughly 800,000 square feet in the quarter, more than those companies took in all of 2025. The quarter’s largest deal was law firm Simpson Thacher & Bartlett’s 916,000-square-foot lease at Extell Development’s 570 Fifth Avenue, followed by L’Oréal’s 484,000-square-foot renewal.

The clearest evidence of that confidence broke ground Thursday, when American Express began construction on its new global headquarters at 2 World Trade Center, the final commercial tower on the Lower Manhattan campus rebuilt after the September 11 attacks. In a statement issued through BusinessWire, the company confirmed the start of work on the 55-story, 1,226-foot tower designed by Foster + Partners and developed by Silverstein Properties. American Express, whose CEO is Stephen Squeri, will own the building and anchor it across nearly 2 million square feet, remaining at 200 Vesey Street until the tower is finished, targeted for 2031. Lisa Silverstein, CEO of Silverstein Properties, noted that her father, Larry Silverstein, 95, first promised in 2001 to rebuild the site. Mamdani attended and wielded a shovel, offering rare praise for a private-sector project, alongside Port Authority Executive Director Kathryn Garcia and Chairman Kevin O’Toole. The state estimates the build will create more than 2,000 union construction jobs and inject roughly $5.9 billion into the city’s economy.

A second project advanced in Midtown, where demolition began the week of July 7 at 350 Park Avenue to clear the way for a $4.5 billion, 1,414-foot supertall. The 64-story tower, also designed by Foster + Partners and developed by Vornado Realty Trust, Rudin and billionaire Ken Griffin, will deliver about 1.8 million square feet of Class A space. Griffin’s firms, Citadel and Citadel Securities, will anchor it with at least 850,000 square feet, nearly half the building, which the City Council approved 48 to zero. The demolition signals Griffin intends to follow through despite a bitter feud with Mamdani, who used the billionaire’s $238 million penthouse to illustrate a new tax on part-time residents. Griffin vowed to “double down” in Miami, but Vornado CEO Steven Roth attacked the mayor’s rhetoric on an earnings call, and executive Glen Weiss said the firm had “started demolition and we’re ready to roll.” Griffin took a 60 percent stake in the venture in December; Vornado and Rudin hold an option through July to keep interests of 23 to 40 percent or sell the site to Griffin for $1.2 billion.

The third move surfaced Thursday, when The Wall Street Journal identified Airbnb as the buyer of 281 Park Avenue South, the landmarked Beaux-Arts building in Gramercy known for its tie to con artist Anna Sorokin. Airbnb paid $81.5 million for the six-story, 42,500-square-foot property, its first building purchase anywhere and the only one it owns. CEO Brian Chesky said the deal reflected a long-term commitment to the city and would house one of the largest employee hubs outside San Francisco. The purchase is notable because Airbnb has been largely shut out of the city by Local Law 18, the 2022 short-term rental crackdown it continues to fight. Seller RFR, controlled by Aby Rosen, bought the 1894 building for $50 million in 2014 and booked a 63 percent premium, in a deal marketed by Avison Young’s James Nelson and broker Ryan Serhant.

The activity runs against a budget standoff beneath the leasing figures. Mamdani’s administration is weighing options to close a $5.4 billion shortfall while keeping its “tax the rich” platform, drawing warnings from Steven Fulop, president and CEO of the Partnership for New York City, that higher levies could push firms out. Expansion south remains real: JPMorgan Chase employs more workers in Dallas than in New York, and CEO Jamie Dimon wrote that the pattern would likely continue. For now, the transaction data points the other way, with Colliers projecting Manhattan’s busiest leasing year since 2000 if the second half holds.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Traders head into the final stretch before the Federal Reserve’s July 29 meeting caught in a rare bind: the same forces lifting the U.S. dollar are punishing the bond market, a split that hardened this week after Fed Chair Kevin Warsh reaffirmed that prices remain too high and declined to signal any retreat from his higher-for-longer stance.

The U.S. Dollar Index finished Friday near 100.9, within reach of the 101.8 peak it touched in late June, its strongest level in 13 months. The gauge has climbed about 3 percent this year and roughly 5 percent since late January, a sharp reversal from the first half of 2025, when the greenback logged its weakest opening half in more than 50 years. At the same time, the 10-year Treasury yield sat around 4.54 percent after brushing a seven-week high near 4.58 percent at midweek, while the 30-year bond hovered near 5.06 percent and the rate-sensitive 2-year note held around 4.14 percent. Because bond prices fall as yields rise, fixed-income holders are nursing losses even as dollar bulls press their advantage.

The engine behind both moves is the same: a Fed that has swung from planning cuts to weighing hikes. At the June 17 meeting, Warsh’s first as chair, policymakers held the federal funds rate at 3.50 to 3.75 percent in a unanimous vote, but the updated projections flipped the script. The median year-end forecast climbed to 3.8 percent from 3.4 percent in March, implying a hike rather than a cut, and 17 of 18 officials judged inflation risks tilted to the upside. Inflation has stayed stubborn, with the PCE index running at 4.1 percent in May, the hottest since 2023, and core prices up 3.3 percent. On July 10, Warsh named the leaders of five task forces to review how the central bank sets policy, a signal he intends to reshape the institution as well as its rate path.

Higher U.S. rates, and the prospect of higher ones still, widen the gap between American yields and those in Europe and Japan, pulling money toward dollar assets. The European Central Bank, led by Christine Lagarde, and the Bank of Japan both sit well below the Fed, leaving the euro and yen unable to keep pace. Muhammad Hamza Saleem, a currency analyst at Morningstar, has called the rally mostly a Fed story, driven by the hawkish June dot plot and the widening rate advantage, though he cautions that his model reads the index as roughly 15 percent overvalued and likely to drift lower into 2027.

Market movers. The dollar’s strength has rippled across assets. The euro has struggled near $1.14 even as traders price in another ECB move, and the yen has stayed under pressure, keeping Japanese officials on intervention watch. According to CME FedWatch, traders now put the odds of a hold on July 29 near 70 percent, with hike bets cooling after a soft June payrolls report that showed just 57,000 jobs added and the labor force shrinking by roughly 720,000, even as unemployment slipped to a 14-month low of 4.2 percent. Further out, the market still leans toward tightening, pricing at least one increase by the September or October meetings. New York Fed President John Williams added a wrinkle, saying he is most focused on inflation fed by demand from artificial-intelligence investment.

Commodities and volatility. The bond market’s trouble traces partly to oil. The U.S.-Iran war, now in its fifth month, has kept energy prices jumpy: a three-week-old cease-fire frayed this week as the two sides exchanged fresh strikes, though reports that talks would continue pulled U.S. crude back toward $72 a barrel and eased the haven bid that had briefly lifted the dollar. That captures the bind facing bond investors. A Middle East war would normally send buyers into Treasuries, but because this one drives up energy costs and inflation, it pushes yields higher rather than lower. Gold, another usual refuge, has wobbled near $4,000 an ounce as the strong dollar caps its appeal. Weighing on bonds from another direction is supply: the Treasury is financing wide deficits, with the Congressional Budget Office estimating last year’s tax law could add $3.4 trillion to federal debt by 2034, leaving investors to absorb heavy issuance.

Attention now turns to the July 29 decision and to Warsh‘s deliberate refusal to telegraph it. Having scrapped the forward guidance that defined the Jerome Powell era in favor of what strategists call strategic ambiguity, the new chair has left traders to price policy off inflation data alone. President Trump has pressed publicly for lower rates, but with inflation above 4 percent, Warsh has little room to oblige. Until the data cool, the market’s uncomfortable math is likely to hold: what is good for the dollar stays bad for bonds.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Brookfield, one of the world’s largest owners of commercial real estate, is in talks to buy a stake in the Hudson Square office portfolio on Manhattan’s West Side, according to people familiar with the negotiations, as first reported by The Wall Street Journal on Sunday. The discussions would value the portfolio at roughly $3.5 billion, though none of the parties has publicly confirmed an agreement, and the people familiar with the matter cautioned that negotiations remain ongoing and could still end without a deal.

The properties at the center of the discussions are held by Hudson Square Properties, a joint venture assembled a decade ago by Trinity Church Wall Street, Norway’s sovereign wealth manager Norges Bank Investment Management, and developer Hines. The venture controls roughly 6 million square feet across a dozen former printing-house buildings between SoHo, Tribeca and the Hudson River. Trinity valued the portfolio at about $3.55 billion when it sold Norges a minority interest in the 75-year ground lease in 2015.

If completed, the investment would rank among the largest Manhattan office transactions since the pandemic reshaped the commercial real estate market. It would also deepen Brookfield’s already significant presence on Manhattan’s West Side, where the company developed Manhattan West and One Manhattan West near Penn Station. Downtown, Brookfield also owns One Liberty Plaza, which secured a 475,000-square-foot lease with law firm Cleary Gottlieb Steen & Hamilton earlier this year.

One reason investors continue to focus on Hudson Square is the neighborhood’s growing concentration of technology and artificial intelligence companies. According to Newmark, asking office rents on the far West Side averaged approximately $134 per square foot during the fourth quarter of 2025, an increase of 6.2% from the previous year.

Hudson Square’s transformation accelerated after Google established a major campus spanning 315 and 345 Hudson Street and purchased St. John’s Terminal at 550 Washington Street for $2.1 billion in 2021. Disney followed with its new headquarters at 7 Hudson Square, which opened in 2024 under a 99-year, $650 million ground lease from Trinity Church.

The district continues attracting large technology tenants. AI developer Anthropic has been pursuing AEW Capital Management’s entire 466,000-square-foot building at 330 Hudson Street. PayPal leased 261,000 square feet at 345 Hudson Street earlier this year, healthcare software company Tennr expanded into 125,000 square feet, while Notion and RadicalMedia renewed significant office commitments.

For Brookfield, the strategy aligns with its broader push into artificial intelligence infrastructure. The company has expanded investments in data centers, power infrastructure and digital assets, including launching a $10 billion AI-focused infrastructure fund backed by investors that include Nvidia. A Hudson Square investment would extend that strategy into one of New York City’s strongest office markets, where AI companies are increasingly driving leasing demand.

The transaction could also benefit the existing owners. Trinity Church, whose Lower Manhattan land holdings trace back to a 1705 royal charter, has used returns from the Hudson Square venture to support its ministries and charitable work. Norges Bank Investment Management, which oversees Norway’s sovereign wealth fund, has steadily expanded its investment in the portfolio over the years, including extending portions of its ownership interest to 99-year lease terms.

The broader question is whether confidence has fully returned to New York’s office investment market. Leasing activity across Manhattan has strengthened through 2026, with available office space falling to its lowest level since 2020, yet sales of large office portfolios have remained relatively limited as buyers and sellers continue negotiating pricing expectations.

If a transaction is completed at roughly $3.5 billion, it would provide one of the clearest recent benchmarks for the value of a well-leased, technology-focused Manhattan office portfolio. It would also signal renewed institutional confidence in premier New York office assets as AI-driven demand continues reshaping the commercial real estate market.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved.

More than 1,000 MagSafe battery chargers have been recalled over burn risks following reports of the power banks catching fire and causing burn injuries.

Flaunt is recalling about 1,400 MagSafe battery chargers due to the risk of serious injury or death from fire and burn hazards, according to the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission.

“The lithium-ion battery in the recalled power banks (chargers) can overheat and ignite, posing a risk of serious injury or death from fire and burn hazards,” the commission said.

MORE THAN 550,000 KOBALT YARD TOOLS RECALLED OVER BATTERY FIRE HAZARD

There have been five reports of the power banks overheating and catching fire, including one report of a burn to a person’s hand and another report of a burn to someone’s arm. There have also been four reports of minor property damage.

Affected power banks have model number E33A.

“FLAUNT” is engraved on the front right side of the power bank and a small circular button is on the bottom center of the front side of the item.

The power banks were sold in melon, black, lavender and white. They were sold online at flauntcases.com from May 2024 to April 2025 for about $65.

Consumers are urged to stop using the recalled power banks immediately and contact Flaunt for a full refund.

MILLIONS OF PRESCRIPTION EYE DROPS RECALLED NATIONWIDE OVER CONTAMINATION CONCERNS

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“Do not throw this recalled power bank with lithium-ion battery in the trash, the general recycling stream (e.g., street-level or curbside recycling bins), or used battery recycling boxes found at various retail and home improvement stores. Recalled lithium-ion batteries must be disposed of differently than other batteries, because they present a greater risk of fire,” the commission said.

This post was originally published here

The euro area’s economy is showing early signs of stabilizing after the shock of the U.S.–Iran war, but economists still expect growth to remain sluggish throughout 2026. The European Central Bank, in staff projections released with its June 11 interest-rate decision, forecast euro-area economic growth of just 0.8 percent next year, down from 0.9 percent projected in March. While inflation has eased, oil prices have retreated, and investor confidence is recovering, economists say the damage inflicted during the first half of the year has already been built into the region’s outlook.

Private-sector forecasts largely mirror the ECB’s expectations. Vanguard projects 0.8 percent growth for 2026, while the Conference Board expects 1.0 percent, and the International Monetary Fund forecasts 1.1 percent. Together, they point to one of the weakest growth years for the euro area in more than a decade outside of recessionary periods.

The economic backdrop, however, has improved significantly since the height of the conflict.

According to Eurostat, euro-area inflation slowed to 2.8 percent in June from 3.2 percent in May, marking its lowest reading since February and coming in below economists’ expectations of 3.0 percent. Energy inflation eased sharply to 8.7 percent from 10.8 percent, reflecting a rapid decline in global oil prices after the spring’s supply shock.

Oil has been one of the biggest drivers of the turnaround.

Brent crude briefly surged above $126 per barrel during April as fighting threatened shipping through the Strait of Hormuz, but prices retreated steadily as tensions eased. By mid-July, Brent was trading near $76 per barrel, reducing pressure on European households, manufacturers, and transportation companies that depend heavily on imported energy.

Financial markets have responded positively.

The Sentix euro-zone investor confidence index climbed to -3.1 in July from -13.4 in June, marking its third consecutive monthly improvement and its strongest reading since March. The result also comfortably exceeded economists’ expectations of -10.0.

Even more encouraging, the survey’s expectations index turned positive for the first time since March.

“The slump in sentiment caused by the Iran conflict is slowly being overcome,” Sentix said, citing easing geopolitical concerns and renewed economic reform efforts in Germany, the euro area’s largest economy.

Even with improving confidence, the annual growth outlook remains subdued because much of the economic damage has already occurred.

Euro-area output expanded just 0.2 percent during the first quarter, while weaker consumer spending, higher energy costs, and slower business investment during the second quarter continue filtering through official economic data.

The slowdown has been particularly evident in Europe’s two largest economies.

Germany recently cut its 2026 growth forecast to 0.5 percent, while France reported zero economic growth during the first quarter.

The European Commission, which forecasts 0.9 percent euro-area growth this year, estimates European Union countries have spent roughly €30 billion more on fossil-fuel imports since the conflict began in late February, increasing costs for both businesses and consumers.

The changing economic picture has also reshaped expectations for interest rates.

The European Central Bank raised its three key interest rates by a quarter percentage point on June 11, its first increase since September 2023, lifting the deposit facility rate to 2.25 percent in response to inflation risks stemming from the conflict.

Since then, inflation has moderated more quickly than expected, oil prices have declined sharply, and investor inflation expectations have improved considerably. As a result, financial markets increasingly believe the ECB can afford to pause before considering additional rate increases.

Risks nevertheless remain.

Economists continue warning that potential U.S. tariffs on European exports—particularly automobiles—could weigh on growth next year. Likewise, any renewed disruption to shipping through the Strait of Hormuz could quickly reverse the recent decline in energy prices.

European Commission Executive Vice President Valdis Dombrovskis has previously warned that if elevated energy costs were to persist through late 2026, euro-area growth could be roughly half current projections. While falling oil prices have reduced that risk considerably, it has not disappeared.

For businesses and consumers across Europe, the latest data offer cautious optimism. Lower energy prices are easing pressure on household budgets and manufacturing costs, while improving confidence could encourage companies to invest and consumers to resume larger purchases postponed during the conflict.

The ECB expects euro-area growth to improve to 1.2 percent in 2027 as the energy shock fades and investment, particularly in Germany, begins to recover. For now, however, 2026 remains a rebuilding year—one in which the economic cost of war continues to weigh on annual growth even as the latest data point toward a gradually strengthening recovery.

JBizNews Desk | Frankfurt
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stock futures fell early Monday, July 13, as a weekend of fresh U.S.-Iran strikes drove oil higher and deepened a selloff in chip stocks, pointing to a lower open ahead of a week dominated by big-bank earnings and a closely watched inflation report. Futures tied to the Dow Jones Industrial Average were down about 229 points, or 0.43 percent, while S&P 500 futures slipped 0.58 percent and Nasdaq-100 futures dropped 1.37 percent, according to pre-market trading.

The pullback reversed part of a solid finish to last week. On Friday, the S&P 500 rose 0.42 percent to 7,575.39, the Nasdaq Composite added 0.29 percent to 26,281.61, and the Dow Jones Industrial Average gained 149.60 points, or 0.29 percent, to 52,637.01, leaving the broad market up more than 1 percent for the week. Nvidia climbed about 4 percent Friday, while Meta Platforms jumped roughly 6 percent, capping its strongest week since early 2024. Monday’s futures, however, pointed to a reversal in much of that technology-led momentum.

The catalyst was the latest escalation in the Middle East. U.S. Central Command struck dozens of Iranian targets after an attack on a container ship, Tehran retaliated against Gulf states, and Iran again declared the Strait of Hormuz closed, a claim President Donald Trump disputed Sunday. Brent crude climbed 3.9 percent to $78.96 a barrel, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate gained 4 percent to $74.26, renewing concerns that higher energy costs could reignite inflation.

The selloff spread across global markets before reaching Wall Street. South Korea’s Kospi posted one of the day’s sharpest declines as SK Hynix and Samsung Electronics came under heavy selling pressure, weighing on semiconductor stocks throughout Asia and setting a cautious tone for U.S. chipmakers before the opening bell.

Sector performance reflected the shift toward risk aversion. Semiconductor shares, which have led markets throughout 2026 with the VanEck Semiconductor ETF up roughly 70 percent this year, faced renewed profit-taking. Energy companies appeared positioned to benefit from higher crude prices, while airline and travel stocks were expected to come under pressure as investors priced in rising fuel costs. More defensive sectors, including utilities and consumer staples, showed relative resilience in early trading.

Attention now turns to earnings season. Several of the nation’s largest financial institutions begin reporting second-quarter results this week, including JPMorgan Chase, Goldman Sachs, Wells Fargo, Citigroup, Bank of America, and Morgan Stanley. Investors will closely examine loan growth, credit quality, consumer spending trends and trading revenue for insight into the health of the U.S. economy. Later in the week, Netflix, UnitedHealth Group, GE Aerospace, ASML, and Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co. are also scheduled to report.

Economic data could prove equally important. The Bureau of Labor Statistics will release the June Consumer Price Index on Tuesday morning, with economists expecting headline inflation to ease to approximately 3.8 percent year over year from 4.2 percent in May, while core inflation is expected to remain more persistent. Producer prices and retail sales later in the week will provide additional insight into inflation pressures and consumer demand. Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh is also scheduled to deliver his first congressional testimony since taking office, giving markets another closely watched event.

Other financial markets echoed the cautious tone. Treasury yields continued climbing, with the two-year Treasury note trading near its highest level since early 2025, while the U.S. dollar strengthened. Gold fell more than 1 percent, an unusual move during a period of heightened geopolitical tensions, reflecting investor concern that higher oil prices may keep inflation elevated and interest rates higher for longer rather than immediately boosting traditional safe-haven assets.

For investors, Monday’s outlook presents a market balancing two competing forces. Strong corporate earnings and easing inflation could help extend the rally that has driven equities to record highs this year. But another jump in oil prices or a hotter-than-expected inflation report could quickly shift sentiment and test whether Wall Street’s technology-led advance can withstand mounting geopolitical and inflation risks.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The yield on the two-year U.S. Treasury note pushed to its highest level since early 2025 on Monday, July 13, as a weekend surge in oil prices drove up the cost of money across the economy, from short-term business loans to 30-year mortgages, according to Treasury market data compiled by the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury. The two-year note, the maturity most sensitive to near-term borrowing costs, ended Friday at 4.21 percent and climbed further Monday, moving back above its June peak of 4.232 percent and toward the 4.275 percent high last reached on Feb. 21, 2025.

Rising yields ripple straight into what households and companies pay. The 10-year note, the benchmark that lenders use to price mortgages, auto loans and credit-card debt, finished Friday at 4.56 percent, and the 30-year bond has been trading above the 5 percent mark. Freddie Mac’s latest Primary Mortgage Market Survey put the average 30-year fixed home loan at 6.49 percent, keeping financing costs elevated for buyers heading into the summer season. Because Treasuries set the floor for nearly every other interest rate, lenders add a risk premium on top, so Monday’s move up the curve tightened conditions for anyone borrowing to buy a house, a car or refinance corporate debt.

The shape of the curve told its own story. The gap between the two-year and 10-year yields held positive at roughly a third of a percentage point, leaving the curve upward-sloping after a long stretch of inversion that ran from July 2022 to August 2024. But that spread has been narrowing as the front end climbs faster than the long end, a flattening that signals investors expect short-term rates to stay high even as the growth outlook cools. When the two-year rises toward the 10-year, it compresses the margin banks earn between short-term funding and long-term lending, a squeeze that tends to slow credit creation.

Real borrowing costs are the sharper part of the picture. Adjusted for expected inflation, yields on Treasury Inflation-Protected Securities sit near their highest since 2008, according to Standard Chartered, meaning the true cost of capital is the steepest in roughly 17 years. That weighs directly on housing affordability, corporate refinancing and the federal government’s own interest bill, which climbs every time the Treasury rolls maturing debt into higher-yielding paper at its regular bill, note and bond auctions.

The trigger was the weekend’s escalation in the Gulf. U.S. Central Command struck dozens of Iranian targets after an attack on a container ship, Tehran retaliated against Gulf states, and oil jumped, with Brent crude up 3.9 percent to $78.96 a barrel and U.S. West Texas Intermediate up 4 percent to $74.26. Higher energy prices lift the inflation embedded in bond pricing, and traders sold Treasuries in response, sending yields higher. The move built on a repricing that began at the Federal Reserve’s June meeting, when the two-year yield jumped more than 16 basis points in a single session, its biggest move on a policy day since March 2008, according to MUFG.

Strategists split on whether the climb has room to run. Anthony Saglimbene, chief market strategist at Ameriprise, said energy-driven inflation is straining the consumer engine globally, describing an economy still running but without a full tank of gas. Byron Anderson, head of fixed income at Laffer Tengler Investments, said the market has returned to an era in which it reacts to the Fed rather than the Fed reacting to markets, while analysts at ING wrote that the central bank has signaled it sees inflation as a problem it is prepared to act on. Taking the other side, Ross Pamphilon, fixed-income chief investment officer at Impax Asset Management, argued the energy spike is more likely transitory than structural and sees room for longer-dated yields to fall back.

For borrowers, the near-term consequences are concrete. Mortgage applications and corporate bond issuance both tend to cool when yields spike, and the flattening curve makes it costlier for companies to lock in long-term funding just as the second-quarter earnings season opens and major banks including JPMorgan Chase, Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley report results this week. Their commentary on loan demand and credit quality will offer an early read on how the higher cost of money is filtering through to Main Street.

For now, the front end of the curve is setting the tone. With oil elevated and real yields near multi-decade highs, the two-year note is likely to hold near its firmest levels in more than a year, keeping upward pressure on the borrowing costs that touch nearly every corner of the economy.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Asian markets tumbled Monday, July 13, led by a plunge in South Korean shares, after U.S. Central Command carried out a fresh wave of strikes on Iran over the weekend and Tehran’s Revolutionary Guard again declared the Strait of Hormuz closed, according to closing levels from the region’s exchanges. The escalation drove oil sharply higher, revived inflation fears days before a key U.S. inflation report, and sent investors out of the chip stocks that had powered the region’s rally.

South Korea took the hardest hit. The Kospi sank about 5.6 percent to 7,060.69, its lowest level since May 4, after falling as much as 7 percent intraday. The rout centered on memory-chip makers: SK Hynix dropped 10.6 percent in Seoul, unwinding part of the euphoria from its Nasdaq debut Friday, when its American depositary shares jumped 13 percent after the company raised roughly $26.5 billion at $149 each. Larger rival Samsung Electronics fell 6.7 percent, as profit-taking deepened worries about how durable the artificial-intelligence memory boom really is. Bucking the slide, LG Electronics rose more than 5 percent on a Seoul Economic Daily report that it will build AI server racks for Nvidia.

Japan followed the risk-off tone. The Nikkei 225 lost 1.1 percent to 67,786.86 as rising energy costs clouded the outlook just as earnings season opened, while the broader Topix slipped 0.52 percent. Australia’s S&P/ASX 200 eased 0.3 percent to 8,777.00.

Greater China split from the region. Mainland shares fell, with the Shanghai Composite down about 1.2 percent to 3,947.34 and the CSI 300 off 0.64 percent, dragged by consumer and tech names including BYD, which lost 3.2 percent. Energy producers went the other way as crude climbed: PetroChina rose 0.9 percent and CNOOC gained 2.2 percent, after Beijing reportedly urged major refiners to keep fuel output high to protect energy security against any disruption to Persian Gulf shipments. Hong Kong’s Hang Seng Index was the region’s outlier, edging higher to around 24,202, extending a recent run of outperformance by Chinese equities.

The driver was the weekend’s sharp military escalation. U.S. Central Command struck dozens of Iranian targets across several waves after an Iranian attack on a container ship in the strait, and Tehran retaliated against U.S. facilities in multiple Gulf states, hitting Qatar and the United Arab Emirates for the first time in months and firing ballistic missiles at Jordan. President Donald Trump disputed Iran’s closure claim on Sunday, saying the waterway remained open to commercial traffic even as roughly 20 vessels were reported to have transited under U.S. coordination.

Oil surged on the uncertainty. Brent crude gained 3.9 percent to $78.96 a barrel and U.S. West Texas Intermediate added 4 percent to $74.26, unwinding the drop that had followed last month’s interim truce. Gold slid more than 1 percent and the dollar firmed as traders priced in a firmer rate path, the same mechanism pressuring metals all year: higher oil feeds inflation, which lifts real yields and pushes the Federal Reserve toward keeping policy tight.

Strategists framed the selloff as risk-off but contained. Ben Emons, founder of Fed Watch Advisors, wrote that the strait closure would hang over the market with a cautious tone, but said the week’s focus would also turn to inflation data, Fed testimony and bank earnings. Goldman Sachs economists expect U.S. core consumer prices to ease to 2.8 percent year-over-year in June, while Standard Chartered reiterated that gold remains its preferred hedge against geopolitical risk, noting U.S. real yields near their highest since 2008 and forecasting the Fed to hold rates through 2026.

The week ahead sets up as pivotal. U.S. June CPI lands Tuesday at 8:30 a.m. Eastern, the last major inflation read before the July 29 Fed decision, followed 90 minutes later by Chair Kevin Warsh’s first congressional testimony since taking office. Earnings season also opens in force, with JPMorgan Chase, Goldman Sachs, Morgan Stanley, Bank of America, Citigroup and Wells Fargo among 28 S&P 500 companies reporting. U.S. futures pointed lower as Asia closed, with Dow Jones Industrial Average futures down 229 points, or 0.43 percent, S&P 500 futures off 0.58 percent and Nasdaq-100 futures down 1.37 percent.

For Asian investors, the message from Monday’s tape was that the market’s assumption the Gulf skirmishes would stay contained is being tested, and that the chip trade underpinning the region’s gains is the first thing sold when that assumption wobbles.

JBizNews Desk | Hong Kong © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Gold and silver opened the week sharply lower Monday, July 13, with spot gold sliding to about $4,061 an ounce and silver to roughly $58.22, extending a losing run as the weekend’s U.S.-Iran escalation drove oil higher and hardened bets on a Federal Reserve rate increase, according to dealer spot pricing, the CME Group’s FedWatch tool and minutes from the Fed’s June meeting. Gold fell about $61 from Friday’s level and silver nearly $1.80, adding to a prior week in which the metals lost roughly 1.5 percent and 4 percent. FedWatch showed the probability of a September hike firming toward 60 percent, with a smaller chance of a move at the late-July meeting.

The fresh leg down followed the weekend’s fighting. U.S. Central Command carried out its largest strike wave yet against Iran, hitting some 140 military targets, and early Sunday Iran’s Revolutionary Guard declared the Strait of Hormuz closed after firing on a vessel. Crude had already climbed about 7 percent the prior week, with Brent settling at $76.01 a barrel and U.S. West Texas Intermediate at $71.41 Friday. Higher energy costs revive inflation and lift real yields, undercutting metals that pay no interest. In 2026 a Hormuz flare-up now reads as an inflation shock that keeps the Fed hawkish rather than a safe-haven trigger, which is why the metals that once rallied on Middle East conflict are falling instead.

The intraday history has been volatile. Gold opened the prior week near $4,155, dropped to about $4,076 on July 8 after President Donald Trump declared the interim ceasefire over, steadied above $4,100 Friday, then broke lower at Monday’s open. Silver, hit harder because more than half its demand is industrial, slid toward $58 with the gold-silver ratio near 68. For the year to date gold is down about 3 percent and silver about 12 percent, a reversal after 2025 gains of 66 percent and 135 percent, and gold has just posted its worst quarter in 13 years.

The pressure traces to the Fed’s June turn. At the June 16-17 meeting, its first under Chair Kevin Warsh, the Federal Open Market Committee held its benchmark at 3.50 to 3.75 percent but lifted its median 2026 inflation forecast to 3.6 percent from 2.7 percent and raised the dot-plot rate projection to 3.8 percent from 3.4 percent, signaling rates staying higher for longer. Warsh, sworn in May 22 after a 54-45 Senate confirmation, declined to submit his own dot, the first chair to abstain, shifting more weight onto the data and the minutes.

Two catalysts land Tuesday. The Bureau of Labor Statistics releases June CPI at 8:30 a.m. Eastern, the last major inflation read before the July 29 decision, and Warsh makes his first appearance before Congress as chair at 10 a.m. before the House Financial Services Committee, followed by the Senate on Wednesday. Economists expect the headline to look soft, even negative, because oil fell about 21 percent in June during the mid-June truce, but core prices are seen rising 0.3 percent with the annual core rate stuck near 2.9 percent. The New York Fed’s latest survey put one-year inflation expectations at 3.7 percent, the highest since September 2023.

Wall Street is split. Mark Cabana, rates strategist at BofA Securities, said a firm core print could push the market toward a coin flip between a hike and a hold. New York Fed President John Williams has pointed to easing shelter costs, while Chicago Fed President Austan Goolsbee warned inflation is trending the wrong way. On the metals, Greg Shearer of J.P. Morgan said gold is stuck in a technical no-man’s land, though the bank still targets $6,000 an ounce by the fourth quarter. HSBC cut its 2026 average gold forecast to $4,560 from $4,864, and Macquarie sees prices drifting toward $4,300 by year-end. Consultancy Metals Focus and Adrian Ash of BullionVault argued the market has over-priced the odds of a hike.

Physical demand has stayed firm underneath the paper selling. China’s central bank, the People’s Bank of China, added 14.93 tonnes of gold in June, its 20th straight month of buying and the largest monthly increase in more than two and a half years, while the SPDR Gold Shares ETF drew its first weekly inflow since mid-June. The 2-year Treasury yield, which tracks near-term rate expectations, has pushed to its highest since 2025.

That leaves gold and silver hostage to Tuesday’s inflation print and testimony heading into the July 29 meeting. As long as the war keeps oil elevated and Warsh keeps a hike on the table, the classic safe havens will struggle to find a floor.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Sen. Ron Johnson, the Wisconsin Republican and self-described fiscal hawk, is positioned to become the next chairman of the Senate Budget Committee, his office confirmed Sunday, July 12, following the sudden death of Sen. Lindsey Graham of South Carolina. Johnson spokeswoman Grace Carnathan said the senator “is prepared to serve as budget chair when announced,” signaling he intends to claim a gavel that steers the chamber’s tax-and-spending machinery at a fraught moment for federal finances.

Graham, 71, died Saturday night at his Capitol Hill home from what the District of Columbia Medical Examiner described in preliminary findings as an aortic dissection tied to cardiovascular disease, according to a statement released by his office. His death removes a central architect of the Republican fiscal agenda and hands outsized influence to a lawmaker who has spent his career warning that Washington spends far beyond its means.

Johnson, a third-term senator, is next in line by seniority for the Budget post. Two more senior Republicans, Sen. Chuck Grassley of Iowa and Sen. Mike Crapo of Idaho, are expected to keep their gavels atop the Judiciary and Finance committees, clearing Johnson’s path. The elevation still requires ratification by the Senate Republican Conference and the full Senate, procedural steps typically completed with little fanfare.

The timing carries weight for markets and for the White House. Graham used the Budget chairmanship to move two party-line reconciliation packages through the Senate — last year’s tax-cut-centered One Big Beautiful Bill Act and this year’s measure funding immigration enforcement through the remainder of President Donald Trump’s term. Republican leaders are weighing a third reconciliation bill, and the Budget chairman controls the blueprint that sets its spending and revenue targets.

That is where Johnson’s record becomes consequential. He has repeatedly pushed to return federal outlays to their pre-pandemic share of the economy, roughly 20.6% of gross domestic product, the 2019 level. In a Wall Street Journal op-ed last year, he argued that restoring that ratio would save about $8.4 trillion over a decade — far beyond the roughly $1.5 trillion in cuts his colleagues were then debating. He has called the national debt, now near $37 trillion, unsustainable, and has resisted raising the debt ceiling without deeper reductions, describing the borrowing cap as leverage his party should not surrender.

Johnson also broke ranks during last year’s megabill fight, warning the legislation would widen deficits the Congressional Budget Office pegged at nearly $4 trillion over ten years. He has since signaled support for another reconciliation attempt, but his insistence on hard spending targets could complicate leadership’s math. Republicans hold a narrow majority, and Graham’s death temporarily trims it further until South Carolina Gov. Henry McMaster names a replacement to serve until January.

For businesses, the shift carries real stakes. The Budget Committee frames the fiscal envelope for tax policy, including whether expiring provisions of the 2017 Trump tax cuts are extended and whether new business tax breaks survive. A chairman determined to offset every dollar of tax relief with spending cuts could reshape the size and structure of the next package, influencing corporate rates, Treasury issuance and the trajectory of federal borrowing that feeds into interest rates. Deeper cuts to programs such as Medicaid and food assistance, which drew much of the friction in prior rounds, would again land on the table.

Johnson’s stance has long unsettled some in his own party. He has described himself as “more Tea Party than Republican” and cast spending discipline as the central test of GOP governance. Whether he can convert the Budget gavel into leverage — or whether leadership and Trump override his objections as they did in the last two reconciliation fights — will help set the fiscal path heading into the 2026 midterms.

Graham, first elected to the Senate in 2002, chaired the Budget panel after years on Judiciary, Appropriations and other powerful committees. His death also scrambles the November ballot in South Carolina, where he had secured renomination for a fifth term. Under state law, Republicans must field a replacement nominee, with a special primary expected by Aug. 11.

For now, attention turns to how quickly the conference formalizes Johnson’s ascension and how he wields a post sitting squarely at the intersection of politics, policy and the federal balance sheet.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Apple sued OpenAI on Friday in the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California, accusing the artificial-intelligence company of orchestrating a systematic theft of hardware trade secrets to accelerate its push into consumer devices. Within a day, the lawsuit had reignited the long-running public feud between Elon Musk and OpenAI Chief Executive Sam Altman, with the two exchanging fresh barbs on X.

In its complaint, Apple alleges that OpenAI relied on former Apple employees, recruiting efforts and supplier relationships to obtain confidential information involving unreleased products, engineering specifications and supply-chain vendors. The suit names former Apple engineers Tang Tan and Chang Liu, both now employed by OpenAI’s hardware division.

According to the filing, Liu, who joined OpenAI earlier this year, retained a company laptop, exploited an internal authentication vulnerability to obtain confidential documents and encouraged departing employees to copy files without triggering security systems. Apple describes OpenAI’s hardware operation as “rotten to its core” and says it warned the company in a February letter before filing suit. The company is seeking monetary damages, court injunctions and other legal relief. OpenAI has denied the allegations, saying it has no interest in competitors’ trade secrets.

The case arrives at a pivotal time for both companies. Apple is preparing a leadership transition later this year while continuing development of its next generation of AI products. OpenAI, meanwhile, is reportedly preparing for a future public offering that could value the company at more than $1 trillion, although executives have indicated the timing remains uncertain. A successful trade-secret claim targeting its hardware division could complicate those ambitions.

The lawsuit centers on OpenAI’s expanding hardware strategy following its partnership with legendary former Apple designer Jony Ive, whose startup io Products was acquired to help develop a new generation of AI-powered consumer devices. Ive is not named in the lawsuit.

While the legal battle drew headlines, the public confrontation between Musk and Altman quickly became the bigger story.

Posting on X, Musk revived his criticism of Altman, referring to him as “Scam Altman” and accusing him of abandoning OpenAI’s original nonprofit mission while now facing accusations involving Apple’s technology. Musk also resurfaced Altman’s earlier congressional testimony regarding his ownership interest in OpenAI, using the lawsuit to intensify his broader criticism of the company’s leadership.

Altman responded directly, dismissing Musk’s attacks as evidence that OpenAI’s newest models were gaining momentum. He argued that Musk had become increasingly focused on attacking competitors instead of advancing his own products and also mocked Musk’s vision for large-scale AI infrastructure projects.

The exchange comes as both companies release new flagship AI models within days of one another. OpenAI recently introduced GPT-5.6 Sol, while xAI launched Grok 4.5, intensifying competition across enterprise software, consumer AI and developer tools.

The rivalry now carries enormous financial implications. Musk’s xAI and OpenAI are among the world’s most closely watched artificial-intelligence companies, with investors closely tracking each product launch, legal dispute and executive statement. As AI competition expands beyond software into dedicated hardware, the stakes continue rising.

Beyond the personal feud, the lawsuit highlights how fiercely technology companies are protecting intellectual property in the race to build AI-powered devices. Apple’s complaint notes that hundreds of former employees now work at OpenAI, framing the dispute as a battle over talent, confidential engineering knowledge and the future of consumer hardware.

For OpenAI, already defending multiple copyright lawsuits over AI training data, the new case introduces another legal challenge just as investors evaluate its long-term prospects. Apple has not indicated whether the litigation will affect its existing relationship with OpenAI or future AI integrations, leaving one of the industry’s most significant partnerships under a cloud of uncertainty.

Whether the courtroom battle or the war of words ultimately has the greater impact remains to be seen. What is already clear is that the competition to dominate artificial intelligence has become as personal as it is technological, with two of the industry’s most influential leaders once again taking their fight into public view.

JBizNews Desk | San Francisco
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved.

The U.S. Department of Justice has opened a federal grand jury investigation into United Auto Workers President Shawn Fain, according to a June 18 email from the lead counsel for the union’s court-appointed monitor, disclosed Sunday, July 12. The probe, described in internal union communications, examines whether Fain used his office to secure financial benefits for his fiancée and her sister, then punished the senior officer who blocked them.

The monitor policing the UAW, New York attorney Neil Barofsky of the law firm Jenner & Block, notified Fain and UAW Vice President Rich Boyer that a grand jury had subpoenaed his office. In a report last month, Barofsky wrote that his office had substantiated the claim that Fain acted improperly to obtain financial benefits for his fiancée, and that Boyer’s refusal to approve a bonus for her may have contributed to Fain’s retaliation against him.

The specifics are unusually personal for a union that spent years trying to shed a corruption label. Investigators are examining whether Fain pushed for a bonus for his fiancée and backed a workers’ compensation claim for her sister, according to the monitor’s findings. When Boyer declined to sign off, Fain allegedly retaliated by stripping him of his role as the union’s chief negotiator with Stellantis, the maker of Jeep and Ram, before Boyer was reinstated to the post early this year. Boyer is now among the candidates challenging Fain for the presidency.

The case sharpens a long-running complaint from Fain’s critics: that the president has steered the UAW toward his own political agenda rather than the shop-floor concerns of the members who elected him. Under Fain, the union’s executive board passed a Gaza ceasefire resolution in late 2023, and at its June convention in Detroit delegates voted 321 to 287 to pull the union’s strike fund out of Israeli government bonds — a move aligned with the boycott, divestment and sanctions campaign against Israel, pushed onto the floor by a UAW local representing New York University adjuncts. Fain has blamed the monitor’s scrutiny on that stance, saying Barofsky carries a “political grudge” tied to the union’s position on Gaza, after the monitor circulated Anti-Defamation League materials questioning a local’s right to back a boycott of Israel.

Fain has rejected the allegations outright, calling them “bogus” and accusing Boyer of feeding the monitor “false allegations.” He said Barofsky’s reports are politically motivated and that he has hired a law firm to fight them. The UAW declined to comment, and a lawyer for the union said the organization itself is not the target of the grand jury. The Justice Department did not respond to requests for comment.

The stakes are heightened by the union’s recent past. The UAW has operated under federal oversight since a 2020 settlement that resolved a sprawling corruption scandal, one that sent two former union presidents and other officials to prison for embezzling member funds and taking kickbacks. Barofsky’s monitorship was the price of that deal, and a fresh federal probe of the sitting president revives the specter the settlement was meant to bury.

For the auto industry, the timing matters. Fain built his standing on the 2023 “Stand Up Strike” against Ford, General Motors and Stellantis that delivered roughly 25% wage gains, and the union’s contracts with Ford and GM expire in April 2028. A leadership fight clouded by a criminal investigation injects fresh uncertainty into that bargaining cycle and into stalled organizing drives across the South, where the union followed its Volkswagen win in Chattanooga with a string of losses at plants including Mercedes-Benz in Alabama. Automakers and their dealers, already navigating shifting electric-vehicle plans and trade uncertainty, now face the added question of who will lead the UAW into the next round of talks.

Ballots in the UAW election go out to more than a million members and retirees ahead of an October count, with Fain still viewed as the front-runner despite the mounting legal cloud. Whether the grand jury acts before members vote — and whether it acts at all — remains unknown.

JBizNews Desk | Detroit © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Wall Street heads into the week ahead facing its busiest stretch of the summer, with the nation’s largest banks opening second-quarter earnings season, the government set to release fresh inflation figures, and renewed fighting between the United States and Iran hanging over global oil. On Friday, President Donald Trump wrote on Truth Social that Washington had agreed to resume talks with Tehran but that the ceasefire reached in April was “over,” a message that leaves traders guessing about the path of crude just as earnings and price data land. Three forces will shape the days ahead: what the banks say about the economy, what June inflation reveals about the Federal Reserve’s next move, and whether the Strait of Hormuz stays open.

The banks lead off

The season starts Tuesday, when JPMorgan Chase, Bank of America, Citigroup, Wells Fargo, and Goldman Sachs all report before the opening bell. Because banks lend to nearly every corner of the economy, their results and their commentary on loan demand, credit quality, and consumer health serve as an early read on how businesses and households are holding up. Analysts expect a strong quarter overall: S&P 500 earnings are projected to climb about 24% from a year earlier on nearly 12% higher revenue, a forecast that has risen since April. JPMorgan, the largest U.S. bank, is expected to earn roughly $5.44 a share, up almost 10% from last year, while Bank of America is seen posting about $1.12 a share on $30.7 billion in revenue. Trading desks are believed to have had a solid three months, but investors will listen closely for any hint that commercial real estate or a softening job market is starting to strain credit.

Inflation and the Fed

The bigger market-mover may be prices. The Bureau of Labor Statistics releases the June Consumer Price Index on Tuesday, followed by the Producer Price Index on Wednesday. The stakes are high because inflation has been climbing again: the May reading hit 4.2%, its highest since April 2023 and the third straight monthly acceleration, driven largely by the energy shock from the Iran conflict. A hotter-than-expected June number would raise the odds that the Fed lifts interest rates before year-end, while a softer print would support recent comments from Fed Chair Kevin Warsh that price pressures are easing. Warsh testifies before Congress on Wednesday, giving markets a live look at his thinking days ahead of the central bank’s July 28-29 meeting. Other data fills out the week: retail sales and jobless claims on Thursday, industrial production and a preliminary read on consumer sentiment on Friday. A weak June jobs report, which showed just 57,000 payrolls added, has already put the strength of the consumer in question. Adding to the pressure, the 10% tariffs imposed under Section 122 are set to expire July 24, mid-season, leaving companies to weigh how much of the cost they can pass along.

Oil and the Iran risk

Hanging over all of it is the Middle East. The shaky ceasefire between Washington and Tehran, formalized in a June memorandum of understanding, unraveled this week after Iran attacked three commercial ships in the Strait of Hormuz. The United States responded with waves of strikes on dozens of Iranian targets and reimposed oil sanctions; Iran fired back at U.S.-linked bases in Kuwait and Bahrain. The practical worry for markets is the strait itself, the channel through which a large share of the world’s oil moves. Traffic has slowed to a trickle, with roughly a dozen vessels passing in a recent 24-hour stretch against about 110 a day before the war. Oil has stayed relatively contained so far because tankers keep moving, but any further disruption could push energy prices higher, feed straight into inflation, and complicate the Fed’s job. Mediators from Qatar and Pakistan are working to restart negotiations, though Iran’s chief negotiator, Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf, warned Tehran is prepared for “all-out defense” if the fighting resumes.

Overseas data adds another layer, with China’s second-quarter GDP and a Bank of Canada rate decision both due Wednesday. For investors, the week is a test of a market that has climbed to records on optimism about artificial intelligence and steady corporate profits. Strong bank results and a tame inflation number would reinforce the case that the economy can absorb both higher rates and geopolitical shocks. A hot CPI or a fresh flare-up in the Gulf would remind everyone how quickly that calm can break.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta Platforms Inc. is expanding its artificial intelligence infrastructure by developing its own cloud business to market excess computing capacity, a move that could eventually place one of CoreWeave Inc.’s largest customers in direct competition with the AI cloud provider. The development comes just months after the two companies signed a long-term agreement valued at approximately $21 billion, according to CoreWeave’s April filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.

CoreWeave, headquartered in Livingston, New Jersey, rents high-performance computing infrastructure powered primarily by Nvidia Corp. graphics processors used to train and operate advanced artificial intelligence systems. Founded in 2017 and publicly listed on the Nasdaq in 2025, the company has rapidly expanded by supplying AI computing capacity to some of the world’s largest technology companies. Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Michael Intrator has said growing demand reflects the increasing need for specialized computing infrastructure capable of supporting the next generation of AI applications.

The relationship with Meta Platforms became one of CoreWeave’s largest commercial wins when the companies announced an expanded agreement in April. Under the contract, CoreWeave will provide dedicated AI cloud capacity through December 2032, including deployments built around Nvidia’s next-generation Vera Rubin computing platform. The agreement represented one of the largest disclosed AI infrastructure contracts in the industry and significantly strengthened CoreWeave’s long-term revenue outlook.

Investor attention shifted this week after reports that Meta is exploring ways to commercialize excess computing capacity by offering cloud services to outside customers. While Meta has historically built AI infrastructure primarily for internal use, expanding into commercial cloud services could eventually place it alongside companies that currently provide AI computing to third parties, including CoreWeave.

CoreWeave’s latest financial results illustrate both the company’s rapid growth and the scale of its ongoing investment. For the first quarter of fiscal 2026, reported on May 7, revenue more than doubled to $2.08 billion, a 112% increase from the prior year and above analysts’ expectations. Net losses widened to $740 million from $315 million as the company continued investing aggressively in new data centers, computing equipment and infrastructure needed to meet rising customer demand.

The company also disclosed signing more than $40 billion in additional customer commitments during the quarter, increasing its contracted revenue backlog to nearly $100 billion. Chief Financial Officer Nitin Agrawal reaffirmed the company’s full-year outlook, saying pressure on profit margins should moderate as recently deployed infrastructure becomes fully operational. CoreWeave expects to invest between $31 billion and $35 billion in capital expenditures this year, reflecting continued expansion and higher equipment costs.

Those figures underscore the balance investors continue to evaluate. CoreWeave benefits from long-term, take-or-pay contracts that generally require customers to pay for reserved computing capacity regardless of actual usage, limiting the immediate impact of changing customer strategies. At the same time, the company remains highly leveraged, carrying approximately $25 billion in long-term debt while continuing to invest heavily to expand capacity.

The development also reflects a broader shift occurring across the artificial intelligence industry. Major technology companies are investing billions of dollars to build proprietary AI infrastructure while increasingly exploring opportunities to monetize unused computing resources. As hyperscale technology companies become both customers and potential competitors, traditional distinctions between cloud providers and cloud users continue to blur.

For businesses and investors, the larger story extends beyond one company’s stock performance. Demand for artificial intelligence computing infrastructure continues to accelerate as companies race to deploy increasingly sophisticated AI models. Whether specialized providers such as CoreWeave can maintain their competitive advantage as major technology companies expand their own commercial cloud offerings will be one of the defining questions shaping the AI infrastructure market in the years ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Apartment renters are finally seeing relief across much of the United States, but booming artificial intelligence markets are creating a very different story in some of the country’s largest technology hubs.

According to Apartment List’s June national rent report, the median U.S. apartment rent stood at approximately $1,385, down 1.2% from a year earlier and about 4% below its 2022 peak.

The improvement follows one of the largest apartment construction booms in decades.

More than 600,000 new multifamily housing units were completed during 2024—the highest annual total since the mid-1980s—giving renters more choices and increasing competition among landlords.

As vacancies have risen, many property owners have responded by offering incentives including free rent, waived application fees and discounted parking to attract tenants.

National apartment vacancy rates have climbed to roughly 7%, easing the intense competition that characterized the housing market during and immediately after the pandemic.

The national picture, however, masks significant regional differences.

According to Apartments.com, San Francisco recorded one of the nation’s fastest annual rent increases, with rents rising more than 9% over the past year.

Nearby San Jose also experienced strong rent growth.

Housing analysts attribute much of that increase to the rapid expansion of artificial intelligence companies.

Technology firms including OpenAI, Anthropic and other AI developers continue hiring aggressively, bringing highly paid workers back into the Bay Area and increasing demand for housing near major employment centers.

By contrast, several Sun Belt cities that experienced rapid apartment construction over recent years are now seeing rents decline.

Markets including Austin, San Antonio, Phoenix and Denver have recorded year-over-year rent decreases as newly completed apartment communities compete for tenants.

Industry researchers say housing supply remains the primary factor influencing rental prices nationwide.

Areas that added large numbers of new apartments generally experienced slower rent growth or outright declines, while markets with limited supply and strong job creation continue seeing prices increase.

Despite improving conditions in many cities, affordability remains a major challenge.

The Harvard Joint Center for Housing Studies reports that a record number of American renters continue spending more than 30% of their income on housing, with millions spending over half of their income on rent and utilities.

Even after recent declines, national rents remain significantly higher than they were before the pandemic.

For renters, today’s market presents better negotiating opportunities than existed just a few years ago.

Landlords in many cities are once again offering concessions and becoming more flexible during lease negotiations.

For developers and investors, however, slowing rent growth has reduced returns in many markets and contributed to fewer new apartment construction projects moving forward.

Economists say the slowdown in new construction could eventually tighten housing supply again, placing upward pressure on rents in future years.

For now, renters across much of the country are benefiting from increased apartment availability, while the nation’s rapidly expanding AI industry continues creating localized housing demand in some of America’s most expensive metropolitan areas.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Buy Now, Pay Later financing has become one of the fastest-growing forms of consumer borrowing in the United States, and new reporting practices could soon make those loans more important to Americans’ credit scores.

According to an Economic Brief published by the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond, Americans used Buy Now, Pay Later (BNPL) services for an estimated $70 billion in purchases during 2025. While that remains a small fraction of overall consumer borrowing, the market has been expanding rapidly, growing by roughly 20% annually since 2021.

The industry is dominated by six major providers: Affirm, Afterpay, Klarna, PayPal, Sezzle and Zip, which together account for the vast majority of the U.S. market.

The typical BNPL transaction allows shoppers to divide purchases into four interest-free payments spread over several weeks.

The option has become increasingly common at major retailers including Amazon, Walmart and Sephora, giving consumers another alternative to traditional credit cards.

Researchers say younger consumers are driving much of that growth.

According to the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB), adults between 18 and 24 years old use Buy Now, Pay Later services at significantly higher rates than older consumers.

One concern highlighted by regulators is “loan stacking.”

Many shoppers simultaneously maintain multiple Buy Now, Pay Later loans across different providers, making it difficult for individual lenders to see a borrower’s complete financial obligations.

Historically, many of these short-term installment loans did not appear on traditional credit reports.

That is beginning to change.

Affirm now reports many of its installment loans to Experian, while FICO continues developing credit-scoring models that incorporate Buy Now, Pay Later activity.

As additional providers begin reporting repayment history, responsible borrowers could benefit by building stronger credit profiles.

At the same time, consumers who miss payments may eventually see negative effects reflected in their credit scores.

Not every provider has adopted the same reporting practices, however.

Some companies continue arguing that traditional credit-scoring systems were not designed for short-term installment products and could unfairly penalize responsible users.

Industry analysts say the reporting landscape remains fragmented, although broader reporting appears increasingly likely over time.

Regulators have also increased oversight.

The Consumer Financial Protection Bureau has expanded consumer protections for Buy Now, Pay Later borrowers, giving shoppers rights that more closely resemble those associated with traditional credit cards, including dispute resolution and refund protections.

Financial experts caution that while Buy Now, Pay Later loans are often marketed as interest-free, missed payments can still result in late fees, collection activity and legal action in some cases.

For consumers, the growing use of Buy Now, Pay Later financing offers greater flexibility but also increases the importance of budgeting carefully and tracking multiple payment schedules.

As more lenders begin sharing repayment information with credit bureaus, these once largely invisible loans are becoming a more visible part of consumers’ overall financial profiles.

For retailers, Buy Now, Pay Later remains an important sales tool.

For borrowers, however, its growing connection to credit reporting means these convenient payment options increasingly carry long-term financial consequences.

This article is for informational purposes only and should not be considered financial advice.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Wall Street analysts are overwhelmingly optimistic about SpaceX, but investors have taken a more cautious approach since the company’s highly anticipated public debut. Following the expiration of the post-IPO quiet period, most of the investment banks that underwrote the offering initiated research coverage with bullish recommendations, even as the stock has retreated from its early highs.

The company’s shares briefly traded above $200 during their first week on the Nasdaq following the June 12 initial public offering before settling back to around $150, roughly where they began trading. The pullback has come despite a wave of favorable analyst reports projecting substantial long-term upside.

Among the most optimistic firms, J.P. Morgan described SpaceX as one of the most transformative companies it has ever covered, assigning a $225 price target through the end of 2027. Raymond James issued an even more aggressive outlook, initiating coverage with a Strong Buy rating and an $800 price target, suggesting the company’s long-term revenue potential could eventually reach into the trillions of dollars as its Starship launch system dramatically expands access to space.

Not every analyst shares that enthusiasm. Research firm MoffettNathanson initiated coverage with a Neutral rating and a $131 price target, below the stock’s current trading price. The firm argued that while SpaceX dominates commercial launch services today, investors are effectively paying for years of future growth that still depends on technological execution, regulatory approvals and continued market demand.

The differing opinions highlight the challenge of valuing one of the world’s most ambitious technology companies. SpaceX has already established itself as the global leader in reusable rocket launches, while its Starlink satellite internet business has become the company’s largest source of recurring revenue. Supporters believe those two businesses together create a long-term growth platform unlike anything currently available in public markets.

Skeptics, however, note that much of today’s valuation depends on future milestones rather than current financial performance. Continued expansion of Starship, higher launch frequency, additional government contracts and sustained growth at Starlink will all be necessary to justify Wall Street’s most optimistic forecasts.

For investors, the situation reflects a familiar pattern seen with many high-profile initial public offerings. Early excitement often drives sharp gains immediately after a stock begins trading, while longer-term performance ultimately depends on whether the company can consistently deliver revenue growth, profitability and operational execution.

Political considerations also remain part of the investment discussion. Elon Musk’s public profile continues to generate both enthusiastic supporters and outspoken critics, leading some investors to either embrace or avoid the stock regardless of its underlying financial prospects.

The coming quarters are likely to determine whether Wall Street’s optimism proves justified. If Starship achieves a reliable launch cadence and Starlink continues expanding globally, today’s bullish price targets may appear conservative. If technological setbacks or regulatory hurdles slow that progress, investors may become less willing to pay premium valuations based primarily on future potential.

For now, analysts remain largely enthusiastic while investors appear content to wait for additional evidence that SpaceX can translate its technological leadership into the financial performance needed to support one of the market’s most closely watched new public companies.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency has proposed rolling back portions of the federal emissions requirements for heavy-duty diesel vehicles, a move the agency says will lower costs for manufacturers, truck operators and small businesses while keeping the core pollution limits in place.

The proposal, announced Thursday by EPA Administrator Lee Zeldin, would modify several provisions of the agency’s heavy-duty vehicle emissions rule that applies to trucks, buses, garbage trucks, fire engines and other large diesel-powered vehicles beginning with the 2027 model year.

Although the proposal leaves the stricter nitrogen oxide (NOx) emission standards unchanged, it would ease several related compliance requirements that trucking companies and engine manufacturers have argued are costly and difficult to implement.

Among the biggest proposed changes is a delay in tougher engine durability requirements.

Under the current rule, heavy-duty diesel engines would be required to meet emissions standards for up to 650,000 miles beginning with model year 2027.

The EPA now proposes keeping the existing 435,000-mile requirement until 2030, giving manufacturers additional time to develop and validate longer-lasting emissions-control systems.

The agency also proposes reducing mandatory emissions-control warranties from 10 years to 5 years.

In addition, the EPA would eliminate a requirement that automatically reduce engine power when emissions-control systems malfunction.

Instead, vehicles would notify drivers through warning systems while allowing operators to continue driving.

According to the EPA, the changes would reduce manufacturing costs while avoiding disruptions for commercial fleets.

The agency estimates the proposal would save between $4,100 and $6,100 per heavy-duty diesel engine, depending on vehicle type and configuration.

Administrator Lee Zeldin said the proposal maintains cleaner air standards while reducing unnecessary regulatory burdens on businesses.

Trucking organizations and industry groups welcomed the announcement, arguing that the previous regulations required manufacturers to deploy technologies before they were fully proven under real-world operating conditions.

The U.S. Small Business Administration also supported the proposal, saying lower compliance costs could benefit trucking companies, farmers and many small businesses that rely on commercial transportation.

Environmental organizations strongly criticized the plan.

Groups including the Sierra Club argued that weakening emissions requirements would result in additional air pollution and greater health risks for communities located near highways, ports and freight corridors.

The EPA’s own analysis estimates the proposal would increase nitrogen oxide emissions compared with the current rule, although the agency says approximately 90% of the expected pollution reductions under the original regulation would still be achieved.

Nitrogen oxide pollution contributes to smog formation and has been linked to respiratory illnesses including asthma and other lung diseases.

Heavy-duty trucks represent only a small percentage of vehicles on U.S. roads but account for a disproportionately large share of transportation-related emissions.

The proposal will now enter the federal public comment process before the EPA determines whether to finalize the changes.

For manufacturers, the proposal offers additional time to develop new engine technologies while reducing warranty and compliance costs.

For trucking companies and fleet operators, it could lower equipment costs and reduce maintenance expenses associated with complex emissions-control systems.

For businesses that depend on freight transportation, lower truck acquisition costs could eventually help reduce operating expenses across supply chains.

The proposal reflects the administration’s broader effort to reduce regulatory costs while balancing environmental standards with business competitiveness.

Whether the revised rule ultimately takes effect will depend on the outcome of the public comment process and any future legal challenges.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

The Rutgers University Board of Governors approved a $6.2 billion operating budget Tuesday for the 2026–27 academic year, raising tuition 3% for both in-state and out-of-state students in what university officials said is the smallest increase in four years. The budget took effect with the fiscal year that began July 1 and will affect tens of thousands of New Jersey families preparing for the fall semester.

For a typical full-time New Jersey resident enrolled in the School of Arts and Sciences, annual tuition will increase by approximately $448, rising from $14,933 to $15,381. Mandatory student fees will also increase by about $117, from $3,891 to $4,008.

Housing and dining costs are increasing 4%, climbing from $15,332 to $15,945. Combined, the total annual cost for an in-state student living on campus now exceeds $35,000, before books, transportation and personal expenses.

Out-of-state students will see an even larger increase, with tuition and mandatory fees rising from $39,649 to $40,839.

Smaller Increase Than Last Year

Although costs continue to rise, this year’s increase is below last year’s tuition hikes of 5% for New Jersey residents and 6% for non-resident students.

Rutgers President William F. Tate IV said the university worked to limit increases despite ongoing financial pressures.

“At a time when colleges and universities across the country continue to face significant financial headwinds and uncertainty, this balanced budget demonstrates disciplined stewardship and thoughtful planning, while ensuring our university does not sacrifice the high quality of education our students deserve,” Tate said.

University officials said cost-saving measures, including a hiring freeze and tighter budget controls, helped reduce the tuition increase while keeping it below the current rate of inflation.

Higher Costs Continue to Pressure Universities

Rutgers said the budget must absorb rising expenses across multiple areas, including employee salaries and benefits, utilities, technology, facilities maintenance, student financial aid and academic operations.

University officials also cited uncertainty surrounding future federal funding and enrollment trends as continuing financial challenges.

Financial Aid Remains a Priority

Board of Governors Chair Amy L. Towers credited continued support from Governor Mikie Sherrill and the New Jersey Legislature for helping the university expand financial aid while maintaining academic programs.

Students from families earning up to $65,000 annually remain eligible for tuition-free programs through Scarlet Guarantee, RU-N to the TOP, and Bridging the Gap across Rutgers’ three campuses.

According to the university, nearly 80% of undergraduate students received some form of financial aid during the 2025–26 academic year, more than 60% received need-based assistance, and nearly 38% qualified for Pell Grants.

Where the Money Goes

Instruction and academic support account for the largest share of Rutgers’ spending at 33.1%, followed by health care and public service (21.1%), administration and operations (15.8%), scholarships and student services (10.8%), sponsored research (10.4%), auxiliary operations such as housing and dining (5.4%) and Division I athletics (3.4%).

On the revenue side, tuition and fees generate 28.8% of the university’s budget, followed by state appropriations (21.9%), patient care services (19.8%) and sponsored research (12.3%).

A Major Economic Driver for New Jersey

Beyond education, Rutgers remains one of New Jersey’s largest economic engines.

The university estimates it generated approximately $13.3 billion in economic impact during fiscal 2025, supporting thousands of jobs, research initiatives, healthcare services and business activity throughout the state.

For families preparing to pay tuition this fall, the cost of attending Rutgers continues to rise. However, compared with recent years, the pace of those increases has slowed, while expanded financial aid continues to help many lower-income students access one of New Jersey’s largest public universities.

JBizNews Desk | New Brunswick, N.J.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New York Attorney General Letitia James has filed a major lawsuit against 3M, DuPont, Chemours, Corteva and several related companies, accusing them of knowingly selling products containing toxic PFAS, commonly known as “forever chemicals,” while concealing the health and environmental risks for decades.

The lawsuit, filed Thursday in Albany County Supreme Court, alleges the companies manufactured, marketed and sold PFAS-containing consumer products despite evidence that the chemicals could accumulate in the human body and persist in the environment indefinitely.

PFAS, or per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances, have been widely used for decades because they resist water, grease and heat.

The chemicals are commonly found in nonstick cookware, stain-resistant fabrics, food packaging, cosmetics, waterproof clothing and firefighting foam.

Unlike many other chemicals, PFAS break down extremely slowly, allowing them to accumulate in soil, groundwater, rivers and drinking water supplies.

Health researchers have linked long-term exposure to certain PFAS compounds with increased risks of cancer, developmental problems, immune system disorders and other serious illnesses.

Attorney General Letitia James said New Yorkers have spent years paying the environmental and public health costs while manufacturers continued profiting from products containing the chemicals.

The lawsuit alleges the companies possessed internal research demonstrating the dangers of PFAS decades before consumers were informed.

According to the complaint, internal company documents dating back to the early 1980s indicated concerns about birth defects and other health risks associated with exposure to certain PFAS compounds.

Despite that knowledge, the state alleges the manufacturers continued producing and selling PFAS-containing products without adequately warning consumers.

The lawsuit seeks significant financial damages and broad corrective actions.

New York is asking the court to require the companies to pay for environmental cleanup across the state, compensate affected communities, provide restitution, pay civil penalties and stop selling PFAS-containing consumer products without appropriate warnings.

The case adds to a growing wave of PFAS litigation across the United States.

Chemical manufacturers have already agreed to billions of dollars in settlements related to contaminated drinking water systems, and additional lawsuits continue moving through federal and state courts.

For businesses, the financial implications could be substantial.

Large environmental liabilities, remediation costs and potential future settlements continue creating uncertainty for chemical manufacturers and investors.

Companies facing PFAS litigation may also encounter higher compliance costs, increased regulatory oversight and reputational challenges as governments continue tightening environmental standards.

The lawsuit also carries implications for manufacturers that continue using PFAS in consumer products.

Many companies have already begun developing alternative materials as regulators around the world move toward stricter limits on the chemicals.

For consumers, the lawsuit highlights growing concerns surrounding products used every day in homes and workplaces.

While many manufacturers have already begun phasing out certain PFAS compounds, environmental experts note that decades of previous use have left widespread contamination requiring long-term cleanup efforts.

The defendant companies had not publicly responded in detail to the lawsuit at the time of the announcement.

The case is expected to become one of New York’s largest environmental lawsuits involving PFAS contamination and could influence similar litigation across other states.

For businesses, investors and manufacturers, the outcome may help shape future standards governing chemical safety, environmental responsibility and corporate disclosure for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Albany, N.Y.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

NEW YORK — The world’s largest record companies are accelerating an industry-wide effort to have streaming services clearly identify songs created with artificial intelligence, as platforms, distributors and music companies move toward greater transparency for listeners. Recent initiatives by Apple Music, Spotify and other major streaming services reflect a broader push to distinguish AI-generated content from music created by human artists.

The world’s biggest record companies are pressing streaming platforms to put a clear mark on songs made with artificial intelligence, and the effort is moving from optional to expected. Apple Music said the disclosure tags it introduced this spring, known as Transparency Tags, will become required for newly delivered music. Spotify, which began displaying AI credits in song listings, says the labels identify when AI was used for vocals, lyrics or production, while cautioning that the absence of a label does not necessarily mean a song was created entirely by humans.

The push matters because AI music is no longer a curiosity. It is arriving at an unprecedented pace. Deezer, the French music streaming platform, says its AI detection system now flags approximately 75,000 fully AI-generated tracks uploaded each day—more than 2.2 million every month. Spotify has also disclosed removing tens of millions of spam and fraudulent tracks over the past year. For listeners, the result is straightforward: it is becoming increasingly difficult to know whether the voice behind a song belongs to a human artist or was created by software.

Much of the emerging labeling system is built around DDEX, the music industry’s global metadata standard used by record labels and distributors to deliver songs to streaming platforms. Under the system, artists or labels disclose whether artificial intelligence was used during the creative process, allowing that information to appear within song credits on services including Spotify and Apple Music. Major distributors such as DistroKid, CD Baby, Believe and EMPIRE have integrated the framework into their delivery systems. The current challenge, however, is that the process largely depends on creators accurately reporting AI usage.

The financial stakes are substantial. Streaming royalties are distributed from a shared revenue pool, meaning fraudulent or artificially generated content that attracts illegitimate streams can reduce payments available to legitimate artists. When streaming services later identify manipulated activity, royalties are often reclaimed from distributors and, in some cases, charged back to artists. Record labels argue that stronger disclosure standards will improve transparency while helping protect royalty payments for musicians whose work generates authentic audience engagement.

The transparency initiative is unfolding alongside an even larger legal battle over artificial intelligence and copyright. The Recording Industry Association of America (RIAA), representing Universal Music Group, Sony Music Entertainment and Warner Music Group, filed lawsuits against AI music companies Suno and Udio, alleging their models were trained using copyrighted recordings without authorization. Since those lawsuits were filed, several companies have reached licensing agreements while others continue to defend their practices in federal court. The outcome could reshape how artificial intelligence companies obtain training data and determine whether future AI music platforms must license copyrighted recordings before developing new models.

The legal questions extend well beyond major record labels. Independent musicians, producers and session performers have also argued that recordings containing their performances were used to train AI systems without compensation. Several additional lawsuits remain pending as courts weigh whether training artificial intelligence models using copyrighted works qualifies as fair use or requires licensing agreements.

For consumers, the most visible change will likely be the labels themselves. As more streaming platforms adopt standardized disclosures, listeners will increasingly know whether artificial intelligence played a role in creating vocals, lyrics, instrumentals or production. While a label cannot determine whether a song is good or bad, it provides information many listeners increasingly say they want before pressing play.

For the music industry, the effort reaches beyond transparency. Record companies view AI labeling as one component of a broader strategy to protect intellectual property, preserve royalty streams and establish clear rules governing how artificial intelligence is used throughout music production and distribution. As AI-generated music continues to grow, the industry’s next challenge will be balancing technological innovation with protections for the creators whose work built today’s music business.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Australia and India have signed a long-awaited agreement that will allow Australia to begin supplying uranium for India’s rapidly expanding civilian nuclear power program, strengthening both countries’ energy and strategic partnership.

Australian Prime Minister Anthony Albanese and Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi finalized the administrative arrangement on Thursday, completing the final step needed to implement the Australia–India Nuclear Cooperation Agreement first signed in 2015.

The agreement clears the way for commercial uranium exports from Australia to India under strict international safeguards governing peaceful civilian nuclear use.

Australia possesses approximately 28% of the world’s known uranium reserves, making it one of the world’s largest uranium suppliers.

India, meanwhile, has become one of the fastest-growing energy markets as it works to meet rising electricity demand while reducing carbon emissions.

The Indian government plans to increase nuclear generating capacity from approximately 8 gigawatts today to 100 gigawatts by 2047, making nuclear energy a central component of its long-term electricity strategy.

Because India has relatively limited domestic uranium resources, securing reliable foreign fuel supplies has become increasingly important.

Prime Minister Anthony Albanese described the agreement as an important opportunity for Australia to become a dependable supplier of critical energy resources to one of the world’s fastest-growing economies.

Prime Minister Narendra Modi called the arrangement a significant step toward advancing India’s clean-energy goals while strengthening economic cooperation between the two nations.

All uranium exports will remain subject to oversight by the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) to ensure the material is used exclusively for peaceful civilian purposes.

The agreement follows years of diplomatic negotiations.

Although Australia and India established their nuclear cooperation framework nearly a decade ago, several regulatory and administrative requirements delayed large-scale commercial shipments until now.

India’s participation in international nuclear commerce expanded after receiving a waiver from the Nuclear Suppliers Group, despite not being a signatory to the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty.

For Australia’s mining industry, the agreement opens an important new export market.

Industry representatives say India’s long-term nuclear expansion could provide stable demand for Australian uranium producers for decades as dozens of additional reactors are planned.

Australia currently exports uranium to several countries but does not generate nuclear electricity domestically.

Instead, the country continues relying primarily on renewable energy, natural gas and coal while prohibiting commercial nuclear power generation within Australia.

India has taken the opposite approach.

The country currently operates more than twenty nuclear reactors and continues constructing additional facilities as part of its broader effort to diversify electricity generation while reducing dependence on fossil fuels.

The uranium agreement also forms part of a broader package of economic and strategic cooperation announced during Modi’s visit.

Both governments agreed to expand collaboration in critical minerals, defense, advanced technology, space research and regional security.

The strengthening relationship reflects growing strategic cooperation between two Indo-Pacific democracies seeking more resilient supply chains and closer economic ties.

For businesses, the agreement creates opportunities across mining, engineering, transportation and energy infrastructure while supporting long-term investment in uranium production.

Global demand for uranium has risen steadily as more countries reconsider nuclear energy to meet growing electricity needs driven by artificial intelligence, manufacturing expansion and decarbonization efforts.

The agreement positions Australia to benefit from that demand while helping India secure reliable fuel supplies for one of the world’s most ambitious nuclear power expansion programs.

As construction of new reactors accelerates over the coming decades, the partnership is expected to become an increasingly important part of both countries’ long-term energy and economic strategies.

JBizNews Desk | Melbourne
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Homeowners across the United States continue facing higher insurance premiums as severe weather, rising rebuilding costs and more expensive reinsurance drive up the cost of protecting their homes.

According to a recent Pew Research Center survey, 71% of homeowners said their home insurance premiums have increased over the past several years, while 42% reported their costs had risen “a lot.”

The increases have significantly outpaced overall inflation.

The Consumer Federation of America found that average homeowners insurance premiums increased by approximately 24% between 2021 and 2024, adding roughly $648 annually and pushing the national average to about $3,300 per year.

Insurance marketplace Insurify projects premiums will continue rising during 2026, although at a slower pace than in recent years.

Analysts estimate the average annual homeowners insurance premium will reach just over $3,000, following several consecutive years of double-digit increases.

The largest premium increases continue occurring in states with greater exposure to hurricanes, wildfires, tornadoes and severe storms.

Florida remains among the nation’s most expensive insurance markets, with many homeowners paying well over $7,000 annually for coverage.

Insurance experts point to several factors driving the increases.

Natural disasters have become both more frequent and more expensive.

At the same time, higher construction costs, labor shortages and rising prices for building materials have significantly increased the cost of repairing or rebuilding damaged homes.

Insurance companies have also faced sharply higher reinsurance costs—the insurance they purchase to protect themselves from catastrophic losses—which has contributed to higher premiums for homeowners.

Some insurers have reduced their presence in high-risk states, making coverage more difficult to obtain and limiting competition.

Consumer researchers say the higher costs are influencing homeowner behavior.

Some families are increasing deductibles, reducing optional coverage or shopping more aggressively for lower-cost policies.

Others, particularly lower-income homeowners, have considered reducing coverage altogether because of affordability concerns.

Industry analysts caution that dropping adequate insurance coverage can create significant financial risk following storms, fires or other disasters.

There are some signs the market is beginning to stabilize.

Insurance rating agency AM Best recently revised its outlook for the homeowners insurance sector from negative to stable, citing improving financial conditions across the industry.

Reinsurance prices have also moderated, which could eventually help slow premium growth in some markets.

However, relief is expected to vary widely by region.

Areas facing elevated wildfire, hurricane or severe storm risks are likely to continue experiencing above-average insurance costs.

For homeowners preparing to renew policies, consumer advocates recommend comparing quotes from multiple insurers, reviewing coverage limits regularly and documenting home improvements that may qualify for premium discounts.

Roof upgrades, impact-resistant materials and other mitigation measures can sometimes reduce insurance costs depending on the insurer and location.

For the housing market, rising insurance premiums have become an increasingly important affordability issue alongside mortgage rates and property taxes.

As insurance costs consume a larger share of monthly housing expenses, they are influencing where Americans choose to buy homes and how much they can afford.

This article is for informational purposes only and should not be considered insurance or financial advice.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

U.S. Central Command said Sunday, July 12, that American forces struck about 140 Iranian military targets over the weekend, the third round of strikes in a week, after Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps attacked a container ship in the Strait of Hormuz and again declared the waterway closed. The command said the operation, ordered by President Donald Trump on Saturday, lifted the three-night total to more than 300 targets and was meant to strip Tehran of the ability to fire on commercial shipping.

The targets included missile and drone positions, naval assets, ammunition depots, communications networks and coastal radar, CENTCOM said. The escalation followed the IRGC’s strike on the Cyprus-flagged GFS Galaxy, whose engine room was heavily damaged; one Indian crew member remained missing and ten others were rescued after the crew abandoned ship to a lifeboat. Iran answered by firing across the Gulf, claiming attacks on Jordan, where three missiles struck near the Prince Hassan Air Base; on Qatar, where shrapnel from an intercept injured three people, including a child, near the Al Udeid base; and on Kuwait, where a Kuwait Oil Company drilling platform was hit and a worker hurt. The United Arab Emirates, Oman and Bahrain reported intercepting missiles and drones.

The fighting runs straight through the price of oil. Brent crude, the international benchmark, has held near $76 a barrel and settled as high as $78.19 last week, while West Texas Intermediate climbed above $73, leaving Brent up more than 5% on the week. Roughly 20% of the world’s oil and liquefied natural gas — about 20 million barrels of crude a day — moved through Hormuz before Iran began choking the channel in late February. Equities have swung with each headline: the Dow Jones Industrial Average shed 577 points, or 1.1%, the day Trump told a NATO summit the ceasefire was “over,” while the energy-tracking XLE fund rose more than 2% as crude jumped. The S&P 500 and Nasdaq Composite have traded choppily since, and the yield on the 10-year Treasury note climbed toward 4.60%, up from 3.97% before the war, as bond investors priced in faster inflation.

Washington also tightened the financial screws. The U.S. Treasury moved to revoke the 60-day waiver that had allowed sales of Iranian oil through August 21, barring transactions after July 17 and cutting off revenue Tehran had counted on under the “Islamabad Memorandum” the two sides signed last month. That deal was meant to pause the war for 60 days, reopen Hormuz and buy time to negotiate Iran’s nuclear program; it has instead frayed with each attack.

The disruption reaches well beyond crude. Major carriers including Maersk, Hapag-Lloyd, CMA CGM and MSC have suspended or sharply limited Hormuz transits and rerouted Asia-Europe cargo around the Cape of Good Hope, adding 10 to 14 days and thousands of dollars per container in war-risk and emergency surcharges. War-risk insurance premiums have run near 0.5% of a vessel’s value per transit, about four times pre-crisis levels, with some underwriters pulling Gulf cover entirely. Maritime trackers said the number of ships waiting west of the strait had fallen below 700. Energy majors are feeling it too: Shell trimmed its second-quarter gas output guidance, citing lost Qatari volumes, and the International Monetary Fund cut its 2026 global growth forecast to 3%, blaming the energy shock even as booming AI investment cushioned the blow.

The political temperature matched the military one. Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth wrote on social media, “Iran made a poor choice. Now they pay.” Iran’s new Supreme Leader, Mojtaba Khamenei, who took over after his father was killed in the war’s opening strikes on February 28, vowed vengeance, and senior negotiator Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf declared “the era of one-sided deals is OVER.” CENTCOM, disputing Tehran’s closure claim, insisted the corridor stays open: “Iran does not control the strait. Traffic is flowing,” it said, adding that U.S. forces had helped move more than 800 commercial vessels and 400 million barrels of crude since early May.

For businesses, the risk is a fresh energy and price shock at a delicate moment. Berenberg chief economist Holger Schmieding noted that Trump, facing November midterm elections, wants cheaper fuel, while Tehran’s Guard covets the cash that sanctions relief would bring — competing pressures pulling the strait in opposite directions. Verdence chief investment officer Megan Horneman called the standoff “highly inflationary and highly uncertain,” warning that markets may be growing numb to an on-again, off-again war. With Oman’s mediation stalling and both sides digging in, the crude that fuels the world economy remains hostage to a 21-mile channel.

JBizNews Desk | Washington © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

America’s highest-income households are planning to spend less on back-to-school shopping this year, a sign that inflation and economic uncertainty are beginning to influence even consumers who have largely powered retail spending in recent years. According to Deloitte’s 2026 Back-to-School Survey, parents earning more than $200,000 annually expect to spend 20% less than they did last year, while 63% of those households say they simply have less money available for school-related purchases.

Across all income levels, spending is expected to remain relatively stable at approximately $30.4 billion, or about $557 per K-12 student, just $13 less than last year. However, after adjusting for inflation, Deloitte estimates overall purchasing power will decline by roughly 6%, meaning families will likely bring home fewer goods despite spending nearly the same amount.

The survey, conducted in late May among more than 1,200 parents, found growing concern about the broader economy. Approximately 57% of respondents expect economic conditions to worsen over the next six months, the highest level of pessimism recorded since 2020.

Those concerns are changing shopping habits. Parents expect to reduce spending on technology purchases by approximately 16%, delaying laptop, tablet and other electronics upgrades, while increasing spending on clothing by roughly 22% as children outgrow last year’s wardrobes. About half of all parents surveyed said they plan to reduce discretionary spending—including dining out and entertainment—to make room in their household budgets for school expenses.

Consumers are also becoming more strategic shoppers. Many families plan to delay purchases until closer to the start of the school year in hopes of finding deeper discounts. Brian McCarthy, a Retail Strategy Principal at Deloitte Consulting, said parents are approaching the season far more deliberately, carefully evaluating where every dollar is spent.

The pullback among higher-income households may be the survey’s most significant finding. Wealthier consumers have largely sustained retail sales over the past several years, supported by strong stock market gains and rising home values even as lower-income families struggled with higher prices. If those households are beginning to reduce discretionary spending as well, retailers may face broader demand challenges heading into one of the industry’s most important shopping seasons.

The changing spending mix also presents challenges for retailers. Electronics generally carry higher profit margins than apparel, meaning a shift toward clothing combined with increased bargain hunting and delayed purchases could pressure profitability for many chains. Major retailers including Walmart, Target, department stores and electronics sellers will likely compete aggressively for value-conscious shoppers throughout the season.

For businesses, back-to-school shopping often serves as an early indicator of broader consumer confidence heading into the important holiday shopping season. If households across multiple income levels continue becoming more cautious, retailers may face additional pressure during the second half of the year despite relatively healthy employment and wage growth.

While American consumers continue spending, Deloitte’s survey suggests they are becoming increasingly selective about where those dollars go. With inflation still weighing on household budgets and economic uncertainty remaining elevated, retailers may need to rely more heavily on promotions, discounts and value-focused marketing to attract shoppers throughout the remainder of 2026.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) and Zoox, Amazon’s autonomous vehicle subsidiary, announced on Friday, July 17, 2026, that the company has begun recalling a portion of its self-driving robotaxi fleet following the discovery of a software issue that could increase the risk of a crash under certain driving conditions. The recall is being addressed through an over-the-air software update, underscoring both the promise and the continuing safety challenges facing autonomous transportation as driverless vehicles expand into American cities.

The action comes as autonomous vehicle technology moves from limited pilot programs toward broader commercial deployment. Unlike conventional vehicle recalls that often require owners to schedule service appointments for mechanical repairs, this recall involves software governing how the vehicle interprets traffic situations and responds to surrounding vehicles. The update can be transmitted remotely to affected vehicles, allowing the company to correct the issue without bringing each vehicle into a repair facility.

Zoox, which was acquired by Amazon in 2020 for more than $1.2 billion, has spent years developing a purpose-built autonomous vehicle designed specifically for ride-hailing rather than adapting traditional automobiles. Its distinctive bidirectional robotaxi has no steering wheel or pedals, relying instead on an array of cameras, radar, lidar sensors, artificial intelligence, and onboard computers to navigate city streets without a human driver.

According to federal safety documents, engineers identified conditions in which the vehicle’s automated driving software could make an incorrect driving decision during certain complex traffic interactions. While the issue does not affect every driving scenario, federal regulators determined that the software should be updated to reduce the possibility of collisions before additional vehicles are placed into service.

The recall highlights one of the defining characteristics of modern vehicles: software has become just as important as engines, transmissions, and braking systems. Today’s vehicles often contain hundreds of millions of lines of computer code controlling everything from adaptive cruise control and emergency braking to navigation and battery management. As a result, recalls increasingly involve software corrections rather than replacement of physical components.

For consumers, the recall also illustrates how autonomous vehicles differ from conventional automobiles. Instead of requiring drivers to visit a dealership, many software-based recalls can now be completed remotely through secure over-the-air updates, similar to updates performed on smartphones or personal computers. Manufacturers argue that this capability allows safety improvements to be deployed much faster than traditional recall campaigns.

The autonomous vehicle industry has been under increasing scrutiny from federal regulators as robotaxis expand into more cities. Companies developing self-driving technology must demonstrate that their systems can safely respond to pedestrians, bicyclists, emergency vehicles, construction zones, changing weather conditions, and unpredictable actions by other motorists. Even relatively minor software issues are receiving close attention because they could affect public confidence in driverless transportation.

Amazon has made autonomous mobility a long-term strategic investment through Zoox. The company envisions a future in which fleets of autonomous vehicles provide on-demand transportation in urban areas while eventually supporting portions of its broader logistics and delivery ecosystem. Although commercial deployment has progressed more slowly than many technology companies initially predicted several years ago, investment in autonomous transportation remains substantial throughout the industry.

The recall also reflects the evolving relationship between regulators and technology companies. Rather than waiting for widespread failures to occur, manufacturers are increasingly working with federal agencies to identify software issues early and deploy corrective updates before they become larger safety concerns. Industry analysts say this proactive approach is likely to become increasingly common as software controls more aspects of vehicle operation.

Competition within the autonomous vehicle sector has intensified as multiple companies race to commercialize self-driving technology. Several firms have already launched limited robotaxi services in select metropolitan markets, while others continue conducting testing under state permits. Each software update, regulatory review, and safety investigation contributes to the industry’s growing body of operational experience.

Transportation experts note that recalls should not necessarily be interpreted as evidence that autonomous vehicle technology is failing. Traditional automakers collectively announce hundreds of recalls every year affecting millions of vehicles, many involving software, electronics, or safety systems. Instead, regulators say the willingness to identify defects and promptly issue corrective actions remains a critical component of vehicle safety regardless of whether a vehicle is driven by a human or a computer.

Consumers considering future autonomous ride services are unlikely to notice any immediate operational changes resulting from the recall. The software update is designed to improve system performance while allowing affected vehicles to continue operating once the correction has been installed. Nevertheless, the action serves as another reminder that autonomous transportation remains an evolving technology undergoing continuous refinement through testing, regulatory oversight, and real-world experience.

As driverless vehicles gradually become a more familiar sight on American roads, recalls such as this one are expected to remain part of the industry’s maturation process. Federal regulators have emphasized that manufacturers will continue to be held to the same safety standards expected of every vehicle operating on public roadways, regardless of whether a human or an artificial intelligence system is behind the wheel.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nearly half of U.S. businesses that have paid import tariffs over the past year expect to raise prices again, suggesting the inflationary effects of trade duties may continue well beyond the initial cost increases, according to new research released by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York.

The report, published Wednesday on the New York Fed’s Liberty Street Economics blog, was authored by economists Jaison Abel, Mary Amiti, Richard Deitz, Sebastian Heise and Nick Montalbano. Drawing on the bank’s regional business surveys, the researchers found that many companies are still gradually passing higher import costs on to customers rather than absorbing them all at once.

The findings challenge the common assumption that tariffs create only a one-time increase in prices.

Instead, businesses continue raising prices months after paying the higher import costs, extending inflationary pressure across the broader economy.

Among service-sector businesses that directly paid tariffs, 47% said they still expect to increase prices. Of those, 31% plan to do so within the next six months, while another 16% anticipate raising prices after six months.

Manufacturers reported similar expectations.

Among manufacturers paying tariffs, 44% still expect additional price increases, with 37% planning them during the next six months.

The survey also illustrates how widespread tariff exposure has become.

Nearly two-thirds of service businesses and almost every manufacturer reported importing at least some materials or products. Among those importers, 40% of service firms and 70% of manufacturers said they had directly paid tariffs during the past year.

Businesses cited several reasons for delaying price increases.

Some companies remain locked into long-term contracts that prevent immediate price adjustments, forcing them to temporarily absorb higher costs until agreements expire.

Others said they deliberately spread price increases over time to reduce customer resistance rather than implementing one large increase.

Continued uncertainty surrounding future tariff policy also plays a role.

With businesses unsure whether tariff rates could change, expand or be reduced, many have adopted a cautious pricing strategy instead of making immediate adjustments.

The report arrives as policymakers continue evaluating inflation trends.

Earlier this week, New York Federal Reserve President John Williams said the economy appears to be approaching the peak impact from tariff-related inflation.

The new survey suggests, however, that additional pricing pressure could still emerge over coming months as more businesses pass along costs.

Other inflationary pressures remain present as well.

Higher energy prices following renewed tensions in the Middle East and continued investment in artificial intelligence infrastructure have increased demand for commodities, construction materials and specialized labor.

Previous research has consistently shown that consumers ultimately bear most tariff costs.

The Tax Foundation has estimated recent tariffs could increase costs for the average American household by hundreds of dollars annually as businesses continue adjusting prices.

For companies, delaying price increases can protect customer relationships temporarily, but few businesses can permanently absorb higher import costs without reducing profits.

Eventually, those additional expenses typically work their way through supply chains and appear in consumer prices.

Although the survey reflects businesses located within the New York Federal Reserve District—which includes New York, northern New Jersey, parts of Connecticut, Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands—the findings offer an important snapshot of how companies continue responding to higher trade costs.

For business owners, the report suggests tariff-related pricing decisions remain an ongoing challenge rather than a completed adjustment.

For consumers, it indicates that additional price increases tied to tariffs may still be ahead.

For policymakers, the findings reinforce that inflationary effects from trade policy can unfold gradually, making the path back to the Federal Reserve’s long-term 2% inflation target more complicated than many initially expected.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Americans continue spending on restaurants, but where they choose to eat is changing as higher-income households keep dining out while lower-income consumers become more cautious.

According to the latest Bank of America Institute Consumer Checkpoint report, restaurant spending remains one of the strongest categories of discretionary consumer spending, alongside travel. However, the data also shows a widening gap between higher- and lower-income households that is reshaping the restaurant industry.

Researchers found that wealthier consumers continue increasing restaurant spending, while spending growth among lower-income households has slowed considerably.

That divide is becoming increasingly visible across the restaurant business.

Many quick-service and value-oriented chains have experienced softer customer traffic, while casual dining and full-service restaurants have benefited from customers willing to spend more for dining experiences.

At the same time, restaurants continue facing rising operating costs.

According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, prices for food consumed away from home increased 3.5% over the past year, outpacing grocery inflation.

Restaurants continue dealing with higher labor costs, insurance expenses, rent and elevated food prices, including record wholesale beef prices.

Several restaurant operators have responded by closing weaker locations.

Papa John’s announced plans to close more than 200 restaurants, while franchise operators for Carl’s Jr. have reduced store counts in parts of California amid financial pressures.

Other well-known chains have also undergone restructuring as operators adjust to changing consumer behavior and higher operating costs.

Despite those challenges, overall restaurant spending remains relatively resilient.

The National Restaurant Association projects U.S. restaurant industry sales will approach $1.5 trillion, supported by continued consumer demand and major events expected to boost travel and dining activity.

Analysts also expect the 2026 FIFA World Cup to increase restaurant traffic in host cities as millions of visitors travel throughout the United States.

Industry experts say successful restaurant companies are increasingly focusing on value promotions, menu innovation and improving the customer experience rather than relying solely on discount pricing.

Consumers who continue dining out are placing greater emphasis on quality and overall value for their money.

The report also highlights broader economic trends.

Restaurant spending often serves as an important measure of consumer confidence because dining out is typically among the first discretionary expenses households reduce during periods of financial stress.

While overall restaurant spending remains healthy, the widening gap between income groups suggests economic conditions are affecting consumers differently.

Higher-income households continue supporting much of the industry’s recent growth, while many lower-income consumers have become more selective about how frequently they eat away from home.

For restaurant operators, the challenge is balancing higher operating costs with consumers’ growing focus on value.

Those able to offer compelling menus, strong service and competitive pricing are expected to remain best positioned as consumer spending patterns continue evolving.

For investors, the data suggests

Washington — The sudden death of Senator Lindsey Graham, announced by his office early Sunday, July 12, removes the single most important congressional force behind a sanctions package that energy traders, defense contractors, and Kyiv had tracked for months. President Trump, speaking Sunday on NBC’s “Meet the Press,” said he spoke with the South Carolina Republican by phone Saturday evening — possibly Graham’s final call — and that the senator was still pushing legislation hours before he died at 71 of what his office called a brief and sudden illness.

The immediate economic casualty is Graham’s Sanctioning Russia Act, the bill he co-authored with Senator Richard Blumenthal that would slap a 500% tariff on any country buying Russian oil, gas, uranium, and other goods. Just two days earlier, on July 10, Graham stood in Kyiv after his tenth wartime visit and told reporters he had reached a deal with the White House on a version the administration would support, declaring it would become law. The measure carried 85 cosponsors — past the two-thirds threshold needed to override a veto — and had been designed to pressure buyers like China, India, and Brazil to abandon discounted Russian crude. Graham was the engine keeping it alive after Senate Majority Leader John Thune repeatedly slowed it to give Trump room to negotiate with Vladimir Putin.

With Graham gone, the bill loses its most relentless salesman at the exact moment it was closest to a floor vote. Blumenthal and Senator Jeanne Shaheen remain attached, but neither commands the same standing with Trump, and the timing question now reopens. For markets, the stakes are concrete. A 500% secondary tariff on Russian-energy buyers would ripple straight into global oil pricing, refiner margins, and the shipping and insurance costs already inflamed by the closure of the Strait of Hormuz. The same trip produced Trump’s political green light for Ukraine to co-produce Patriot missile interceptors and advance a bilateral drone agreement — deals that funnel real dollars to U.S. and allied defense manufacturers and that Graham had personally championed.

The Middle East loses a comparable weight. Graham was the Senate’s loudest advocate for military pressure on Iran, arguing for months that Tehran’s leadership was an unreliable negotiating partner and backing the U.S. and Israeli campaign now in its fifth month. His death lands as Iran has shut the Strait of Hormuz, fired on a commercial tanker, and drawn a third round of American strikes — a crisis pushing Brent crude back near $76 a barrel and war-risk insurance toward 3% of a vessel’s value. Graham had been among the most forceful voices tying that confrontation to a regime-change outcome, and his absence shifts the balance of hawks shaping how far Washington presses.

For Israel, the loss is personal and strategic. Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, who long called Graham the country’s best friend in Washington, paid tribute Sunday and was said to be weighing a trip to the funeral. Graham cosponsored anti-boycott legislation and consistently defended U.S. security assistance — the kind of aid that underwrites contracts across the American defense-industrial base.

Trump, who described Graham as “like a member of the family to me,” framed the death partly through the lens of his stalled legislative wish list, calling it “a big blow” to the SAVE America Act, the voter-identification bill Graham was pressing in that last call. “We’re going to get it done, Lindsey,” Trump recalled telling him. Whether the president can move either the sanctions package or the election bill without Graham’s floor management is now an open question in a chamber where he supplied both the votes and the urgency.

There is also a South Carolina seat to fill. Graham was running for a fifth term this fall, and Trump said Sunday he already has a successor in mind but considers it too soon to name. The appointment will shape the balance on the Senate Budget Committee, which Graham chaired, and the fate of the spending and sanctions priorities he steered through it.

For now, the desks watching Russia sanctions, Ukraine reconstruction, defense procurement, and Iran policy face the same recalculation: a bill that looked destined to pass, and a hawkish posture that looked locked in, both suddenly depend on who inherits the fight. Graham spent three decades turning foreign-policy conviction into legislation and contracts. Replacing the conviction is one problem. Replacing the man who could count the votes is another.

JBizNews Desk | Washington © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Americans continue carrying one of the largest credit card balances in history, and a growing number are falling behind on payments as high interest rates and rising living costs strain household budgets.

According to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York’s latest Household Debt and Credit Report, total U.S. credit card balances stood at approximately $1.25 trillion during the first quarter of 2026. While that was slightly below the record set during the previous quarter, balances remain nearly 6% higher than a year ago, highlighting the continued reliance on credit.

The more concerning trend is delinquency.

The share of credit card balances that are 90 days or more past due climbed to roughly 13%, the highest level in about 15 years.

Federal Reserve researchers noted that while overall household debt increased only modestly during the quarter, credit card repayment difficulties continue growing among financially stressed households.

Economists say the problem is becoming increasingly concentrated.

Rather than large numbers of new borrowers missing payments, many consumers who were already behind are falling even further behind.

According to Oxford Economics, the trend reflects mounting financial pressure on households facing persistently high costs for groceries, housing, utilities and other necessities.

Research from debt-management firm Achieve found that more than half of consumers carrying credit card balances now use their cards to pay for essential living expenses rather than discretionary purchases.

With average credit card interest rates exceeding 21%, many borrowers find it increasingly difficult to reduce balances once debt begins accumulating.

Financial analysts note that making only minimum monthly payments often keeps accounts current while allowing interest charges to continue growing.

Despite the rising delinquency rate, economists emphasize that today’s credit environment differs significantly from the period preceding the 2008 financial crisis.

Many households continue paying balances in full every month and never incur interest charges.

Researchers also note that while delinquent balances have increased, the number of delinquent accounts has remained comparatively stable, suggesting financial stress remains concentrated among a smaller portion of borrowers rather than spreading broadly across consumers.

Even so, higher gasoline prices, elevated grocery costs and persistent inflation continue placing additional pressure on already stretched household budgets.

Credit card performance is closely watched because it often provides one of the earliest indicators of changing consumer financial health.

Banks may respond to rising delinquencies by tightening lending standards, reducing available credit or increasing approval requirements for new borrowers.

That, in turn, can slow consumer spending throughout the broader economy.

Financial experts generally recommend paying more than the minimum payment whenever possible, focusing on the highest-interest balances first and exploring lower-interest balance-transfer options if appropriate.

For consumers, the report illustrates how elevated living costs continue affecting household finances despite a resilient overall economy.

For lenders and investors, rising credit card delinquencies remain an important measure of consumer financial stress heading into the second half of 2026.

This article is for informational purposes only and should not be considered financial advice.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Cybercriminals are impersonating recruiters from more than 30 major companies—including Netflix, OpenAI, Adobe, Coca-Cola and Adidas—in a sophisticated phishing campaign designed to steal Google account credentials from marketing professionals and other job seekers.

The operation was detailed in a technical analysis published by Will Thomas, Senior Threat Intelligence Adviser at cybersecurity firm Team Cymru, who found that attackers are sending personalized recruitment emails that appear to come from legitimate hiring managers at well-known companies.

Unlike traditional phishing emails, the messages are tailored to each recipient by name, profession and career background, making them significantly more convincing.

One example cited in the report impersonated a recruiter from McKinsey & Company, congratulating the recipient on their professional experience and inviting them to schedule a 30-minute interview.

The email included what appeared to be a legitimate scheduling link.

Instead of directing victims to a real interview portal, however, the link redirected them through several legitimate online services before ultimately arriving at a fraudulent login page designed to capture Google account credentials.

Thomas said the attackers are abusing trusted business platforms, including PeopleForce, a legitimate applicant-tracking system, along with infrastructure connected to Salesforce Marketing Cloud.

Because the emails originate from authentic commercial services, they can often bypass standard email security filters that would normally identify phishing attempts.

Security researchers emphasized that neither PeopleForce nor Salesforce appears to have been hacked. Instead, criminals likely created legitimate accounts—or gained access to existing ones—to launch the campaign.

The fake Google login page uses a technique known as Browser-in-the-Browser, which recreates Google’s authentication window entirely within a webpage using HTML and CSS.

To unsuspecting users, the login box looks identical to Google’s real sign-in screen even though it is completely controlled by the attacker.

Researchers also found that the campaign uses photographs and names of real recruiters while registering internet domains that closely resemble official company career websites.

For businesses, the risks extend far beyond a single compromised password.

A stolen Google account can provide access to Gmail, Google Drive, saved passwords, calendars, cloud storage and numerous connected workplace applications, allowing attackers to expand their access throughout an organization.

According to the FBI’s Internet Crime Complaint Center, employment scams generated more than 24,000 complaints and approximately $362 million in reported losses during 2025.

The bureau has also warned that criminals increasingly use artificial intelligence to enhance hiring scams through realistic voice cloning, deepfake video interviews and personalized communications.

The campaign also creates reputational challenges for the companies being impersonated.

Although firms such as Netflix, OpenAI and Adobe are themselves victims of brand impersonation, job seekers may mistakenly believe those companies were responsible for the fraudulent communications.

Cybersecurity experts recommend that organizations actively monitor newly registered internet domains resembling their corporate brands and quickly pursue their removal.

For individuals, security professionals advise verifying unexpected interview invitations directly through a company’s official careers website rather than clicking links contained in unsolicited emails.

Users should also confirm that any Google login page begins with the official accounts.google.com web address before entering credentials.

Enabling multi-factor authentication provides an additional layer of protection by making stolen passwords significantly less valuable to attackers.

Anyone who believes they entered credentials on a fraudulent website should immediately change their Google password, review recent account activity, revoke unfamiliar sessions and update recovery information.

For businesses, the campaign reflects a broader evolution in cybercrime.

Rather than relying on poorly written phishing emails, attackers increasingly exploit trusted cloud platforms, recognizable corporate brands and highly personalized messages to bypass both technology and human skepticism.

As remote hiring and online recruiting continue expanding, cybersecurity experts expect fake recruiter campaigns to remain one of the fastest-growing methods used to steal corporate credentials.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Americans planning summer vacations are paying significantly more this year as higher airfare, hotel rates and gasoline prices drive up the cost of travel across the country.

According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, airline fares in May were 26.7% higher than a year earlier, while the U.S. Travel Association’s Travel Price Index showed overall travel costs rising 9.8% year over year—more than twice the pace of overall inflation. Hotel and motel prices climbed another 5.1%.

One of the biggest reasons is higher fuel costs.

Jet fuel prices surged following renewed conflict involving Iran, increasing airline operating expenses that carriers have largely passed on to passengers through higher ticket prices.

Another major factor is the disappearance of one of America’s largest discount airlines.

Spirit Airlines ceased operations on May 2 after multiple bankruptcy filings, removing roughly 2% of domestic airline capacity during one of the busiest travel seasons of the year.

While 2% may sound modest, Spirit concentrated heavily on price-sensitive leisure routes serving cities including Orlando, Fort Lauderdale and Las Vegas, where its low fares helped keep prices down across the industry.

For years economists referred to the company’s influence as the “Spirit Effect.”

Research cited by the U.S. Department of Justice found average fares often fell substantially whenever Spirit entered a market and frequently increased after the airline exited.

With Spirit no longer competing, larger carriers including American Airlines, Delta Air Lines, United Airlines and Southwest Airlines have gained greater pricing power across many domestic routes.

Industry data reflects that shift.

According to the Airlines Reporting Corporation, the average domestic round-trip ticket reached approximately $623 during April, the highest level in nearly four years.

Travel analytics firm Points Path also found domestic airfare for summer travel running roughly 15% higher than last year, while international fares have increased approximately 12%.

Driving vacations have become more expensive as well.

AAA has warned gasoline prices could continue climbing through the summer, while GasBuddy forecasts prices could approach $5 per gallon if geopolitical tensions continue disrupting global oil supplies.

Hotels have also increased prices as strong travel demand meets higher labor, insurance and operating costs.

Despite higher prices, travel demand remains resilient.

Many travelers continue prioritizing vacations, although more families are adjusting plans by booking earlier, traveling during midweek, shortening trips or redeeming airline miles and credit-card reward points to offset higher costs.

Travel experts say Tuesday and Wednesday departures often remain the least expensive options and can save travelers hundreds of dollars compared with weekend flights.

Budget airlines including Frontier, Allegiant, Breeze Airways and Avelo Airlines are expected to expand into some former Spirit markets, but analysts believe meaningful increases in low-cost competition could take several months.

For consumers, the message is clear.

Traveling this summer requires larger budgets than in previous years, particularly for families purchasing multiple airline tickets.

For the travel industry, the combination of higher fuel costs, reduced airline competition and strong consumer demand has created one of the most expensive summer travel seasons in recent years.

Unless fuel prices decline or additional low-cost airline capacity enters the market, travelers should expect elevated airfare and vacation costs to continue through the remainder of the summer.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

The number of American employees taking leave for mental health conditions has risen sharply in recent years, creating new challenges for employers struggling to balance workforce well-being with business operations.

According to workforce management company ComPsych, mental health-related leaves increased approximately 300% between 2017 and 2023, including a 33% jump during 2023 alone, reflecting a significant shift in how employees use protected medical leave for stress, anxiety, depression and burnout.

Additional research released this year by workplace mental health provider Spring Health found that 61% of human resources professionals reported an increase in mental health leave requests over the past year.

Much of the increase involves the Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA), which allows eligible employees to take up to 12 weeks of unpaid, job-protected leave for qualifying medical conditions, including diagnosed mental health disorders.

For many employees, the leave provides an opportunity to recover before workplace stress develops into more serious medical problems.

Mental health professionals say the COVID-19 pandemic permanently changed how many workers view burnout, work-life balance and seeking professional treatment.

Surveys consistently show younger employees reporting the highest levels of workplace stress, with many citing heavier workloads, staffing shortages and ongoing economic uncertainty.

While the trend reflects greater awareness of mental health, employers increasingly face operational and financial challenges.

When employees take extended leave, companies often redistribute responsibilities among remaining staff, increasing workloads for coworkers and sometimes contributing to additional burnout across teams.

Spring Health reported that 16% of HR professionals experienced increases of 25% or more in mental health leave requests during a single year.

Approximately 40% identified disability claims and employee leave management as one of their organization’s fastest-growing workplace concerns.

The financial impact extends well beyond temporary staffing shortages.

Research cited by workforce specialists estimates untreated mental health conditions cost U.S. employers between $31 billion and $51 billion annually through absenteeism, reduced productivity and lower workplace performance.

Additional healthcare costs, employee turnover and recruiting expenses further increase the financial burden.

Companies have responded in different ways.

Some employers have expanded counseling services, employee assistance programs and flexible work arrangements in hopes of addressing problems before employees require extended leave.

Others have strengthened leave management policies to ensure medical leave is used appropriately while continuing to comply with federal and state employment laws.

The legal landscape also continues to evolve.

Although the Family and Medical Leave Act establishes nationwide protections, many states provide additional employee benefits, paid leave programs and broader workplace accommodations, creating compliance challenges for employers operating across multiple jurisdictions.

Human resources professionals increasingly view mental health leave as a permanent workforce planning issue rather than a temporary post-pandemic trend.

Many organizations are investing more heavily in wellness initiatives, manager training and early intervention programs designed to reduce burnout before employees reach the point of needing extended leave.

Business leaders also recognize that supporting employee mental health can improve retention, productivity and overall workforce stability.

At the same time, companies continue balancing those investments against rising healthcare costs, staffing shortages and operational demands.

For employers, the message is becoming increasingly clear: mental health has evolved from an employee benefit issue into a core business concern affecting productivity, labor costs and long-term organizational performance.

As awareness continues growing and employees become more comfortable seeking treatment, experts expect mental health leave to remain an increasingly important factor in workforce management across nearly every industry.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

The rapid growth of weight-loss drugs such as Ozempic and Wegovy is beginning to reshape the retail industry, with one of the biggest effects showing up in the plus-size clothing market.

Torrid, one of the nation’s largest plus-size apparel retailers, reported that net sales fell 7.6% to $245.8 million during its latest quarter ended May 2. At the same time, the company reduced its store count to 463 locations, down from 632 stores a year earlier—a decline of nearly 27%.

Company leaders say the closures are part of a broader restructuring plan, but the changing shopping habits of customers taking GLP-1 weight-loss medications are adding new pressure to the business.

These medications suppress appetite and can lead to significant weight loss over time. As consumers move through that transition, many are delaying clothing purchases until their weight stabilizes.

Harvey Kanter, chief executive of plus-size retailer DXL Group, recently told investors that as many as 25% of the company’s customers may now be using GLP-1 medications.

Rather than repeatedly purchasing clothing in different sizes while losing weight, many customers are waiting before replacing their wardrobes.

That pause has created a temporary drop in demand across the plus-size apparel sector.

Torrid closed 151 stores during 2025 and has announced plans to shutter additional locations during the first half of 2026, focusing on stores with weaker financial performance.

DXL has experienced similar challenges, reporting a 6% decline in quarterly sales while also planning additional store closures.

According to CoreSight Research, retail store closures across all sectors increased 67% during 2025 compared with the previous year, with specialty apparel retailers among the hardest hit.

The trend is also influencing major clothing brands.

Companies including H&M, Nike, Old Navy, L.L. Bean, Ralph Lauren and Shein have reduced portions of their extended-size offerings as they adjust inventory to changing consumer demand.

Still, analysts caution that the plus-size market remains substantial.

Industry estimates value the global plus-size apparel market at more than $114 billion, with continued long-term growth expected despite the short-term disruption.

Many retailers also believe today’s slowdown could become tomorrow’s opportunity.

Once customers complete significant weight loss, they often need entirely new wardrobes.

Research from Dentsu found that roughly half of Americans using GLP-1 medications report shopping for clothing more frequently after losing weight, while nearly one-third purchase more accessories.

Analysts at eMarketer estimate that wardrobe replacement alone could eventually generate approximately $13 billion in additional annual apparel sales.

The challenge for retailers is surviving the transition period before that new demand arrives.

Torrid continues to invest in digital sales, new product lines and brand expansion while reducing underperforming locations.

The company ended its latest quarter with approximately $301 million in debt and $22.8 million in cash, underscoring the importance of improving profitability during the restructuring.

For consumers, the changes may mean fewer dedicated plus-size stores and a smaller selection of extended sizes at traditional retailers.

For investors and the retail industry, the broader story is becoming increasingly clear.

Weight-loss medications are beginning to influence purchasing behavior well beyond healthcare, affecting apparel, food, consumer products and other industries.

As millions more Americans adopt GLP-1 medications, retailers across multiple sectors are adjusting business strategies to reflect changing consumer habits.

For Torrid, the immediate focus is reducing costs while positioning itself for the next wave of demand—when today’s customers finish losing weight and begin rebuilding their wardrobes.

JBizNews Desk | Los Angeles
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

President Donald Trump and Senator Bernie Sanders rarely agree on economic policy, but both are now advocating for a U.S. sovereign wealth fund—a government-owned investment vehicle designed to hold stakes in private companies and other assets. While the two envision very different purposes for such a fund, their shared interest has moved the concept from a fringe idea into a serious policy discussion.

The foundation of the debate is President Trump’s February 2025 executive order directing the U.S. Treasury Department and the Department of Commerce to develop a plan for creating a sovereign wealth fund that would “maximize the stewardship of our national wealth.” The order outlined the goal but left unanswered the most important questions, including where the money would come from, who would manage it and what assets it would own.

Unlike countries such as Norway, Saudi Arabia and Singapore, which built sovereign wealth funds using large budget surpluses or natural-resource revenue, the United States currently runs persistent budget deficits. That has made funding a national investment vehicle far more complicated.

Several ideas have been discussed, including directing revenue from tariffs or proceeds from a possible sale of TikTok’s U.S. operations into the fund. None has been formally adopted.

Rather than waiting for a fully structured fund, the Trump administration has already taken strategic stakes in selected industries, including semiconductor manufacturers, rare-earth mining companies and quantum-computing firms. Among those investments is a passive ownership position in Intel, reflecting the administration’s broader effort to strengthen domestic technology and manufacturing.

Meanwhile, Sanders has proposed a dramatically different approach.

The Vermont independent recently introduced legislation that would create an American AI Sovereign Wealth Fund, financed through a one-time 50% tax paid in stock by large artificial intelligence companies generating more than $200 million in annual AI-related revenue.

Instead of collecting cash, the federal government would receive equity in qualifying companies, placing those shares into a professionally managed public investment fund.

According to Sanders, the fund could eventually hold approximately $7 trillion in assets. Investment returns would help finance direct payments to Americans while supporting priorities such as healthcare, education and affordable housing.

Although both proposals use the term “sovereign wealth fund,” the philosophies behind them differ substantially.

Trump has generally described government investments as strategic assets that could strengthen America’s industrial competitiveness and national security.

Sanders argues that much of today’s AI industry was built upon decades of publicly funded research and therefore believes Americans should directly share in the wealth created by the technology.

Despite those differences, the fact that leaders from opposite ends of the political spectrum support some form of public investment fund has attracted growing attention from economists and investors.

Ashby Monk, executive director of Stanford University’s Research Initiative on Long-Term Investing, has described sovereign wealth funds as an increasingly common tool for governments seeking long-term economic growth rather than relying solely on taxes and regulation.

Several countries have recently expanded or created national investment funds to support artificial intelligence, advanced manufacturing, clean energy and strategic industries.

Critics, however, warn that government ownership of private companies raises significant concerns.

Free-market organizations argue that political leaders should not influence corporate decision-making through government share ownership, while some economists caution that concentrating public money in rapidly appreciating technology companies could expose taxpayers to unnecessary investment risk.

Others question whether Washington could manage such a fund independently of political pressures.

Supporters counter that professionally managed sovereign wealth funds around the world have successfully generated long-term returns while maintaining operational independence from day-to-day politics.

The debate also carries major implications for the private sector.

If the federal government eventually becomes a significant shareholder in leading artificial intelligence companies, semiconductor manufacturers or other strategic industries, it could reshape corporate governance, investment priorities and the relationship between government and business.

For investors, the discussion reflects a broader shift in economic policy as governments worldwide become more directly involved in financing industries viewed as critical to long-term national competitiveness.

Whether Congress ultimately embraces either proposal remains uncertain.

Sanders’ legislation faces significant political obstacles in a Republican-controlled Congress, while the Trump administration has yet to present a detailed structure for implementing its own sovereign wealth fund.

Still, the unusual convergence between Trump and Sanders illustrates how rapidly attitudes toward government investment have evolved. An idea once viewed as politically improbable has become an increasingly prominent part of the national conversation over artificial intelligence, technology leadership and America’s economic future.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Bruce Blakeman, the Nassau County executive and Republican nominee for New York governor, said this week that he intends to use a little-known provision of the state constitution to try to kill Mayor Zohran Mamdani’s roughly $70 million plan to open city-owned grocery stores across the five boroughs, arguing that public money spent to undercut private operators runs afoul of the charter. In comments reported Friday, Mr. Blakeman pointed to the constitution’s gift-and-loan clause as the legal basis for a challenge, framing the fight as a defense of the neighborhood stores he says the plan would crush.

The clause Mr. Blakeman is leaning on is roughly 150 years old and bars local governments from giving or lending public funds or property to private entities, while requiring that municipal spending serve a genuine public purpose. It was written to stop cities and counties from steering taxpayer money to favored businesses, railroad companies chief among them, during an era of aggressive public subsidy. Mr. Blakeman’s argument is that opening one store in each borough and handing day-to-day operations to a chosen private company would use public dollars to lower that operator’s costs, amounting to a subsidy for select firms while nearby shops get no such help.

“City-run supermarkets can use public money to push prices down, leaving independent grocers and bodegas to face unfair competition that threatens local jobs and the survival of existing businesses,” Mr. Blakeman said, according to the reporting. He has separately called the broader plan unworkable and warned that taxpayers would carry the tab.

The proposal Mr. Blakeman is targeting took its first concrete step in April, when Mr. Mamdani named La Marqueta, a city-owned market in East Harlem, as the site of the Manhattan store. The mayor has said he wants the full five-borough network running by the end of his first term in 2029, using publicly owned space that is exempt from rent and property taxes to trim overhead and pass savings to shoppers on staples such as eggs, milk and bread. City Hall has not detailed how prices would be set, and the mayor’s office did not respond to a request for comment on Mr. Blakeman’s threat.

For the grocery trade, the stakes are concrete. Supermarkets typically operate on net margins of just 1% to 3%, and independent operators argue that a rival exempt from rent and property taxes would enjoy an advantage they cannot match. Roughly 450 independent stores in the city, many of them family-run and a large share operated by immigrant owners, sit closest to the proposed sites, and their operators say pricing and location decisions by a city-backed competitor could pull away the foot traffic they depend on. John Catsimatidis, the chief executive of the supermarket chain Gristedes, opposes the city-run model but said he was not familiar with the constitutional clause Mr. Blakeman cited. His alternative: rather than build new stores, the city could subsidize existing grocers who buy in bulk and require them to pass the savings to customers.

Whether the legal theory holds is another question. James M. McGuire, a former state appellate judge who served as chief counsel to former Republican Governor George Pataki, cautioned that existing New York Court of Appeals precedent could make Mr. Blakeman’s argument difficult to sustain. Courts have generally given lawmakers wide latitude to define what counts as a public purpose, a deference that has blunted past gift-and-loan challenges. A suit would likely turn on how directly the arrangement channels benefit to a private operator versus the public at large.

The clash also feeds directly into the governor’s race. Gov. Kathy Hochul, who backed Mr. Mamdani’s mayoral bid, told a business breakfast last August that she “supports free enterprise,” but she has largely stayed quiet on the grocery plan since. Mr. Blakeman, who carries President Donald Trump’s endorsement, trails Ms. Hochul by about six points in some polls, and he appears intent on making the cost of living and the proper role of government the center of his campaign. A courtroom fight over the grocery stores would give him a high-profile vehicle to press that case, whatever its odds of success.

For now, the plan remains on track inside City Hall, with site scouting underway and no store yet open. Mr. Blakeman’s threat adds legal uncertainty to a program already facing questions about pricing, supply chains and operating costs, and it signals that the first city-owned shelves, whenever they arrive, may open under the shadow of litigation.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The way consumers shop online is rapidly changing, with purchasing decisions increasingly beginning inside AI-powered assistants rather than on traditional retailer websites. As more shoppers turn to platforms such as ChatGPT, Claude, Google Gemini and Microsoft Copilot for product recommendations, retailers are racing to ensure their products appear where those conversations begin.

“The shelf moved,” said Matthew Bouchner, founder and chief executive of AI commerce startup Satsuma.ai. “It is inside the assistant now.”

Shopping Begins Inside the Chat

The shift reflects a broader change in online commerce. On February 16, OpenAI introduced its “Buy it in ChatGPT” shopping experience, allowing U.S. users to purchase products from Etsy sellers and later Shopify merchants through technology built with Stripe. Today, ChatGPT serves more than 700 million weekly users, with shopping-related questions becoming an increasingly significant part of overall usage.

Major retailers have moved quickly to participate. Walmart integrated approximately 200,000 products into the ChatGPT shopping experience, recognizing that consumers are increasingly asking AI assistants what to buy before ever visiting a retailer’s website.

While OpenAI later shifted away from completing purchases directly inside ChatGPT, instead directing shoppers to retailers’ own checkout systems, the broader trend has continued. Retailers increasingly view AI assistants as another important customer touchpoint rather than simply another search engine.

Retailers Are Rethinking Their Digital Strategy

Industry analysts say retailers are still determining the best way to integrate with AI assistants.

“No one has this figured out,” said Emily Pfeiffer, principal analyst at Forrester.

Bob Hetu, vice president analyst at Gartner, said many retailers underestimated the complexity of allowing external AI assistants to securely interact with inventory systems, customer accounts and checkout platforms.

For retailers, the challenge extends beyond simply appearing in search results. Consumers are asking AI assistants to recommend products, compare options, locate inventory nearby and assemble complete shopping lists. If the information an assistant provides is outdated or incomplete, retailers risk losing sales before a customer ever reaches their website.

Building the Infrastructure for AI Commerce

That opportunity is driving companies such as Satsuma.ai, which says it enables retailers to connect inventory, shopping carts, checkout systems and loyalty programs across multiple AI assistants through a single integration.

The platform is built around the Model Context Protocol (MCP), an emerging open standard designed to help AI systems securely interact with external business software. According to the company, retailers can connect once and make their data available across ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Microsoft Copilot and their own AI-powered customer service platforms.

Bouchner previously founded MealMe, a shopping application that grew to more than one million users and raised $8 million in funding before evolving into Satsuma.ai. He argues that AI commerce represents a shift similar to the early days of e-commerce, when retailers that delayed investing in online shopping spent years trying to catch up.

A Battle Over Industry Standards

The race to become the standard for AI commerce is intensifying.

Google has introduced its own commerce protocol through Shopify, while retailers increasingly evaluate whether to support multiple AI ecosystems.

At the same time, companies including Amazon have taken a more guarded approach, limiting outside access to shopping data as competition among AI platforms accelerates.

For many retailers, the practical question is no longer whether customers will shop through AI assistants—but how to ensure their products are accurately represented wherever those purchasing conversations take place.

The Stakes for Retailers

Supporters of agentic commerce—the growing practice of allowing AI systems to research and complete purchases on behalf of consumers—project the market could reach $175 billion by 2030.

Although many of the technologies remain in their early stages, analysts broadly agree that AI-assisted shopping is becoming an increasingly important part of the retail landscape.

For retailers, the opportunity extends beyond selling products online. As more consumers ask AI assistants for recommendations, the companies that successfully integrate into those conversations may gain an advantage in influencing purchasing decisions before shoppers ever visit a traditional online storefront.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

After years of sharp increases, auto insurance premiums are beginning to stabilize in many parts of the country, but drivers are still paying significantly more than they were just a few years ago.

According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, auto insurance costs increased more than 64% between September 2020 and September 2025, making insurance one of the fastest-rising household expenses during that period.

There are now signs that the pace of increases is slowing.

Insurance marketplace Insurify reports the average annual premium for full-coverage auto insurance declined about 6% during 2025 to approximately $2,144, with only modest changes expected during 2026.

Another industry comparison site, The Zebra, estimates the national average now stands near $2,250 per year, although premiums vary widely depending on location and driving history.

The biggest differences remain regional.

Drivers in Washington, D.C. currently face some of the nation’s highest premiums, while states including Florida, Louisiana, Nevada and Michigan also remain among the most expensive markets.

Meanwhile, many lower-density states experienced premium declines during the past year as insurers returned to profitability.

Industry experts say the dramatic increases seen over the past several years were driven by multiple factors.

Vehicle repair costs climbed sharply because of inflation, supply-chain disruptions and increasingly sophisticated vehicle technology.

Labor shortages and higher medical costs also pushed insurance claims higher.

According to the Insurance Information Institute, insurers experienced one of their most challenging underwriting periods in decades before filing substantial premium increases to restore profitability.

Now that many companies have improved their financial results, some insurers have begun slowing—or even reducing—premium increases for lower-risk drivers.

However, not every driver is benefiting equally.

Motorists with recent accidents, traffic violations, DUI convictions or poor credit histories continue facing significantly higher premiums than drivers with clean records.

Teen drivers also remain among the most expensive groups to insure.

Another potential challenge remains on the horizon.

Industry analysts warn that tariffs on imported automobile parts could increase repair costs if they remain in place, potentially leading insurers to raise premiums again in future policy renewals.

Consumer advocates continue recommending that drivers compare quotes from multiple insurers before renewing coverage.

Raising deductibles, bundling home and auto insurance, maintaining safe driving records and participating in usage-based insurance programs can often reduce annual premiums.

For consumers, the encouraging news is that the period of rapid double-digit insurance increases appears to be slowing.

However, overall premiums remain near record highs, and affordability continues varying significantly depending on where drivers live and their individual risk profiles.

As insurers continue adjusting pricing to changing repair costs, weather risks and claim trends, shopping around remains one of the most effective ways for drivers to reduce insurance expenses.

This article is for informational purposes only and should not be considered insurance or financial advice.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Getting into Harvard is easier than getting hired at Bending Spoons.

The Milan-based technology company, which acquired AOL in January, revealed in regulatory filings tied to its July 1 Nasdaq debut that it hired just 286 people in 2025 from roughly 800,000 job applications—an acceptance rate of about 0.04%. That’s about one hire for every 2,800 applicants, making it one of the most selective employers in the technology industry.

The statistic quickly became one of the most talked-about disclosures from the company’s IPO. While most employers are trying to fill openings, Bending Spoons has built its business around hiring only a tiny number of people and using technology, acquisitions and artificial intelligence to multiply what each employee can accomplish.

Chief Executive Luca Ferrari, 41, co-founded the company in 2013 after an earlier startup, Evertale, failed, leaving him and his partners with about $40,000. Today, the company employs only about 620 people, known internally as “Spooners,” despite owning some of the internet’s best-known brands.

Getting hired is deliberately difficult. Applicants go through résumé screenings, timed problem-solving and behavioral assessments that the company says “might not even appear strictly related to the role,” followed by multiple interviews. Every final hiring decision is made by a committee rather than an individual manager, a process Bending Spoons says is designed to reduce bias and reward problem-solving ability over pedigree. Applicants who are turned down must wait a full year before applying again.

Ferrari describes the company as “the best of both worlds of Berkshire Hathaway and a technology company,” and elsewhere as roughly one-quarter private equity firm and three-quarters technology company. Its strategy is straightforward: acquire widely used subscription apps that have stalled, rebuild the underlying technology with a lean engineering team, reduce costs and often increase subscription prices.

That formula has reshaped several well-known brands. Evernote, acquired for $200 million in 2023, raised the price of its annual subscription from $100 to $249. Users of Vimeo and WeTransfer have seen similar increases. The company’s growing portfolio now includes AOL, Vimeo, Eventbrite, Brightcove, Meetup, WeTransfer, Evernote and the AI-powered photo app Remini. Together, those platforms reach more than 500 million monthly users and approximately 9 million paying subscribers.

The hiring story looks very different for employees who join through acquisitions rather than applying directly. Bending Spoons said it inherited 1,830 full-time employees through its acquisitions of AOL, Eventbrite and Vimeo, but expects only a few hundred will remain once those companies are fully integrated later this year. The company recorded $78.6 million in reorganization costs during 2025 as part of those workforce reductions. The contrast is striking: extraordinarily difficult to join as a Spooner, yet many employees acquired through corporate deals ultimately don’t remain.

The strategy is paying off financially. Revenue generated per Spooner climbed from $1.12 million in 2023 to $2.57 million in 2025, a jump the company partly attributes to artificial intelligence. Overall revenue reached $1.31 billion in 2025, while the first quarter of 2026 produced $601 million in revenue and $27.5 million in net income, compared with a $112 million loss during the same period a year earlier.

Investors have largely embraced the story. Bending Spoons priced its IPO at $29 per share, above the expected $26-to-$28 range, raising approximately $1.68 billion and valuing the company at about $18.4 billion. Shares surged after the debut, briefly pushing its market value above $25 billion, before settling back. The stock has recently traded around $33 per share, giving the company a market value of roughly $20 billion, down from an intraday high near $44. The company’s acquisition spree has been financed heavily with debt, leaving about $6 billion on its balance sheet.

The four co-founders who continue to lead the company—Luca Ferrari, Matteo Danieli, Francesco Patarnello and Luca Querella—became paper billionaires through the IPO while retaining more than 80% of the company’s voting power.

Ferrari has never hidden his philosophy. “If someone wants to see nothing change, we’re not a good buyer,” he has said of companies Bending Spoons acquires. And the acquisition pipeline isn’t slowing down. The company reviewed more than 2,500 potential acquisition targets in 2025, closely evaluated about 200, completed six deals and says it has identified more than 1,000 additional companies that could eventually become acquisition candidates.

For today’s labor market, Bending Spoons offers a glimpse of where some executives believe technology is heading: a $20 billion company powered by only a few hundred carefully selected employees, using acquisitions and artificial intelligence to produce more with fewer people. Whether that model becomes the future of work remains to be seen, but one statistic already stands out—286 hires from 800,000 applicants.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Goldman Sachs has barred employees from placing bets on prediction markets involving financial markets, elections, geopolitics and major economic events, expanding its personal trading policy as Wall Street responds to growing concerns over insider trading and conflicts of interest.

The revised policy, confirmed Thursday, July 9, prohibits employees from trading event contracts tied to individual companies, financial markets, election outcomes, geopolitical conflicts and other events where employees could potentially possess material nonpublic information.

According to a policy document reviewed by Bloomberg News, the restrictions also cover contracts involving Goldman Sachs itself, including wagers related to possible mergers, acquisitions, restructurings or other corporate events.

Employees who repeatedly violate the policy could face disciplinary action, including termination, while the bank also reserves the right to recover improper profits or require gains exceeding $200 to be donated to charity.

A Goldman Sachs spokesperson declined to comment on specific provisions of the policy but reiterated that employees are prohibited from trading on material nonpublic information across all markets.

The move represents one of the strongest restrictions adopted by a major Wall Street bank as prediction markets rapidly expand beyond sports into finance, politics, economics and global events.

Only months ago, Goldman Sachs Chief Executive David Solomon publicly praised prediction markets, calling them “super interesting” after meeting with executives from leading event-trading platforms.

The firm’s position shifted following increased regulatory scrutiny.

In May, the Commodity Futures Trading Commission and the U.S. Department of Justice charged a Google employee with allegedly using confidential company information to profit from contracts traded on Polymarket, marking one of the first insider trading cases centered on an event-betting platform.

Regulators alleged the employee earned approximately $1.2 million by trading contracts linked to Google’s annual “Year in Search” rankings using information unavailable to the public.

The case highlighted a growing challenge facing employers.

Prediction markets now allow participants to wager on thousands of possible outcomes, including corporate earnings, mergers, Federal Reserve decisions, inflation reports, ceasefires, elections and cryptocurrency prices. That expansion creates more opportunities for employees with inside information to improperly profit from future events.

Compliance experts say traditional insider trading policies technically cover these markets, but many firms are now explicitly adding prediction-market language to eliminate uncertainty.

Goldman Sachs is not alone.

Several major financial institutions have begun reviewing or strengthening their policies. JPMorgan Chase has advised employees to exercise caution when trading financial event contracts, while Morgan Stanley points to existing insider trading rules governing employee conduct.

Some hedge funds have gone even further. Point72 Asset Management and Balyasny Asset Management have prohibited employees from participating in prediction markets entirely.

Government officials have also become increasingly concerned.

Earlier this year, White House officials reportedly reminded staff that using confidential government information to trade prediction-market contracts could violate ethics rules and federal law after unusual trading activity appeared ahead of several major policy announcements.

The rapid growth of platforms such as Polymarket and Kalshi has attracted millions of users seeking to trade contracts tied to political, economic and business events rather than traditional stocks or commodities.

Supporters argue prediction markets improve forecasting by aggregating information from thousands of participants. Critics counter that the markets create new opportunities for insider trading, market manipulation and conflicts of interest.

For Goldman Sachs, the legal and reputational risks appear to outweigh any benefits.

The bank spends heavily monitoring employee trading activity across stocks, bonds and other securities. Expanding those controls to prediction markets reflects the growing view that event contracts now present many of the same compliance risks as traditional financial instruments.

As prediction markets continue expanding into mainstream finance, more banks, investment firms and corporations are expected to adopt similar restrictions to reduce legal exposure and protect confidential information.

Goldman Sachs’ decision signals that Wall Street increasingly views prediction markets not simply as a new form of speculation, but as another area requiring strict compliance oversight in an era when almost any future event can become a tradable contract.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Meta Platforms began charging businesses to use one of its artificial-intelligence models for the first time on Thursday, July 9, when Mark Zuckerberg rolled out an upgraded model called Muse Spark 1.1 alongside a public preview of the new Meta Model API. In an interview with Bloomberg News timed to the launch, the chief executive said the company would compete on cost, describing the pricing as “very aggressive and attractive” and taking direct aim at the fat margins he says rival labs charge for comparable tools.

The numbers back up the pitch. According to Meta’s own developer blog, the Meta Model API will charge $1.25 per million input tokens and $4.25 per million output tokens, with $20 in free credits for every new account. Zuckerberg put that at roughly a quarter of what OpenAI and Anthropic charge for models in the same class. The preview is open to developers in the United States at launch, with additional access handled through a waitlist.

For Meta, the move is less about the model than about the business behind it. The company built its AI reputation by giving its Llama models away for free, arguing open-source software was good for the industry and bad for closed-model competitors. Muse Spark 1.1 is the opposite: proprietary, closed-weight, and reachable only through Meta’s apps or the paid interface. It marks the first time the company has turned one of its models into a direct revenue line, and it plants Meta squarely in the market for paid developer tools that OpenAI and Anthropic have largely had to themselves.

The man driving the shift is Alexandr Wang, the 28-year-old former co-founder of Scale AI whom Zuckerberg brought in last summer to run Meta Superintelligence Labs. Meta paid $14.3 billion for a 49% nonvoting stake in Scale AI in June 2025 and handed Wang a newly created chief AI officer role after the disappointing reception of the Llama 4 series. Wang echoed his boss on price, positioning the new model against offerings from Anthropic and OpenAI and calling it Meta’s strongest work yet for coding and agent-style tasks.

Agents are the selling point. Muse Spark 1.1 is a multimodal reasoning model with a one-million-token context window, built to plan and carry out multi-step jobs across outside apps, use software and tools, write and debug code, and read text, images and video in a single pass. Zuckerberg described its reasoning and tool use as state-of-the-art or close to it, and said Meta employees have already been using the model in-house to build features across the company’s products. He also claimed it beat Alphabet‘s Gemini on several benchmarks tied to agents, coding and multimodal work — in his telling, the first time Meta’s models have topped all of Google’s.

Meta lined up early partners to make the case. Replit chief executive Amjad Masad pointed to the long context window and the model’s coding strength, particularly on front-end and design work. Cline chief executive Saoud Rizwan said the pricing makes it realistic to run heavy coding jobs at scale. Yashodha Bhavnani, who runs AI products at Box, said the model held its own against top frontier systems on the company’s internal tests. A quiet but important detail: the Meta Model API speaks both the OpenAI and Anthropic software formats, so a developer can point an existing setup at Muse Spark by changing a web address and a key rather than rebuilding anything.

That compatibility is the sharp edge of the strategy. It lowers the cost of switching to near zero at the same moment Meta is undercutting the field on price — a squeeze aimed at pure-play labs that need model revenue to survive. Meta, by contrast, funds its AI push with an advertising machine and has told investors it will spend as much as $135 billion to $145 billion on capital projects this year.

Investors were split on the day. Meta shares opened lower, trading down about 3.5% near $581.70 in the first hour, then reversed higher through the session as the market weighed the new revenue angle against the spending. The stock had already jumped about 9% on July 1 on separate reports that Meta plans to sell excess cloud capacity. The company carries a market value near $1.51 trillion, and Wall Street’s consensus rating sits at “strong buy” with an average 12-month target around $824.

The open question is whether cut-rate pricing wins share fast enough to justify the outlay. Zuckerberg is betting that getting Meta’s technology into as many hands as possible matters more than protecting margins today — and that the companies charging premium rates will feel the pressure first.

JBizNews Desk | Menlo Park, Calif. © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Vivani Medical is wagering that a matchstick-sized device tucked under the skin can fix the costliest weakness of the blockbuster weight-loss drugs: keeping patients on them long enough to hold onto the pounds they shed. On Tuesday, July 7, the Alameda, California biopharmaceutical company said it had signed an agreement letting Novo Nordisk run an internal evaluation of NPM-139, its experimental implant that releases semaglutide — the same molecule inside Novo’s Wegovy obesity injection and Ozempic diabetes shot — in a slow, steady dose over six months to a year. Adam Mendelsohn, Vivani’s president and chief executive, said the deal reflects Novo’s interest in the platform and reinforces the company’s confidence in a “market opportunity” for a treatment patients could receive once or twice a year.

The pitch is aimed squarely at a real and expensive problem. Real-world studies show that up to 65% of GLP-1 users stop treatment within a year of starting, driven off by cost, gastrointestinal side effects and the burden of weekly injections. One large analysis of more than 125,000 patients found 64.8% of those without type 2 diabetes discontinued within a year, versus 46.5% of those with diabetes. The consequences show up on the scale: withdrawal trials such as STEP 4 and SURMOUNT-4 found that roughly two-thirds of lost weight is regained within a year of stopping, often erasing the metabolic gains that made the drugs so sought after in the first place. An implant that delivers the medicine automatically for months removes the daily and weekly decision-making that trips patients up.

Vivani’s device is essentially a tiny titanium reservoir preloaded with a fixed dose of semaglutide, built on the company’s proprietary NanoPortal platform, which is designed to leak the drug out at a controlled rate. Mendelsohn has argued the approach could also blunt the nausea and other side effects tied to the peaks and troughs of injections, and the company says the implant can be removed or swapped for a higher or lower dose if needed — a feature it frames as giving patients the “peace of mind” of stopping whenever necessary. Skeptics note the flip side: those insertion and removal procedures add friction for patients and clinicians that a self-administered pen does not.

The Novo agreement carries no exclusivity, licensing terms or upfront payment, and amounts to the world’s dominant obesity player kicking the tires rather than committing. Novo confirmed the arrangement and said it aims to complement its own research with outside innovation. Still, for a company Vivani’s size, the validation matters. The stock closed near $1.60 on July 8, giving the clinical-stage firm a market value of roughly $116 million — a rounding error against a GLP-1 market that some analysts project could top $100 billion by the early 2030s. Lake Street rates the shares a buy with a $4 price target, though the company still carries no revenue and steady losses.

The science remains early. In June, an Australian human research ethics committee cleared Vivani to begin SLIM-1, the first human study of the semaglutide implant. The Phase 1 trial, expected to start in mid-2026, will enroll about 20 overweight or obese adults who have never taken a GLP-1, testing the implant’s safety, tolerability and drug levels against a low starting dose of Wegovy over four weeks. Vivani chose Australia partly to tap government research tax incentives. Preclinical work has been encouraging — a single implant produced more than 20% sham-adjusted weight loss sustained for a full year in animals — but human efficacy is unproven, and the road from a four-week safety readout to a marketable product runs through a Phase 2 dose-ranging study and years of larger trials.

For the broader industry, Vivani’s bet underscores where the obesity gold rush is heading next. The first wave of competition was about who could produce the most weight loss; Wegovy has averaged about 15% over 68 weeks, reaching nearly 28% at a higher dose. The next battle is durability and adherence — turning a drug people quit into a therapy people stay on. Whether the answer is an implant, a cheaper oral pill, or better insurance coverage is unsettled, and questions about the implant’s eventual price and reimbursement remain wide open. But the maintenance problem is now the field’s central commercial question, and a small California biotech has put a physical device on the table as one possible fix. With Novo Nordisk watching, the coming Phase 1 data will determine whether the idea graduates from intriguing to investable.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Interior Department and the Commerce Department finalized a rule on Friday, July 10, that narrows one of the most consequential words in American environmental law, clearing habitat that had been off-limits for half a century for use by energy producers, farmers, fishing operations, miners and developers. Interior Secretary Doug Burgum said the action restores common sense and gives landowners certainty, framing a change that turns on the single word “harm” in the Endangered Species Act.

For more than four decades, federal regulators treated “harm” to a protected species as including significant destruction or degradation of the habitat it needs to feed, shelter and breed. The U.S. Supreme Court upheld that reading in 1995. The new rule scraps it. Going forward, a project can impair the place where a threatened or endangered species lives without running afoul of the law, so long as the activity does not directly injure or kill the animal itself.

The Commerce Department’s role is easy to overlook and central to the business impact. Commerce oversees NOAA Fisheries, the agency responsible for salmon, sturgeon, whales and other marine and migratory species, while the Fish and Wildlife Service inside Interior handles land animals. That split means the rewrite reaches straight into the ocean economy: commercial fishing fleets, aquaculture operators, offshore wind and offshore oil and gas developers, and port and coastal construction projects have all bumped up against habitat-based restrictions tied to listed marine species. In their joint announcement, Interior and Commerce said the rule reduces permitting and compliance costs for energy producers, farms and fishing interests, and returns the statute to what they called its single best meaning rather than a politically stretched one.

That is the crux of the commercial story. The Endangered Species Act is one of the biggest regulatory chokepoints in federal permitting. Any agency weighing a permit for oil and gas, mining, logging, electric transmission or coastal development has to evaluate the effect on listed species, and habitat considerations routinely add years and cost to a project’s timeline. By pulling habitat modification out of the definition of harm, the administration is betting it can accelerate approvals across exactly the sectors it has prioritized. The move aligns with President Donald Trump’s broader push to strip regulations he argues constrain American business.

The legal scaffolding matters for how durable the change proves to be. In their news release, Interior and Commerce leaned on Loper Bright v. Raimondo, the 2024 Supreme Court decision that overturned the long-standing Chevron doctrine, which had directed judges to defer to an agency’s reading of an ambiguous statute. With Chevron gone, courts now interpret statutory text themselves, and the administration is arguing that the plain text of the Act never required the broader habitat definition in the first place. The rule was first proposed in April of last year and, as of Friday afternoon, had not yet appeared in the Federal Register, the step that starts the clock on its legal effect.

Opponents are already moving. The Center for Biological Diversity called the decision a death knell for American wildlife, with senior campaigner Tara Zuardo arguing that habitat destruction is the leading threat to imperiled species and that removing it from the definition of harm guts the law’s purpose. Lawyers at Earthjustice and other conservation groups have signaled litigation, meaning the rule’s real-world staying power will be tested in court before businesses can fully count on it. Environmental groups note the Act is credited with pulling the bald eagle, the California condor and other species back from extinction, and warn that spotted owls, Atlantic salmon and Florida panthers are among those now exposed.

For companies weighing capital decisions, the practical takeaway is mixed. The rule opens a wider lane for extractive and development projects and could shorten permitting timelines, a genuine cost saving in industries where delay is the single largest risk. But the coming legal fight introduces its own uncertainty. A developer who breaks ground relying on the new interpretation could face exposure if a court reinstates the old one, and lenders and insurers tend to price that ambiguity in. The safest near-term posture for regulated businesses is to treat the change as directional rather than settled, and to watch the Federal Register filing and the first court challenges closely.

What is not in dispute is the direction of travel. The administration has signaled the harm rule is one piece of a broader slate of environmental rollbacks aimed at speeding approvals, and Commerce and Interior have now shown they are willing to reach deep into decades-old regulatory language to get there.

JBizNews Desk | Washington © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Meta Platforms shut down one of its newest artificial-intelligence tools on Friday, July 10, telling users that a feature allowing anyone to generate AI images from public Instagram photos was, in the company’s words, no longer available. In a statement updating the product’s launch announcement, a Meta spokesperson conceded the feature “missed the mark,” TheWrap closing out a controversy that had run for barely three days.

The retreat capped a fast-moving episode that began Tuesday, July 7, when Meta introduced Muse Image, its first image-generation model from Meta Superintelligence Labs. RAPPLER The company pitched it as a creative upgrade to its Meta AI assistant — a system that could take a photo as input, understand detailed prompts, and let users tweak the results with simple sketches. Buried in the rollout, however, was a capability that quickly overshadowed everything else: users could manipulate an image of a person simply by tagging that person’s public Instagram account — or any public account at all. Variety

That design decision put the burden on users to say no. The feature applied to account holders over 18 with public profiles, who had to dig into their settings and switch it off to keep their images out of the generator. Variety Meta’s own help documentation acknowledged a further wrinkle: people would not be notified when someone created content using the AI feature. Variety For a platform built on billions of publicly posted photos, the math alarmed users almost immediately.

The pushback came fast and from heavy hitters. Emmy-winning actor Hannah Einbinder, of the series “Hacks,” criticized the feature on Instagram, saying it had switched on automatically and urging followers to disable it. Detroit News On Thursday, SAG-AFTRA, the union representing actors and other media professionals, urged members and the broader public to opt out. Detroit News The talent agency CAA, whose client roster includes Tom Hanks and Meryl Streep, said it had taken its objections straight to Meta. The agency argued that no one’s name, image, likeness, voice or creative work should be used by any third party, including AI models, without clear and documented consent. Variety

Meta initially tried to hold the line, downplaying the privacy concerns in an early response before reversing course days later. Deadline By Friday the company had folded. Its spokesperson said the original intent was to offer a useful creative tool while giving people control over whether their public content could be referenced, but that the feedback had been heard. Variety Both CAA and SAG-AFTRA welcomed the decision, with CAA commending Meta for moving swiftly to remove the feature. TheWrap

For Meta, the damage is less about a single product than about what it signals. Muse Image was the debut consumer showcase for Meta Superintelligence Labs, the unit into which the company has poured enormous capital and talent as it races OpenAI, Google and others for generative-AI supremacy. Launching a flagship model and yanking its marquee capability within 72 hours is a costly stumble for a division built to prove Meta can ship AI that people trust — not just AI that works.

The reversal also lands on the fault line that now defines the industry: speed versus consent. Tech companies are shipping likeness-based tools faster than the legal and social guardrails around them can form, and the creative economy is pushing back hard. The parallel to OpenAI is direct. Last October, SAG-AFTRA condemned a similar opt-out arrangement on OpenAI’s Sora 2 video model, warning it threatened the economic foundation of the performance industry; that model was later shut down. TheWrap Meta walked into the same trap and exited it just as quickly.

The commercial stakes run beyond Hollywood. Meta’s advertising machine depends on creators and everyday users treating Instagram as a safe place to post. A feature that let strangers remix anyone’s face — with no notification — threatened the trust that underwrites the platform’s engagement and, by extension, its ad inventory. The consent-first standard that CAA and SAG-AFTRA are demanding, if it hardens into regulation, would reshape how every large platform trains and deploys likeness-based models, raising compliance costs across the sector.

For now, Meta has bought itself breathing room by retreating. The harder question is whether Meta Superintelligence Labs can move fast enough to stay competitive while absorbing the lesson that, in consumer AI, launching without consent baked in is no longer a viable strategy. Its next release will be watched for whether the default has changed.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Body runs ~760 words. Want me to add a “Market movers” style analyst reaction block on META stock, or keep it as straight tech-policy news?

The U.S. Navy’s top officer, Adm. Daryl Caudle, has sharpened his case that the country does not have enough warships — a warning thrown into relief this weekend as a third round of U.S. strikes on Iran and the closure of the Strait of Hormuz stretched a force the admiral says is already running near its limits. Testifying before the Senate Appropriations defense subcommittee in May, the 34th Chief of Naval Operations told lawmakers that escorting commercial ships through the contested strait would “exceed” the Navy’s capacity, a blunt admission that the fleet is spread thin at exactly the chokepoints where global commerce is most exposed.

The numbers behind the warning are stark. The Navy fields roughly 291 battle force ships today, well short of the 355 that Congress set as a statutory floor and further still from the service’s own 2023 assessment calling for 381 manned ships plus 134 unmanned platforms. The Navy’s May shipbuilding plan charts a path to about 450 vessels by 2031 under the administration’s “Golden Fleet” initiative, yet the service concedes a hard truth: despite a budget that has roughly doubled over two decades, today’s fleet is no larger than it was in 2003.

The constraint is not mainly money — it is steel and skilled hands. Only two American yards build nuclear-powered warships: Huntington Ingalls Industries’ Newport News Shipbuilding in Virginia and General Dynamics’ Electric Boat in Connecticut. Submarine production is stuck near 1.2 boats a year against a need above two, attack-submarine readiness has slipped to 62% from 67% a year earlier, and the newest aircraft carrier has slid toward the mid-2030s because the yard cannot physically fit the work. Adm. Caudle has told appropriators the industrial base will not reach a two-carrier-a-year cadence until around 2032, four years later than the target his predecessor named in 2023.

Those bottlenecks land against a competitor moving at industrial speed. China’s People’s Liberation Army Navy is now the world’s largest by hull count, fielding upward of 730 vessels and launching destroyers, frigates and submarines faster than Western shipyards can match. Pentagon planners increasingly frame the coming decade as the window that will decide the balance of power in the Indo-Pacific, and Adm. Caudle’s push for combat mass — manned and unmanned — is aimed squarely at that clock.

For the defense-industrial base, the CNO’s argument is also a demand signal worth billions. The Golden Fleet envisions a “high-low mix” of high-end combatants, cost-effective frigates and drones: continued Arleigh Burke destroyer production, a new nuclear-powered Trump-class battleship, the FF(X) patrol frigate derived from a Coast Guard cutter, and fleets of medium unmanned surface vessels. Acting Navy Secretary Hung Cao has cast the effort as a generational investment meant to revive American shipbuilding and create thousands of high-skill jobs. The fiscal 2027 budget request seeks roughly $65.8 billion for Navy shipbuilding, and Navy leaders have signaled the new plan could more than double the 19 hulls funded in fiscal 2026 — a pipeline that flows directly to publicly traded prime contractors and a web of suppliers across dozens of states.

The weekend’s events made the strain concrete. As the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps sealed Hormuz and U.S. forces struck Iranian targets for a third time in a week, the Navy’s presence in the region was a fraction of the June wartime surge — recent tallies put roughly six U.S. warships in the Central Command area, including three Arleigh Burke destroyers and three littoral combat ships. The service has kept a blockade posture and mine-clearing options in play, but Adm. Caudle has been candid that de-mining and escort duty in a narrow, contested waterway are among the hardest missions to run, and cannot be switched on at scale until a durable ceasefire reopens the strait.

That gap between mission demand and available hulls is the heart of the CNO’s message. The Navy has set a goal of surging 80% of its force on short notice, but with about a third of the fleet deployed, a third in maintenance and a third in sustainment at any given time, deferred repairs and aging shore infrastructure leave little slack. Adm. Caudle has called the shortfall a “resource issue,” arguing that sustained shipbuilding near the roughly $38 billion a year the Congressional Budget Office estimates — and defense spending closer to 4% of GDP — is what a fleet of the required size would take.

For businesses tied to sea trade, the stakes are not abstract. A Navy stretched thin at chokepoints like Hormuz means thinner protection for the tankers, box ships and energy cargoes that set fuel prices, insurance premiums and supply-chain timetables worldwide. Whether Washington funds the larger fleet Adm. Caudle is asking for — and whether the yards can build it fast enough to matter — will shape both American sea power and the reliability of the trade routes that the global economy runs on.

JBizNews Desk | Washington © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New Jersey’s commuter railroad has the money and the green light for real-time train tracking — now it needs a company to build it. NJ Transit President and CEO Kris Kolluri said Monday, July 6, that Gov. Mikie Sherrill has authorized the agency to spend $12 million on a live, GPS-based system that will show trains moving in real time and give riders accurate arrival and departure times. The work is not live yet. Kolluri put the rollout at the next several months, and the agency is still lining up the vendors who will do the building.

The platform is called NJT LiveView, and it is the centerpiece of the digital overhaul inside the Rapid Action Plan, the customer-service roadmap Sherrill ordered and unveiled in May. Kolluri called live tracking the single upgrade commuters asked for most.

“This was the single biggest thing that people have asked for,” he told News 12 New Jersey, crediting the governor with clearing the money to get it done.

The spending is still moving through procurement, which is where the opportunity sits for New Jersey’s technology sector. In June, NJ Transit issued a request for information asking companies that build real-time transit communication systems to spell out what they can deliver — the step agencies take before formal bids open. Contracts tied to NJT LiveView and the wider digital rebuild are now moving toward award, and the $12 million authorization gives bidders a concrete budget to size their proposals against.

Here is the problem the system is meant to solve. Right now NJ Transit figures out where a train is by reading trackside switches — the junction points where trains move from one track to another — rather than the train itself. That method is coarse and runs a step behind reality, which leaves the agency’s own app and station boards out of sync with the actual train. Riders who wanted a true live map have had to rely on outside apps.

NJT LiveView is designed to pull precise GPS coordinates directly from each train and turn them into one authoritative feed that powers arrival countdowns, service alerts and push notifications across the redesigned NJ Transit app, station display screens and third-party navigation apps. The buses already operate on similar technology; now the trains are catching up.

The business stakes are significant because the ridership is substantial. More than 300,000 New Jersey residents ride NJ Transit on a typical weekday, many commuting into New York City, tying northern New Jersey’s workforce directly to the reliability of the rail network. When riders cannot trust arrival times, the consequences go beyond inconvenience. Missed shifts, delayed meetings, late daycare pickups and uncertainty all carry real economic costs. Accurate real-time information is one of the most cost-effective ways an agency can improve the customer experience without adding new tracks or expanding service.

The timing also increases the pressure. NJ Transit raised fares by roughly 3% on July 1, meaning customers are paying more while expecting improved service. At the same time, the agency is preparing for the 2026 FIFA World Cup, when massive crowds will rely on the rail system to travel to and from matches. A GPS-based tracking system becomes especially valuable when platforms are crowded and even small delays can ripple throughout the network.

The funding is not coming from a new tax or special appropriation. The Sherrill administration has said the Rapid Action Plan will be financed within NJ Transit’s existing budget and will not require additional state funding in the coming fiscal year. Beyond live train tracking, the plan includes expanded station-cleaning crews, repairs to elevators and escalators, enhanced Wi-Fi on buses and a new Real Time Crime Center to monitor security cameras at major transit hubs.

New Jersey Department of Transportation Commissioner and NJ Transit Board Chair Priya Jain, who helped develop the plan under Sherrill’s executive order, has described it as a series of tangible improvements riders will notice. Kolluri, who also serves as Executive Director of the New Jersey Turnpike Authority, has said the shift to GPS tracking is long overdue.

For now, the funding has been approved and vendors are being courted. The real test of NJT LiveView will come in the months ahead, when commuters look at the countdown clock and expect it to match where the train actually is.

JBizNews Desk | Newark, N.J.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Justice Department served grand jury subpoenas on Friday to four New York Times reporters who wrote about security gaps in President Donald Trump’s new Qatari-gifted Air Force One, an escalation that David McCraw, senior vice president and deputy general counsel of The New York Times Company, denounced in a statement Saturday as a bid to frighten journalists out of doing their jobs. The subpoenas were signed by Jay Clayton, the U.S. Attorney for the Southern District of New York and Mr. Trump’s nominee to lead the Office of the Director of National Intelligence, and order the reporters to appear before a federal grand jury in Manhattan on Wednesday.

The four journalists — Julian E. Barnes, Eric Lipton, Tyler Pager and Eric Schmitt — carried the bylines on reporting this week that the Secret Service pressed the president to leave a NATO summit in Turkey aboard an older presidential jet because the newer plane lacked some defensive systems. Federal agents hand-delivered several of the subpoenas to the reporters’ homes, the paper said, a detail that press advocates seized on as unusually aggressive. Mr. McCraw said the sight of federal law enforcement at reporters’ front doors should trouble anyone who values the Constitution and a free press.

The dispute traces back to an abrupt switch of aircraft. Mr. Trump flew to Turkey on the newly delivered Boeing 747-8 that Qatar gave the United States and that underwent a $400 million retrofit before entering service. He then departed for a Royal Air Force base in England on an older jet, with both planes flying to the same stop before he boarded the new aircraft for the trip home to Joint Base Andrews. The Times reported the swap came at the Secret Service’s urging, and that the retrofitted jet lacked some advanced protections, including antimissile capabilities, found on the older aircraft. The episode landed as a cease-fire with Iran collapsed and the U.S. resumed strikes, sharpening questions about the president’s exposure to threats.

The administration cast the matter as a leak investigation, not an attack on the press. In a rapid-response statement, the Justice Department said reporters were not the targets and that those disclosing classified information were. A department spokesperson told news organizations that every administration has confronted the crime of leaking national-security material and that it would keep investigating breaches. Acting Attorney General Todd Blanche, who also serves as deputy attorney general, said last month that his office would not stop pursuing government employees who share secrets with journalists. White House spokesman Steven Cheung defended the new plane as a state-of-the-art aircraft fitted with high-level security, adding that the administration uses distraction and misdirection to protect the president.

For The New York Times Company, which trades publicly and has built its subscription business on original, source-driven reporting, the fight cuts at a core asset: the confidential relationships that produce national-security scoops. A protracted legal battle carries direct costs — outside counsel, management time and the risk of contempt exposure for reporters — and a subtler one, the chance that sources go quiet across the industry. The company said it will fight the order in court.

The move fits a broader pattern that has rattled newsrooms as businesses. Earlier this year the Justice Department issued grand jury subpoenas to reporters at The Washington Post and The Wall Street Journal in separate national-security leak probes, then withdrew them after the outlets pushed back. That the department has now returned to the same tactic against a third major publisher suggests the earlier retreats were tactical rather than a change in posture, leaving media companies to price in recurring legal risk as a cost of covering the federal government.

Press-freedom organizations lined up against the subpoenas. Bruce D. Brown, president of the Reporters Committee for Freedom of the Press, said the action breaks from a longstanding department practice of seeking information from reporters only as a last resort. Stephen J. Adler, the group’s chairman, warned that crushing the public’s right to know inflicts lasting harm. The National Press Club, led by Mark Schoeff Jr., urged the department to withdraw the subpoenas immediately, calling agents at reporters’ homes an extraordinary assault on the First Amendment. Seth Stern of the Freedom of the Press Foundation argued the government’s real concern was reputational, not national security.

The timing adds a political wrinkle. Mr. Clayton faces a Senate Intelligence Committee confirmation hearing on Wednesday — the same day the reporters are told to testify — for the intelligence post he was tapped to fill after Tulsi Gabbard stepped down. The Reporters Committee has called on senators to press him on the subpoenas. Whether the grand jury appearances proceed as scheduled will likely turn on how fast the Times can get before a judge.

JBizNews Desk |Washington D.C. © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Australia’s national public broadcaster defended its reporting on the Israel-Hamas war while rejecting calls to adopt the International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance (IHRA) definition of antisemitism during testimony before a national inquiry examining antisemitism and social cohesion.

The issue arose Thursday as Australian Broadcasting Corporation (ABC) Editorial Director Gavin Fang appeared before Australia’s Royal Commission into Anti-Semitism and Social Cohesion, which was established following a rise in antisemitic incidents across the country.

During the hearing, Fang said the ABC believes its existing editorial standards, anti-racism policies and internal guidelines are sufficient to address antisemitism and maintain balanced journalism.

He argued that formally adopting the IHRA working definition could create concerns about the broadcaster’s editorial independence.

The IHRA definition has been adopted by numerous governments and organizations worldwide, including the Australian government, and includes examples of antisemitic conduct related to Jewish identity and, in certain circumstances, criticism of Israel.

Fang described the definition as “contested” and maintained that the ABC’s existing editorial framework already provides appropriate guidance for journalists.

The broadcaster’s position drew criticism during the inquiry.

Australia’s Special Envoy to Combat Antisemitism, Jillian Segal, testified that many members of Australia’s Jewish community believe the ABC’s reporting has disproportionately focused on Gaza while presenting coverage they consider unfair toward Israel.

Segal questioned why the broadcaster had adopted formal editorial standards addressing issues such as harassment and genocide but had declined to adopt a recognized definition of antisemitism.

She also proposed creating an independent oversight body to review complaints involving coverage of the Middle East rather than relying solely on the broadcaster’s own internal review process.

During questioning, Fang acknowledged one significant editorial mistake involving the ABC’s reporting of claims about humanitarian conditions in Gaza during 2025.

He said the broadcaster should have corrected inaccurate information more quickly after later evidence demonstrated the original reporting was incorrect.

However, Fang rejected broader allegations that the ABC systematically favors one side in its Middle East coverage.

He noted that complaints received by the broadcaster are roughly divided between viewers who believe coverage is too favorable toward Israel and those who believe it is too critical of Israel.

The ABC also submitted a written statement maintaining that its journalism remains evidence-based, impartial and fully consistent with its public broadcasting responsibilities.

The broadcaster said no formal findings of systemic editorial bias regarding its Middle East reporting have been upheld by its internal ombudsman.

The inquiry also heard testimony from representatives of Australia’s multicultural broadcaster SBS, which likewise defended its editorial practices while condemning antisemitism.

The commission forms part of Australia’s broader effort to address rising antisemitism following increased tensions surrounding the Israel-Hamas conflict.

Beyond examining public broadcasters, the inquiry has also reviewed social media platforms, online hate speech, community safety and the spread of antisemitic content across digital platforms.

For media organizations, the proceedings highlight growing scrutiny over how major news organizations report on highly polarizing international conflicts while balancing editorial independence with public confidence.

The inquiry may ultimately recommend additional oversight mechanisms or policy changes affecting publicly funded media organizations.

For businesses, the hearings also underscore the broader reputational and governance challenges facing media companies operating in an increasingly polarized information environment where questions surrounding trust, transparency and editorial standards continue attracting greater public attention.

The Royal Commission is expected to continue hearing testimony from government officials, community leaders, media organizations and academic experts before issuing its final recommendations.

JBizNews Desk | Sydney
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Artificial intelligence has become the most common stated reason for U.S. job cuts for four straight months, an unprecedented streak, according to the outplacement firm Challenger, Gray & Christmas. The firm reported that tech employers announced 139,156 job cuts in the first half of 2026—an 83% jump from a year earlier—and that AI was explicitly cited in 101,743 layoff announcements across the economy this year.

The pace has been relentless. Independent trackers put total tech-sector job cuts above 100,000 for the year, with monthly totals exceeding 20,000 in nearly every month of 2026. What sets this wave apart is the explanation attached to it: company after company has publicly tied workforce reductions to artificial intelligence, in some cases in filings with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.

The list spans much of the technology industry. Meta Platforms cut roughly 8,000 jobs, about 10% of its workforce, while shifting thousands of employees into artificial intelligence roles. Chief executive Mark Zuckerberg told employees that success in AI “isn’t a given.” Oracle Corp. disclosed in a regulatory filing that it had reduced its workforce by about 21,000 over a 12-month period, stating that adoption of AI “may continue to result in reductions to our workforce.” Amazon.com Inc. eliminated roughly 16,000 corporate positions on top of earlier layoffs, with chief executive Andy Jassy saying generative AI and AI agents will eventually allow the company to operate with fewer employees.

Other companies were equally direct. Snap Inc. cut about 1,000 jobs, roughly 16% of its workforce, with chief executive Evan Spiegel writing that advances in AI would reduce repetitive work. Cisco Systems Inc. eliminated nearly 4,000 positions while reporting record revenue, saying the restructuring was designed to redirect investment toward networking silicon, cybersecurity and AI. Intuit Inc., GitLab Inc., Cloudflare Inc. and Block Inc. have also reduced headcount while pointing to AI initiatives or the need to finance them.

At the same time, many of the companies citing AI as a reason for layoffs are investing extraordinary sums to build it. Alphabet Inc., Microsoft Corp., Meta Platforms and Amazon.com Inc. have collectively guided investors toward nearly $700 billion in 2026 capital spending, most of it earmarked for AI infrastructure, including data centers, chips and computing capacity. Analysts say workforce reductions may also be helping offset the enormous cost of those investments.

Whether AI itself is replacing workers as quickly as companies suggest remains a subject of debate. A Gartner survey of 350 companies found businesses making the deepest staff reductions showed no stronger financial performance than those making fewer cuts. A paper from the National Bureau of Economic Research found that 90% of executives surveyed reported AI had little or no employment impact at their own organizations. Even OpenAI chief executive Sam Altman has acknowledged that some companies may be attributing layoffs to AI that likely would have occurred regardless.

The human impact remains significant. A Goldman Sachs analysis estimated that AI is eliminating roughly 25,000 U.S. jobs each month while creating about 9,000 new ones, resulting in a net loss of approximately 16,000 jobs monthly. Ken Matos, an organizational psychologist at the hiring platform HiBob, said companies are shifting labor costs toward technology investments and expects hiring to recover over time, but warned many displaced workers will not automatically qualify for the new positions because they require different skills.

For workers and business leaders alike, the message is becoming clearer. Artificial intelligence is reshaping hiring decisions, corporate spending and workforce planning across industries. Whether AI is the primary cause of every layoff or simply one factor among many, it has become one of the defining business stories of 2026 and a central force driving how companies allocate capital and talent.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Artificial intelligence company Anthropic announced Thursday that it has appointed former Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke to its Long-Term Benefit Trust, the independent body responsible for helping ensure the company remains committed to its public mission as it moves toward a potential stock market debut. The appointment brings one of the nation’s best-known economic policymakers into a governance structure designed to distinguish Anthropic from many of its Silicon Valley competitors.

Bernanke, who served as Federal Reserve Chairman from 2006 to 2014, guided the central bank through the 2008 financial crisis and received the 2022 Nobel Prize in Economic Sciences for his research on banking crises and the Great Depression. He currently serves as a distinguished fellow at the Brookings Institution and previously chaired Princeton University’s economics department. In announcing his appointment, Bernanke said artificial intelligence has enormous potential and that its long-term impact will depend in part on the institutions created to guide its development.

Anthropic’s Long-Term Benefit Trust is unlike the governance model used by most technology companies. Trustees hold no financial interest in the company but have authority to appoint and remove members of Anthropic’s board of directors, with that authority expected to expand over time. Operating as a public benefit corporation, Anthropic says it is committed to balancing shareholder interests with broader societal responsibilities. Bernanke joins Neil Buddy Shah, Richard Fontaine, and Mariano-Florentino Cuellar on the trust, with another trustee expected to be named later.

The appointment comes as Anthropic prepares for its next stage of growth. The company confidentially filed last month for an initial public offering and is reportedly considering a public listing as early as October. Following its May funding round, Anthropic was valued at approximately $965 billion, making it one of the most valuable private technology companies and positioning any future IPO among the largest ever.

The company said Bernanke will help advise on the economic consequences of increasingly advanced AI systems, particularly their impact on labor markets, productivity and long-term economic growth. Co-founder Daniela Amodei said the appointment reflects Anthropic’s commitment to understanding AI’s broader economic effects. Chief Executive Dario Amodei has previously warned that artificial intelligence could significantly reshape white-collar employment over the coming years, making governance and public trust increasingly important as the technology advances.

For businesses and investors, Bernanke’s appointment signals that Anthropic is placing governance alongside innovation as it prepares for public markets. By adding one of the world’s most respected economists and former central bankers to its oversight structure, the company is betting that strong leadership, transparency and responsible oversight will become competitive advantages as artificial intelligence becomes an increasingly important force in the global economy.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

By Duvi Honig, Founder and CEO of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce

Start with the tell. This week President Trump flew home from the NATO summit in Turkey on the old Air Force One — not the gleaming, Qatari-gifted jet he’s been showing off. Why? Because the older plane carries the full set of defensive measures and the new one doesn’t, and multiple reports tied the switch directly to the Iran threat. The President wasn’t coy about it. “I’m number one on the kill list for Iran,” he said. Israel had just handed Washington fresh intelligence — reported by The Wall Street Journal and confirmed by CNN and Fox News — pointing to a new Iranian plan to assassinate him. At the Ayatollah’s funeral, crowds waved “Kill Trump” signs and posters offering $100 million for his head.

So the commander in chief accepts, publicly, that a foreign regime is actively trying to murder him. He changes planes over it.

Now look at what that same administration put at the top of its agenda this week. A Saturday deadline — delivered to Tehran through Axios by three U.S. officials — demanding that Iran publicly declare the Strait of Hormuz open and pledge to stop shooting at tankers. Open the shipping lane by the weekend, or else.

Read those two paragraphs back to back and tell me the math works. One plus one doesn’t add up.

We are being asked to treat a plot to kill the President of the United States and a dispute over oil-tanker tolls as if they’re the same negotiation, on the same clock, with the same regime. They are not apples to apples. They are not even in the same orchard. A shipping-lane deadline has exactly nothing to do with whether Iran gets to put a bullet in the president. Reopening the strait by Saturday does not lower the kill list. It does not recall the assassins. It does not make the man safer on the older plane. So what, precisely, does it have to do with our security?

Here’s the part nobody in Washington seems willing to say out loud: you cannot run a routine maritime haggle with a government you simultaneously believe is trying to assassinate your head of state. Either the threat is real — in which case the strait is a sideshow and the entire posture should be built around the President’s life — or the threat isn’t real, in which case somebody explain the old plane. It can’t be both. Pick one. Right now the government is behaving as if both are true at once, and that is the definition of asleep at the wheel.

And let me say this as a businessman, because the strait is my beat. I know exactly what that waterway is worth. It carries roughly one-fifth of the world’s oil. War-risk insurance that was a rounding error before the war now runs 2% to 6% of a ship’s value — a $6 million toll to move one tanker — and transits have collapsed by as much as 90%. Every dollar of it lands at the American pump and on the American shelf. I have built my career arguing that these everyday costs matter. They do.

But a shipping crisis is a commercial problem. A plot to kill the President is an existential one. Confusing the two — putting a Saturday tanker deadline in the same news cycle, the same breath, the same priority slot as an active assassination threat — is not strategy. It’s a scrambling of first things and last things.

Comparing apples to apples would mean this: the number-one item on every desk in that administration is keeping the President alive. Full stop. The strait, the tolls, the insurance premiums, the oil price — real as they are — come after. Instead we got a weekend ultimatum about a waterway and a president slipping onto the safer plane, and we’re all supposed to nod along as if that adds up.

It doesn’t. One plus one still equals two. Secure the President first. Then, and only then, worry about who opens the strait and when. Anyone treating those as the same equation is either not doing the arithmetic — or asleep at the wheel.

The U.S. Treasury sold $22 billion of 30-year bonds on Wednesday, July 8, at a high yield of 5.058%, the steepest rate the government has paid at a long-bond auction since 2007, according to the Treasury Department’s official auction results. The sale completed this week’s series of Treasury coupon auctions and underscored how investors are demanding higher returns to lend money to the federal government for the long term.

Wednesday’s offering was a reopening of the 5% coupon bond first issued in May and maturing in 2056. The auction followed May’s historic sale, when the government crossed the 5% threshold for 30-year borrowing costs for the first time since 2007.

Demand proved stronger than many expected, led by overseas investors. International buyers took nearly 78% of the auction, well above the six-auction average, while domestic participation came in below normal levels. The auction also cleared slightly stronger than market expectations. The when-issued yield immediately before bidding closed stood at 5.061%, while the auction stopped at 5.058%, indicating investors were willing to accept a slightly lower yield than the market had anticipated.

Long-term Treasury yields climbed sharply this week as oil prices surged following renewed geopolitical tensions involving the United States and Iran. The benchmark 30-year Treasury yield rose to about 5.07%, while the 10-year Treasury note, a key benchmark influencing mortgage, auto loan and other consumer borrowing rates, climbed to approximately 4.571%. The 2-year Treasury also moved higher to around 4.206%.

Markets reacted after President Donald Trump, speaking at the NATO summit in Turkey, said he believes the ceasefire with Iran is over. Oil prices have climbed nearly 10% over the past two sessions as the United States carried out additional strikes on Iran, revoked a waiver allowing Iranian crude exports, and tensions escalated following attacks on commercial vessels transiting the Strait of Hormuz. Brent crude climbed above $80 per barrel, fueling renewed concerns that higher energy costs could reignite inflation.

Higher oil prices feed directly into inflation expectations, and inflation is one of the biggest factors influencing long-term Treasury yields. Investors committing money for three decades demand greater compensation when they believe inflation could remain elevated, forcing the government to offer higher borrowing costs.

Markets also adjusted expectations for monetary policy. Traders increased their expectations that the Federal Reserve could raise interest rates again in September. Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh has maintained a hawkish stance since assuming office in May, repeatedly emphasizing that inflation remains above target while also supporting continued reductions in the Fed’s balance sheet, particularly its holdings of longer-term Treasury securities. Minutes from the Fed’s June meeting also indicated that several policymakers viewed persistent inflation and continued labor-market strength as supporting additional policy tightening.

For consumers and businesses, the implications extend well beyond Wall Street. Higher Treasury yields typically translate into more expensive mortgages, auto loans, business financing and other forms of long-term credit. Mortgage rates have remained near 6.5%, keeping pressure on home affordability at a time when housing inventory remains constrained in many parts of the country.

The government also faces growing borrowing costs. Every increase in Treasury yields raises the amount Washington must pay to finance its expanding national debt, increasing federal interest expenses and reducing fiscal flexibility over time.

Wednesday’s sale concluded a week of Treasury coupon auctions that also included three-year and 10-year notes. The strong participation from international investors demonstrated that global demand for U.S. government debt remains solid despite higher yields, while weaker domestic participation highlighted investors’ growing caution toward locking money into long-term securities amid elevated inflation and geopolitical uncertainty.

The last time the Treasury paid yields this high on newly issued 30-year bonds was in 2007, before the global financial crisis transformed interest-rate markets for more than a decade. The return of borrowing costs above 5% marks another milestone in the economy’s transition away from the era of ultra-low interest rates and signals that financing costs for both the government and consumers are likely to remain elevated.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal safety regulators are warning drivers, repair shops and used-car buyers about a growing threat from counterfeit air bag parts after defective inflators linked to at least 10 deaths and multiple serious injuries were found in vehicles across the United States.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has prohibited the sale and import of the defective inflators, identified by the marking DTN60DB, after investigators connected them to fatal crashes involving airbags that exploded with excessive force instead of protecting vehicle occupants.

Transportation Secretary Sean Duffy called the counterfeit components “illegal Chinese airbag parts responsible for 10 deaths.”

Air Bags Became Deadly Instead of Protective

Rather than inflating normally during a collision, investigators found the defective inflators ruptured when deployed, sending metal fragments into drivers and passengers.

Victims suffered severe injuries to the head, neck, chest and face in crashes that authorities say otherwise may have been survivable.

The inflators carry markings associated with Jilin Province Detiannuo Safety Technology (DTN) of China. The company has stated it does not export the affected products to the United States and believes many of the components may themselves be counterfeit.

Regardless of their origin, NHTSA says inflators marked DTN60DB should be considered unsafe.

Why Regulators Can’t Simply Recall Them

Unlike factory-installed airbags, these counterfeit inflators are generally installed after a vehicle has already been involved in a collision.

Many enter the market through independent repair shops, online marketplaces and unauthorized parts suppliers, often costing around $100, compared with $1,000 or more for genuine replacement components.

Because they are installed after the vehicle leaves the factory, the parts are not linked to a vehicle’s VIN, meaning traditional recall searches cannot identify affected vehicles.

Officials say that makes locating every defective inflator significantly more difficult.

Used-Car Buyers Face Greater Risk

Investigators have identified many of the incidents in previously damaged vehicles, particularly used Chevrolet Malibu and Hyundai Sonata sedans, although regulators caution the problem may extend to additional makes and models.

Vehicles carrying salvage or rebuilt titles may face elevated risk because airbags are often replaced following previous accidents.

The FBI and Department of Homeland Security are assisting in efforts to identify the supply chain responsible for distributing the counterfeit components.

Industry Faces Growing Liability

The discovery has increased scrutiny across the automotive repair industry.

Automakers, insurers, dealerships, salvage auctions and collision repair facilities all face growing legal exposure as investigations continue.

General Motors’ global brand protection team has warned that counterfeit safety components frequently use inferior materials that dramatically increase the likelihood of catastrophic failure during a crash.

The situation has also drawn comparisons to the massive Takata air bag crisis, although regulators note the counterfeit inflator problem presents additional challenges because the parts entered vehicles outside traditional manufacturer supply chains.

What Drivers Should Do

NHTSA advises owners of vehicles previously involved in accidents—particularly those with salvage or rebuilt titles—to have their airbags inspected by an authorized dealership or qualified repair facility.

Since VIN searches cannot identify counterfeit replacement parts, a physical inspection may be the only way to determine whether a dangerous inflator has been installed.

Federal officials say removing counterfeit components already circulating throughout the marketplace will likely require years of inspections and enforcement efforts.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NATO leaders gathered in Ankara, Turkey, this week for a summit centered on defense spending, military production and alliance commitments, as member nations sought to demonstrate to President Donald Trump that they are increasing defense investment and strengthening the alliance’s industrial base. The meeting, held Tuesday and Wednesday at the Beştepe Presidential Complex and chaired by NATO Secretary General Mark Rutte, brought together leaders from all 32 member countries against a backdrop of billions of dollars in newly announced defense contracts.

Rutte focused the summit on three priorities: increasing allied defense spending, expanding defense manufacturing capacity and maintaining support for Ukraine. Ahead of the gathering, he called for what he described as a “transatlantic defense industrial revolution,” pointing to tens of billions of dollars in expected defense-related contracts and a defense industry forum that brought together senior government officials and major weapons manufacturers. NATO used the summit to highlight military procurement projects, underscoring how increased defense budgets are translating into production orders and industrial expansion.

The spending initiative builds on commitments made at last year’s NATO summit in The Hague, where member nations agreed to work toward spending 5% of gross domestic product on defense and security by 2035, including 3.5% for core military capabilities and 1.5% for broader security investments. This year’s summit focused on measuring progress toward that goal. Matt Whitaker, the U.S. ambassador to NATO, said the alliance would evaluate how quickly members are moving toward the benchmark. He noted that Poland, the Nordic nations and the Baltic states have made the fastest progress, while Germany expects to reach the target by 2029.

The United States continues to account for the largest share of NATO defense spending. The U.S. defense budget for 2026 totals approximately $901 billion, representing about 3.3% of the nation’s GDP. NATO officials say European allies and Canada have collectively increased defense spending by roughly $1.2 trillion over the past decade, including an approximately 20% increase during the past year. Despite that growth, analysts note that many European militaries remain heavily dependent on U.S. equipment, logistics and operational support.

The Trump administration has promoted a broader strategy often referred to as “NATO 3.0,” encouraging European allies to assume greater responsibility for conventional defense while allowing the United States to shift more military resources toward other strategic priorities. The approach has been reinforced by Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth’s review of U.S. force deployments in Europe and by repeated calls from President Trump for allies to increase their financial contributions to collective defense.

The summit also produced significant defense-industry news involving Turkey. During a bilateral meeting with Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, President Trump said the United States would lift sanctions on Turkey and would consider resuming sales of Lockheed Martin F-35 fighter aircraft, a move that could reopen a major defense procurement relationship between the two NATO allies. The potential return of Turkey to the F-35 program would represent one of the most significant defense export developments discussed during the summit.

Regional security concerns also shaped discussions. The summit took place amid renewed tensions involving Iran, ongoing instability near the Strait of Hormuz and continued Western support for Ukraine. Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy attended the gathering as allies increasingly highlighted Ukraine’s battlefield innovations in drone technology and electronic warfare alongside continued military assistance.

For the defense industry, the summit underscored a clear trend: long-term NATO spending commitments are increasingly translating into contracts, manufacturing expansion and new procurement opportunities for defense companies across Europe and the United States. As governments accelerate military modernization, defense contractors are expected to remain among the primary beneficiaries of higher alliance spending over the coming decade.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara, Turkey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JPMorgan Chase & Co. is launching a dealmaking team aimed at small companies, targeting businesses valued between $100 million and $500 million, according to an internal memo issued Wednesday and confirmed by the bank. The move pushes the nation’s largest bank further down the market, into a segment long dominated by boutique investment banks and regional advisory firms.

The new unit, described in the memo as a small-cap investment banking group, will complement an existing mid-cap operation that handles larger transactions. John Richert, who leads the mid-cap business and serves as global head of business services investment banking, said the effort expands the firm’s ability to serve smaller companies operating in specialized industries. The mid-cap group has grown steadily over the past decade to nearly 400 bankers worldwide, generating more than $1 billion in annual revenue while expanding at a rate exceeding 20% a year.

Richert pointed to two major trends behind the decision. The first is a generational transition as thousands of companies founded by baby boomers prepare for ownership changes, creating what he expects will be a significant pipeline of business sales over the coming years. The second is the continued flow of capital into private equity firms focused on lower- and middle-market businesses, creating increased demand for acquisition opportunities. Together, those forces are expected to drive more transactions involving companies that historically have not been a primary focus for JPMorgan.

The bank said the expansion will allow it to build relationships with entrepreneurs earlier in their business lifecycle while entering a market where many of its largest Wall Street competitors have only a limited presence. Richert noted the firm’s broad capabilities, saying few financial institutions can advise on the sale of a family-owned business while also helping take a company the size of SpaceX public. JPMorgan Chase participated in SpaceX’s June initial public offering.

The small-cap investment banking team will be led by Michael Flynn, a middle-market adviser with more than two decades of experience who joined JPMorgan Chase from G2 Capital Advisors, a Boston-based boutique investment bank. He will be joined by managing director Arash Farin, whose career includes roles at Centerstone Capital, Goldman Sachs, Blackstone and Lehman Brothers, along with executive director Jamie Eastham, a longtime JPMorgan banker who most recently worked in the firm’s strategic financing solutions group. The bank plans to expand the new division to more than 75 bankers.

The group will operate from Atlanta, Chicago, Dallas, Los Angeles and New York, placing advisers closer to business owners across the country instead of concentrating operations in a single financial center. Initial industry coverage will focus on consumer and retail companies, business services and other diversified sectors.

For small and mid-sized business owners, the move could have significant implications. Selling a privately owned company is often the largest financial transaction an entrepreneur will ever complete and, for many baby boomers, represents the primary source of retirement wealth. Historically, businesses valued below $500 million have relied on boutique advisory firms for mergers and acquisitions advice. The arrival of JPMorgan Chase could increase competition, provide greater access to financing and potentially improve valuations for sellers while intensifying pressure on smaller investment banking firms that have traditionally dominated the market.

The expansion comes as JPMorgan Chase continues to rank among Wall Street’s leading dealmakers. According to Dealogic, the bank has advised on more than $500 billion in U.S. transactions so far this year, trailing only Goldman Sachs. By moving further into the small-cap market, the bank hopes to establish relationships with growing companies earlier, positioning itself to serve them as they expand into larger corporate clients.

Whether the strategy succeeds will depend on how quickly the anticipated wave of baby boomer business sales develops and whether private equity firms continue investing aggressively in smaller acquisitions. For now, the message is clear: one of the world’s largest financial institutions sees the market for selling privately owned American businesses as large enough to warrant a dedicated national investment banking platform.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street closed a volatile week higher on Friday, July 10, as a record-setting chip listing and easing Middle East tensions lifted technology stocks and papered over a shaky stretch for the broader market. The S&P 500 rose 0.42% Friday to 7,575.39, finishing the week up about 1.2%. The Nasdaq Composite added 0.29% to 26,281.61 for a weekly gain near 1.7%. The Dow Jones Industrial Average climbed 149.60 points, or 0.29%, to 52,637.01 on Friday but still slipped roughly 0.5% on the week — a divergence that tells the real story of the past five sessions. The money moved into chips and artificial intelligence, and the blue-chip index that carries more old-economy names got left behind.

The week ran in three acts. It opened Monday with the Dow setting a record close above 53,000 for the first time, at 53,055.91, riding the momentum of a strong pre-holiday run and the recent addition of Alphabet to the 30-stock index. The mood flipped Tuesday and into Wednesday, when semiconductor stocks sold off hard on worries their valuations had outrun reality. Micron Technology fell 4.7% Tuesday, with KLA Corporation, Marvell Technology, Broadcom and AMD all sliding, and even a record quarterly profit from Samsung Electronics failed to steady the group. “Expectations are up, and fundamentals are struggling to meet these sky-high demands,” said Mike Bailey, director of research at FBB Capital Partners. Then Thursday and Friday brought the rebound, as bargain hunters and a blockbuster IPO pulled the chip trade back to life.

That IPO was the week’s centerpiece. On Friday, SK Hynix, the South Korean memory-chip maker and a critical Nvidia supplier, made its Nasdaq debut under the ticker SKHYV. The company priced its American depositary receipts at $149 and watched them open near $170, a gain of about 14%, after raising $26.5 billion — the largest U.S. share sale ever by a foreign company, with orders running more than seven times the shares available. For investors, the listing was a direct bet on the memory chips that feed AI data centers, and its success reset sentiment across the sector heading into the weekend.

The other hand on the wheel was geopolitics. Markets spent the week tracking the sharpest U.S.-Iran fighting since the two sides agreed to a ceasefire. Oil jumped early after the Treasury Department moved to revoke the license allowing Iranian crude sales, sending Brent up more than 5% in a single session, and a U.S.-led naval coalition raised the threat level for tankers in the Strait of Hormuz to “severe.” The pressure eased later in the week after President Donald Trump said Iran had reached out to make a deal, with Qatar and Pakistan working to restart talks and an administration official saying technical negotiations would continue even after the exchange of strikes. Crucially, laden tankers kept crossing Hormuz throughout, which steadily bled the risk premium out of oil and cleared a path for stocks.

Market movers. Big Tech supplied most of the week’s fuel. Meta Platforms was the single biggest winner, soaring nearly 15% — its best week since early 2024 — and jumping about 6% Friday. Bank of America kept its buy rating on the stock, citing an internal memo, reviewed by Reuters, that pointed to a leaner cost structure for Meta’s AI buildout; separately, the company said it aims to produce its own AI chip by September. Nvidia rose about 4% Friday. Chip-equipment names ran hot early after Morgan Stanley lifted price targets on Lam Research, Applied Materials and KLA Corporation, briefly pushing all three up around 4%. In dealmaking, Vertex Pharmaceuticals agreed to acquire Crinetics Pharmaceuticals for $85 a share, a roughly $10 billion deal that nearly doubled Crinetics stock. On the losing side, AstraZeneca dropped close to 8% after its heart-disease drug Wainua missed in a late-stage trial, Rivian Automotive fell about 10% on a 75-million-share stock offering, and Deutsche Bank analyst Omotayo Okusanya downgraded mall owner Simon Property Group to hold from buy, calling it “fully valued” at 16.3 times price to funds from operations. Amazon also lined up a $25 billion bond sale.

The rally masks a genuine debate about whether the AI trade has gone too far. The run has been staggering: Micron has surged more than 200% in 2026, while Lam Research, Marvell Technology and Intel have all more than doubled. That kind of move makes even bulls nervous. “There’s been so much euphoria around the AI boom going all the way back to the summer of 2023,” said Eric Parnell, chief market strategist at Great Valley Advisor Group. “We’re clearly in a boom phase right now, but I do have genuine concerns about some sort of bust coming in the second half of the year.” The week’s whipsaw — record highs Monday, a chip rout midweek, a sharp bounce to close — is exactly the kind of two-way action that shows up when valuations are stretched and every headline moves the tape.

Commodities and volatility. West Texas Intermediate crude settled near $71 a barrel and Brent held above $76, both well off their midweek spikes as the Iran risk faded. Gold slipped 0.65% Friday to $4,113.90 an ounce, extending its long retreat from a late-January peak above $5,500. The CBOE Volatility Index, Wall Street’s fear gauge, fell about 5% to 15.05, ending the week near the low end of its recent range and signaling that, for all the noise, investors were not bracing for a shock. In the bond market, the 10-year Treasury yield edged up to around 4.49% from 4.37% a week earlier, a quiet sign that inflation worries have not gone away.

The economic data cut against the optimism. The National Association of Realtors said existing-home sales unexpectedly fell to 4.09 million units in June, missing forecasts and underscoring how stubbornly high mortgage rates keep buyers frozen out. Weekly jobless claims held low at 215,000, but the May trade deficit widened to $77.6 billion, and recent hiring has cooled. That leaves the Federal Reserve boxed in: soft jobs data argues against another rate increase, yet pricey oil and heavy AI spending keep inflation sticky, and a few strategists warned the next move could still be a hike rather than a cut.

For everyday investors, the takeaway is the same one that has defined 2026. The market’s fate rests on a narrow band of technology giants and the chips inside them, while housing, trade and the Fed pull in the other direction. The next real test comes fast: the big banks kick off second-quarter earnings season in the days ahead, and analysts tracked by FactSet expect S&P 500 companies to post average profit growth of 23.3%. If those numbers hold, the bulls get fresh cover. If they disappoint, a market priced for perfection has a long way to fall.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Ticket resale prices for the final stretch of the 2026 FIFA World Cup have plunged after the United States and Mexico were eliminated, underscoring how strongly host-nation teams drive demand. According to figures reported Friday by secondary ticket marketplace TickPick, the cheapest resale ticket for Friday’s quarterfinal between Belgium and Spain in Los Angeles fell to about $1,100, down roughly 65% from approximately $3,200 before the U.S. was knocked out earlier this week.

The reason is simple: home fans buy tickets to watch home teams. With all three co-hosts—the United States, Mexico and Canada—eliminated before the quarterfinals, demand in the resale market dropped sharply almost overnight. The U.S. was defeated 4-1 by Belgium in Seattle on Monday, while England eliminated Mexico 3-2 on July 5. Canada exited the tournament the previous weekend after losing to Morocco.

The United States had generated enormous local demand throughout the tournament, drawing a sellout crowd of 66,925 fans in Seattle for its final match. Mexico’s passionate fan base created even stronger demand in many host cities, helping push resale prices to record highs during the knockout rounds.

The decline extends well beyond one match. Ticket marketplace Gametime reported that entry prices across all quarterfinal matches have fallen by roughly 50% since July 4. Belgium-Spain in Los Angeles dropped from $3,047 to $1,072. Norway vs. England in Miami fell from $3,756 to $1,975, while Argentina vs. Switzerland in Kansas City declined from $2,470 to $1,186. Thursday’s France-Morocco quarterfinal also saw resale prices tumble by roughly 66% before kickoff.

For fans who waited, the selloff has created a rare opportunity. Tickets that were financially out of reach just days ago are now selling for roughly one-third of their previous prices, allowing many more spectators to attend one of the world’s biggest sporting events.

The impact extends well beyond ticket marketplaces. Businesses that expected weeks of spending from American and Mexican supporters are now adjusting their forecasts. Tom’s Watch Bar, which operates 18 sports bars across the United States, counted World Cup matches involving the U.S. and Mexico among its busiest days of the year.

Co-founder and Co-Chief Executive Brooks Schaden said games featuring the two host nations delivered “massive lifts” in sales but expects World Cup business to fall by roughly half now that both teams have been eliminated. He noted that Mexican supporters typically spent more and stayed longer, making their absence particularly noticeable. Even so, the remaining World Cup matches continue generating approximately 25% more revenue than an average business day.

The changing ticket market reflects the broader economics surrounding major sporting events. Hotels, restaurants, bars, rideshare drivers and retailers in host cities benefited most when local fans had teams to support. With the host nations gone, demand now depends primarily on traveling supporters from Europe, South America and Africa—a smaller but still enthusiastic group.

Attention now shifts toward the tournament’s final stages. The semifinals will be played in Dallas and Atlanta, while the World Cup Final is scheduled for July 19 at MetLife Stadium in New Jersey. Historically, championship matches continue commanding premium prices regardless of who qualifies, suggesting demand could strengthen again as the tournament reaches its climax.

For now, the quarterfinals remain a bargain by World Cup standards. The stadiums are still expected to be full—but the fans sitting in those seats are paying far less than they would have just a week ago.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two significant outages at Meta Platforms within an 11-day span last month disrupted advertising campaigns for businesses around the world, highlighting how dependent many companies have become on a single digital platform for customer acquisition and sales.

On June 12, problems within Meta’s authentication systems triggered widespread outages affecting Facebook, Instagram, and the company’s advertising tools. Outage-tracking service Downdetector logged more than 100,000 reports from users experiencing problems with Facebook alone, while Meta’s own business status page showed major disruptions affecting ad creation, campaign management, reporting and delivery.

For businesses relying on Meta’s advertising ecosystem, the impact was immediate. Marketing teams found themselves unable to launch new campaigns, pause existing advertisements, adjust budgets or access reporting tools. Many advertisers were forced to simply wait while active campaigns continued running without the normal level of oversight or control.

Less than two weeks later, on June 23, Meta experienced another major outage. Facebook, Instagram, and Ads Manager again suffered widespread service interruptions. As during the earlier incident, Meta acknowledged the disruption but provided little immediate information beyond saying it was working to restore services.

The outages highlighted a reality many businesses rarely consider. Unlike many enterprise software providers, Meta does not offer advertisers a formal service-level agreement (SLA) guaranteeing platform availability. When the advertising system becomes unavailable, companies generally receive no contractual compensation for lost business opportunities or interrupted marketing campaigns.

For businesses whose customer acquisition depends heavily on Facebook and Instagram advertising, even several hours of downtime can translate into missed sales opportunities, delayed product launches and advertising budgets that cannot be adjusted in response to changing market conditions.

The broader lesson extends beyond Meta itself. Over the past decade, many small and medium-sized businesses have concentrated a significant portion of their digital marketing on a single platform because of its massive audience and sophisticated advertising tools. While that strategy has often delivered strong returns, it also creates a single point of failure capable of disrupting revenue generation with little warning.

The outages underscore the importance of diversification. Companies that spread customer acquisition across search engines, email marketing, multiple social media platforms and owned marketing channels are generally better positioned to continue operating when one platform experiences technical problems. Building direct relationships with customers through email lists, loyalty programs and company-owned websites also reduces dependence on third-party platforms.

Despite the recent disruptions, Meta’s platforms remain among the world’s most resilient and widely used digital advertising networks, serving billions of users and millions of businesses every day. However, the twin outages serve as a reminder that even the largest technology companies are not immune from technical failures.

For business owners, the lesson is increasingly clear: digital marketing should be diversified just as investment portfolios are. Companies that rely too heavily on a single platform assume risks that may not become visible until that platform unexpectedly goes offline.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A Ryanair flight made an emergency landing in Greece after a cabin window failed shortly after takeoff, forcing the aircraft to rapidly descend and return to the airport while leaving one passenger injured.

Flight FR1879, operated by Malta Air for Ryanair, departed Thessaloniki bound for Memmingen, Germany, before the crew declared an emergency and safely returned to the airport.

Window Failure Triggers Emergency

According to Ryanair, a passenger window became dislodged during the aircraft’s climb, causing cabin depressurization and the automatic deployment of oxygen masks.

Flight crews immediately initiated emergency procedures, descending the aircraft to a lower altitude before returning safely to Thessaloniki.

One passenger was transported to a local hospital with injuries that authorities described as non-life-threatening.

Investigation Underway

The cause of the incident remains under investigation.

Initial reports indicate debris from an apparent engine-related event may have struck the fuselage and damaged the window, although investigators have not yet determined the exact sequence of events.

Boeing acknowledged the incident and said it is working with Ryanair as authorities continue their investigation.

Passengers Continue on Replacement Aircraft

Following the emergency landing, Ryanair arranged a replacement aircraft to transport passengers to Germany.

The airline praised the flight crew for following established emergency procedures and ensuring the aircraft landed safely.

Attention Returns to Boeing’s Best-Selling Aircraft

The incident again places attention on the Boeing 737, the world’s most widely used commercial aircraft family.

Although investigators have not determined whether the window failure resulted from the airframe, engine or another mechanical issue, aviation experts note that any cabin depressurization event receives extensive regulatory review.

Should investigators determine the damage originated from an engine failure, the focus could expand beyond Boeing to include the engine manufacturer and maintenance history of the aircraft.

Safety Procedures Worked as Designed

A rapid cabin depressurization is considered one of the more serious in-flight emergencies commercial flight crews train to handle.

In this case, emergency oxygen systems deployed properly, pilots executed a controlled descent and the aircraft landed safely without further injuries.

Regulators will now examine maintenance records, flight data and physical evidence from the aircraft to determine what caused the failure and whether any additional inspections are warranted across similar aircraft.

JBizNews Desk | London
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The traditional roadmap to success—earn top grades, attend an elite school, secure a prestigious internship and climb the corporate ladder—is beginning to shift as artificial intelligence reshapes education and the workplace. From wealthy families enrolling children in AI-powered schools to top university students leaving campus to build startups, a growing number of Americans are betting that mastering AI and entrepreneurship may provide a greater advantage than following conventional career paths.

The trend reflects a broader belief that the skills most valued in tomorrow’s economy will differ dramatically from those that defined previous generations.

AI Is Reshaping Education

One example is Forge Prep, a new private school in Livingston, New Jersey, which combines artificial intelligence with project-based learning focused on practical skills such as public speaking, negotiation, leadership and entrepreneurship.

Nationally, Alpha School, an AI-powered private education network, has attracted significant attention for its personalized learning model. Tuition reaches approximately $75,000 per year, and the organization continues expanding into new markets across the country.

Rather than relying on traditional classroom instruction throughout the day, students complete AI-guided academic lessons in a fraction of the time, allowing more hours for collaborative projects, problem-solving, business development and real-world experiences.

Supporters argue that as AI increasingly performs routine knowledge work, schools should place greater emphasis on creativity, communication, critical thinking and leadership.

Elite Students Are Taking a Different Path

The same transformation is unfolding at America’s top universities.

Instead of pursuing highly competitive internships on Wall Street or at major technology companies, increasing numbers of students are choosing to launch AI startups while still in college.

Several have postponed graduation or taken gap years to build companies full-time, attracted by growing venture capital investment in artificial intelligence and changing employment opportunities.

Student entrepreneur communities have expanded rapidly around institutions including Yale, Princeton, MIT and Harvard, where startup incubators and founder residences are becoming alternatives to traditional recruiting pipelines.

AI Is Changing the Economics of Careers

Part of the shift reflects changes within the labor market itself.

As artificial intelligence automates many entry-level tasks once assigned to interns and junior employees, some students believe building companies may offer greater long-term opportunities than competing for positions that increasingly rely on AI tools.

Venture capital firms have responded by investing earlier, funding student-led startups before graduates even enter the workforce.

For many aspiring entrepreneurs, the calculation has changed: rather than waiting years to build a business after gaining corporate experience, they see AI allowing smaller teams to launch companies much earlier.

Not Without Risks

Despite the enthusiasm, experts caution that both AI-driven education models and student startups remain largely unproven over the long term.

Most startup companies ultimately fail, while many AI-based educational programs have only recently opened and have yet to demonstrate long-term academic outcomes.

Some researchers have also questioned the accuracy of AI-generated educational content, emphasizing the continued importance of human oversight.

The high cost of many AI-focused private schools has also raised concerns that access to these new learning models may remain limited primarily to affluent families.

A New Definition of Career Success

Whether in elementary schools or elite universities, one theme is becoming increasingly clear: many families and students now believe artificial intelligence is fundamentally changing the skills needed for future success.

Instead of viewing AI as simply another classroom subject or workplace tool, they increasingly see it as a platform capable of reshaping education, entrepreneurship and career development.

Whether those bets ultimately outperform the traditional path will take years to answer. What is already evident is that more students, parents and investors are willing to rethink long-held assumptions about how the next generation should prepare for the future.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said Friday he will not sign the biggest housing bill in decades, even as the measure heads toward becoming law at midnight without his signature.

In a post on Truth Social, Trump said he was withholding his signature “in PROTEST” because the Senate has failed to pass the SAVE America Act, the voter-identification legislation he has repeatedly urged lawmakers to approve. He stopped short of issuing a veto, meaning the legislation will become law automatically under the Constitution if Congress remains in session and the president neither signs nor returns the bill within the required 10-day period.

The 21st Century ROAD to Housing Act passed both chambers of Congress with broad bipartisan support in June and was formally delivered to the White House on June 29, starting the constitutional review period.

A Major Housing Overhaul

The legislation represents one of the most significant federal housing reforms in decades, aiming to increase the nation’s housing supply while improving affordability.

Among its major provisions, the law streamlines portions of the federal permitting process to accelerate residential construction, places new restrictions on large institutional investors purchasing single-family homes, and creates incentives for developers to convert vacant commercial and abandoned properties into residential housing.

Supporters argue the package addresses one of the country’s most pressing economic challenges—a shortage of available housing that has driven home prices to record levels.

Housing Affordability Remains a Major Challenge

According to the National Association of Realtors, the median price of an existing U.S. home reached $440,660 in June, an increase of 1.8% from a year earlier.

Industry groups have long argued that lengthy permitting requirements, limited land availability and increasing construction costs have slowed new housing development, contributing to the nation’s housing shortage.

The legislation seeks to address those issues while also responding to concerns that large corporate investors have purchased significant numbers of single-family homes, reducing inventory available to first-time homebuyers.

Politics Overshadow the Policy

While the housing legislation received bipartisan support, Trump’s decision not to sign it reflects his continued focus on election-related legislation.

The president has repeatedly urged Congress to approve the SAVE America Act, which would require proof of citizenship for voter registration and establish stricter voter-identification standards nationwide.

Trump has also encouraged Senate Republicans to reconsider the legislative filibuster in an effort to move the proposal forward.

House Speaker Mike Johnson previously indicated that Trump was unlikely to block the housing legislation, saying the president could either sign the measure or allow it to become law without his signature.

Industry Watches for Implementation

For builders, developers, lenders and local governments, the practical effect remains the same regardless of whether the president signs the legislation.

Attention now shifts toward implementation, with the housing industry closely watching how quickly the new permitting reforms, redevelopment incentives and investment restrictions translate into additional housing construction and improved affordability.

Whether the legislation meaningfully expands the nation’s housing supply will likely depend on how rapidly federal, state and local governments implement the new provisions over the coming months.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. stock market has climbed to record highs in 2026 on the strength of corporate profits, and over the next several weeks investors will learn whether companies can continue delivering the earnings needed to justify those gains. Second-quarter earnings season officially begins the week of July 13, with JPMorgan Chase and several other major U.S. banks reporting results on July 14, launching what is expected to be one of the most closely watched reporting seasons in years.

According to LSEG IBES data, Wall Street analysts expect S&P 500 companies to deliver earnings growth of more than 20% compared with the same quarter a year ago. Those expectations reflect continued confidence in corporate America but also leave little room for companies to disappoint investors.

The optimism follows an exceptionally strong first quarter. Corporate earnings grew 29.4%, roughly double what analysts had projected before reporting season began and marking the strongest quarterly profit growth in more than four years. Much of that performance was fueled by continued investment in artificial intelligence infrastructure, resilient consumer spending and stronger-than-expected economic activity. As a result, analysts have raised full-year earnings expectations to approximately 26.4% growth for 2026, which would represent the strongest annual expansion since 2021.

Higher expectations, however, also create greater risk. With stock prices already reflecting significant optimism, companies that merely meet expectations may find investors looking for more. Joe Mazzola, Head Trading and Derivatives Strategist at Charles Schwab, warned that steadily rising earnings estimates raise the likelihood of increased market volatility as investors react sharply to even modest disappointments. Bruce Zaro of Granite Wealth Management similarly noted that many technology and growth companies may need to significantly exceed forecasts to justify additional gains after such a strong rally.

Recent trading has already demonstrated that reality. Even companies reporting solid financial results have sometimes seen their shares decline as investors judged the performance against exceptionally high expectations. Strong earnings from Samsung Electronics, for example, were followed by weakness across portions of the semiconductor sector as investors questioned future growth rather than current results.

Technology remains the primary driver of expected earnings growth. LSEG projects technology-sector profits will rise roughly 65% during the second quarter, while energy companies are expected to benefit from higher oil prices, potentially doubling earnings from a year earlier. Materials companies are also forecast to post significant gains. That concentration means much of the broader market’s performance continues to depend on a relatively small group of large technology and energy companies, with Nvidia, one of the market’s most influential stocks, not scheduled to report until late August.

Investors are also confronting higher borrowing costs. Long-term Treasury yields have climbed sharply in recent weeks, with the 30-year Treasury bond trading near 5% and the 10-year Treasury note around 4.6%. Rising yields increase financing costs for businesses while also making bonds more attractive relative to equities. Combined with persistent inflation concerns and the Federal Reserve’s cautious approach toward interest-rate cuts, higher bond yields have become an increasingly important headwind for stock valuations.

Market valuations themselves remain elevated. The widely followed Shiller CAPE ratio continues to rank among the highest levels on record, suggesting investors are paying historically expensive prices for future earnings. While elevated valuations alone do not guarantee a market correction, they reduce the margin for error if corporate results fail to meet expectations.

For businesses, earnings season offers far more than insight into quarterly profits. Company guidance on hiring, capital spending, consumer demand, artificial intelligence investment and tariff costs often provides one of the clearest real-time snapshots of the broader economy. Investors will be paying close attention not only to what companies earned during the second quarter but also to what executives expect for the remainder of the year.

For millions of Americans whose retirement savings are invested in stock market indexes, the coming weeks could determine whether this year’s rally continues or begins to cool. Corporate America enters earnings season from a position of strength, but expectations have rarely been higher. With profits, valuations and interest rates all elevated simultaneously, even small disappointments could trigger outsized market reactions.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Walmart has agreed to pay more than $13 million to settle a Texas investigation into whether the retailer misled the gig workers who deliver its groceries about how much they would earn, Texas Attorney General Ken Paxton announced Monday. The settlement resolves allegations that Walmart gave drivers in its Spark Driver program inaccurate information about tips, base pay and bonus opportunities, while requiring the company to change how it presents driver compensation going forward.

Roughly half of the settlement—about $6.69 million—has already been paid directly to affected Texas drivers as restitution, according to the attorney general’s office. An equal amount will go to the state to cover civil penalties, attorneys’ fees and investigation costs, bringing the total settlement to more than $13.3 million. The agreement, filed June 19 in Collin County District Court as an Assurance of Voluntary Compliance under the Texas Deceptive Trade Practices Act, does not require Walmart to admit wrongdoing.

Walmart’s Spark Driver platform, launched in 2018, connects independent contractors with grocery and retail deliveries from local Walmart stores and fulfillment centers. Drivers accept delivery offers through a mobile app and are paid per trip. According to court filings, Texas alleged that since at least 2021, Walmart represented that drivers would receive the full amount of customer tips even though some tips were allegedly split among multiple drivers or not paid in full. The state also alleged Walmart reduced base pay on modified delivery offers without adequate disclosure and provided misleading information regarding incentive bonuses.

Beyond the financial settlement, Walmart agreed to implement significant operational changes. The company must establish an earnings verification system designed to ensure drivers receive the compensation shown when they accepted delivery offers. Walmart must also improve transparency regarding driver pay, bonuses and incentives. The Texas Attorney General’s Office said it will continue monitoring the company’s records and compensation practices to ensure ongoing compliance.

Attorney General Ken Paxton called the settlement a victory for Texas workers, saying it ensures drivers receive the wages and tips they were promised while reinforcing that large corporations must honor the compensation they advertise. Walmart responded that it values its Spark drivers, has already issued remediation payments to eligible drivers and continues working to improve its compensation systems to promote fairness and transparency.

The settlement highlights growing regulatory attention on the rapidly expanding gig economy. As retailers compete to offer faster home delivery, millions of independent contractors increasingly rely on app-based platforms where earnings can be difficult to verify. Rather than challenging the independent contractor model itself, Texas focused on the accuracy and transparency of compensation disclosures—an approach that other states could potentially adopt.

For Walmart, the financial cost is relatively small compared with its overall size, but the operational requirements could have broader implications across the delivery industry. If earnings verification and greater compensation transparency become industry standards, competing delivery platforms may also face pressure to modify how they present pay offers to drivers.

As same-day delivery becomes an increasingly important part of modern retail, regulators appear increasingly focused on ensuring that gig workers receive exactly what they are promised. The Texas settlement may ultimately serve as an early blueprint for how states oversee pay transparency throughout the rapidly growing app-based delivery economy.

JBizNews Desk | Bentonville

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The National Coffee Association told the Office of the U.S. Trade Representative on Wednesday, July 8, that Brazilian coffee should stay out of a new round of import taxes, warning that fresh duties would push already-steep grocery prices higher for the tens of millions of Americans who drink coffee every day.

William Murray, president and chief executive of the National Coffee Association, made the case in testimony at a public hearing in Washington tied to the government’s review of trade with Brazil. He asked officials to protect green, unroasted coffee that is already exempt and to add unflavored instant coffee to the tax-free list, calling both essential to keeping coffee affordable and U.S. coffee companies competitive.

The economic stakes are substantial. Murray told the panel that protecting coffee matters for more than 176 million daily American coffee drinkers and a domestic coffee economy he valued at about $343 billion. Instant coffee alone, he said, is consumed by nearly 30 million adults each day and serves as a base for cold brew, flavorings, extracts and the fast-growing category of canned, ready-to-drink coffee.

The hearing is part of a Section 301 investigation run by the Office of the U.S. Trade Representative into Brazil’s trade practices, spanning complaints from digital-commerce rules to illegal deforestation. Out of that review, the government could place a 25% tariff on a list of Brazilian goods. A separate measure has already added a 12.5% charge on products from more than 60 countries, instant coffee among them.

Brazil is the world’s largest coffee producer and supplies about a third of what the United States drinks, which makes any tax on its beans hard to dodge at the register. Last year, Washington imposed a 50% tariff on Brazilian imports that threw the U.S. coffee trade into turmoil before officials carved out green coffee. Instant coffee stayed taxed at 50% until the Supreme Court struck down most of the administration’s blanket tariffs; it now carries a 10% global rate.

Murray said the earlier duties fed what he called “highly visible price inflation on popular products,” squeezing the companies that turn beans into everyday goods. His core argument to regulators was practical: the country cannot grow its way out of a coffee tax. Farms in Hawaii and Puerto Rico cover only a sliver of demand, and the United States produces less than 6% of the instant coffee it uses.

The pain would not stop at the supermarket shelf. Higher bean costs ripple through corner coffee shops, diners and national restaurant chains that price a cup on thin margins, through grocery retailers that lean on coffee to draw shoppers, and through the food manufacturers that fold coffee into syrups, creamers, ice cream and bottled drinks. The National Coffee Association notes that roughly 99% of U.S. coffee is imported, so there is no domestic supply to cushion the blow.

Brazilian producers pressed the same point from the other side of the table. Representatives of Abics, the Brazilian Soluble Coffee Industry Association, and the exporter group Cecafe appeared at the Washington hearings alongside the American association. Aguinaldo José de Lima, executive director of Abics, said more than 90% of Brazil’s instant coffee is bound for the U.S. market — about 15,500 metric tons a year — and that no other supplier can match that volume at a similar price. The first hit from any new tariff, he said, would land on companies and jobs before reaching shoppers.

Relief at the register looks distant regardless of the ruling. In a London interview reported by Bloomberg, Giuseppe Lavazza, chairman of the Italian roaster Lavazza, said retail coffee prices are unlikely to fall for at least two years, citing tight global supply, weather damage to crops in Brazil and Vietnam, and speculation that has driven futures to record levels. He described the market’s instability as “the new constant.”

Coffee has become a recurring flashpoint in the tariff fight precisely because almost none of it grows on American soil. Lawmakers in both parties, including Representative Don Bacon and Representative Ro Khanna, have pushed the White House to leave the drink alone, arguing that taxing a product the country cannot realistically produce simply raises costs for households.

For now the decision sits with trade officials weighing the Section 301 findings. Murray asked them to extend the existing exemptions rather than reopen them, telling the panel that keeping coffee tariff-free would benefit both the broader economy and the millions of Americans who start each day with a cup. A ruling is expected in the weeks ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

EATONTOWN, N.J. — As businesses across every industry race to improve productivity and prepare their workforce for a rapidly evolving workplace, the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce and the Parnassah Network Foundation will host the JBIZ Leadership Multi-Platform AI Summit this Monday and Tuesday, July 13–14, at the Sheraton Eatontown Hotel in Eatontown, New Jersey.

The two-day executive program is designed for business owners, executives, managers, employees, entrepreneurs and individuals entering the workforce, providing practical, hands-on training in the business platforms that are increasingly becoming essential in today’s workplace.

Just as Word, Excel, Outlook and Email Became Workplace Essentials…

Twenty years ago, knowing how to use Microsoft Word, Excel, Outlook and email separated job candidates from the competition. Today, those programs are standard requirements in virtually every workplace.

Organizers say the workplace is experiencing another transformation.

Today’s leading business platforms—including ChatGPT, Claude, Microsoft Copilot, Google Gemini, Grok, Perplexity, Meta AI and Mistral—are quickly becoming the next generation of must-have workplace skills. Just as previous generations were expected to master Word and Excel, today’s professionals are increasingly expected to understand how and when to use these platforms effectively.

Knowing how to use these platforms has become as essential as knowing Word, Excel and email. Employees who can use them independently complete tasks faster, improve accuracy, reduce administrative work and free up valuable time for higher-level responsibilities. 

Why Businesses Are Investing in These Skills

Research continues to demonstrate measurable returns from integrating these platforms into everyday business operations.

According to the London School of Economics, professionals save an average of 7.5 hours per week through effective use of these workplace platforms.

The GoTo 2025 AI in Business Report found employees save an average of 2.3 hours per day, enabling organizations to improve productivity while reducing repetitive administrative work.

The PwC Global AI Jobs Barometer, which analyzed more than one billion job postings worldwide, found that positions requiring AI-related skills command an average 72% earnings premium, reflecting the growing demand for professionals who know how to use these technologies effectively.

Meanwhile, FOX Business reported that survey data suggests as many as 70% of laid-off workers were not actively using artificial intelligence tools, highlighting the growing importance many employers are placing on technology adoption and workforce readiness.

Whether You’re a Business Owner, Executive, Manager, Employee or Entering the Workforce—This Summit Is for You

The summit is designed to deliver practical value for professionals across every stage of their careers.

Business owners will learn how to increase productivity, reduce operating costs, improve customer service and grow revenue by empowering their workforce with today’s leading business platforms.

Executives and managers will discover how to streamline operations, delegate repetitive work more efficiently and build higher-performing teams.

Employees will learn how to draft professional emails, prepare reports and presentations, analyze spreadsheets, review contracts, conduct research, summarize documents and automate repetitive office tasks—allowing them to focus on work that creates greater value.

Individuals entering the workforce or returning from seminary will gain practical skills that employers increasingly expect, helping them stand out in today’s competitive job market. 

Built on Nearly Two Decades of Business Leadership

The JBIZ Leadership Multi-Platform AI Summit is built on the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce’s nearly 20 years of empowering businesses, entrepreneurs and professionals.

Over that time, the Chamber has presented more than 1,000 workshops, conferences and executive education programs, becoming a recognized leader in workforce development, business growth and economic stimulation.

Developed over months by industry professionals, the summit teaches attendees which platform to use, when to use it and how to apply it across writing, research, marketing, sales, spreadsheets, presentations, document analysis, customer service and everyday office operations. Every participant will receive a Certificate of Completion

Event Information

The JBIZ Leadership Multi-Platform AI Summit will be held Monday and Tuesday, July 13–14, at the Sheraton Eatontown Hotel, 6 Industrial Way East, Eatontown, New Jersey.

Click To Register


Information: Esther@OJChamber.com
Phone: (212) 659-5270 ext. 104 

www.OJChamber.com

JBizNews Desk | Eatontown, New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved

ATLANTA — Delta Air Lines reported record second-quarter revenue on Friday, according to the company’s earnings release, as robust demand for premium travel, corporate bookings and loyalty programs helped the carrier deliver its strongest spring revenue ever despite significantly higher fuel costs. The Atlanta-based airline reaffirmed its full-year outlook, signaling confidence that travel demand remains resilient.

Delta reported $17.7 billion in adjusted operating revenue for the quarter, a 14% increase from a year earlier and the highest quarterly revenue in the company’s history. Adjusted net income totaled approximately $1.6 billion, down about 25% from the prior year as soaring fuel expenses weighed on profitability. Adjusted earnings came in at $1.56 per share, ahead of Wall Street expectations.

The airline’s biggest challenge remained fuel. Delta said it paid an average of $3.93 per gallon for jet fuel during the quarter, roughly 75% higher than the same period a year ago, making it the most expensive fuel quarter in company history. Although higher fares and strong passenger demand offset much of the increase, they were not enough to completely absorb the added costs.

“We delivered record revenue while navigating one of the most challenging fuel environments our industry has experienced,” Chief Executive Officer Ed Bastian said in the company’s earnings release. He said Delta remains confident in its strategy and expects strong customer demand to support continued earnings growth through the remainder of the year.

Premium travel continued to be one of Delta’s strongest growth drivers. Revenue from premium cabins, including first class and Delta One, reached $6.92 billion, surpassing main-cabin revenue for the quarter. Premium revenue increased 17% year over year, reflecting travelers’ continued willingness to pay for added comfort and flexibility.

The airline’s loyalty business also remained a major contributor. Revenue tied to Delta’s partnership with American Express climbed 16% to approximately $2.4 billion, while broader loyalty-related revenue rose 19%. Corporate travel continued improving as well, led by customers in the aerospace, defense, banking and automotive sectors, with premium corporate bookings posting particularly strong gains.

Speaking following the earnings release, Bastian said demand remains healthy across both leisure and business travel. He pointed to disciplined capacity growth across the airline industry and continued consumer willingness to purchase premium products as factors supporting fare stability despite easing fuel prices in recent weeks.

Chief Financial Officer Erik Snell also expressed confidence in the company’s booking trends, noting that a significant portion of third-quarter travel demand has already been booked. Strong international demand and higher-than-expected travel tied to the ongoing World Cup also contributed to the quarter’s performance.

Reflecting that confidence, Delta reinstated its full-year financial outlook after withdrawing guidance earlier this year amid heightened uncertainty in energy markets. The airline now expects adjusted earnings of $6.50 to $7.50 per share for 2026 and projects $3 billion to $4 billion in free cash flow. For the current quarter, Delta forecast adjusted earnings between $2.00 and $2.50 per share, generally in line with analysts’ expectations.

Delta continues to distinguish itself from many competitors. Several major U.S. airlines have reduced or suspended their financial outlooks this year as fluctuating fuel prices and geopolitical uncertainty complicated forecasting. Delta’s decision to reaffirm guidance reflects management’s confidence that strong customer demand can continue offsetting higher operating costs.

Travelers may also notice continued changes to the airline’s fare offerings. Delta recently introduced its new Basic Business fare, providing customers with a lower-priced entry into premium cabins while removing certain benefits such as lounge access and refundable tickets. The move expands the airline’s pricing strategy while encouraging more customers to upgrade into higher-margin seating options.

For consumers, the earnings report suggests airfare pricing is likely to remain firm. Industry demand remains elevated, aircraft supply remains constrained, and airlines continue exercising discipline when adding capacity. Even if fuel prices moderate, carriers appear focused on protecting margins rather than aggressively discounting fares.

Investors will now watch whether Delta can maintain its pricing power through the second half of the year while keeping costs under control. Friday’s results demonstrated that customer demand remains exceptionally strong. The next question is whether continued premium travel and disciplined capacity can keep profits growing even if fuel markets remain volatile.

JBizNews Desk | Atlanta

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Energy Information Administration reported Wednesday that the nation’s commercial crude oil inventories rose by 3 million barrels in the week ended July 3, marking the first weekly build in 11 weeks, according to the agency’s Weekly Petroleum Status Report. The increase left commercial stockpiles, which exclude the Strategic Petroleum Reserve, at 411.4 million barrels, a level the EIA said remains about 6% below the five-year average for this time of year.

Ordinarily, an unexpected increase in crude supplies would put downward pressure on prices. Instead, oil has continued climbing. Brent crude, the global benchmark, surged above $80 a barrel after rising nearly 10% over two trading sessions as renewed tensions between the United States and Iran fueled fears of disruptions to Middle East energy supplies. The disconnect reflects a market focused less on current inventory levels and more on the growing geopolitical risks facing global oil flows.

According to Ole S. Hansen, Head of Commodity Strategy at Saxo Bank, U.S. crude inventories increased primarily because exports slowed to 3.3 million barrels per day, their lowest level since November. Crude that would normally have been shipped overseas instead remained in domestic storage. At the same time, U.S. production climbed to 13.86 million barrels per day, approaching last year’s record high and adding further to domestic supplies.

While crude inventories increased, refined fuel supplies continued tightening. The government withdrew another 6.2 million barrels from the Strategic Petroleum Reserve, reducing holdings to 319.5 million barrels, down from 403 million barrels a year ago and near the lowest level in four decades. Refiners operated at a robust 95.8% of capacity, yet fuel inventories still declined. Distillate inventories, which include diesel fuel, dropped 5 million barrels to a four-year low, while gasoline inventories fell 1.9 million barrels to their lowest seasonal level since 2012.

That combination carries significant implications for the broader economy. Diesel powers freight transportation, agriculture and construction, making it one of the most important fuels for the movement of goods. Tight diesel supplies can quickly translate into higher shipping costs that ultimately reach consumers through increased grocery, retail and manufacturing prices. Meanwhile, shrinking gasoline inventories during the height of the summer driving season leave motorists vulnerable to additional price spikes if geopolitical tensions worsen.

The export picture also highlights America’s increasingly important role in global energy markets. Hansen noted that U.S. refined-product exports climbed to a record 8.7 million barrels per day, lifting total oil and refined-product exports, including crude, to approximately 12 million barrels per day. American refiners continue supplying international markets even as domestic inventories of finished fuels become increasingly constrained, a balancing act that could become more challenging should global supply disruptions intensify.

The report also illustrated how volatile current market conditions have become. The American Petroleum Institute, whose industry survey is released one day before the government’s official report, estimated a modest crude draw of approximately 399,000 barrels for the same reporting week—moving in the opposite direction from the EIA’s reported build. Such differences often reflect tanker arrival schedules and shipment timing but can become more pronounced when geopolitical events disrupt normal trade flows, as they have around the Strait of Hormuz.

Despite the inventory increase, traders continued pushing oil prices higher, viewing the risk of future supply disruptions as more significant than one week of rising U.S. stockpiles. Over the past four weeks, U.S. crude imports averaged roughly 5.4 million barrels per day, approximately 11.4% below the same period last year, suggesting the flow of foreign oil into the United States has already slowed.

The coming weeks will determine whether this inventory build proves temporary or signals a broader shift in supply. With diesel and gasoline inventories remaining tight, refiners operating near full capacity, and the Strait of Hormuz continuing to pose a significant geopolitical risk, markets appear focused on the possibility that today’s crude surplus could quickly disappear. If that happens, higher fuel costs could ripple through transportation, manufacturing and consumer prices across the economy.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The number of Americans filing new claims for unemployment benefits fell last week, the U.S. Labor Department reported Thursday, the latest sign that employers are holding onto workers even as hiring cools. Initial claims for state jobless benefits slipped by 2,000 to a seasonally adjusted 215,000 for the week ended July 4, according to the department, below the roughly 218,000 that economists polled by Reuters had expected. The prior week’s figure was revised up to 217,000.

The four-week moving average, which smooths out weekly swings, dropped by 3,750 to 218,750. Continuing claims, which track people still collecting benefits, edged up by 8,000 to 1.81 million for the week ended June 27—the highest since late March, but still low by historical standards.

The picture beneath the seasonally adjusted headline was a bit busier. Unadjusted filings actually rose by 9,967 to 224,583, with applications jumping by 8,467 in California, 5,872 in Missouri, and 4,401 in Michigan, likely as some automakers idled assembly lines for summer maintenance and retooling. General Motors and Ford Motor Company, however, have canceled summer shutdowns at many plants, which should limit those layoffs going forward. Claims filed by federal employees, watched closely amid the administration’s push to shrink the public workforce, fell by 40 to 404.

Economists treat weekly filings as the fastest read on the job market because they capture how many workers employers are actively letting go. The message this week was continuity: layoffs remain scarce. Analysts have taken to calling the current environment “low-hire, low-fire,” a labor market where companies are reluctant both to add staff and to cut jobs.

That reluctance matters because the hiring side has weakened sharply. The report follows a disappointing June jobs report in which employers added just 57,000 nonfarm positions, far below the 115,000 forecasters had projected. The unemployment rate ticked down to 4.2% from 4.3%, but much of that improvement came from people leaving the labor force rather than finding work, while revisions erased 74,000 jobs from the April and May totals.

For businesses, the steadiness in claims is a double-edged number. Low layoffs help keep household incomes and consumer spending—the engine of roughly two-thirds of the U.S. economy—intact, supporting everything from retail sales to loan repayment. But weak hiring reflects growing caution in corporate boardrooms as companies contend with uncertainty stemming from the conflict with Iran, higher oil prices and persistent inflation.

The data also feed directly into the debate at the Federal Reserve. A resilient labor market gives Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh and his colleagues room to keep interest rates elevated to combat inflation rather than cutting them to support employment. With jobless claims remaining near the low end of their recent range and inflation risks still elevated, the report does little to strengthen the case for near-term rate cuts and reinforces the view that the Fed remains more concerned about inflation than layoffs.

The coming weeks will reveal whether that stability continues. Seasonal auto-sector layoffs should ease as factory retooling concludes, but the sharp slowdown in hiring combined with workers leaving the labor force suggests the employment market rests on a narrower foundation than the low claims figures alone may indicate.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Sales of previously owned U.S. homes declined in June even as prices climbed to a record high, the National Association of Realtors reported Thursday, underscoring how elevated borrowing costs continue to limit affordability during what is typically the busiest season for the housing market.

Existing-home sales fell 2.4% from May to a seasonally adjusted annual rate of 4.09 million, below economists’ expectations of approximately 4.21 million, according to FactSet. Despite the monthly decline, sales remained 2.8% higher than a year earlier.

At the same time, the median existing-home price reached a record $440,600 for the month of June, extending a long streak of annual price increases. The combination of slowing sales and record prices continues to challenge prospective buyers, many of whom remain priced out of the market despite modest improvements in housing inventory.

Dr. Lawrence Yun, Chief Economist for the National Association of Realtors, attributed much of the market’s weakness to mortgage affordability. He said monthly fluctuations in existing-home sales continue to track even modest changes in mortgage rates, demonstrating just how sensitive buyers remain to financing costs. While Yun pointed to continued job growth as a positive long-term factor supporting housing demand, he emphasized that affordability remains the industry’s biggest obstacle and reiterated the need for substantially more housing supply.

Mortgage rates remain central to the market’s direction. According to Freddie Mac, the average 30-year fixed-rate mortgage stood at 6.43% as of July 2, marking a seven-week low and down slightly from 6.49% the previous week and 6.67% one year earlier. Because existing-home sales are recorded at closing, June’s figures primarily reflect purchase contracts signed in April and May, when mortgage rates were moving higher.

Those borrowing costs continue to be influenced by Treasury yields, which have risen as investors respond to higher oil prices, persistent inflation concerns and renewed geopolitical tensions in the Middle East. As long as long-term Treasury yields remain elevated, mortgage rates are likely to remain under pressure as well, limiting affordability for many prospective buyers.

The composition of homebuyers also reflected the affordability challenge. First-time buyers accounted for 33% of June transactions, up from 30% a year earlier but still well below the 40% share that the National Association of Realtors considers representative of a healthy housing market. Meanwhile, approximately 25% of all purchases were completed with cash, illustrating the continued advantage enjoyed by buyers less dependent on financing.

Housing inventory showed modest improvement. Roughly 1.56 million existing homes were available for sale at the end of June, about 1.3% higher than one year earlier. Even so, that represents only a 4.6-month supply, remaining below the level generally considered balanced between buyers and sellers.

The slowdown has now persisted for several years. Existing-home sales have remained near an annual pace of 4 million since 2023, well below the long-term historical average of roughly 5.2 million. Through the first half of 2026, total sales were only 0.7% above the same period a year earlier, reflecting a market that continues to struggle despite solid employment and resilient consumer demand.

The housing slowdown affects far more than homebuyers and real estate agents. Every home sale typically generates additional spending on furniture, appliances, home improvements, moving services, insurance, mortgage financing and numerous local businesses. When housing activity slows, those industries often experience weaker demand as well, reducing economic activity across a broad range of sectors.

Lawmakers continue debating measures designed to increase housing supply and improve affordability, but meaningful expansion of inventory will take time. In the meantime, economists generally expect mortgage rates to remain above historical norms, limiting affordability for many households.

With home prices at record highs, mortgage rates still above 6%, and inventory remaining relatively limited, June’s housing report suggests the market continues to face significant affordability pressures. Until either financing costs decline meaningfully or substantially more homes become available, many prospective buyers are likely to remain on the sidelines.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Delta Air Lines will start the airline industry’s earnings season on Friday, July 10, reporting June-quarter results before markets open, the Atlanta-based carrier said in an investor-relations announcement setting the release and a 10 a.m. Eastern conference call. In its last public guidance, issued with March-quarter results in April, Delta told investors to expect June-quarter pre-tax profit of around $1 billion even as its fuel bill rose by more than $2 billion.

As the first major U.S. airline to report, Delta sets the tone for how Wall Street reads the health of American travel heading into the back half of the year. The picture is mixed but leaning positive. The Zacks Consensus Estimate calls for adjusted earnings of about $1.44 a share, down roughly 31% from $2.10 a year earlier as higher labor costs and a heavier fuel bill press on profit. Revenue tells a friendlier story at an estimated $17.72 billion, up about 6.5% from the same quarter last year.

Delta enters with momentum. It has topped profit forecasts in each of the last four quarters, and in the March quarter it earned an adjusted 64 cents a share against a 61-cent estimate, on revenue of about $14.2 billion. Chief Executive Ed Bastian has spent the year describing steady demand for higher-end travel while holding off on raising full-year targets, citing uncertainty over fuel.

The biggest change since Delta issued its April outlook has been fuel. Crude oil has eased in recent weeks to some of its lowest levels of the year, taking pressure off the airline’s largest cost after labor. Delta also owns a refinery near Philadelphia, an asset it has long framed as a hedge that benefits when crude falls, giving it a cushion rivals lack.

Investors have already rewarded the stock. Delta shares have climbed about 30% in 2026, far outpacing the broad market, and recently traded in the high $80s to low $90s, giving the carrier a market value near $61 billion. That rally raises the stakes: the company now has to show the summer earned it.

Bank of America struck an upbeat note ahead of the report, telling clients it sees a constructive setup for the quarter and raising its estimate for how fast Delta’s revenue is growing on each seat it flies. The firm kept its buy rating, citing the airline’s strength in premium cabins, corporate travel and its co-branded credit-card partnership with American Express, and called Delta the cleanest opening act of the season.

Those premium and corporate travelers are the heart of the case. Delta has leaned into higher-fare cabins, international routes and loyalty income, betting that customers with money to spend keep flying even when budget leisure demand softens. Business travel typically rebuilds after Memorial Day, and summer flights to Europe peak in the June quarter, both of which favor the carrier’s mix.

The read matters well beyond one company. Airlines are a rough gauge of how freely Americans are spending, and premium-heavy carriers like Delta track the higher-income traveler in particular. Strong demand and firm pricing would signal that households are still willing to pay up for trips; softer numbers would raise fresh questions about the summer.

There are real cautions. Carriers are adding flights later in 2026, and more seats across the industry could chip away at the pricing gains they have enjoyed once peak season passes. Higher wages from recent labor contracts are permanent. That combination is why profit is expected to fall even as revenue rises.

The next signposts come quickly. United Airlines reports on July 16, and rivals follow through the month, so Delta’s results — and, more importantly, its outlook — will shape expectations for the entire group. Delta has held a cautious full-year forecast all year; any move to raise its profit target would tell investors that management believes the summer strength can carry into the fall.

With cheaper fuel, a premium-heavy customer base and a stock near its highs, Delta has a chance on Friday to show its rally was earned. The numbers, and what Bastian says about the months ahead, will tell travelers and investors alike whether the rest of the industry is cleared for the same climb.

JBizNews Desk | Atlanta
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SK Hynix priced its U.S. share sale on Thursday at $149 per American depositary receipt, according to the offering terms and the company’s registration filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission. The South Korean memory-chip maker offered 177.9 million ADRs, equivalent to 17.79 million common shares Bloomberg — each receipt equal to one-tenth of a common share — to raise about $26.5 billion. That would be the largest ever first-time share sale in the US by a foreign company, topping Alibaba Group Holding’s $25 billion debut. Yahoo Finance

The listing lands on the Nasdaq Global Select Market, where the receipts begin when-issued trading Friday under the symbol SKHYV, switching to SKHY when regular-way trading starts July 13. Yahoo Finance The price sits about 3.1% above the Thursday closing price of the common shares in Seoul, which ended at 2.186 million won, or roughly $1,445 each. Bloomberg

Demand ran far ahead of supply. The offering drew demand approaching $200 billion, according to the deal term sheet, Bloomberg and the sale was more than seven times oversubscribed. Yahoo Finance Buyers included global long-only funds, technology sector-focused funds, sovereign wealth funds and Asia-focused global investors. Yahoo Finance Baillie Gifford, Coatue Management and Situational Awareness Partners alone signaled indications of interest for as much as $7 billion worth of ADRs. Yahoo Finance The offering was led by Bank of America, Citigroup, Goldman Sachs and JPMorgan Chase, with nine other firms participating. Yahoo Finance

For American investors, the sale opens a direct door to a company whose parts already sit inside products they own. SK Hynix, the second most valuable company in South Korea behind only Samsung, CNBC is one of three main makers of the memory used in phones, laptops and the servers running artificial-intelligence systems. The other two are Samsung and U.S.-listed Micron.

The timing is bold. SK Hynix shares ended Thursday down 25% from a record-high close in late June, though they remain more than triple where they started the year Yahoo Finance — up 235% in 2026 AOL as the AI-driven memory shortage sent prices and profits soaring. First-quarter revenue tripled to about $34.5 billion, and profit quintupled to $26.5 billion. AOL Rival Samsung this week reported operating profit increased 19-fold last quarter, AOL while Micron’s margins climbed toward 85% from 38% a year earlier. AOL

That heat cuts both ways. South Korea’s benchmark KOSPI Composite Index fell into a bear market on Wednesday, closing more than 20% below last month’s all-time high, AOL dragged down by the same two chipmakers that carried it up. The Roundhill Memory ETF is up 141% over the past 12 months, while the iShares Semiconductor ETF is up 140%. Stocktwits

SK Hynix plans to put the proceeds toward new production facilities in South Korea and the extreme-ultraviolet lithography scanners used to manufacture advanced semiconductors Stocktwits — tools only made by ASML in the Netherlands and costing up to $400 million each. CNBC The buildout is part of an $880 billion South Korean government-led initiative that SK Hynix and Samsung are ramping up investment behind. Yahoo Finance In the United States, the company is putting up a $4 billion advanced-packaging plant in West Lafayette, Indiana, scheduled for completion in 2028, with up to $458 million in CHIPS Act funding and as much as $570 million in federal loans. CNBC SK Square, demerged from SK Telecom in 2021, holds a 20.5% interest in the chipmaker. CNBC

Not everyone is cheering. Jim Cramer of CNBC warned that bankers highlighting the heavy oversubscription were playing “a dangerous game,” and has spent much of 2026 flagging the building IPO pipeline as the market’s biggest short-term risk. Stocktwits Analysts at HSBC took the other side, hiking their SK Hynix price target to 4 million won from 2.9 million and saying the Nasdaq listing could boost the company’s valuation by as much as 20% and narrow its long-standing gap with Micron. Stocktwits

For SK Hynix, the payoff runs past cash. A U.S. listing widens its investor base to funds that never touched the Seoul shares and hands it a stronger currency for future deals, all while the memory business rides the sharpest upswing in its history. The risk is the one this industry knows well: the AI-spending wave paying for these new factories could cool before the concrete is dry.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

South Korea is preparing to create a new national investment fund using tax revenue generated by the country’s booming semiconductor industry, with the goal of helping younger generations afford housing, create businesses and find jobs while strengthening the nation’s artificial intelligence leadership.

Presidential Chief of Staff Kang Hoon-sik outlined the proposal during a high-level government policy meeting, saying the extraordinary tax revenue generated by South Korea’s world-leading chip industry should be invested in the country’s future rather than absorbed into routine government spending.

“We must not spend this money carelessly,” Kang said while describing what officials have called a Future Response Fund.

The proposal would direct additional tax revenue generated by record profits at semiconductor leaders Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix into long-term national investments.

Government officials said the fund would help finance artificial intelligence development, semiconductor infrastructure, startup financing, youth employment initiatives and housing programs targeted at younger South Koreans.

The plan remains under development, with details expected to be reviewed during upcoming fiscal strategy meetings before legislation is introduced.

South Korea’s semiconductor industry has experienced unprecedented growth as worldwide demand for artificial intelligence hardware continues accelerating.

Memory chips produced by Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix have become essential components inside AI servers and advanced data centers, producing record earnings and significantly increasing corporate tax revenue.

Officials have not announced the final size of the proposed fund.

However, Korean media estimates suggest the additional semiconductor-related tax revenue could total 50 trillion to 70 trillion won, creating one of the country’s largest long-term investment vehicles.

The proposal accompanies an even broader national strategy to strengthen South Korea’s semiconductor leadership.

The government recently unveiled plans supporting hundreds of billions of dollars in semiconductor investment, including expanded manufacturing capacity, advanced research and artificial intelligence infrastructure.

Officials have also discussed funding additional purchases of high-performance graphics processors needed for AI development while encouraging greater investment in domestic semiconductor manufacturing.

The proposal reflects growing concern that the benefits of South Korea’s technology boom have not been shared equally across society.

Although the country’s semiconductor companies have generated enormous profits, younger workers continue facing high housing prices, slower wage growth and a competitive employment market.

Government leaders argue that reinvesting part of today’s semiconductor windfall into education, entrepreneurship and affordable housing could help spread the industry’s long-term economic benefits more broadly.

Not everyone agrees on the best approach.

Some policymakers favor creating a broader sovereign wealth fund that would invest across multiple industries, while others have proposed direct payments to citizens or expanded support for rural communities and startup businesses.

Economists also caution that semiconductor profits remain cyclical.

Global memory-chip prices have historically fluctuated sharply, meaning government revenue generated during today’s AI boom may not remain at current levels indefinitely.

That makes long-term fund management particularly important if policymakers hope to sustain future investments during weaker market cycles.

For businesses, the proposal demonstrates how governments increasingly view artificial intelligence and semiconductor manufacturing as strategic national assets rather than simply private industries.

Countries around the world are expanding public investment to strengthen domestic chip production, secure AI supply chains and improve long-term competitiveness.

South Korea’s proposal seeks to accomplish both goals simultaneously—supporting future economic growth while helping younger generations participate more fully in the country’s expanding technology economy.

If approved, the fund would become one of the most significant examples yet of a government using AI-driven corporate tax revenue to finance long-term national development.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Asian stock markets were trading sharply higher on Friday, July 10, after Micron Technology said it would lift spending on new U.S. plants to $250 billion to meet demand from the artificial-intelligence boom, and as South Korea’s SK Hynix prepared for its U.S. market debut. South Korea’s Kospi had climbed about 3.5% to 7,545.51 by 11:20 a.m. in Seoul, according to Korea Exchange data, while Japan’s Nikkei 225 rose roughly 1.7% to trade near 68,900. Both markets were still open as this was written.

The move marked a second straight winning session for the two markets and a sharp recovery for Seoul, which had tumbled nearly 8% on Thursday when fears over stretched AI valuations sparked heavy foreign selling. The rebound followed Wall Street’s overnight gains, where the Nasdaq Composite rose 1.3%, the S&P 500 added 0.81% and the Dow Jones Industrial Average climbed 139 points.

Semiconductors are doing the heavy lifting. Micron’s commitment to a quarter-trillion dollars of U.S. capacity handed the whole memory-chip complex a lift, and traders across the region are watching SK Hynix’s U.S. listing, which priced at $149 a share and was reported more than seven times oversubscribed — one of the largest first-time foreign offerings on record. In Seoul, Samsung Electronics rose about 3.8% and parts affiliate Samsung Electro-Mechanics jumped 6.4%. In Tokyo, memory maker Kioxia advanced more than 4% and technology investor SoftBank Group surged close to 7%, pushing past the 60,000-yen mark.

The other tailwind is easing geopolitical risk. A U.S. official said late Thursday that Washington remains committed to a resolution with Iran, with technical talks continuing and regional mediators pushing to revive a nuclear deal. That cooled the war premium that had gripped markets this week, kept oil in a narrow range, and reassured investors that tanker traffic through the Strait of Hormuz would keep moving despite the recent exchange of strikes. With the immediate energy-shock fear receding, money rotated back into risk assets.

Japan’s session carried a second storyline in bonds and currencies. The yen firmed and the 10-year Japanese government bond yield pulled back from a three-decade high after Finance Minister Satsuki Katayama said Tokyo would explore steps to encourage the country’s giant public pension fund, the GPIF, to hold more domestic assets. Adding to the backdrop, Japan reported that June producer prices rose 7.1% from a year earlier, the fastest pace since 2023 and above forecasts, keeping the Bank of Japan on track toward another rate increase.

Market movers: SoftBank Group was the standout in Tokyo, up nearly 7%, while Kioxia and SK Hynix both gained on the memory-demand story. On the downside, chip-equipment supplier Tokyo Electron slipped, a reminder that the rally is concentrated in memory names rather than the whole sector. On the calls, Goldman Sachs told clients that Nvidia looks compelling at about 21.7 times forward earnings after a product-delay scare faded, and Citigroup kept a $75 base-case forecast for Brent crude in the third quarter, betting on a U.S.-Iran deal and a reopened Hormuz.

Commodities and volatility: Crude held steady in Asian hours, with Brent hovering in the high $70s after this week’s spike, as the absence of fresh escalation calmed nerves. Gold traded near $4,133 an ounce and silver around $59 after a soft stretch earlier in the week, pressured by expectations that the Federal Reserve may keep rates high. Wall Street’s fear gauge, the VIX, closed near 16 on Thursday, well below the level that signals real stress, pointing to a market that is watchful but not panicked.

The near-term test comes when SK Hynix actually begins trading in New York. A strong debut could extend the semiconductor rally across Asia into the back half of the year; a weak one would revive the valuation worries that hammered Seoul just a day earlier. Investors are also looking ahead to the Fed’s rate meeting late this month, where sticky inflation and higher energy costs have put at least one more increase back on the table. For now, with chips leading and the Iran risk fading, Asia is ending its week on the front foot.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta launched its first paid coding artificial intelligence model on Thursday, July 9, marking a significant shift in the company’s AI strategy as it moves beyond free, open-source models to compete directly with OpenAI, Anthropic, Google, and Microsoft in the fast-growing market for software-development tools.

Speaking with CNBC, Meta Chief AI Officer Alexandr Wang unveiled Muse Spark 1.1, calling it the company’s most capable model yet for coding and AI agents. It is also the first Meta-developed AI model that developers must pay to use.

Wang said the company deliberately priced the service well below competing products in an effort to quickly attract developers.

“We wanted pricing that is very aggressive and attractive,” Wang said.

Every new developer account receives $20 in free credits. After that, Meta charges $1.25 per million input tokens and $4.25 per million output tokens, pricing that undercuts many competing enterprise coding models.

The move represents a major strategic change for Meta. The company built much of its AI reputation by releasing its Llama family of models under open-source licenses, encouraging developers to build freely on its technology. Muse Spark takes a different approach by generating direct revenue from enterprise users.

Wang emphasized that Meta remains committed to open-source AI and said the company is developing a version of Muse Spark that it eventually plans to release openly, although he did not provide a timeline.

The launch comes as competition intensifies among the world’s largest AI companies.

Anthropic has gained significant traction with its Claude Code platform, while OpenAI continues expanding enterprise adoption through Codex. Microsoft has integrated AI coding tools into GitHub Copilot, and Google is investing heavily in similar developer platforms.

Although Meta entered the coding market later than many rivals, the company hopes lower pricing and tight integration with existing developer tools will encourage businesses to test its platform.

The financial stakes are enormous.

Chief Executive Mark Zuckerberg has committed tens of billions of dollars toward AI infrastructure, including data centers and specialized computing hardware. Investors have increasingly questioned when those investments will begin generating meaningful revenue.

Paid developer services offer one of the company’s clearest paths toward monetizing its expanding AI portfolio.

Performance also remains a competitive battleground.

On the widely followed SWE-Bench Pro software-engineering benchmark, Meta’s original Muse Spark model achieved a score of 52.5%, trailing OpenAI’s GPT-5.5, which scored 58.6%. Wang said Muse Spark 1.1 delivers significant improvements in both software development and AI-agent capabilities.

The company also designed the model to work seamlessly with popular coding frameworks already used by software engineers, reducing the friction involved in adopting a new platform.

For enterprise customers, pricing increasingly matters as much as performance.

Many software companies now test multiple AI coding models simultaneously, selecting whichever delivers the best balance of speed, accuracy and cost. Because switching between providers has become relatively easy, pricing has emerged as one of the industry’s most powerful competitive tools.

Meta appears determined to use that advantage.

Analysts say an aggressive pricing strategy could pressure competitors to lower their own prices, accelerating a broader price war across the AI industry as companies compete for developer loyalty and enterprise market share.

The implications extend well beyond technology companies.

Lower-cost AI coding tools could reduce software development expenses for businesses of all sizes, allowing startups and smaller companies to automate programming tasks that previously required larger engineering teams. Faster software development also has the potential to shorten product-launch timelines and improve productivity across industries.

Whether Meta can convert lower prices into lasting market share remains uncertain. The company entered the enterprise coding market after several competitors had already established strong positions, and developers have shown they are willing to switch platforms quickly when better models become available.

Still, Thursday’s launch marks one of Meta’s clearest attempts yet to transform its massive AI investments into a sustainable business. By combining lower prices with increasingly capable technology, the company is signaling that it intends to compete aggressively for one of artificial intelligence’s fastest-growing commercial markets.

JBizNews Desk | Menlo Park, Calif.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

The smallest jet in Boeing’s 737 MAX family is finally near the end of its certification marathon, with Federal Aviation Administration Administrator Bryan Bedford saying the agency has found nothing that would stop the MAX 7 from winning approval this summer. Speaking at an aviation forum in Washington in late May, Bedford said regulators had not identified any issue that would push certification of either the MAX 7 or the larger MAX 10 past the end of 2026 — the clearest signal yet after a program that has slipped repeatedly since 2019.

Boeing Chief Executive Kelly Ortberg backed that up at the Bernstein Strategic Decisions Conference on May 27, telling investors the company had completed roughly 80% of the certification flight-test program for both variants and had already received every Type Inspection Authorization it needed from the FAA. “There’s clearly light at the end of the tunnel here,” Ortberg said, adding that the MAX 7 would be certified first, with the MAX 10 following close behind. The MAX 10 entered the final stage of certification flight testing, known as Type Inspection Authorization Phase 2, during the first quarter.

The delays trace back to a single stubborn problem. The engine anti-ice system on the jets’ CFM International LEAP-1B engines could overheat the inlet inner barrels and, in rare cases, cause them to fail — a defect Boeing disclosed in 2023 that forced a full redesign and years of extra testing. Boeing has also built a revised crew-alerting system that Congress mandated after the two MAX crashes in 2018 and 2019 that killed 346 people, and it plans to retrofit the change across the fleet. The program has operated under intense scrutiny since a door plug blew out of an Alaska Airlines MAX 9 in January 2024, prompting the FAA to cap 737 output at 38 jets a month.

No customer has more riding on the MAX 7 than Southwest Airlines, which holds roughly 90% of all orders for the type — about 289 aircraft. Southwest CEO Bob Jordan has said he expects FAA approval by August, with the airline putting the jet into service in the first quarter of 2027. The 138-to-153-seat MAX 7 will replace Southwest’s aging 737-700s and ease capacity pressure at slot-constrained hubs such as Dallas Love Field. At 116 feet long, the MAX 7 is Boeing’s answer to the Airbus A220 in the smallest slice of the single-aisle market.

The business stakes reach well beyond one model. Boeing closed the first quarter with a record backlog of about $695 billion, including more than 6,100 commercial jets, and its 737 MAX order book alone tops 4,850 aircraft. The company delivered 143 planes in the first quarter, up 10% from a year earlier. Certifying the MAX 7 and MAX 10 lets Boeing start converting that backlog into cash, and it clears the way for a production ramp the FAA has already blessed — from 42 jets a month toward 47, then 52 in early 2027, aided by a fourth 737 line at Boeing’s Everett, Washington, plant.

The MAX 10 carries the heavier commercial load. With about 1,431 orders, it is Boeing’s closest competitor to the Airbus A321neo and long-range A321XLR in the high-capacity narrowbody segment that Airbus has dominated. United Airlines leads the book with 277 on order, followed by Alaska Airlines with about 105, along with American Airlines, Delta Air Lines, Pegasus Airlines and Ryanair, which holds 150 firm orders plus 150 options. Combined orders for the two variants exceed 1,700 aircraft, with first deliveries planned for 2027.

What remains is the flight testing itself. Ortberg framed it as running out the clock — working through the last test points rather than clearing new technical hurdles — but the FAA has shown it will take its time and could still surface issues before signing off. If the summer window holds, Boeing closes the final major certification gap in its narrowbody lineup and hands airlines the jets they ordered years ago. If it slips again, carriers that have already rebuilt fleet plans around the aircraft will be waiting a while longer.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nearly two-thirds of American investors under 35 — 62% — say they believe they have to take big risks to reach their financial goals, according to a survey from the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, the brokerage industry’s self-funded watchdog. Those numbers drew fresh scrutiny on Thursday as the behavior behind them came into sharper focus: 43% of that group has traded options, 29% has bought meme stocks, and 22% has invested with borrowed money. The takeaway is a generation treating the market less like a savings account and more like a lottery ticket.

The why is not hard to trace. For many under-35 investors, the old markers of building wealth — a house, a stable career ladder, a paid-off mortgage — feel out of reach, so the calculus on risk shifts. Wealth has grown more concentrated among older and richer households, housing remains unaffordable in much of the country, and steady jobs are harder to land. Most investors under 30 have also only ever traded through a bull market, which tends to make speculative, high-beta bets look like the normal way to make money rather than the exception.

That appetite is showing up in hard credit numbers. U.S. margin debt — what investors borrow from their brokers to buy securities — rose 54% from a year earlier to a record $1.4 trillion in May, according to FINRA data. And that figure leaves out the fastest-growing forms of borrowing entirely: leveraged exchange-traded funds, which aim to double or triple the daily move of an index, plus the embedded leverage baked into futures and options.

Citadel Securities put hard figures on the pileup. Assets in leveraged ETFs have reached a record of roughly $218 billion, up about $82 billion, or 60%, since the end of March alone. Leverage tied to technology has grown 136% over that stretch, while leverage linked to semiconductors has nearly tripled, climbing 175%. Retail traders are also loading up on short-dated contracts, trading a record $7 billion in options premium a day in June, up from $5.8 billion in May, with new participation records set almost weekly on the firm’s platform.

The line between investing and gambling is blurring in the process. A survey from Northwestern Mutual found 32% of Gen Z respondents gamble in crypto or sports betting, 35% of millennials own crypto, and 24% bet on sports. The same survey carried a wrinkle worth noting: despite a year of wild swings, more young people reported feeling financially secure than a year earlier — 39% of Gen Z, up from 36%, and 52% of millennials, up from 43%. Confidence and risk-taking are rising together.

Wall Street is building for the trend rather than fighting it. Brokerages, leveraged-ETF issuers and prediction-market operators are rolling out products aimed squarely at young, active traders, and the demand is feeding the supply. Social media is doing the marketing. A J.P. Morgan Personal Investing survey found many Gen Z and millennial investors now source ideas from financial influencers, Reddit forums and online tips rather than advisers or newspapers. Claire Exley, head of financial advice and guidance at the firm, cautioned that engaging with online sources can help build knowledge but urged young investors to verify information and seek guidance before acting.

The concern among market veterans is less about the whole market cracking than about individual traders blowing themselves up. Margin debt at record highs partly reflects a market at record highs — it is a concurrent signal, not automatically a warning. But borrowed money and triple-leveraged funds cut deep in a downturn, and the AI-driven rally powering these bets has already shown tremors in recent weeks. The risk for this cohort is simple: the tools that magnify gains in a rising market magnify losses just as fast when it turns, and a generation that has never traded through a real bear market is about to learn how that math works.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

of the steak chain.

After some residents expressed concern that a proposed In-N-Out might increase customers, cause health problems for pedestrians and cyclists, a California city is considering a ban on drive-throughs.

Last month, the City Council in Culver City, California, enacted a 45-day moratorium to obstruct allows for fresh drive-throughs while team was developing a possible restrictions, according to LAist. Following the city’s mobility subcommittee’s vote in May to propose staff draft the ban, this comes after.

Only new businesses may be affected if a ban was approved by the city government.

According to a report from the town workers, In-N-Out would be the first new drive-through in Culver City since 1997. A drive-thru street and 61 parking spots would be included in the proposed fast-food restaurant, which could accommodate 26 vehicles.

IN-N-OUT TO GET A BILL OF MULTIPLE RESTAURANTS EVERY YEAR: A Statement

When the town passed the embargo, the burger chain had not yet completed the proper application for a force it was developing, a city official told LAist.

In-N-Out was contacted by FOX Business for remark.

We typically don’t comment publicly on business matters because we are a secret, family-owned company, according to an In-N-Out spokesman, according to LAist.

The proposal has been criticized by In-N-Out’s critics because it has the potential to harm the city’s ability to become accessible and safe.

According to Vanessa Martin, a area resident who is organizing assistance for the drive-thru restrictions, “density is expected, and development is expected.” We want to take initiative and make wise decisions.

The In-N-Out “mega drive-thru,” according to Martin’s family Cynthia, will cause traffic congestion, increase air excellent, and pose safety risks for both pedestrians and cyclists.

Paul Hewitt, a neighbor, started distributing flyers to his companions, calling the job a “terrible idea.”

Bubba Fish, a member of Culver City Council’s flexibility subcommittee, said that “drive-throughs are the epitome of that” and that the city needs to have “more accessible, bikeable, safer streets for people of all modes.”

However, drive-throughs are significant choices for customers, including those who have disabilities and those who have children, according to the ban’s competitors.

Drive-thru restrictions are typically” shortsighted,” according to Jot Condie, leader of the California Restaurant Association.

Condie claimed that you “re largely banning quick-service eateries without particularly stating that.”

A DAD RECRETED A DAD’s FAMILY OF 5 EATS AT CHICK-FIL-A FOR MORE THAN$ 45.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

The American Planning Association estimates that drive-thru orders account for 70 % of fast-food sales.

The Golden State’s second drive-thru restrictions is not currently in place.

Drive-throughs are already prohibited in Culver City’s city, while Santa Barbara and San Luis Obispo, according to LAist, have been prohibited for years. A nationwide restrictions that began in the late 1990s was just lifted in Carlsbad to allow for case-by-case account of fresh drive-throughs.

The California Restaurant Association argued in a letter to San Diego that a limited drive-thru ban would stop some groups, including those with disabilities, from using products and services, according to the outlet.

This post was originally published here

The Jersey City Council unanimously rejected a proposed 15% municipal property tax increase on Wednesday, July 8, leaving New Jersey’s second-largest city without an adopted budget and still facing an estimated $255 million budget shortfall, according to city officials.

The vote came just one day after New Jersey lawmakers approved a $120 million state rescue package for the city, the largest municipal loan in state history. Several council members who had previously indicated support for the tax increase reversed course following strong public opposition, saying they wanted more time to review the city’s finances before asking residents to pay substantially higher property taxes.

Council members Jake Ephros, Eleana Little and Joel Brooks said homeowners deserved a complete budget before voting on such a significant increase. Ephros warned that delaying action could ultimately result in an even larger fourth-quarter tax bill, calling it a potential “death blow” for many residents.

Despite the council’s vote, city officials cautioned that the financial problems remain unresolved.

Finance Director Bill Viqueira told council members that New Jersey’s Department ofCommunity Affairs (DCA) will closely oversee the city’s finances and has the authority to reject the city’s budget and impose its own tax rate if necessary.

Mayor James Solomon said state officials have indicated Jersey City may ultimately need a tax increase of approximately 20% to stabilize its finances.

“The state has been clear—the only other solution is mass layoffs,” Solomon told the council.

The budget crisis marks a dramatic reversal for a city that spent more than two decades transforming itself into one of the nation’s fastest-growing urban centers. Luxury residential towers reshaped Jersey City’s waterfront, thousands of businesses opened and tens of thousands of new residents moved across the Hudson River from Manhattan.

According to the mayor’s administration, however, years of rising spending outpaced revenue growth. Budget gaps were filled through one-time solutions including property sales, borrowing and federal pandemic relief funding. Solomon, who took office in January, has argued those temporary measures are no longer available.

The administration originally proposed a 20% property tax increase, estimating it would add roughly $1,666 annually to the tax bill of a median-valued home. Following the approval of state financial assistance and public criticism, the proposal was reduced to 15%.

Even at the lower level, city officials estimated the increase would generate approximately $60 million in recurring annual revenue while still leaving roughly $20 million in additional budget reductions and another $10 million in restricted funding necessary to close the remaining gap.

The administration says it has already reduced spending by approximately $55 million, with additional departmental restructuring planned later this year.

The financial impact extends beyond homeowners. Property tax increases typically translate into higher rents as landlords pass along higher costs to tenants. At the same time, large-scale layoffs of city employees could reduce consumer spending and affect businesses throughout Jersey City’s local economy.

The city’s financial pressures have also drawn attention from the credit-rating industry. Moody’s Ratings downgraded Jersey City in December, citing rising labor costs, increasing healthcare expenses and years of insufficient revenue growth. Higher borrowing costs could make future infrastructure and capital projects more expensive.

Mayor Solomon has also ordered a review of more than 100 long-term tax-abatement agreements, including several involving major waterfront developments. He argues many of the agreements generate little tax revenue while providing limited affordable housing benefits.

The city’s fiscal problems have also become a political dispute between the current and former administrations. Solomon has blamed former Mayor Steven Fulop for relying on emergency borrowing, selling city assets and using approximately $100 million in federal COVID-19 relief funds to finance a one-time property tax reduction rather than addressing long-term structural deficits.

Fulop, who left office earlier this year to run for governor, has rejected those claims and maintains the budget could have been balanced without a major property tax increase.

The $120 million state aid package was included in a broader $358.8 million supplemental appropriations bill tied to Governor Mikie Sherrill’s fiscal 2027 budget. Hudson County lawmakers, including Raj Mukherji and Katie Brennan, helped assemble the legislation.

Mayor Solomon plans to present a revised budget on July 15, with final adoption expected in August. However, because the Department of Community Affairs now has significant oversight authority, the ultimate size of any property tax increase may rest with the state rather than the City Council.

JBizNews Desk | Jersey City
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Ukraine’s armed forces General Staff said Monday that its drones struck the Gazprom Neft–operated Omsk refinery in western Siberia, the largest fuel-processing plant in Russia and a target that had until this week sat far beyond Kyiv’s reach. The facility lies roughly 2,500 kilometers — about 1,550 miles — from Ukrainian-held territory, near the border with Kazakhstan. Vitaly Khotsenko, governor of the Omsk region, confirmed the attack, saying several drones broke through layers of air defense before igniting a fire at the plant.

The strike carried a message as much as a payload. Iryna Terekh, chief executive of the Kyiv-based defense firm Fire Point, said the company’s upgraded FP-1 drones flew the mission and called it a record for strike drones anywhere in the world. Fire Point’s chief designer, Denys Shtilierman, said the newest jet-launched version of the FP-1 can travel more than 2,100 miles, comfortably clearing the distance to Omsk. President Volodymyr Zelenskyy, in his nightly address, described the operation as an important achievement and said Siberia now sits within range of Ukrainian precision strikes.

Two days later, the campaign widened again. On the night into Wednesday, Ukrainian long-range drones hit the Rosneft-operated Saratov refinery, the TANECO and TAIF-NK complexes in Tatarstan, and a Transneft-Ural pumping station near Ufa in Bashkortostan, according to Ukrainian military statements and regional officials. Saratov’s governor confirmed one person was killed and several injured. The pattern is deliberate: Kyiv is now going after refining, petrochemicals and the pipeline logistics that move crude, not just the refineries themselves.

For Vladimir Putin, the harder problem is arithmetic. Russia spans 11 time zones, and its air defenses were built to guard cities and military sites, not thousands of miles of energy infrastructure scattered across the map. Every deep strike forces Moscow to spread limited interceptors and radar over a far larger area, and the Omsk hit proved that even Siberia — long treated as a safe rear — is no longer off the target list.

The economic damage is already visible at the pump. Gasoline production has fallen roughly 17% to about 850,000 barrels a day, according to Russian government statistics, and analysts estimate that between a fifth and a quarter of the country’s refining capacity is now offline. The International Energy Agency this week called the level of disruption unprecedented in the history of the war. The Omsk plant’s main crude-distillation unit, which accounts for a large share of its output, was reported knocked offline, and the plant processes more than 20 million tons of oil a year.

That shortfall is rippling through daily life. By late June, more than 50 of Russia’s 83 regions were reporting fuel rationing or supply disruptions, with drivers in Moscow waiting hours to fill up and some stations limiting purchases to 20 to 30 liters per car. Crimea has seen sales to ordinary motorists halted outright. The government has banned gasoline and jet-fuel exports, is weighing a diesel export ban, and has loosened fuel-quality rules to keep lower-grade product flowing. To plug the gap, Moscow has started importing gasoline from Kazakhstan and Belarus and is exploring larger purchases from India.

The strain is showing up in the broader economy. The Bank of Russia has flagged rising gasoline prices as an inflation risk, with the rate running near 6% against a 4% target, and the government has cut its 2026 growth forecast to just 0.4%. Repairs are slow and costly because many refineries need specialized imported equipment that sanctions have made hard to source; the Moscow-area Kapotnya plant is expected to stay offline into next year.

The global market has stayed surprisingly calm about the Russian damage, largely because a separate shock is dominating traders’ attention. Brent crude traded near $78 a barrel on Wednesday, up sharply on the week, though the move was driven mainly by renewed U.S.-Iran hostilities and fresh worries over the Strait of Hormuz rather than events in Siberia. Russia’s Urals grade continues to sell at a discount to Brent, and with export terminals and shadow-fleet tankers now under attack, the risk is that Russian barrels reaching market keep shrinking.

There is a cross-border wrinkle for energy buyers, too. Gazprom said Wednesday that drones struck the Krasnodarskaya pumping station, which feeds the Blue Stream pipeline carrying gas to Turkey, though it said exports were not interrupted. Blue Stream and TurkStream are the last pipeline routes moving Russian gas into Turkey and onward toward Central Europe, and repeated hits on that infrastructure keep a tail risk hanging over those supplies.

For now, the race is between Ukraine’s attackers and Russia’s repair crews. Kyiv has struck all 11 of Russia’s largest gasoline producers, and with longer-range drones and domestically built missiles entering the mix, Moscow’s ability to patch and reroute is being tested as never before. Whether that pressure bends the Kremlin toward talks, or simply deepens the pain at Russian gas stations, is the question now hanging over every barrel.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Mortgage rates moved higher this week, adding another hurdle for homebuyers as renewed tensions in the Middle East pushed oil prices and Treasury yields upward.

According to Zillow, the average interest rate for a 30-year fixed-rate mortgage rose to 6.72% on Thursday, up from 6.66% a day earlier, marking one of the highest levels in recent weeks.

The increase follows renewed fighting involving Iran, which has driven crude oil prices higher and fueled concerns that inflation could remain elevated for longer.

Higher inflation expectations typically push Treasury yields upward, and mortgage rates closely follow movements in the 10-year U.S. Treasury note.

As Treasury yields climbed this week, mortgage lenders responded by increasing borrowing costs for new home loans.

The move comes during the heart of the summer homebuying season, when many families traditionally purchase homes before the new school year begins.

While Freddie Mac’s weekly mortgage survey reported a lower average rate earlier in the week, daily market pricing has moved noticeably higher as geopolitical events unfolded.

Housing analysts say the broader outlook for mortgage rates remains uncertain.

Recent comments from Federal Reserve officials indicate policymakers continue watching inflation closely, making near-term interest-rate cuts less likely if price pressures persist.

Although the latest employment data showed slower hiring growth, economists say inflation remains the primary factor influencing long-term borrowing costs.

Higher oil prices also threaten to increase transportation and manufacturing costs, creating additional inflationary pressure throughout the economy.

For homebuyers, the impact is immediate.

Every increase in mortgage rates raises monthly payments and reduces purchasing power, making homes less affordable for many first-time buyers.

Housing affordability remains near multi-decade lows as elevated borrowing costs combine with limited housing inventory and still-high home prices.

Many homeowners also remain reluctant to sell because they locked in mortgage rates near 3% during previous years.

Selling today would often require replacing those loans with mortgages carrying rates more than twice as high.

That “lock-in effect” continues limiting the supply of existing homes available for sale, helping keep home prices elevated despite slower buyer demand.

Real estate economists expect mortgage rates to remain above 6% through much of the year unless inflation eases significantly or financial markets begin anticipating Federal Reserve rate cuts.

Some housing markets are showing modest signs of improvement as inventory slowly increases and sellers become more willing to negotiate pricing.

Still, affordability remains a major challenge across much of the country.

For buyers who remain active, financial experts continue recommending mortgage preapproval, comparison shopping among lenders and locking interest rates once purchase contracts are signed to reduce exposure to further market swings.

For the housing market, renewed geopolitical uncertainty has become another factor influencing borrowing costs alongside inflation, Federal Reserve policy and economic growth.

Unless inflation moderates or global tensions ease, mortgage rates are likely to remain elevated, keeping pressure on affordability for millions of prospective homebuyers.

This article is for informational purposes only and should not be considered financial advice.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Germany recorded an estimated 5,120 heat-related deaths during the first half of the year, the Robert Koch Institute said Thursday, July 9, as the country’s public health agency warned that increasingly severe heat waves are becoming both a growing health emergency and a mounting economic burden.

According to the Robert Koch Institute’s latest weekly report, about 4,270 of the deaths were among people aged 75 and older. Women accounted for more fatalities than men, largely because they make up a greater share of Germany’s oldest population. The total already exceeds Germany’s annual average of roughly 2,900 heat-related deaths recorded between 2023 and 2025.

Most of the deaths occurred during a single week of extreme temperatures between June 22 and June 28, when much of Germany experienced its most intense heat of the year. The institute estimated that approximately 4,310 heat-related deaths occurred during that week alone, compared with about 810 deaths recorded from early April through June 21.

Temperatures climbed above 40 degrees Celsius (104 degrees Fahrenheit) in several parts of the country, with a new national high of approximately 41.3 degrees Celsius recorded near Saarbrücken. Public temperature displays in Berlin also registered about 41 degrees Celsius during the heat wave.

Germany’s experience reflects a broader trend across Europe. The Copernicus Climate Change Service, the European Union’s climate monitoring agency, reported Thursday that Western Europe experienced its hottest June on record, with average temperatures reaching 20.74 degrees Celsius. France, Belgium, Spain and the Netherlands together also reported more than 4,700 excess deaths during the same late-June heat wave.

Beyond the tragic loss of life, economists warn that extreme heat is increasingly weighing on Europe’s economy. Many German homes, hospitals and care facilities were built for a cooler climate and lack widespread air conditioning, forcing governments and businesses to invest heavily in cooling systems, building upgrades and public-health protections.

Allianz Trade estimates that climate-related losses could reduce the European Union’s cumulative economic output by 5% to 7% between 2026 and 2030. Germany alone could face economic losses of approximately $131 billion during that period, according to the insurer’s projections.

Industries that rely on outdoor labor face some of the greatest risks. Construction, agriculture, transportation and delivery services all experience productivity declines as temperatures rise, while recurring drought conditions continue to pressure crop yields and food production across Europe.

The European Central Bank has previously warned that prolonged drought and extreme heat contribute to higher food prices and slower economic growth. Officials increasingly view climate-related disruptions as both an inflation risk and a long-term challenge for economic planning.

As climate events become more frequent, businesses are also confronting rising insurance costs, higher energy demand for cooling, increased workplace safety requirements and disruptions to supply chains. Many economists now view extreme heat as an ongoing business risk rather than an occasional weather event.

German officials expect the death toll to increase further as additional reports from the hottest days of the summer are finalized.

For businesses, insurers and governments alike, Thursday’s report underscores that extreme heat is no longer simply an environmental issue—it has become an increasingly important economic challenge affecting productivity, infrastructure, healthcare spending and long-term growth across Europe’s largest economy.

JBizNews Desk | Berlin
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Europe is accelerating efforts to build its own payment network and reduce its dependence on American financial giants Visa Inc. and Mastercard Inc., turning what was once a long-term policy goal into a strategic economic priority. European Central Bank President Christine Lagarde has emerged as the initiative’s strongest advocate, arguing that Europe cannot claim true economic sovereignty while relying on foreign-controlled payment systems.

The concern is backed by significant market share. Visa and Mastercard together process an estimated $24 trillion in transactions annually, while handling roughly 61% of euro-area card payments. In 13 of the eurozone’s 21 member states, cross-border card transactions rely exclusively on international payment networks. European officials increasingly view that dependence as both an economic and geopolitical vulnerability.

At the center of Europe’s response is Wero, a digital payment platform launched in 2024 by the European Payments Initiative (EPI). The service began by offering instant person-to-person transfers before expanding into online payments. In-store tap-to-pay capability is scheduled to roll out during 2026 and 2027. The platform has already attracted more than 43 million users across Germany, France and Belgium while processing billions of euros in transactions, with additional expansion into the Netherlands, Luxembourg and Spain.

Momentum increased earlier this year when the European Payments Initiative reached an agreement with the EuroPA Alliance, connecting national payment systems including Spain’s Bizum, Italy’s Bancomat, Portugal’s MB WAY and the Nordic Vipps MobilePay platform. Together, the partnership links roughly 130 million users across 13 European countries, allowing consumers to make payments across borders without routing transactions through American card networks.

The financial incentives are substantial. Traditional card networks generally charge merchants interchange and processing fees, while Wero relies on the Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) instant payment infrastructure to move money directly between bank accounts. For retailers processing millions of transactions each year, even modest savings can translate into significant reductions in payment costs while keeping customer payment data within Europe’s banking system.

European policymakers are advancing broader reforms alongside the new payment network. The European Parliament has backed development of a digital euro targeted for introduction later this decade, while major European banks continue developing a euro-backed stablecoin. Updated European Union payment regulations have also expanded open-banking access and tightened fee rules, increasing competition with established card providers.

The challenge remains significant. Mastercard alone has more than 900 million branded cards in circulation across Europe, far exceeding Wero’s current user base. Adoption has also been gradual in some markets. Analysts note that consumers generally choose payment methods based on convenience, speed and reliability rather than questions of economic sovereignty, meaning any new platform must match the seamless experience customers already expect.

Supporters argue that recent geopolitical events have strengthened Europe’s resolve. The suspension of Visa and Mastercard operations in Russia following the 2022 invasion of Ukraine demonstrated how globally dominant payment networks can become tools of international policy. Combined with broader trade tensions between Europe and the United States, policymakers say the experience reinforced the need for independent European payment infrastructure.

For businesses, the outcome could eventually mean lower transaction costs and greater control over payment data. For consumers, the success of Europe’s strategy will depend on whether the new payment systems prove as convenient and reliable as the global networks they are attempting to challenge.

JBizNews Desk | Brussels

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh named 15 economists, former central bankers and business leaders on Thursday, July 9, to lead five task forces reviewing how the U.S. central bank operates, launching one of the broadest internal examinations of the Federal Reserve in years.

The Federal Reserve said the panels will work independently while drawing on Fed staff for support. Their mission is to evaluate key areas of the central bank’s operations and deliver recommendations to the Federal Open Market Committee by the end of the year.

The review comes less than two months after Warsh became chairman. He first announced the initiative following the Fed’s June policy meeting, saying the institution should examine whether its communications, policy tools and economic models remain effective in a rapidly changing economy.

The list of outside advisers includes some of the biggest names in economics, finance and technology. Among them are venture capitalist Marc Andreessen, Microsoft executive Asha Sharma, former Bank of England Governor Mervyn King, former Reserve Bank of India Governor Raghuram Rajan, former Central Bank of Brazil President Arminio Fraga, Harvard University economists Greg Mankiw, Karen Dynan, Jeremy Stein and Raj Chetty, Stanford University economist Charles Jones, Nobel Prize-winning economist Thomas Sargent, former Walmart Chief Executive Doug McMillon, and University of Chicago economist Kevin Murphy.

The task forces will focus on five major areas: Federal Reserve communications, the central bank’s balance sheet, economic data and forecasting, productivity and artificial intelligence, and the framework the Fed uses to measure and respond to inflation.

“I am honored that the best minds from a range of disciplines have agreed to work with us to sharpen our performance as an institution,” Warsh said in the Fed’s announcement.

One of the most closely watched reviews will examine the Fed’s roughly $6.7 trillion balance sheet. Any future recommendations to speed or slow the reduction of those holdings could influence interest rates, bond markets and borrowing costs throughout the economy.

Another task force will study how advances in artificial intelligence and productivity should influence monetary policy. Economists have increasingly debated whether AI-driven productivity gains could allow stronger economic growth without generating additional inflation, potentially giving the Fed more flexibility when setting interest rates.

The review also arrives as businesses, investors and consumers closely watch the timing of future rate cuts. Any changes to how the Fed measures inflation, interprets economic data or communicates policy decisions could affect financial markets and borrowing costs for mortgages, auto loans and business financing.

Before becoming chairman, Warsh had publicly argued that the Federal Reserve needed significant institutional changes. Thursday’s announcement signals a more collaborative approach, bringing in outside experts while emphasizing that any recommendations will still require approval from the Fed’s governors and regional bank presidents before implementation.

Market analysts said the broad review could eventually reshape how the Federal Reserve communicates with investors and how it approaches future monetary policy decisions.

Scott Clemons, chief investment strategist at Brown Brothers Harriman, described the effort as one of the most significant institutional reviews the Fed has undertaken in years. Rick Rieder, chief investment officer of global fixed income at BlackRock, said the initiative could mark the beginning of a new chapter for U.S. monetary policy.

While no immediate policy changes were announced, Thursday’s action signals that the Federal Reserve is preparing for a comprehensive reassessment of how it conducts monetary policy in an economy increasingly shaped by technological change, shifting labor markets and evolving inflation dynamics.

The task forces are expected to complete their work later this year, with recommendations then considered by Federal Reserve policymakers.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Citigroup launched a new capability allowing instant cross-border U.S. dollar payments between global banks, the company announced Thursday, July 9, marking a major step toward around-the-clock international payments for corporate clients. The first live transaction sent funds from a Citigroup account in the United Kingdom to Siam Commercial Bank in Thailand over the July 4 holiday weekend, when U.S. banks are typically closed.

The payment was initiated by Phillip Securities Thailand, a client of Siam Commercial Bank, and settled in U.S. dollars in near real time despite the American holiday, according to Citigroup. The Thai bank is one of roughly 300 financial institutions connected to Citigroup’s global instant-payments network, which operates within the bank’s Services division and supports multinational corporations and institutional clients.

The milestone expands the bank’s instant-payment capabilities beyond transfers between accounts held within Citigroup itself. Until now, the company’s fastest international dollar transfers were largely limited to accounts inside its own network. Those internal transfers already process approximately $1 billion each day, the bank said.

“This milestone reflects the growing demand from clients for real-time cross-border payments that extend beyond a single banking network,” Debopama Sen, Citigroup’s head of payments, said in the announcement.

The new capability is powered by technology the bank has spent the past year developing. Siam Commercial Bank became the first financial institution to connect to Citigroup’s combined 24/7 USD Clearing and Citi Token Services platform. Together, the systems allow participating banks and their customers to send and receive U.S. dollar payments 24 hours a day, seven days a week, including weekends and holidays.

Traditionally, international U.S. dollar payments have depended on domestic banking hours and clearing windows, often delaying transactions until the next business day. The new platform removes those constraints, allowing businesses to move funds whenever needed.

For multinational companies, the benefits extend beyond convenience. Instant settlement reduces idle cash, improves liquidity management, and gives treasury departments greater flexibility in managing global operations across multiple time zones. Businesses can free working capital immediately rather than waiting through weekends or holidays for payments to clear.

The launch also strengthens Citigroup’s competitive position as financial institutions race to modernize cross-border payments. Fintech firms have increasingly challenged traditional banks by offering faster international money movement, prompting major banks to invest heavily in always-on payment infrastructure.

Citigroup has estimated that global cross-border payment flows could approach $250 trillion over the coming years. The bank has identified real-time payments as a core part of its long-term strategy to maintain its leadership in international transaction services.

Chief Executive Jane Fraser has made expanding the bank’s Services business a central priority as Citigroup continues its broader restructuring. The division provides treasury, trade, securities and payment services to corporations, governments and financial institutions across more than 180 countries and jurisdictions.

For partner banks such as Siam Commercial Bank, joining the network provides access to continuous U.S. dollar clearing without having to build comparable infrastructure independently. Their customers gain access to faster settlement while maintaining existing banking relationships.

Industry analysts view the Thailand transaction as an important proof of concept for global banking. While the payment involved a single partner institution, Citigroup’s network already includes approximately 300 connected banks, creating the foundation for broader adoption of real-time international dollar payments.

As demand for faster global commerce continues to grow, financial institutions are increasingly expected to provide payment services that operate continuously rather than only during domestic banking hours. Thursday’s announcement signals that instant, cross-border U.S. dollar payments are moving beyond pilot programs and becoming a practical commercial offering.

For businesses operating internationally, the ability to move money across borders in seconds instead of days could improve cash management, reduce financing costs and simplify global operations. As additional banks join the network, real-time international payments are expected to become an increasingly standard feature of global banking.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Israel handed the United States fresh intelligence indicating that Iran was weighing a new plan to assassinate President Donald Trump, according to a report published Thursday by The Wall Street Journal, which cited people familiar with the exchange. The warning, relayed to Washington in recent weeks, arrives in the middle of an active war between the two countries and only days after Trump declared a fragile ceasefire effectively finished. Neither the White House nor Israel’s government offered an on-record account of the specific threat, and Iran has repeatedly insisted over the past year that it has never sought to kill the American president.

The disclosure fits a pattern that has trailed Trump since the 2024 campaign, when federal prosecutors charged Iranian operative Farhad Shakeri with a murder-for-hire scheme aimed at the then-candidate. In March, a Brooklyn jury convicted another man, Asif Merchant, on terrorism and murder-for-hire charges tied to an Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps plot against U.S. officials. Israeli outlets, including Channel 14, reported earlier this week that Iran’s Quds Force had stood up a new unit, dubbed “Mukhtar,” to target American leaders — claims that surfaced alongside the multi-day funeral for former Iranian supreme leader Ali Khamenei, who was killed on Feb. 28 in a joint U.S.-Israeli strike. Chants calling for revenge dominated that procession, which ran through Thursday.

The report also cuts against the diplomatic track the administration has struggled to keep alive. Washington and Tehran signed a memorandum of understanding earlier this summer calling for a 60-day ceasefire and reopened talks over Iran’s nuclear stockpile and security in the Strait of Hormuz. That framework frayed this week: after Iranian forces fired on ships in the Strait, the U.S. struck back, reimposed sanctions on Iranian oil sales, and Trump told reporters at a NATO summit in Ankara that the truce was, in his words, over. Iran’s military answered with strikes on U.S. installations in Bahrain and Kuwait. Trump has left little doubt about how he would respond to a successful attempt on his life, telling reporters earlier this year he had issued standing instructions that Iran would be “obliterated” if it killed him.

For all the weight of the headline, Wall Street treated the news calmly. The S&P 500 rose 0.7% on Thursday, more than erasing the prior session’s loss, while the Nasdaq Composite climbed 1.2% and the Dow Jones Industrial Average added roughly 119 points, or 0.2%, in late trading. That steadiness held even as the fresh U.S. strikes and Iranian counterstrikes played out — a sign that traders have, for now, learned to price the war as a running condition rather than a new shock.

Oil told the clearest story. Brent crude, the international benchmark, fell 2.2% to about $76.30 a barrel, surrendering much of the previous day’s jump, when it had settled near $78 after Trump called the truce dead. U.S. West Texas Intermediate had spiked above $73 on Wednesday. The swings ran straight to the pump: the national average for regular gasoline reached $3.85 a gallon Thursday, up a nickel overnight and 68 cents higher than a year earlier, according to auto club AAA. Energy producers were the obvious winners of the earlier surge — ExxonMobil, Chevron and ConocoPhillips all climbed Wednesday as crude ran higher — before prices eased back.

The deeper worry sits beneath the water. A genuine return to full conflict threatens tanker traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, the chokepoint that moves a large share of the world’s seaborne crude. That fear is sharpened by thin cushions at home: U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve stocks fell this week to their lowest level since 1983, leaving Washington less room to blunt a supply shock. Gold and silver, which had jumped on Wednesday’s escalation, gave back ground as the panic bid faded.

Attention is now shifting to earnings. The largest U.S. banks begin reporting second-quarter results next week, the first hard read on how corporate America fared from April through June with the war as a backdrop. PepsiCo offered an early, uneven signal Thursday, falling 3.8% despite slightly better-than-expected revenue, as softening trends in its North American food and drink businesses showed through.

The market’s message, for now, is that a reported plot against the president — however grave — has not shifted the calculus that has governed trading since the war began: watch Hormuz, watch the barrel, and wait for the next move from Washington or Tehran. Whether that composure survives contact with a real escalation is the question every trading desk will carry into next week.

JBizNews Desk | Washington © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Body runs ~780 words. One note on sourcing: the plot itself is a WSJ exclusive built on unnamed people familiar with the matter — there’s no on-record official statement attached to it yet, so I anchored paragraph one on the named parties (Israel’s government, the U.S., Trump) and flagged the denial rather than inventing an official. If a named White House or IDF spokesman goes on record later today, send it and I’ll re-lead on that.

PepsiCo Inc. is putting its iconic Quaker Oats brand into a bottle, launching a whole-grain oat shake that consumers prepare themselves as the company targets growing demand for high-protein, portable breakfasts, according to a company announcement released Tuesday.

The new product, Quaker Oat Shake & Go, comes as a dry oat mix packaged inside a single-serve bottle. Consumers simply add cold milk, a milk alternative or water to a fill line, replace the cap, shake the bottle until blended and drink directly from it. The product will debut nationwide this month in Strawberry Banana and Cinnamon Vanilla flavors and will be stocked alongside traditional Quaker hot cereals at major U.S. retailers.

Each serving contains 15 grams of protein, 16 grams of whole grains and 3 grams of fiber. When prepared with eight ounces of milk, the protein content increases to 23 grams, according to the company. The product requires no refrigeration before preparation and contains no artificial preservatives, flavors or added colors.

James Wade, chief marketing officer for Quaker Foods, said the launch is designed to bring the brand’s oat-based nutrition into a format that better matches today’s fast-paced lifestyles. He emphasized that the shake is intended to complement a consumer’s daily routine rather than replace a full meal.

The introduction fits into a broader strategy at Purchase, New York-based PepsiCo to expand its portfolio of products built around functional nutrition. Over the past year, the company has introduced a variety of higher-protein and higher-fiber products, including protein instant oatmeal, protein granola bars, protein rice crisps, protein Doritos and prebiotic beverages sold under both the Pepsi and poppi brands. Quaker Oat Shake & Go extends that strategy into one of the fastest-growing segments of the breakfast market.

The timing reflects changing consumer habits. According to research cited by Quaker, most Americans now prepare breakfast in less than five minutes, while many are actively seeking foods containing higher levels of protein and fiber without adding extra preparation time. Drinkable breakfasts and other portable nutrition products have become increasingly popular among consumers who skip traditional sit-down meals but still want convenient options they perceive as healthier. The trend has also created new merchandising opportunities for grocery stores, convenience retailers and vending operators.

This is not Quaker’s first attempt to enter the beverage category. PepsiCo introduced a Quaker Oat Beverage in the United States in 2019 but discontinued the product less than a year later. This time, however, the company is emphasizing protein, convenience and functional nutrition rather than marketing the product primarily as a plant-based beverage. Executives appear to be betting that today’s stronger consumer interest in protein-rich foods gives the concept a better chance of success.

The move also reflects a broader shift across the packaged-food industry. Major consumer brands are increasingly adding protein and fiber claims to well-established product lines rather than creating entirely new brands. Protein has become one of the grocery industry’s strongest marketing trends, expanding far beyond traditional nutrition products into chips, cereals, beverages and snack foods. By extending the trusted Quaker Oats brand into the drinkable breakfast category, PepsiCo hopes to capitalize on growing consumer demand while leveraging nearly 150 years of brand recognition.

For shoppers, the appeal is simple: a shelf-stable breakfast requiring no bowl, spoon or overnight preparation that can be mixed with whatever liquid is available. Whether Quaker Oat Shake & Go succeeds where the company’s earlier oat beverage fell short will likely depend on pricing, taste and whether consumers embrace the combination of convenience, protein and whole grains as part of their daily breakfast routine.

PepsiCo is scheduled to report quarterly earnings later this month, when investors are expected to look for signs that the company’s growing emphasis on functional foods is translating into stronger sales.

JBizNews Desk | Purchase, New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

.

Federal regulators believe that after an earlier remember involving the same automobiles failed to solve the issue, Kia is is issuing a new recognize for more than 460, 000 vehicles.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration announced on Thursday that the recall affects 462 869 Kia Telluride cars from the ages 2020 to 2024.

Due to the possibility of fire while driving or parked, users are advised to area inside and aside from other vehicles and structures.

HONDA RECALLS MORE THAN 325 000 Cars FOR POTENTIAL CASH RISK

For the same problem, the exact cars were recalled in 2024.

The change may be dislodged, misaligned, or damaged, causing the chair motor to continue operating and overheating if the front energy seat slide cover or knob is struck or unwittingly struck.

The past recall’s poor repair also could cause the motor to start overheating and catch fire.

Seat vehicles and 11 instances of desk fires have been reported.

Lincoln RECALLS MORE THAN 110, 000 MUSTANG VEHICLES OVER WINDSHIELD WIPER AND DRIVETRAIN Flaws

FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO: Press HERE.

On August 13, owners may receive letter of alert.

Owners can then get their vehicles to a Kia vendor where an electronic wire assembly may be installed to stop the seat motor from working continuously if the seat switch is damaged, misaligned, or otherwise misaligned privately.

This post was originally published here

, but they are slightly higher.

Freddie Mac, a lease customer, reported on Thursday that while mortgage rates increased this week, they have remained relatively stable over the past few weeks.

The benchmark 30-year fixed mortgage’s average interest rate increased to 6.49 % from last week’s 6.43 % reading, according to Freddie Mac’s most recent primary mortgage market survey, which was released on Thursday.

A 30-year fixed-rate loan had a rate of 6. 72 % a year ago on regular.

Landlord, HOMEOWNER, AND OTHER HOUSING AFFORDABILITY TO IMPROVE. Projections Web

According to Freddie Mac’s chief economist Sam Khater,” the 30-year fixed-rate mortgage averaged 6.49 % this week.”

Although mortgage rates have never significantly changed recently, Khater continued to see improvement in home value and economic growth as homebuyers look for homes in the current market.

A 15-year set mortgage’s ordinary rate increased somewhat to 5.82 %. That’s an improvement over last week’s 5.79 %, but it’s still below the previous week’s average of 5.86 %.

RECORD DECLINE IN HOME ASKING PRICES OFFERS AFFORDABILITY BOOST BUYERS

The Federal Reserve and politics are just two examples of how mortgage rates are affected by various aspects. Mortgage rates closely monitor the 10-year Treasury yield, despite not being directly affected by the Fed’s interest level choices. As of Thursday evening, the supply for the 10-year was only 4.5 %.

The most recent mortgage information comes as consumers ‘ housing market conditions have improved a little bit, with many of them watching as inventory increases and mortgage rates remain relatively flat.

Realtor.com released a mid-year update to its 2026 housing market forecast, which predicts that home prices will increase by 1.2 % this year, which is lower than the previous forecast and slower than the current rate of inflation. In other words, home prices may actually be falling in inflation-adjusted conditions.

Developers SAY THAT THE GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS ADD ABOUT$ 132K TO THE COST OF NEW HOMES.

The business has proven to be resilient in the face of both old and new challenges. In consequence, the housing market’s second quarter of 2026 was more stable than momentumful,” according to Realtor.com senior economist Danielle Hale.

According to Hale,” the housing market is moving forwards as sellers update their expectations, price growth slows, and buyers gain more negotiating leverage.” We anticipate momentum to increase as more neglected buyers and sellers find solutions that work for both sides as the year progresses.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

A rebound in inflation brought on by the Iran conflict, which could have prevented interest charges from being cut in the first quarter of the year, which is expected to keep mortgage rates at the same degree as they were when they were at when they ended in 2025, is expected to remain unchanged.

This post was originally published here

Tellers and bankers at a Wells Fargo branch in Egg Harbor, New Jersey, voted 5-4 on Wednesday to keep their union, according to unofficial results tallied by the National Labor Relations Board. The single-vote margin defeated a petition to decertify the Communications Workers of America unit the employees had formed in February 2024, and it broke a run of Wells Fargo branches that had spent much of this year cutting ties with the same union. The matter is docketed at the labor board as Case No. 04-RD-388660.

The outcome is small in raw numbers but pointed in its timing. Every other recent test of worker sentiment inside the bank had gone against the CWA. Workers at five branches across five states have dissolved their unions since the winter, including a Wells Fargo location in Seaside Park, New Jersey, and another in Casper, Wyoming. Earlier this year, employees at a branch in Connecticut voted the union down in the only certification election Wells Fargo has seen in 2026. Against that backdrop, the Egg Harbor vote is the first time in months that a decertification drive at the bank has failed.

Union organizing is close to unheard of in American banking. Fewer than one in a hundred bank employees is represented by a union, a share that has held for years. That is what made the CWA campaign notable: between 2023 and 2024, workers at 28 Wells Fargo locations voted to join Wells Fargo Workers United, the CWA affiliate behind the drive, in what labor advocates billed as the first serious union push at a major U.S. lender. The question ever since has been whether those wins would spread across the industry or stall out.

The momentum has clearly cooled. There were only four branch elections at Wells Fargo in 2025, down sharply from the burst of activity the year before. The petition to unwind the Egg Harbor unit was filed with free legal help from the National Right to Work Legal Defense Foundation, a nonprofit that represents workers seeking to remove unions and has been involved in most of the recent Wells Fargo cases. The group backed the Egg Harbor petition and four of the five successful decertifications elsewhere.

Decertification votes are uncommon on their own terms. The labor board fields only a few hundred petitions to remove a union each year, against thousands of certification elections, and they tend to succeed most easily at small workplaces — which describes nearly every Wells Fargo branch that has organized. The units are tiny, often fewer than ten non-managerial employees, so a handful of departures or a couple of changed minds can tip a branch either way. Egg Harbor, decided by one vote out of nine cast, is a plain case in point.

The foundation has argued that some unionized Wells Fargo employees soured on the CWA because the union has not landed a single contract with the bank since the first branch organized in late 2023. More than two years in, none of the unionized branches has a ratified agreement. The union tells a different story, accusing Wells Fargo of dragging out talks and refusing to bargain in good faith. Last month the CWA filed an unfair labor practice complaint with the labor board accusing the bank of making unilateral changes to working conditions at the Egg Harbor branch without first bargaining with the union.

Wells Fargo has not answered that complaint and did not comment on Wednesday’s vote. The bank has generally denied wrongdoing in the dozens of cases the union has filed against it, many of which have since been withdrawn or thrown out. The CWA and the National Right to Work Legal Defense Foundation did not respond to requests for comment.

The fight sits on top of the workplace complaints that fueled the organizing wave in the first place: thin staffing, pay that workers say has not kept up, and steady pressure to hit sales targets — the same pressure that produced the bank’s unauthorized-accounts scandal a decade ago and still shadows its branches. Those grievances have not gone away. But this year’s results suggest that frustration with the bank and frustration with the union can push workers in opposite directions.

For Wells Fargo, the result is a rare setback in a year that has mostly broken its way on the labor front, and it keeps at least one organized branch on the board as contract talks grind on. For the CWA, holding Egg Harbor by a single vote is thin comfort, but it stops the bleeding and preserves a foothold the union can point to as it presses the bank to negotiate.

In the legal lineup, Jerry Walters of Littler Mendelson represented Wells Fargo, Nicholas Hanlon appeared for the CWA, and Bart Valad of the National Right to Work Legal Defense Foundation represented the worker who brought the petition. The labor board’s tally stays unofficial until certified, and either side can file objections. What happens next at the bargaining table — where nothing has been signed in more than two years — will say more about the campaign’s future than any single 5-4 count.

JBizNews Desk | Egg Harbor, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Wall Street pushed higher on Thursday as a sharp rebound in semiconductor stocks and a retreat in oil prices carried the major indexes back into the green, even as the United States and Iran traded fresh military blows across the Middle East. The Nasdaq Composite led the advance, closing up 1.30%, or 336.24 points, at 26,206.89. The S&P 500 rose 0.81%, or 60.93 points, to 7,543.64. The Dow Jones Industrial Average added 139.02 points, or 0.27%, to 52,487.41. The small-cap Russell 2000 gained 1.22%, or 36.15 points, to 2,992.54, nearly matching the Nasdaq’s pace after lagging badly the day before.

The bounce reversed part of a punishing Wednesday, when the Dow shed 576.76 points, or 1.09%, and the S&P 500 slipped 0.28% after President Donald Trump told the NATO summit in Turkey that the U.S. ceasefire with Iran was over and oil prices spiked. Thursday brought no letup in the fighting — the U.S. launched airstrikes on roughly 90 Iranian targets and Tehran retaliated against U.S.-allied Gulf countries, according to reports cited by the Associated Press — yet investors chose to look through the conflict and back toward the artificial-intelligence spending boom that has driven equities all year. The willingness to buy despite the headlines marked a shift from the risk-off crouch of the prior session.

The clearest expression of that mood was in chips, which had been the market’s biggest drag earlier in the week. The iShares Semiconductor ETF climbed more than 5%, and a broader Bloomberg gauge of chipmakers rose about 4%. Micron Technology jumped 4.5% after announcing plans to spend as much as $250 billion building new U.S. plants to meet AI-driven demand. Sandisk popped 7.6%. The rally helped repair some of the damage in the PHLX Semiconductor Index, which had fallen roughly 16% from its June 22 peak and dropped below its 50-day moving average for the first time since early April. Notably, the pivot came at the expense of the megacap “hyperscalers”: the Roundhill Magnificent Seven ETF slipped 0.6% as money rotated out of the largest AI platform names and into the chipmakers that supply them.

Much of the day’s attention centered on SK Hynix, the South Korean memory giant set to price its U.S. offering Thursday and begin trading Friday. Demand ran hot, with the listing reported to be more than seven times oversubscribed, and the stock closed 5.3% higher in Seoul ahead of the debut — a fresh signal that appetite for anything tied to AI memory and data-center buildout remains strong even against a wartime backdrop.

Market movers. PepsiCo fell 1.8% to about $140 after mixed second-quarter results. The company posted adjusted earnings of $2.20 a share, a penny short of the $2.21 analysts expected, though revenue rose 6.4% from a year earlier to $24.18 billion on strong international sales. Drug stocks swung hard on trial data: Ionis Pharmaceuticals tumbled about 21% and British partner AstraZeneca dropped nearly 8% — its worst day since March 2020 — after their heart-disease drug Wainua failed to meet its primary goal in a late-stage study, while Alnylam Pharmaceuticals surged 17.5%. Defense contractor CACI International fell 7.7%. Among analyst calls, Citi‘s Jason Basinet cut his Netflix price target to $100 from $115 but kept a buy rating, citing soft viewership and the market’s shift toward semis. KeyBanc Capital Markets downgraded Salesforce to sector weight from overweight and pulled its target, saying it saw no clear momentum catalyst. S&P Global Ratings downgraded Oracle one notch to BBB-, the lowest rung of investment grade, on rising business risk and weaker cash flow, though the stock still advanced.

Commodities and volatility. Oil gave back a chunk of Wednesday’s surge as traders weighed whether the flare-up stays contained. Brent crude fell more than 2% after topping $78 a barrel the day before, and West Texas Intermediate slid toward $72. The CBOE Volatility Index, Wall Street’s fear gauge, dropped 6.3% to 15.84 after jumping to 16.90 on Wednesday. Gold rose about 1.2% to roughly $4,132 an ounce as some investors kept a safe-haven hedge in place. In the bond market, Treasury yields held firm rather than retreating: the 30-year yield stayed above the 5% mark at about 5.08%, reflecting lingering worry that renewed energy-price pressure could keep inflation sticky — the same concern flagged in minutes from the Federal Reserve’s June meeting, which showed some policymakers open to another rate hike if price growth stays elevated.

On the economic calendar, the National Association of Realtors reported that existing-home sales unexpectedly fell in June, a reminder that higher-for-longer rates continue to weigh on housing even as equities climb.

Overseas markets firmed alongside New York. The pan-European Stoxx 600 closed up about 0.8%, led by basic resources up 3.2% and technology up 2.8%. Germany’s DAX rose 0.83%, France’s CAC 40 gained 0.9% and Italy’s FTSE MIB added 1.1%, while the U.K.‘s FTSE 100 slipped 0.2%. In Asia, Japan’s Nikkei 225 rose 1.4%, South Korea’s Kospi added 0.62%, mainland China’s CSI 300 gained 2.5% and Hong Kong’s Hang Seng fell 0.5%.

The unresolved question is whether the market’s composure lasts. Some strategists warned that investors may be growing numb to an on-again, off-again conflict that still carries real economic weight. Vikas Dwivedi, global energy strategist at Macquarie Group, said he expects the tensions to prove relatively short-lived because both countries face practical limits, but cautioned against chasing the rally given a large underlying oversupply in oil that he said leaves room for prices to fall once the current standoff eases. Others put inflation at the center of the risk: renewed Middle East pressure on energy, stacked on top of heavy AI investment and resilient consumer spending, could keep price growth stubborn through the back half of the year and leave the door open to a Fed rate increase before December.

For now, the focus turns to Friday’s SK Hynix debut and to next week, when June’s Consumer Price Index and congressional testimony from Fed Chair Kevin Warsh land alongside the first big bank earnings, including JPMorgan Chase.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Minority-owned and woman-owned businesses in Newport News, Virginia, won only a small fraction of the city’s contracting dollars over a five-year period compared with the number of qualified firms available to perform the work, according to an independent disparity study presented to the Newport News City Council during a June 23 work session.

The study, conducted by BBC Research & Consulting and presented alongside Sheila White, the city’s director of finance, examined more than $814 million in construction, professional services and goods contracts awarded between July 2019 and June 2024. The review measured how much work went to small and diverse businesses, how many qualified firms existed in the marketplace and whether significant gaps suggested barriers to participation.

The findings showed substantial disparities. Researchers used a disparity index that compares the percentage of contract dollars awarded to a business group with that group’s estimated availability in the marketplace. An index below 0.80 is widely recognized as indicating substantial underutilization and may support an inference that barriers to participation exist.

Minority-owned businesses collectively received just 1.8% of the city’s contracting dollars despite representing an estimated 14.9% of available firms, producing a disparity index of 0.12. White woman-owned businesses received 3.4% of contract dollars compared with 10.4% availability, resulting in an index of 0.33. Service-disabled veteran-owned businesses recorded the lowest participation, with a disparity index of just 0.04. Every category examined in the study fell well below the accepted 0.80 benchmark.

Individual business groups experienced similar results. Black-owned businesses received 1.0% of contract dollars despite representing 5.2% of available firms. Hispanic-owned businesses received 0.5% compared with 2.8% availability. Asian-Pacific-owned businesses captured 0.2% of contract spending despite representing 4.6% of the marketplace. Businesses owned by individuals of Middle Eastern and North African descent received virtually no contracting dollars during the study period.

Researchers also found city contracting dollars were concentrated among a relatively small number of vendors. For contracts valued below $1 million, just 12.9% of participating businesses received half of all contract dollars awarded, a pattern researchers said can make it more difficult for newer and smaller businesses to compete for government work.

City officials emphasized that the study measures outcomes rather than making legal findings of discrimination. Under federal law, race- or gender-conscious contracting programs generally require evidence demonstrating identifiable barriers to participation. Disparity studies such as this one are commonly used by state and local governments to determine whether additional contracting programs may be legally justified.

In response to the findings, Newport News is preparing to launch a new initiative known as Bridge Forward Business Access, designed to expand opportunities for small businesses and firms owned by minorities, women, veterans and individuals with disabilities. The City Council reviewed the proposal during its work session and is expected to vote on the program later this month. Officials say increasing participation by qualified businesses will strengthen competition, improve procurement and support broader economic growth throughout the community.

The Newport News study reflects a broader trend seen across the country. Similar disparity studies have been conducted by numerous cities, counties and state governments, including a recent statewide review in Virginia examining contracting practices across state agencies and public universities during the same July 2019 through June 2024 period. Such studies have become the primary analytical tool governments use when evaluating supplier diversity initiatives and defending them against legal challenges.

For minority business owners, the report provides quantitative evidence supporting long-standing concerns that public contracting opportunities remain concentrated among an established group of vendors. Whether the proposed Bridge Forward Business Access program narrows those gaps will depend on the final policies adopted by the City Council, including outreach efforts, procurement practices and ongoing measurement of participation. Supporters say success will ultimately be measured by whether public contracting opportunities more closely reflect the diversity of qualified businesses available to compete.

JBizNews Desk | Newport News, Virginia

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Mexico is pressing the Office of the U.S. Trade Representative (USTR) to exempt more of its exports from a proposed U.S. tariff tied to forced labor, as federal hearings on the measure opened this week in Washington and a separate tariff deadline approaches later this month, according to the Mexican Economy Ministry and USTR filings.

The dispute centers on a proposal announced by the U.S. Trade Representative on June 2 under Section 301 of the Trade Act of 1974. Following an investigation into labor enforcement practices across 60 economies, the agency concluded that many trading partners had failed to adequately prevent imports produced with forced labor. It proposed additional tariffs of 10% on imports from 15 countries, including Mexico, and 12.5% on goods from the remaining countries under review.

U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer said countries that fail to block forced-labor goods create an unfair competitive disadvantage for American workers and manufacturers. Public hearings before the agency’s Section 301 Committee began Tuesday and continue through Thursday following the close of the written comment period.

Mexico quickly sought to minimize the impact. After consultations with USTR officials in early June, the Mexican Economy Ministry said products qualifying under the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA) rules of origin—representing roughly 85% of Mexico’s exports to the United States—would remain exempt from the proposed 10% tariff. Products already covered under separate Section 232 national security tariffs, including automobiles, steel and aluminum, also remain outside the scope of the proposal, although many of those products continue to face tariffs of up to 50% under separate trade actions.

That leaves approximately 15% of Mexico’s exports potentially subject to the new tariff, and it is that remaining share Mexico is attempting to protect. Economy Minister Marcelo Ebrard is leading negotiations with U.S. officials during a 45-day consultation period, arguing that Mexico has strengthened efforts to prevent forced-labor goods from entering its supply chains and deserves broader exemptions.

The legal backdrop adds urgency to the negotiations. The proposed Section 301 tariffs are widely viewed as replacing earlier duties that encountered legal challenges. A 25% tariff imposed on many Mexican imports under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (IEEPA) was later struck down by the U.S. Supreme Court, while a temporary 10% surcharge imposed under Section 122 of the Trade Act is scheduled to expire around July 24. Many trade analysts believe the administration intends to have the Section 301 framework ready before that deadline to preserve tariff authority under a more durable legal basis.

Unlike traditional labor disputes, the proposal focuses less on Mexico’s domestic labor practices and more on preventing goods produced with forced labor in third countries—particularly China—from entering the United States through Mexican supply chains. Business groups have expressed concern that companies could increasingly bear the burden of proving their supply chains are free of forced labor before products are allowed into the U.S. market.

The administration has also attempted to limit the impact on American consumers. The proposal includes dozens of pages of product exemptions covering numerous food products, agricultural goods and industrial materials. Items including certain coffee, bananas, tomatoes and selected metals would either remain exempt or face lower tariff rates. A special quota system would also allow limited volumes of qualifying textile and apparel imports to enter under reduced duties.

The tariff discussions come as the United States and Mexico continue broader negotiations over the future of the USMCA trade agreement. The two governments completed a second round of consultations in June and are scheduled to meet again on July 20 in Mexico City, where Mexico will also continue pressing Washington to remove the 50% Section 232 tariffs on steel and aluminum exports that have sharply reduced shipments to the United States.

No new forced-labor tariffs will take effect until the Office of the U.S. Trade Representative completes the hearing process and issues a final determination. Until then, manufacturers, importers and cross-border businesses are watching closely as both governments negotiate over one of North America’s most important trading relationships.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

America’s largest airlines are redesigning air travel around their highest-paying passengers, pouring money into first-class cabins, private lounges and luxury perks while the experience for ordinary coach flyers grows tighter and pricier — a divide that industry executives and analysts spelled out this week.

The split is now impossible to miss. At Delta’s newest first-class lounges, open kitchens plate dishes like hamachi crudo, cocktail bars mix drinks to order, and travelers unwind in soundproof pods or on outdoor decks overlooking the tarmac. American Airlines has teamed with the James Beard Foundation to upgrade its lounge menus and redesigned its newest Boeing 787-9 Dreamliners around private business-class suites with sliding doors, lie-flat seats longer than a twin mattress, and amenity kits stocked with premium skincare.

For everyone else, the trip looks different: a line at every step, a café selling $16 sandwiches, a late boarding group, and a cramped middle seat once the overhead bins fill up.

The reason is money. Premium cabins have become the airlines’ most valuable real estate, throwing off outsized revenue from a small share of seats. That has pushed carriers to keep expanding the front of the plane while packing more travelers into the back. The shift didn’t happen overnight. Delta rewrote the industry’s playbook in the early 2010s, using sophisticated pricing tools to sell first-class seats to coach passengers willing to pay a bit more, rather than simply handing them out as free upgrades, said Henry Harteveldt, president of travel advisory firm Atmosphere Research Group.

Not every airline chief accepts the idea that the industry has abandoned regular flyers. United Airlines CEO Scott Kirby pushed back on the notion that carriers chase only big spenders, saying the company is “investing nose to tail for all customers.” He pointed to upgrades such as seatback entertainment and a better mobile app as improvements that reach every traveler, not just those up front.

Still, the direction is clear, and it reshapes what flying costs for families and budget travelers. As airlines devote more space and investment to premium seats, the cheapest fares increasingly arrive stripped of what used to be standard — seat selection, carry-on baggage, the ability to change or refund a ticket — through basic economy fares. The gap between a comfortable trip and a bare-bones one has widened dramatically, and closing it increasingly means paying more.

For the New York region, the trend hits close to home. Newark Liberty International Airport, a major United hub, along with JFK and LaGuardia, funnels millions of travelers into exactly this two-tier system every year. The business traveler who can expense a lounge pass and a lie-flat seat glides through; the family watching every dollar often pays extra just to sit together or bring a roller bag onboard.

The bigger question is where premiumization stops. Airlines have discovered that affluent travelers are willing to pay substantially more for comfort, convenience and exclusivity, and that finding is steadily reshaping aircraft cabins themselves. More premium suites, larger business-class cabins and expanded lounges are becoming the industry’s growth strategy, while economy passengers are asked to pay separately for services that were once included in the ticket price.

For most travelers, the skies remain open. They simply cost more to navigate comfortably than they did just a few years ago.

JBizNews Desk | Chicago

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

AeroVironment Inc. reported record financial results and announced a major new U.S. Army contract in updates released during the first week of July, sending shares sharply higher and reinforcing investor enthusiasm for companies developing next-generation military technologies. The drone manufacturer has emerged as one of Wall Street’s strongest-performing defense stocks as governments worldwide increase spending on unmanned aircraft, counter-drone systems and advanced battlefield technology.

The company’s latest earnings report highlighted one of the strongest years in its history.

For its fiscal fourth quarter, AeroVironment reported revenue of $641.6 million, an increase of more than 130% compared with the same period a year earlier and well above Wall Street expectations. Adjusted earnings also exceeded analyst forecasts, while full-year revenue approached $2 billion, another company record.

Investors were equally encouraged by AeroVironment’s growing backlog of future business.

The company ended the fiscal year with approximately $1.2 billion in funded backlog while booking roughly $2.7 billion in new orders. That strong pipeline reflects increasing demand from governments seeking modern battlefield technologies following years of rising geopolitical tensions and evolving military strategies.

Adding to investor optimism, the U.S. Army awarded AeroVironment a $500 million contract to supply advanced counter-drone systems through 2029. The award further strengthens the company’s position as one of the Pentagon’s leading suppliers of unmanned and autonomous defense technologies.

Chief Executive Officer Wahid Nawabi described the current fiscal year as transformational for the company, pointing to recent acquisitions that significantly expanded AeroVironment’s technology portfolio. Those acquisitions broaden the company’s capabilities beyond its well-known Switchblade loitering munitions into advanced defense electronics, autonomous systems, directed energy and next-generation aerospace technologies.

While AeroVironment initially built its reputation through small tactical drones used by military forces around the world, management believes some of its fastest future growth may come from defending against drones rather than launching them.

Counter-drone technology has become one of the defense industry’s fastest-growing markets as militaries increasingly seek systems capable of detecting, tracking and neutralizing unmanned aircraft. Governments worldwide continue investing billions of dollars in these capabilities following lessons learned from recent conflicts where inexpensive drones have demonstrated outsized battlefield impact.

Wall Street has taken notice.

Shares of AeroVironment have surged following the earnings release, making the company one of the strongest performers in the aerospace and defense sector. Investors increasingly view companies specializing in drones, artificial intelligence, autonomous systems and electronic warfare as beneficiaries of long-term defense modernization programs.

The broader defense industry has experienced similar momentum.

Growing military budgets across the United States, Europe and Asia continue supporting demand for advanced defense technologies. Rather than focusing solely on traditional military equipment such as tanks and fighter aircraft, governments are allocating increasing resources toward software, autonomous systems, surveillance platforms and precision technologies.

For investors, AeroVironment represents a broader shift occurring throughout the defense sector.

Modern warfare increasingly depends on unmanned systems, artificial intelligence, electronic warfare and networked battlefield communications. Companies supplying those technologies are attracting higher valuations as investors anticipate years of sustained government spending.

The implications extend well beyond one company.

Suppliers throughout the defense technology ecosystem—including semiconductor manufacturers, software developers, communications companies and advanced electronics firms—stand to benefit as military modernization accelerates globally. Defense procurement is becoming increasingly technology-driven, creating opportunities for companies operating far beyond traditional aerospace manufacturing.

Despite the company’s strong performance, management cautioned that government contracting remains dependent on budget approvals and procurement timing. Delays in congressional appropriations or shifts in defense priorities could affect the pace of future contract awards.

Still, AeroVironment’s latest results reinforce a larger trend reshaping both the defense industry and financial markets. Investors are increasingly rewarding companies developing the technologies expected to define future conflicts, positioning drone manufacturers and defense technology firms among the sector’s fastest-growing businesses.

JBizNews Desk | Arlington, Va.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The global pharmaceutical industry is experiencing one of its busiest acquisition periods in years, with drug manufacturers announcing roughly $134 billion in mergers and acquisitions during the first half of 2026, according to PitchBook and other industry trackers. The wave of deals has already surpassed the value of all pharmaceutical acquisitions completed during 2025 and reflects an industry racing to replace future revenue before some of its biggest blockbuster medicines lose patent protection.

The acquisition surge has produced more than 30 billion-dollar transactions during the first six months of the year, making 2026 one of the strongest years for pharmaceutical dealmaking in recent memory.

Driving the activity is what industry executives call the “patent cliff.”

Over the next several years, patents protecting many of the world’s highest-selling medicines will expire, allowing lower-cost generic drugs and biosimilars to enter the market. Once exclusivity ends, pharmaceutical companies often see billions of dollars in annual revenue disappear as competition quickly drives prices lower.

Rather than relying solely on internal research, many companies are choosing to purchase promising biotechnology firms already developing the next generation of treatments.

One of the year’s largest transactions involves Sun Pharmaceutical Industries, which agreed to acquire Organon, headquartered in Jersey City, New Jersey, in an approximately $11.75 billion deal. The acquisition strengthens Sun Pharma’s global presence while adding an established portfolio of women’s health and specialty medicines.

The New Jersey connection highlights the state’s continued importance as one of the world’s leading pharmaceutical hubs.

Often called the “Medicine Chest of the World,” New Jersey remains home to numerous major pharmaceutical companies, biotechnology firms and research facilities. Large transactions involving New Jersey-based companies continue reinforcing the state’s central role in global life sciences.

Several other major acquisitions have reshaped the industry this year.

AbbVie announced a multibillion-dollar acquisition of Apogee Therapeutics, expanding its immunology pipeline as it prepares for future competition facing some of its largest products. GSK, Merck and Eli Lilly have also completed or announced significant acquisitions designed to strengthen future drug portfolios across cancer treatments, immunology, obesity therapies and neurological diseases.

The obesity market has become one of the industry’s hottest areas.

Growing demand for GLP-1 weight-loss medications has triggered intense competition among pharmaceutical companies seeking new treatments capable of competing in what analysts expect to become one of healthcare’s largest markets. More than one hundred experimental obesity medicines remain under development worldwide, making biotechnology companies attractive acquisition targets.

Cancer treatments continue attracting significant investment as well.

Many recent acquisitions involve companies developing next-generation oncology drugs, targeted therapies and precision medicine technologies that pharmaceutical giants hope will replace revenue from older medicines approaching patent expiration.

For patients, the acquisition wave carries both opportunities and concerns.

Large pharmaceutical companies often possess the financial resources, manufacturing capacity and global distribution networks necessary to bring promising medicines through final clinical trials and regulatory approval. Acquisitions can therefore accelerate commercialization of new therapies that smaller biotechnology firms might struggle to develop independently.

At the same time, healthcare economists caution that continued industry consolidation could reduce competition in some therapeutic areas and potentially influence long-term drug pricing if fewer companies control larger portions of the market.

The broader business implications are equally significant.

Biotechnology startups continue attracting billions of dollars in venture capital investment because successful innovation increasingly leads to acquisition by larger pharmaceutical manufacturers. That cycle continues fueling research into treatments for cancer, Alzheimer’s disease, autoimmune disorders and other major health conditions.

Industry analysts expect acquisition activity to remain strong throughout the remainder of 2026 as pharmaceutical companies continue preparing for upcoming patent expirations. With substantial cash reserves still available across many major drug manufacturers, observers believe additional multibillion-dollar transactions remain likely before year-end.

For consumers, today’s corporate acquisitions may ultimately determine tomorrow’s medicines. Many of the treatments expected to reach pharmacies later this decade are changing hands today, making this historic buying spree one of the pharmaceutical industry’s most consequential periods in years.

JBizNews Desk | Jersey City, N.J.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to a recent announcement from Canada’s Department of Finance, a group of allied governments is moving ahead with plans to establish the Defence, Security and Resilience Bank (DSRB), a multilateral financial institution designed to help member nations finance military modernization and defense projects. The proposed bank, modeled after the World Bank, would provide long-term financing for weapons procurement, military infrastructure and defense manufacturing while helping participating countries borrow at lower costs. Canada has agreed to host the institution’s headquarters.

The proposal comes as defense spending across the Western alliance accelerates at the fastest pace in decades. At its recent summit, NATO members committed to increasing defense expenditures toward 5% of gross domestic product over the coming years, placing significant pressure on government budgets already strained by higher borrowing costs and slowing economic growth.

The International Monetary Fund, in its April World Economic Outlook, warned that the renewed global military buildup could significantly increase public debt while forcing governments to make difficult fiscal choices. The IMF found that major defense expansions historically add roughly 14 percentage points to national debt-to-GDP ratios within three years while placing pressure on spending for healthcare, education and other domestic priorities.

Supporters argue the DSRB offers a practical solution. Like other multilateral development banks, member governments would contribute capital, allowing the institution to secure top-tier credit ratings and raise funds in global debt markets at favorable interest rates. The bank would then lend those proceeds to participating nations over extended periods, making expensive defense investments more affordable while helping smooth annual budget pressures.

Backers also hope the institution will attract significant private-sector investment. By providing guarantees and co-financing arrangements, the DSRB could encourage commercial banks and institutional investors to participate in defense projects that have traditionally relied almost entirely on government funding. Officials have discussed an initial lending capacity approaching $135 billion, with additional private capital expected to expand the bank’s overall financing power.

The proposal reflects a broader shift in how governments view defense spending. Rather than treating military investment solely as a security expense, policymakers increasingly describe it as an industrial policy capable of supporting manufacturing, technology development and skilled employment. Defense companies, aerospace manufacturers, electronics suppliers and advanced materials producers all stand to benefit from a more predictable pipeline of long-term financing.

One proposal under discussion would use frozen Russian central-bank assets held in Europe as part of the bank’s capitalization, though that idea remains politically sensitive and has not been adopted. Supporters argue such an approach would reduce the financial burden on taxpayers while helping fund Ukraine’s long-term security and allied defense capabilities.

For financial markets, the bank could create an entirely new category of government-backed defense financing, opening opportunities for institutional investors while providing manufacturers with greater certainty as they expand production capacity. Large defense contractors, suppliers and commercial lenders could all benefit if governments begin financing procurement through a permanent multilateral institution rather than relying exclusively on annual appropriations.

Questions remain over governance, membership, lending criteria and how much private capital will ultimately participate. Even so, the direction is becoming increasingly clear. As geopolitical tensions reshape national priorities, allied governments are not only increasing military spending — they are building the financial infrastructure needed to sustain it for decades to come.

JBizNews Desk | Ottawa

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

José Batista Sobrinho S.A., the world’s largest meat company, has formally stepped back from its promise to reach net-zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2040, in a filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission that drew wide attention this week. The disclosure marks the clearest retreat yet from a climate commitment the Brazilian giant once promoted as a first for the global meat industry.

José Batista Sobrinho S.A. first announced the goal in March 2021, and global chief executive Gilberto Tomazoni reinforced it at a New York Times event in September 2023, saying the company aimed for net zero by 2040 rather than 2050 because it recognized the urgency. In the recent filing, the company frames that ambition far more cautiously, acknowledging that achievement of a goal of this magnitude was never under the control of any one company and noting the legal exposure the pledge has created.

That exposure is real. In February 2024, New York Attorney General Letitia James sued José Batista Sobrinho S.A., alleging it violated state consumer-protection laws with “sweeping representations” about a net-zero goal the state said the company had no actual plan to achieve. The two sides settled in late 2025, with the company agreeing to present “net zero by 2040” as a goal rather than a pledge or commitment, disclose specific actions and conduct annual internal reviews for three years, funded by a $1.1 million settlement supporting climate-smart agriculture in New York.

The company’s claims had already begun to shift. In January 2025, global chief sustainability officer Jason Weller told Reuters the 2040 target was an “aspiration” and “was never a promise that José Batista Sobrinho S.A. was going to make this happen,” citing the company’s limited control over farms and customers. The company later said its climate ambitions had not changed.

The challenge is rooted in the company’s supply chain. By José Batista Sobrinho S.A.’s own reporting, Scope 3 emissions — chiefly from suppliers — account for 97% of its total greenhouse gas footprint, while its estimated methane emissions exceed those of oil giants ExxonMobil and Shell. In March 2024, the Science Based Targets initiative, widely regarded as the leading benchmark for corporate climate goals, removed the company from its register after it failed to submit a validated emissions-reduction plan.

The retreat comes at a sensitive moment for the company’s finances. José Batista Sobrinho S.A. listed on the New York Stock Exchange in 2025, completing a comeback after paying billions of dollars in fines to Brazilian and U.S. authorities to settle bribery and corruption cases. The listing expanded the company’s access to American capital markets as it continued investing in new facilities, including operations in Nigeria and expanded U.S. beef production.

Environmental groups quickly criticized the latest disclosure, arguing they had warned for years that the company was using the net-zero commitment to improve its public image while continuing business largely unchanged. They point to reported links to more than 118,000 hectares of Amazon deforestation between 2022 and 2024. The company says it continues investing in supply-chain initiatives, including cattle-tracking systems in the Brazilian state of Pará and programs worth tens of millions of dollars to help farmers reduce emissions.

For the broader food industry, the retreat reflects a wider reassessment of ambitious climate commitments. José Batista Sobrinho S.A. was the first major global meatpacker to announce a 2040 net-zero target, but a growing number of companies across industries are revising environmental goals that proved more difficult to achieve than initially expected. At the same time, regulators in states including New York and California are increasingly requiring companies to support climate-related marketing claims with measurable plans and documented progress.

For shoppers and suppliers, the takeaway is straightforward. Environmental claims attached to beef, chicken and pork products — including brands such as Swift and Pilgrim’s — face growing scrutiny from regulators and investors alike, making documented progress increasingly important alongside public commitments.

JBizNews Desk | São Paulo

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu told a Sunday cabinet meeting on July 5 that the proposed $4.2 billion sale of Israeli shipping company Zim Integrated Shipping Services to Germany’s Hapag-Lloyd is “not on the agenda at all,” throwing the deal into serious doubt and erasing much of the premium built into Zim’s stock. Defense Minister Israel Katz backed him, telling ministers the government still holds a “golden share” in Zim and will use its legal authority to step in if national security requires it.

The turning point came when Deputy Minister Almog Cohen raised the sale during the meeting and warned that handing control to a buyer with Gulf ownership would be a disaster. He said Israel would be giving away the key to its maritime gateway to a company under Qatari and Saudi influence. Days earlier, the Defense Ministry had formally concluded that the deal, in its current form, does not adequately protect Israel’s security interests — a position Katz adopted and disclosed to the media.

Investors reacted fast. Zim shares fell about 6.8% on Monday on the New York Stock Exchange, closing near $23.70 and pushing the company’s market value below $3 billion — well under the $4.2 billion the buyers agreed to pay. The stock now trades at a steep discount to the $35-per-share cash offer, a sign the market sees a real chance the sale never closes.

The deal was signed in February. Under its structure, Hapag-Lloyd would take over most of Zim’s international routes, including lanes between East Asia and the Americas, while Israeli private equity fund FIMI Opportunity Funds, led by Ishay Davidi, would carve out the Israeli operations into a separate company called New Zim. That smaller carrier — roughly a dozen vessels — was designed to satisfy the state’s golden-share rules, which require Zim to keep a fleet of Israeli-owned ships and maintain freight service to and from Israel.

Officials say that is exactly the problem. With few commercial land crossings and a single major international airport, Israel depends on the sea for about 90% of its imports. Critics argue that a slimmed-down New Zim, with limited reach and capacity, could not carry that load during a war or blockade, especially if foreign shipping lines stay away. A Knesset committee earlier warned that Zim vessels played a direct role during the recent conflict, moving ammunition, food and medicine when it mattered most.

The ownership of Hapag-Lloyd has drawn the sharpest objections. Among its largest shareholders are Qatar Holding, an arm of Qatar’s sovereign wealth fund with a 12.3% stake, and Saudi Arabia’s Public Investment Fund, which holds about 10.2%. The Ministry of the Economy wrote that relying on a shipping company whose major owners include states hostile to Israel during a national emergency is completely detached from strategic reality. The Defense Ministry also flagged Chile’s government, a shareholder that has grown increasingly critical of Israel, as an added concern.

Katz confirmed the government retains a golden share that lets it intervene when national security is at stake. The February agreement itself says the transaction cannot close without sign-off from Israeli regulators and the state under that special share, alongside approvals from the Israel Companies Authority and the Israel Competition Authority. That gives the government a hard stop, not merely a voice.

Opposition has been building for months. Before Netanyahu and Katz weighed in, the Economy, Agriculture and Transportation ministries, together with Israel’s Shipping and Ports Authority, had already moved to block the sale. Zim’s workers’ union and the naval officers’ union oppose it as well. Union chairman Oren Caspi called Zim the world’s ninth-largest shipping line, controlling about 40% of Israel’s import and export market, and said it is not an ordinary commercial company.

Hapag-Lloyd is not backing down. A spokesperson said the company still expects to complete the acquisition and is pursuing approvals from regulators and the government, adding that it believes it will receive them all. The German carrier has hired former IDF Chief of Staff Gabi Ashkenazi to help move the bid forward. For Hapag-Lloyd, losing Zim would be a major setback to its growth strategy.

Some parties close to the deal believe the review is being slowed on purpose to push any final decision past Israel’s November elections, leaving it to a future government. FIMI’s Davidi, who has clashed with Netanyahu politically, argues that New Zim would launch debt-free with $700 million in equity and meet every state requirement. For now, the sale sits stalled at the top of Israel’s government, and the market is pricing in the doubt.

JBizNews Desk| Jerusalem © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Hotter, drier weather could nearly double household water bills in some American cities by midcentury, according to a Stanford-led study published July 8 in Nature Sustainability. The research, led by Jennifer Skerker, a doctoral student in civil and environmental engineering, is the first to model how climate change, the cost of new infrastructure and household demand combine to push an already growing affordability problem toward a breaking point.

The team built its model around Santa Cruz, California, a small coastal city that draws almost entirely on local surface water and a single reservoir with barely a year of storage. That makes it unusually exposed to drought and a useful test case, the authors said, because the city has already used up cheaper conservation options such as restricting irrigation and switching to water-efficient appliances.

The numbers are stark. Under a dry-climate scenario, median monthly water bills for the poorest residents could rise from about $60 to $111 in today’s dollars. Paying for the needed infrastructure could push the share of local households above the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) affordability threshold from 19% to 35%. More than 5% of households could end up spending as much as a third of their income on water, forcing hard trade-offs against food, health care and other basics.

“Climate change stresses water supplies and forces utilities to build expensive new infrastructure to maintain reliability,” Skerker said. That construction — desalination plants, water-reuse systems, new pipelines — is costly, and utilities pass the expense on to ratepayers.

How a city pays for resilience matters as much as the climate itself. The study found that a build-early approach adding large desalination capacity delivered reliable supply but at a steep cost to affordability, while a wait-and-see approach kept bills lower but provided reliable water in only six of ten years on average.

“Under today’s financing and regulatory models, climate adaptation and water affordability are on a collision course,” said senior author Sarah Fletcher, an assistant professor at the Stanford Woods Institute for the Environment.

The warning sits atop a longer trend. The average cost of tap water in the United States has risen three times faster than inflation over the past two decades, driven largely by aging pipes and deferred maintenance. Water has long been one of the cheapest lines on a household budget, in part because most communities draw from nearby sources and are shielded from the global forces that move gas and food prices.

That is changing. When Hurricane Helene tore through western North Carolina in 2024, it caused nearly $3.7 billion in damage to the region’s water systems, and in Asheville it took 53 days to restore drinkable tap water to the whole city. In Corpus Christi, Texas, four years of drought pushed the city to approve nearly half a billion dollars for new water sources, and the city manager has said residents will likely see rates double over the next few years.

The researchers said the framework can be applied to other exposed cities, naming Los Angeles, San Diego, San Francisco, and abroad Cape Town and Melbourne. Even places that look secure could grow vulnerable as utilities raise rates.

The finding fits a wider pattern. A separate analysis from MIT Sloan economists Christopher Knittel and Catherine Wolfram, with UCLA’s Kimberly Clausing, estimated that climate change is already adding hundreds of dollars a year to household budgets — more than $1,000 in some regions — through insurance premiums, utility bills and disaster losses, including an average $360 increase in home insurance premiums between 1990 and 2023.

For families, the throughline is simple. The cost of a warming climate is not only wildfires and floods on the news; it turns up on the monthly water, power and insurance bills households pay whether or not they follow the science.

JBizNews Desk | Stanford, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The first deadlines set by President Donald Trump’s executive order on artificial intelligence have now arrived, putting hard dates on a policy the administration spent months shaping. The order, titled “Promoting Advanced Artificial Intelligence Innovation and Security” and signed at the White House on June 2, gave federal agencies 30 days to begin strengthening government cybersecurity systems, with a broader set of actions due by August 1.

The order was notable because the White House substantially revised an earlier draft before it was signed. Trump had postponed a tougher version, telling reporters he did not want regulations that could slow American leadership in artificial intelligence. “We’re leading China, we’re leading everybody, and I don’t want to do anything that’s going to get in the way of that lead,” he said, adding that he did not want the policy to become a barrier to innovation. The final version shortened a proposed government review period for advanced AI models from 90 days to 30 and relies primarily on voluntary industry cooperation instead of mandatory requirements.

The administration’s concern centers on cybersecurity risks posed by increasingly powerful artificial intelligence systems. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent and then-Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell met with major Wall Street executives earlier this year to discuss emerging AI-related cyber threats and the potential risks advanced models could pose to financial institutions and critical infrastructure.

The executive order directs the Department of War and the Committee on National Security Systems to prioritize strengthening cybersecurity protections across their networks within roughly 30 days. It also instructs the Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA) to accelerate protections for civilian federal systems while expanding cybersecurity assistance to state and local governments and operators of critical infrastructure, including community banks, rural hospitals and local utilities.

The next major milestone arrives on August 1. By then, the Treasury Department, the National Security Agency (NSA) and CISA are directed to establish a classified process for determining when an artificial intelligence system qualifies as a “covered frontier model.” The framework also calls for a voluntary process allowing developers to provide the federal government with up to 30 days of early access before releasing certain advanced AI models. The order specifically states that it does not create a mandatory licensing or government pre-approval requirement.

The decision to place the Treasury Department in a leading role reflects the administration’s view that cybersecurity risks now extend well beyond the technology sector into banking, financial markets and the broader economy. The order also instructs the Attorney General to prioritize prosecution of individuals who use artificial intelligence to illegally access, disrupt or damage computer systems under existing federal criminal laws.

The policy marks a significant shift from the administration’s earlier approach. Upon returning to office, Trump rescinded a Biden-era executive order that required leading AI developers to share certain safety testing information with the federal government. The administration also renamed the federal AI Safety Institute, removing the word “Safety” from its title. Some lawmakers have noted that portions of the new executive order revive concepts that had previously been rejected.

Technology industry groups have responded cautiously but positively. Victoria Espinel, president and chief executive officer of the Business Software Alliance, praised the administration for adopting a voluntary, phased approach that encourages collaboration among government agencies, developers and cybersecurity experts. Analysts say that although participation remains voluntary, many companies developing advanced AI systems may feel practical pressure to cooperate because of national security concerns and growing public expectations.

For businesses outside the technology sector, the order carries practical implications. Community banks, hospitals, utilities and other critical infrastructure operators are specifically identified as beneficiaries of expanded federal cybersecurity assistance, while companies developing or deploying advanced AI systems will be watching closely as the August 1 framework begins taking shape.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Costco Wholesale Corporation on Wednesday reported net sales of $29.24 billion for the retail month of June, the five weeks ended July 5, an increase of 10.6 percent from $26.44 billion a year earlier, according to the warehouse retailer’s monthly sales release issued from its Issaquah, Washington headquarters.

The company said comparable sales, a measure that strips out newly opened warehouses, rose 8.8 percent across the business in June. Canada posted growth of 3.7 percent and other international markets rose 4.7 percent. Digitally enabled comparable sales, which cover online orders and delivery, jumped 20.9 percent, extending a long run of double-digit gains in Costco’s e-commerce channel.

A large share of June’s headline growth came from the gas pump rather than the sales floor. Costco said higher fuel prices added roughly 2.5 percentage points to overall comparable sales, with average worldwide selling prices per gallon up about 22 percent from a year earlier. Fuel prices have stayed elevated through the spring and early summer. Stripping out both gasoline and swings in foreign exchange rates, comparable sales still rose, but at a more modest pace, showing that steady member traffic and everyday grocery demand carried the underlying business even without the fuel boost.

For the first 44 weeks of its fiscal year, Costco reported net sales of $250.43 billion, up 10.1 percent from the same stretch last year. Comparable sales for that period rose 8.3 percent, with digitally enabled sales again climbing more than 20 percent. The figures point to a retailer still pulling shoppers through its doors at a time when many chains are fighting to hold traffic against cautious household budgets.

Costco’s model continues to lean on membership fees and repeat visits rather than one-time promotions. The company operates 933 warehouses worldwide as of the June report, including 641 in the United States and Puerto Rico, 115 in Canada and 43 in Mexico, along with locations across Europe, Asia and Oceania. That store base, paired with a renewal-driven membership base, gives the chain a recurring revenue stream that smooths over month-to-month swings in discretionary spending.

Separately, Costco’s board declared a quarterly cash dividend of $1.47 per share on Tuesday. The dividend is payable Aug. 7 to shareholders of record as of the close of business on July 24. The payout signals continued confidence in the company’s cash generation and hands a direct return to shareholders on top of the sales momentum.

Despite the double-digit sales gain, the market reaction was muted, with shares trading in a narrow range after the release rather than rallying on the top-line number. Part of the caution reflects how much of June’s growth was tied to fuel prices, a factor outside the company’s control that can reverse quickly if pump prices fall. Investors tend to focus on the fuel- and currency-adjusted figure as a cleaner read on how the core warehouse business is performing, and that adjusted number, while solid, was less dramatic than the 10.6 percent headline.

For everyday shoppers, the report underscores a pattern that has held for much of the past year. Households have kept filling carts at warehouse clubs, leaning on bulk buying and Costco’s private-label Kirkland Signature brand to stretch grocery budgets as prices for many staples remain higher than they were before the recent stretch of inflation. Fresh foods and core grocery categories have continued to grow, while the company’s ancillary businesses, including gas stations, pharmacies and optical departments, add reasons for members to keep returning.

The June update follows a fiscal second and third quarter in which Costco beat Wall Street expectations on both profit and comparable sales, helped by higher membership fee revenue and steady demand for both essentials and higher-margin discretionary goods. The company has also been pursuing refunds tied to tariffs it paid on imported merchandise, a cost pressure that has weighed on retailers importing goods from abroad.

The next test comes with Costco’s fiscal fourth-quarter and full-year results later this summer, when the company will report full profit figures alongside sales. For now, the June numbers show a retailer holding its ground: growing faster than much of the sector, keeping members loyal and returning cash to shareholders, even as a chunk of the reported growth rests on fuel prices that could ease in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Issaquah, Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

PepsiCo will open the books on its spring quarter Thursday, July 9, and the results could provide one of the clearest signals yet on whether Americans are still willing to pay higher prices for snacks and soft drinks or are finally beginning to push back. The company confirmed it will release second-quarter results before the market opens, with Chief Executive Ramon Laguarta and Chief Financial Officer Steve Schmitt discussing the results with analysts later that morning. The quarter covers the period ending June 13.

Wall Street expects another profitable quarter. Analysts surveyed by Zacks Investment Research forecast earnings of about $2.19 per share on revenue of roughly $23.9 billion, representing approximately 5% sales growth from a year earlier. Other analyst estimates are similar, with consensus earnings near $2.21 per share. PepsiCo earned $2.12 per share during the same quarter last year.

While investors will focus on whether the company meets expectations, the more important question is how PepsiCo achieved those results. Analysts want to know whether sales growth is being driven by customers buying more products or by the company continuing to charge higher prices. That distinction has become increasingly important as consumers face years of elevated grocery costs.

For several quarters, major food and beverage companies have relied heavily on price increases to boost revenue. But there are signs shoppers may finally be reaching their limits. Families are increasingly switching to private-label products, buying fewer discretionary items, or waiting for promotions before making purchases. PepsiCo’s results could help determine whether that trend is accelerating.

Particular attention will be paid to Frito-Lay North America, home to brands including Lay’s, Doritos, and Cheetos. The division has faced growing concerns that demand for snack foods is softening as consumers become more price-conscious. Some analysts have trimmed their price targets for PepsiCo ahead of earnings, and the company’s shares have hovered around $144, a level many technical analysts view as an important support point.

PepsiCo has responded by expanding into faster-growing product categories. The company recently introduced Pepsi Prebiotic, a gut-health soft drink, while also rolling out Gatorade Lower Sugar and additional functional beverage offerings aimed at health-conscious consumers. Investors will be looking for signs these newer products are attracting meaningful customer demand rather than simply adding more options to store shelves.

Costs also remain a key issue. Like much of the food industry, PepsiCo continues to face higher expenses for ingredients, packaging, transportation and tariffs affecting parts of its supply chain. Those higher costs put pressure on profit margins unless the company can successfully pass them on to consumers through additional price increases. Thursday’s report should provide a clearer picture of whether PepsiCo still has that pricing power.

The company enters earnings on relatively solid footing. During the first quarter, PepsiCo reported revenue of $19.4 billion, up 8.5%, while earnings rose to $1.70 per share. Management also reaffirmed its full-year outlook, calling for 2% to 4% organic revenue growth. Investors will be listening closely to see whether executives express greater confidence in reaching the upper end of that range as the second half of the year begins.

PepsiCo also benefits from its broad international operations, where sales have generally outpaced the more mature and highly competitive U.S. market. Continued strength overseas could help offset slower domestic growth if American consumers become more cautious.

For consumers, PepsiCo’s earnings matter far beyond the stock market. The company’s brands—including Pepsi, Mountain Dew, Gatorade, Lay’s, Doritos, Tostitos, and Quaker—are found in millions of American households every day. As one of the world’s largest food and beverage companies, its results often provide an early indication of broader trends across grocery stores nationwide.

If PepsiCo reports that consumers are buying fewer products or increasingly trading down to lower-cost alternatives, it would suggest inflation and higher living costs continue to weigh on household budgets. If shoppers continue purchasing despite higher prices, it could indicate consumers remain more resilient than many economists expected.

Thursday’s earnings also mark the unofficial start of another busy corporate earnings season, with investors looking for clues about the overall health of the American consumer. More than the quarterly numbers themselves, management’s outlook for pricing, demand and the remainder of 2026 will likely determine how investors react.

For shoppers, the message is straightforward: listen closely to what PepsiCo says about consumer behavior. As one of the nation’s largest food companies, its outlook often offers an early glimpse into where grocery prices—and consumer spending—may be headed next.

This article is for informational purposes only and should not be considered investment advice. Analyst estimates are subject to change, and actual results may differ.

JBizNews Desk | Purchase, New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

BOSTON, July 8Vertex Pharmaceuticals announced Wednesday that it has agreed to acquire Crinetics Pharmaceuticals for approximately $10 billion, marking the largest acquisition in Vertex’s history as the biotechnology giant expands beyond its leadership in cystic fibrosis into treatments for rare endocrine diseases. The transaction was announced jointly by both companies and is expected to close during the third quarter of 2026, subject to shareholder and regulatory approvals.

Under the agreement, Vertex will pay $85.00 per share in cash for Crinetics, valuing the San Diego-based biotechnology company at approximately $10 billion, or about $8.8 billion net of Crinetics’ cash on hand. The offer represents a premium of more than 100% over Crinetics’ recent closing price, sending the company’s shares sharply higher as investors welcomed the acquisition.

The purchase significantly broadens Vertex’s pipeline beyond its dominant cystic fibrosis franchise, which has generated billions of dollars in annual revenue but has also increased investor pressure on the company to diversify future growth. The acquisition immediately gives Vertex access to a newly approved commercial product while adding several late-stage drug candidates targeting rare hormonal disorders.

Among the biggest attractions is PALSONIFY, Crinetics’ once-daily oral treatment for adults with acromegaly, a rare disorder caused by excessive growth hormone production. The therapy received approval from the U.S. Food and Drug Administration in 2025 and has also secured regulatory approval in Europe.

Vertex also gains control of atumelnant, an experimental therapy currently in late-stage clinical development for congenital adrenal hyperplasia, with additional potential applications for Cushing’s syndrome. Company executives described the treatment’s clinical results as among the most promising they have seen, believing it could become a major long-term growth driver.

Executives estimate the combined commercial opportunity for the newly acquired portfolio could eventually exceed $5 billion in annual revenue, strengthening Vertex’s position as one of the biotechnology industry’s fastest-growing large-cap companies.

To finance the acquisition, Vertex will use a combination of existing cash and new debt, supported by $4.5 billion in committed bridge financing arranged by Bank of America and Morgan Stanley. Morgan Stanley and Lazard served as financial advisers to Vertex, while Kirkland & Ellis acted as legal counsel.

The acquisition continues an active year for pharmaceutical mergers as large drugmakers seek to replenish future product pipelines ahead of looming patent expirations on blockbuster medicines. Industry leaders have increasingly turned to acquisitions rather than internal development to accelerate growth, particularly in specialty and rare-disease markets where pricing power and long-term demand remain strong.

For patients, the transaction could accelerate global access to innovative therapies as Vertex brings its worldwide commercial infrastructure and financial resources to Crinetics’ growing portfolio. For investors, the deal signals that major biotechnology companies remain willing to pay substantial premiums for high-quality late-stage assets despite broader market volatility and geopolitical uncertainty.

The agreement also reinforces confidence across the biotechnology sector, demonstrating that strategic acquisitions remain a priority even as rising interest rates, inflation concerns and global market turbulence continue to weigh on corporate dealmaking. If approved, the acquisition will become one of the largest healthcare transactions completed this year and a defining milestone in Vertex’s continued evolution into a broader rare-disease powerhouse.

JBizNews Desk | Boston

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Amazon returned to the bond market on Tuesday, filing to raise at least $25 billion to help finance the massive data centers, specialized chips and cloud infrastructure driving its artificial intelligence expansion, marking one of the largest corporate debt offerings of the year.

According to a regulatory filing, the online retail and cloud-computing giant launched an eight-part offering of floating- and fixed-rate notes with maturities ranging from three to 40 years. Amazon said the proceeds will be used for general corporate purposes, including future capital investments and the possible repayment of existing debt.

Investor demand remained strong despite the enormous size of the offering. Orders reportedly peaked at roughly $62 billion before banks tightened pricing and finalized a book of approximately $41 billion, still comfortably exceeding the amount Amazon ultimately sought to raise. Barclays, Goldman Sachs, JPMorgan Chase, and Morgan Stanley led the transaction.

The company also indicated it does not expect to return to the bond market again this year.

Tuesday’s offering is only the latest chapter in Amazon’s unprecedented borrowing campaign. Earlier this year, the company raised approximately $54 billion through bond offerings in the United States and Europe, followed by a $10 billion Canadian debt sale in June. Last November, Amazon also issued $15 billion in U.S. bonds, while its heavily oversubscribed March offering ultimately raised another $37 billion.

The reason for the borrowing spree is equally historic.

Amazon expects capital expenditures to reach approximately $200 billion this year, up dramatically from $131 billion in 2025. Much of that spending is earmarked for expanding data centers, purchasing advanced AI chips, upgrading networking equipment and building the infrastructure required to support growing demand for generative artificial intelligence.

Chief Executive Andy Jassy has repeatedly defended the investment strategy, describing artificial intelligence as a “once-in-a-lifetime opportunity” capable of reshaping nearly every aspect of Amazon’s business.

The spending surge extends well beyond Amazon.

Technology giants including Microsoft, Alphabet, Meta, Oracle, and Nvidia are collectively expected to spend more than $700 billion this year on AI infrastructure, creating one of the largest corporate investment cycles in modern history.

For everyday Americans, those massive debt offerings have a direct connection to retirement savings.

Investment-grade corporate bonds issued by companies like Amazon are widely held by pension funds, insurance companies, mutual funds and many of the bond funds included in 401(k) retirement plans. In effect, millions of retirement savers are helping finance the AI boom while sharing in both its potential rewards and its long-term risks.

Some investors, however, are beginning to question how quickly these enormous investments will generate meaningful returns.

Analysts estimate the largest cloud providers could collectively spend roughly $725 billion on AI-related infrastructure this year alone. While demand for artificial intelligence continues to grow rapidly, Wall Street has increasingly focused on when these investments will begin producing sufficient revenue to justify their extraordinary cost.

The somewhat softer demand for Tuesday’s offering, compared with Amazon’s heavily oversubscribed debt sales earlier this year, suggests some investors may be becoming more selective even as confidence in Amazon’s financial strength remains high.

Fortunately for the company, its balance sheet remains among the strongest in corporate America.

Amazon continues to generate substantial operating cash flow and maintains high investment-grade credit ratings, allowing it to borrow at relatively attractive interest rates even while issuing tens of billions of dollars in new debt.

Still, the sheer pace of fundraising underscores how expensive the AI race has become.

Building hyperscale data centers, purchasing advanced semiconductor processors, expanding cloud capacity and securing enough electricity to power those facilities require capital on a scale rarely seen in the technology industry. Even companies generating tens of billions of dollars in annual profits are increasingly turning to debt markets to help fund the expansion.

Amazon’s second-quarter earnings later this month will provide investors with another opportunity to evaluate whether those investments are beginning to translate into stronger cloud growth and higher AI-related revenue.

For now, Tuesday’s financing sends a clear message: Amazon has no intention of slowing its artificial intelligence ambitions, and Wall Street remains willing to provide tens of billions of dollars to help finance them.

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Investors sharply increased their expectations Wednesday that the Federal Reserve could keep interest rates higher for longer—or even raise them again—after a spike in oil prices renewed concerns that inflation may prove more stubborn than previously expected. The shift followed the release of the Federal Reserve’s latest meeting minutes and a sharp rally in crude oil after renewed tensions involving Iran, according to market pricing and CME FedWatch data.

Markets had entered the week expecting the Fed to remain on course toward eventually lowering interest rates as inflation gradually cooled. That outlook changed after crude prices surged following renewed geopolitical tensions in the Middle East, raising fears that higher energy costs could once again spread throughout the U.S. economy.

International Brent crude settled more than 5% higher Wednesday, while West Texas Intermediate also posted strong gains. Rising oil prices typically filter into gasoline, diesel, transportation and manufacturing costs before eventually reaching consumers through higher prices on everyday goods and services.

Those concerns were quickly reflected across financial markets. Treasury yields climbed as investors adjusted expectations for future Federal Reserve policy, while traders increased the probability that policymakers could delay interest-rate cuts if inflation remains elevated. The move also pressured interest-rate-sensitive sectors of the stock market, particularly technology companies whose valuations are more vulnerable when borrowing costs rise.

Federal Reserve officials have repeatedly stressed that inflation must continue moving sustainably toward the central bank’s 2% target before monetary policy can be eased. Although inflation has moderated significantly from its post-pandemic highs, policymakers have remained cautious, warning that unexpected increases in energy prices could slow or even reverse that progress.

For businesses, higher interest rates carry broad implications. Companies face increased borrowing costs for expansion, equipment purchases and commercial real estate, while consumers typically pay more for mortgages, vehicle loans and credit-card balances. Small businesses, which often rely on financing to fund growth, are particularly sensitive to prolonged periods of elevated borrowing costs.

The latest market reaction underscores how quickly geopolitical events can reshape economic expectations. While the Federal Reserve does not directly target oil prices, sustained increases in energy costs often work their way through supply chains, making inflation more difficult to control and complicating policymakers’ decisions.

Investors will now focus on upcoming inflation reports, employment data and comments from Federal Reserve officials for additional clues about the direction of monetary policy. Should energy prices remain elevated, expectations for lower interest rates could continue to fade, increasing volatility across equity and bond markets.

For Wall Street, Wednesday’s trading served as another reminder that global geopolitical developments can rapidly alter the outlook for inflation, interest rates and corporate earnings. Until oil markets stabilize and inflation shows renewed signs of easing, investors are likely to remain highly sensitive to developments both in Washington and overseas.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The strongest U.S. summer movie season in six years is improving the outlook for AMC Entertainment Holdings Inc. and the broader theater industry, according to a new research report from Macquarie, which raised its 2026 domestic box office forecast following stronger-than-expected ticket sales during the second quarter.

Macquarie said U.S. box office revenue reached approximately $2.97 billion during the second quarter, an increase of about 11% from a year earlier and ahead of industry expectations. The improvement was driven by a series of major theatrical releases, including The Super Mario Galaxy Movie, Michael and Toy Story 5, along with several unexpected box office successes. Based on that performance, the firm increased its forecast for the 2026 North American box office to $9.8 billion, about 13% higher than last year.

For AMC Entertainment, the world’s largest movie theater operator, stronger attendance translates directly into higher ticket sales, concession revenue and improved operating performance. As more seats are filled, theaters generate additional revenue while spreading fixed operating costs across more customers, improving profitability.

The improving industry outlook aligns with guidance previously provided by AMC Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Adam Aron. In recent filings with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, the company highlighted an upcoming release schedule that includes Spider-Man: Brand New Day, Avengers: Doomsday, Moana, Dune: Part Three and The Odyssey. AMC has said it believes the North American box office could exceed 2025 levels by between $500 million and $1 billion, supported by a stronger lineup of major theatrical releases.

Recent attendance trends have reinforced that optimism. AMC reported welcoming more than 5 million moviegoers over the Memorial Day holiday weekend, one of the strongest performances in the company’s recent history. The theater chain also pointed to an extended run of films generating opening weekends exceeding $75 million, providing consistent traffic across its locations.

The stronger business environment has also allowed AMC to improve its financial position. The company raised approximately $350 million through equity offerings this year, increasing liquidity and strengthening its balance sheet as the exhibition industry continues recovering from the disruption caused by the pandemic. While the capital raises diluted existing shareholders, the additional cash provides greater flexibility as AMC continues managing its debt obligations, with no significant maturities scheduled until 2029.

Beyond ticket sales, concession revenue continues to play an increasingly important role in theater profitability. AMC has expanded food offerings at many locations beyond traditional popcorn and soft drinks to include pizza, popcorn chicken, pretzel bites and other premium menu items. Those higher-margin food and beverage sales have become a growing source of revenue as consumers return to theaters.

Despite the improving outlook, challenges remain. The movie theater industry continues to depend on a steady flow of successful film releases, while competition from streaming platforms remains a long-term factor influencing consumer viewing habits. Industry analysts also note that theater operators continue carrying significant debt accumulated during the pandemic years.

Even so, the recent recovery represents the strongest momentum the exhibition business has experienced in several years. A healthy release schedule, stronger attendance and growing concession sales are providing renewed confidence that the theatrical movie business continues to recover as audiences return to cinemas for major blockbuster releases.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK, July 8 — Gold prices extended their decline Wednesday even as renewed tensions between the United States and Iran rattled global markets, signaling that investors are placing greater weight on rising interest-rate expectations than on gold’s traditional role as a safe-haven asset. Trading data from COMEX showed August gold futures settling near $4,157.40 an ounce after another volatile session.

Ordinarily, escalating geopolitical tensions send investors rushing into gold. Instead, the precious metal continued retreating from the record highs reached earlier this year, surprising many market participants. Analysts say the shift reflects changing expectations surrounding monetary policy rather than a reduced appreciation for gold as a defensive investment.

The biggest headwind has been the sharp rise in oil prices. With Brent crude climbing more than 5% Wednesday, investors increasingly believe higher energy costs could reignite inflation, forcing the Federal Reserve to keep interest rates elevated for longer or potentially consider additional tightening if price pressures worsen.

That matters because gold does not generate income. Unlike Treasury bonds or money-market investments, gold pays no interest or dividends. When interest rates rise, income-producing assets become more attractive, reducing demand for precious metals and putting downward pressure on gold prices.

The recent selloff also reflects investor positioning. Earlier this year, concerns surrounding the Middle East, persistent inflation and global economic uncertainty pushed gold to record highs as investors sought protection from market volatility. As those positions become crowded, many institutional investors have begun locking in profits, accelerating the decline.

The stronger U.S. dollar has added another layer of pressure. Since gold is priced globally in dollars, a stronger currency makes bullion more expensive for international buyers, often weighing on global demand and limiting price gains even during periods of geopolitical uncertainty.

For consumers, gold remains an important long-term store of value, but recent trading illustrates that the metal can experience significant short-term swings. Investors who purchased near this year’s highs have already seen notable paper losses, reinforcing that even traditional safe-haven assets carry meaningful market risk.

Jewelry retailers, precious-metal dealers and mining companies also watch gold prices closely. Lower bullion prices can affect retail demand, profit margins and investment activity across the broader precious-metals industry.

Looking ahead, gold’s direction will likely depend on two key factors: whether tensions in the Middle East escalate further and how the Federal Reserve responds to evolving inflation data. A significant deterioration in global security could quickly revive safe-haven buying, while persistently high interest rates may continue to weigh on the metal.

For Wall Street, Wednesday’s trading underscored a changing investment landscape. Rather than reacting solely to geopolitical headlines, investors are increasingly focusing on how those events influence inflation, interest rates and broader monetary policy—factors that now appear to be driving the direction of the gold market more than fear alone.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Midtown Manhattan high-rise where two structural columns buckled on Tuesday was deemed stable on Wednesday, and the New York City Department of Buildings said crews had shored up several floors as some neighboring evacuations were lifted, according to updates from the agency and Mayor Zohran Mamdani’s office.

The building at 235 East 42nd Street, the former global headquarters of pharmaceutical giant Pfizer Inc., is in the middle of one of the largest office-to-apartment conversion projects in New York City’s history, a plan to turn the 37-story tower into roughly 1,600 residential units. The trouble began just before 8 a.m. Tuesday, when the Fire Department of New York (FDNY) received a call about bricks falling from the structure. Construction workers on the 21st floor reported that support columns were beginning to give way, and inspectors later found two bent steel columns, multiple cracks and sagging floors. No injuries were reported, and officials said all workers were accounted for.

The incident triggered a large emergency response, mass evacuations of nearby buildings and street closures on East 42nd and East 43rd Streets between Second and Third Avenues, in a stretch of Midtown near Grand Central Terminal that draws commuters, residents and tourists. The tower sits just blocks from the Chrysler Building and United Nations headquarters.

By Tuesday evening, Department of Buildings Commissioner Ahmed Tigani said temporary shoring had begun, with jacks installed and new steel put in place to stabilize the structure. He said inspectors reached the 21st floor and were confident the emergency work was securing the building, adding that an independent third-party engineer had been brought in to review the situation. Deputy Mayor for Housing and Planning Leila Bozorg said a six-person team inspected the building floor by floor and found no additional movement, calling it an encouraging sign as crews continued working toward the 37th floor.

On Wednesday, Mayor Mamdani said at an unrelated press conference that the building had shown no further movement and that eight floors, from the 18th through the 23rd, had already been shored up by late morning. He said crews would continue working through the day to reach the roof and then reinforce floors down to the ninth. Some evacuation orders affecting neighboring buildings were lifted Wednesday morning, although four nearby buildings remained under vacate orders.

The developer, MetroLoft, said Wednesday that it had identified the problem and was working with the Department of Buildings to complete repairs, maintaining that the building was never at risk of collapse and that no debris fell to the street. Developer Nathan Berman previously described the damage as a routine construction issue and told reporters the buckling was likely caused by additional weight placed on the columns.

City inspection records point to a more serious preliminary assessment. Department of Buildings comments attached to the incident indicate an investigator believed insufficient steel reinforcement, contrary to approved construction plans, may have contributed to the columns buckling. The department ordered all construction work halted except for emergency stabilization performed under full-time supervision by licensed engineers and construction superintendents. Once emergency repairs are completed, officials said a comprehensive structural assessment will be conducted before any additional construction is permitted.

The tower had already attracted regulatory attention before Tuesday’s incident. Public records show the site accumulated roughly two dozen complaints over the past year involving falling material and alleged unsafe working conditions. The developer and property owner are also defendants in an active lawsuit filed by a construction worker who alleges he suffered serious and permanent injuries after a fall at the building in September 2025.

For New York’s commercial real estate market, the incident comes at a pivotal time. Office-to-residential conversions have become a central strategy for addressing the city’s housing shortage while repurposing aging office towers with elevated vacancy rates. The redevelopment of 235 East 42nd Street has been one of the highest-profile examples of that effort. A structural failure during construction is likely to increase scrutiny of engineering oversight, construction practices and regulatory inspections as additional conversion projects move forward.

For now, city officials remain focused on fully stabilizing the building and completing a floor-by-floor structural review. The cause remains under investigation, and the New York City Department of Buildings has indicated a full inquiry will follow once emergency stabilization work is complete. Portions of Midtown surrounding the site are expected to remain partially closed while repairs continue.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TAMPA, Fla., July 8 — A federal judge dismissed Trump Media & Technology Group’s $3.8 billion defamation lawsuit against The Washington Post on Wednesday, ruling that the company failed to produce sufficient evidence that the newspaper acted with the “actual malice” required under U.S. defamation law. The decision came from U.S. District Judge Thomas Barber of the U.S. District Court for the Middle District of Florida, who granted summary judgment in favor of The Washington Post and said a detailed written opinion will follow.

The lawsuit stemmed from a May 13, 2023, Washington Post article titled “Trust linked to porn-friendly bank could gain a stake in Trump’s Truth Social.” The report examined financing arrangements surrounding Trump Media & Technology Group, the parent company of Truth Social, as it sought funding before completing its merger that took the company public.

The article reported that Trump Media had received an $8 million loan from ES Family Trust and stated that the company had paid a $240,000 referral fee to Entoro Securities, a brokerage associated with the transaction. As the litigation progressed, the dispute narrowed to two statements concerning whether that referral fee had in fact been paid.

Judge Barber ruled that Trump Media failed to meet the demanding legal standard established by the U.S. Supreme Court in New York Times Co. v. Sullivan (1964). Under that precedent, public figures must prove by clear and convincing evidence that allegedly defamatory statements were published with actual malice—meaning the publisher either knew the statements were false or acted with reckless disregard for whether they were true.

According to the court, the evidence presented during discovery did not support such a finding. Judge Barber concluded that The Washington Post had conducted a legitimate reporting process before publication, including interviews conducted by reporter Drew Harwell, review of available documents and information provided by former Trump Media co-founder Will Wilkerson. The court found no evidence that the newspaper knowingly published false information or recklessly ignored the truth.

Trump Media argued that a correction added to the article in May 2026 demonstrated the original reporting was inaccurate. The correction acknowledged that discovery had established Trump Media did not pay the $240,000 referral fee referenced in the article while also stating that the original reporting reflected the information available to the newspaper at the time of publication.

Judge Barber rejected the company’s argument, finding that a correction issued years later does not establish actual malice when the article was originally published. The ruling emphasized that mistakes alone are not enough to satisfy the constitutional standard governing defamation claims brought by public figures.

A spokeswoman for The Washington Post welcomed the decision, saying the newspaper was pleased with the court’s ruling and looked forward to reviewing the judge’s full written opinion once it is released. The court also canceled a pretrial conference that had been scheduled for July 13, effectively bringing the case to a close unless an appeal is filed.

The decision comes as Trump Media continues to navigate financial and operational challenges. The company, which trades on the Nasdaq under the ticker DJT, has experienced significant share-price volatility since completing its merger with Digital World Acquisition Corp. in March 2024. Although the company has reported a substantial cash position, investors have continued to focus on its ability to grow advertising revenue, expand subscriptions and develop sustainable long-term earnings.

The ruling also fits into a broader pattern of litigation involving President Donald Trump and media organizations. In recent years, multiple lawsuits filed against national news outlets have been dismissed after courts concluded the plaintiffs failed to satisfy the constitutional actual-malice standard required for public figures seeking defamation damages.

For investors, the immediate financial impact of Wednesday’s ruling is limited. The lawsuit did not represent a core operating asset, nor was any recovery reflected in analysts’ financial models. However, the dismissal closes another lengthy legal battle as management remains under pressure to demonstrate that Truth Social can translate its sizable user base and capital resources into consistent revenue growth and long-term profitability.

The judge’s forthcoming written opinion may offer additional guidance on the court’s reasoning, but for now the ruling underscores the high legal hurdle public companies and public figures face when pursuing defamation claims against major news organizations. From a business perspective, investors are likely to remain far more focused on Trump Media’s operating performance, user growth and monetization strategy than on litigation against the press.

JBizNews Desk | Tampa

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON, July 8 — Oil prices surged Wednesday after renewed military action involving Iran and growing concerns over the security of the Strait of Hormuz, sending energy stocks sharply higher and renewing fears that higher fuel costs could reignite inflation. The move followed statements from the U.S. Treasury Department regarding Iranian oil sanctions and comments from President Donald Trump indicating the ceasefire between the United States and Iran had ended.

International Brent crude settled up 5.43% at $78.19 a barrel after briefly trading above $80, while West Texas Intermediate crude climbed 4.37% to $73.52. The gains marked one of the strongest single-day advances in months as traders reacted to the heightened geopolitical risk surrounding one of the world’s most important oil-producing regions.

The rally quickly spread across Wall Street. Energy producers were among the market’s strongest performers, with shares of Chevron, ExxonMobil, Diamondback Energy, Occidental Petroleum and Valero Energy all moving higher as investors anticipated stronger earnings should crude prices remain elevated.

The latest surge reflects growing concerns that disruptions to shipping through the Strait of Hormuz could tighten global supplies. Roughly one-fifth of the world’s seaborne oil moves through the narrow waterway, making any threat to tanker traffic a major concern for energy markets. Additional attacks on commercial vessels this week reinforced those fears and added a geopolitical premium back into crude prices.

For businesses, rising oil prices extend well beyond the energy sector. Higher fuel costs increase transportation expenses, raise manufacturing costs and eventually push up prices for consumer goods ranging from groceries to household products. Airlines, trucking companies, retailers and manufacturers all face additional pressure when oil remains elevated for an extended period.

The spike also complicates the outlook for the Federal Reserve. Energy prices are a key contributor to inflation, and sustained increases can delay or even reverse progress toward the central bank’s 2% inflation target. Following Wednesday’s rally, traders increased expectations that the Fed may keep interest rates higher for longer if energy-driven inflation persists.

Consumers are likely to feel the impact first at the gasoline pump. If crude prices remain near current levels or continue climbing, retail fuel prices could increase in the weeks ahead, reducing disposable income and placing additional strain on household budgets already facing elevated borrowing costs.

Despite the rally, analysts caution that oil markets remain highly sensitive to geopolitical developments. Any signs of de-escalation could quickly remove the risk premium now supporting prices, while further disruptions to Middle East supply routes could send crude even higher.

For Wall Street, the message was clear. While most sectors struggled with renewed inflation concerns, energy companies once again demonstrated their ability to outperform during periods of geopolitical uncertainty and rising commodity prices. Investors will now closely monitor developments in the Middle East, as well as any additional actions affecting Iranian oil exports, for clues on where crude prices head next.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said Wednesday that Iran had reached out seeking to end the war, telling reporters aboard Air Force One as he returned from a NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey, that Tehran “called a little while ago” and wanted “to make a deal so badly.” He immediately questioned whether the Iranian government was “worthy” of one, leaving the future of the month-old ceasefire in doubt after two days of renewed U.S. military strikes.

The remarks capped a combative day for the president. Earlier at the summit, Trump told reporters, “I’m not sure I want to make a deal,” calling Iran’s leaders “scum” and “liars” and saying U.S. negotiators were “wasting their time.” “We can play games, but I’m not sure I want to make a deal,” he said. “Just finish the job.” Asked why he had shifted so quickly from describing Iran’s leaders as “smart” and “rational” only weeks earlier, Trump replied, “I got to know them.”

The latest escalation began Tuesday when U.S. Central Command (CENTCOM) said Iranian forces attacked three commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s busiest shipping lanes. Shortly afterward, the U.S. Treasury Department revoked the waiver that had allowed Iran to resume oil exports under last month’s truce, cutting off a major source of revenue for Tehran.

CENTCOM said U.S. forces struck more than 80 military targets overnight, including air-defense systems, radar installations, anti-ship missile batteries and more than 60 fast boats operated by Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps. On Wednesday afternoon, the command announced another round of strikes aimed at further degrading Iran’s ability to threaten commercial shipping through the strait.

Trump suggested the campaign could broaden further. He said Washington could restore the naval blockade of Iranian ports that had been lifted under the ceasefire and floated the possibility of seizing Kharg Island, Iran’s principal oil-export terminal. He also raised the prospect of targeting Iran’s electrical grid, saying, “It may be a big attack, and it’ll knock out a lot of stuff. We’ll take them out.”

Despite the tough rhetoric, Trump insisted any renewed military campaign would be brief.

“Anything that happens is going to happen very fast,” he said. “We’re not looking for long-term.”

The president also said he believes he remains a top target of the Iranian government, telling reporters in Ankara, “I’m No. 1 on the kill list for Iran,” before joking that he would rather be “No. 1 on TikTok.” He confirmed he would return to Washington aboard an older presidential aircraft instead of the recently delivered plane donated by Qatar, declining to say whether security concerns influenced the decision. The U.S. Justice Department announced in 2024 that it had disrupted an alleged Iranian plot to assassinate Trump.

Iran forcefully rejected Trump’s characterization of events.

Foreign Ministry spokesman Esmaeil Baqaei accused Washington of violating the June agreement “through its unilateral actions” and said Iran would defend its sovereignty. Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi called Trump a “criminal,” while another Iranian official described the president’s comments as “disgusting.”

Foreign Minister Seyed Abbas Araghchi wrote that insults directed at the Iranian people “do not diminish” the country, adding that Iran responds to provocation “with action.” Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf, who has played a leading role in negotiations, argued that it was the United States that violated the agreement by restoring oil sanctions, declaring, “The era of bullying and extortion is over. We don’t fold.”

Speaking in Milwaukee, Vice President JD Vance defended the administration’s military response and restated its position.

“The basic deal that we cut was we’ll lift our blockade if you stop shooting at ships — but if you shoot at ships, we are going to punch back, and we’re going to punch back harder than ever before,” Vance said. “If they shoot at ships, we’re going to knock the hell out of them, and it’s that simple.”

At the center of the dispute remains the framework signed on June 17 by Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian. The 14-point memorandum halted military operations, reopened the Strait of Hormuz and lifted the U.S. blockade while giving both sides 60 days to negotiate a broader peace agreement. That negotiating window expires in mid-August, with Washington and Tehran now accusing each other of violating its terms.

U.S. envoy Steve Witkoff and presidential adviser Jared Kushner met with mediators in Doha in late June, but no direct talks with senior Iranian officials have been publicly confirmed since then.

For all of the heated rhetoric, Trump stopped short of closing the diplomatic door, saying negotiators “can keep talking if they want.”

Whether Tehran’s reported outreach leads to renewed negotiations or another breakdown may determine whether the ceasefire survives the weeks ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Rivian Automotive and General Motors released their second-quarter vehicle sales during the first week of July, offering two very different snapshots of the U.S. auto market. While Rivian exceeded expectations and raised its full-year delivery forecast, GM remained America’s largest automaker but reported declining sales as demand for electric vehicles slowed following the expiration of federal EV incentives.

Together, the results highlight how the industry is adjusting to changing consumer preferences, new government policies and intensifying competition in both gasoline and electric vehicles.

Rivian delivered 12,194 vehicles during the second quarter, comfortably exceeding both its own guidance and Wall Street expectations. Encouraged by the stronger-than-expected performance, the electric vehicle manufacturer raised its full-year delivery forecast to between 65,000 and 70,000 vehicles, reflecting growing confidence in demand for its expanding lineup.

The company credited continued strength in its R1T pickup, R1S SUV and commercial delivery van business while also pointing to strong early interest in its new R2 sport utility vehicle. Investors welcomed the higher guidance, sending Rivian shares higher following the announcement.

For Rivian, the improved outlook represents another important milestone as the company works toward long-term profitability. Like many newer electric vehicle manufacturers, Rivian continues investing heavily in production capacity while seeking to increase sales volume and lower manufacturing costs.

General Motors painted a different picture.

GM sold 714,896 vehicles in the United States during the second quarter, maintaining its position as the nation’s largest automaker but recording a 4.2% decline from the same quarter a year earlier. It marked the company’s third consecutive quarterly sales decline.

Despite the overall decrease, GM executives emphasized continued strength in traditional trucks and sport utility vehicles. The company reported strong demand for models such as the Chevrolet Silverado, GMC Sierra, Chevrolet Traverse and several other SUV nameplates that continue generating some of its highest profit margins.

Electric vehicles proved more challenging.

GM’s EV sales fell significantly compared with the prior year, reflecting softer consumer demand after the expiration of the federal tax credit previously available on many electric vehicle purchases. Without the incentive, many buyers have delayed purchases or returned to gasoline-powered vehicles, hybrids or plug-in hybrid models.

The contrast between Rivian and GM illustrates how differently manufacturers are experiencing today’s market.

Rivian continues growing from a relatively small production base, allowing new products and increased manufacturing capacity to generate substantial percentage gains. GM, by comparison, manages one of the world’s largest automotive operations, where even modest changes in consumer demand affect hundreds of thousands of vehicle sales.

Another factor is product mix.

While Rivian focuses almost exclusively on premium electric vehicles, GM depends heavily on profitable pickups and SUVs while simultaneously investing billions of dollars to expand its electric vehicle portfolio. That broader strategy provides stability but also exposes the company to changing consumer demand across multiple vehicle categories.

The broader industry continues evolving rapidly.

Automakers worldwide remain committed to electric vehicles, but many are adjusting production schedules, delaying some investments and placing greater emphasis on hybrids as consumers seek lower operating costs without concerns about charging infrastructure.

For consumers, increased competition continues creating more choices than ever before. Buyers shopping for electric vehicles now have access to expanding model lineups across multiple manufacturers, while traditional gasoline and hybrid vehicles remain widely available as companies respond to changing demand.

Investors will now shift their attention to upcoming quarterly earnings reports, where both Rivian and GM are expected to provide additional details about profitability, production plans and expectations for the remainder of the year.

The second-quarter sales reports demonstrate that America’s auto industry remains in the middle of one of its largest transformations in decades. Companies able to balance consumer demand, manufacturing efficiency and evolving technology are likely to be best positioned as the market continues shifting toward its next phase.

JBizNews Desk | Detroit

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Shell told investors on Tuesday that the war in the Middle East sharply reduced its natural gas production during the second quarter, cutting output from its Qatar operations by roughly one-third. Despite the production hit, the energy giant said exceptionally strong trading profits are expected to offset much of the damage when it reports full quarterly earnings later this month.

In a second-quarter trading update released Tuesday, Shell forecast integrated gas production between 610,000 and 650,000 barrels of oil equivalent per day for the April-through-June period. That compares with 909,000 barrels per day produced during the first quarter, representing a decline of roughly 30% that the company directly linked to disruptions affecting its operations in Qatar.

The decline traces back to the Pearl gas-to-liquids facility in Ras Laffan Industrial City, where one of the plant’s two processing trains has remained offline following damage sustained earlier this year. Shell previously indicated repairs could take approximately one year to complete.

Although the production loss is significant, investors focused on another part of Tuesday’s update.

Shell said trading and optimization earnings within its integrated gas division are expected to be significantly higher than in the first quarter, reflecting the extraordinary volatility that has swept through global energy markets.

That helped lift investor sentiment.

Shares of Shell climbed more than 3% in London trading, helping lead the FTSE 100 Index higher as investors concluded that strong trading performance would likely offset much of the production decline.

The pattern has become increasingly common across the global energy industry.

When geopolitical tensions send oil and natural gas prices swinging sharply, the trading desks operated by major energy companies often generate substantial profits by buying, selling and routing energy cargoes around the world. Those gains can offset lower production from disrupted facilities.

Shell, BP, and TotalEnergies all benefited from elevated trading activity during the first quarter, and Tuesday’s guidance suggests that trend continued through the second quarter.

The remainder of Shell’s business also showed signs of improvement.

The company raised its outlook for liquefied natural gas production to between 7.4 million and 7.8 million tonnes, increased its indicative refining margin to approximately $20 per barrel, up from $17 during the previous quarter, and projected chemical margins of roughly $240 per tonne, compared with $139 previously.

Shell also expects a positive working-capital swing of between $1 billion and $6 billion, a significant reversal from the $11.2 billion outflow reported during the first quarter.

The company enters earnings season from a position of considerable financial strength.

Adjusted earnings reached $6.9 billion during the first quarter, the highest level in two years, fueled largely by robust trading activity during periods of heightened market volatility. Shell also increased its dividend by 5%, rewarding shareholders despite ongoing geopolitical uncertainty.

For households and businesses, however, the story looks very different.

The same market volatility boosting profits for major energy companies has contributed to higher fuel prices, increased transportation costs and more expensive utility bills. Price swings in oil and natural gas eventually ripple through the broader economy, affecting everything from airline tickets and freight costs to grocery prices and home heating bills.

The geopolitical backdrop remains highly uncertain.

Energy companies continue monitoring developments across the Middle East as disruptions to shipping routes and production facilities threaten global supply chains. Industry executives have repeatedly emphasized the importance of maintaining reliable export routes, particularly through the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s most important energy corridors.

Investors will receive a clearer picture on July 30, when Shell releases full second-quarter earnings and provides updates on its share repurchase program, dividend policy and progress restoring production at its Qatar operations.

For now, Tuesday’s update illustrates one of the defining realities of today’s energy markets: geopolitical instability can simultaneously reduce production, increase volatility and strengthen trading profits, allowing diversified energy companies like Shell to weather disruptions that might otherwise significantly weaken their financial performance.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The artificial intelligence (AI) boom is causing a fierce bidding war for some luxury homes in the San Francisco Bay Area, with dozens of homes selling more than $1 million above asking price last month.

Mike Simonsen, chief economist at Compass International Holdings, noted in a post on X citing the firm’s analysis of MLS data that there were 44 homes sold in San Francisco that closed at a price at least $1 million above the final asking price. It showed the 44 transactions from June totaled over $60 million in total sales.

The June total marked the continuation of a recent trend after April and May each had a little more than 30 sales that closed at least $1 million over the asking price and totaled over $40 million, while March had 20 such sales that totaled about $30 million.

By contrast, from February 2024 through February 2026, some months saw zero home sales that closed $1 million above the asking price and no month saw more than nine such transactions – which illustrates the rapid intensification of bidding wars in the Bay Area luxury market.

CHATGPT BOOM FUELS A LUXURY HOUSING FRENZY IN BAY AREA

Simonsen said in his post that the data was, “Absolutely BANANAS” and added that it “may be the most useful data in understanding the 2026 San Francisco housing market.”

Most of the homes sold at $1 million or more above their final asking price were sold in San Francisco’s 94114 zip code, which includes neighborhoods such as The Castro, Noe Valley and Dolores Heights.

San Francisco has long anchored the Bay Area’s tech economy and Silicon Valley has surged amid the rapid rollout of AI software serving a wide range of consumer and business purposes. That has contributed to the uptick in demand for luxury homes in the city.

HOUSING AFFORDABILITY UNLIKELY TO RETURN TO MORE FAVORABLE LEVELS OF THE PAST, ECONOMIST SAYS

Joel Berner, senior economist at Realtor.com, told FOX Business that the overall housing market in San Francisco is a “seller’s market” with buyers “competing over a smaller pool of listings, and homes are selling 18% faster than they were last year at this time.”

Across the overall market, the median listing price has actually declined 4.9% from a year ago to $1.137 million, though Berner noted that’s likely due to smaller homes coming onto the market and added, “The luxury tiers (95th and 99th price percentile) of the SF market are seeing stronger price growth than the median.”

CALIFORNIA TECH LEADERS CHALLENGE PROGRESSIVE POLICIES AS BILLIONAIRES, BUSINESSES FLEE: REPORT

“This kind of uptick in buyer activity is consistent with a cash infusion on the buyer side, which we know is occurring as part of the AI boom and the IPOs of several of these companies with presences in the Bay Area,” Berner explained. “Buyers have more money in their pockets, but they’re chasing after the same pool of homes as before as supply has not yet had the chance to meet demand.”

He added that because San Francisco is a “notoriously tough place to build new homes, with pricey and scarce land and high regulatory burdens for builders,” it is “unlikely that a new wave of construction comes to balance the market, so expect seller’s market conditions to continue and prices to start rising significantly.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

Federal Reserve policymakers are increasingly concerned about inflation and the uncertainty about the direction it may take was reflected in the minutes of the Fed’s latest monetary policy meeting released on Wednesday.

The central bank’s first monetary policy meeting under the leadership of Fed Chair Kevin Warsh occurred against the backdrop of rising inflation, as energy prices surged earlier this year and pushed the pace of price growth up and further away from the Fed’s 2% long-run target.

The minutes of the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC), which determines the central bank’s monetary policy moves, showed that while policymakers in June didn’t see a need to raise interest rates immediately amid “high assessed uncertainty” regarding future rate cuts or hikes.

Policymakers voted unanimously to leave the benchmark federal funds rate unchanged at a range of 3.5% to 3.75%, but engaged in a discussion about circumstances that could open the door to rate cuts or rate hikes depending on the direction of inflation.

FED’S FAVORED INFLATION GAUGE ACCELERATED IN MAY AMID ENERGY PRICE SHOCK

“Most participants remarked on scenarios in which inflationary pressures would dissipate and inflation would soon begin to return to 2%. In such scenarios, almost all of these participants noted it would likely be appropriate to maintain or eventually lower the target range for the federal funds rate,” the FOMC explained.

“Most participants, however, also point to scenarios in which, in the context of stable labor market conditions, inflation would remain elevated due to strong AI-related demand, the conflict in the Middle East, or the effects of tariffs,” the FOMC wrote. “In such scenarios, almost all of these participants indicated that some policy firming would likely be warranted to return inflation to 2%.”

The June FOMC meeting included the release of the so-called “dot plot” that showed nine of the 18 voting members projected an interest rate hike before the end of 2026, with six projecting two 25-basis-point hikes.

FEDERAL RESERVE LEAVES INTEREST RATES UNCHANGED AS WARSH ERA BEGINS

The summary of economic projections also revised its forecast for PCE inflation at the end of this year up from 2.7% as of the March projection to 3.6%, reflecting recent inflationary trends.

Warsh has said that he wants to end “forward guidance” in how the Fed communicates about future rate moves and declined to submit his own economic projection as part of the FOMC’s forecasts and post-meeting message.

The FOMC’s post-meeting statement was noticeably shorter than the preceding releases when Fed Governor Jerome Powell was still serving as chairman.

AMERICANS GROW MORE PESSIMISTIC ABOUT FINANCES AS RENT AND FOOD COST FEARS SURGE, FED SAYS

The minutes showed that some policymakers viewed Warsh’s first meeting as “an opportune time to consider significant changes to the FOMC’s post-meeting statement.”

“A majority of participants remarked that they saw advantages in shortening the statement. Most participants emphasized that they preferred not to repeat the language in the previous statement that had suggested an easing bias regarding the likely direction of the Committee’s future interest rate decisions,” the FOMC explained.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here


President Donald Trump said Wednesday that he would fly home from the NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey, aboard the older presidential aircraft rather than the newly delivered Air Force One, announcing in a post on Truth Social that the new plane would instead stop in the United Kingdom so American troops could tour it. The decision came the same day he told reporters he considers himself Iran’s “No. 1 target” for assassination. MEAWW

Speaking at a press conference as he wrapped up the summit, Trump was pressed twice on why he was not taking the new jet on what would have been its first foreign return flight. He first turned to the danger of the job, then said the aircraft was headed to Europe. “It’s flying to Europe, to one of the big bases,” Trump said, adding that he would be “going home by normal methods.” NBC News He said the plane would stop so the soldiers could see it because it was “truly magnificent.”

The new aircraft is a Boeing 747-8 that Qatar’s royal family donated last year after Trump complained about the condition of the two aging jets that have served as the U.S. presidential plane since 1990. Yahoo! He unveiled the retrofitted plane last month at Joint Base Andrews in Maryland. The U.S. Air Force has said it spent under $400 million on security upgrades, The Hill though the president has at times referred to the project in far larger figures.

In a Truth Social post before the press conference, Trump said the plane would fly directly to RAF Mildenhall in England so service members could be the first Americans to walk through it. He said he would fly home in the older plane “for old time’s sake.” PBS

The timing drew immediate scrutiny. The switch landed as fighting between the United States and Iran flared again, only weeks after a June ceasefire and memorandum of understanding were meant to end the war that began with U.S.-led strikes on February 28. Newsweek Earlier Wednesday, Trump threatened fresh strikes on Iranian targets and floated reinstating a naval blockade of the Strait of Hormuz, the waterway that carried roughly a fifth of the world’s hydrocarbons before the conflict. The Hill

Reporters asked directly whether security concerns tied to Iran drove the plane change. Trump did not confirm or deny it. “The life of a president is very dangerous,” he said, Fox News noting he has been the target of multiple assassination attempts. “I’m No. 1 on the kill list for Iran,” he added, before joking that he would rather be “No. 1 on TikTok.” The Hill

The White House has denied that the change in plans is due to any issue with the new plane. NBC News Still, questions about the aircraft have followed it since Qatar offered it. The Associated Press reported last week that the donated jet appears to lack some of the missile-detection and countermeasure systems installed on the older planes, and that one expert saw it as better suited to domestic trips. The Hill There has been no official statement from the White House, the Air Force, or military officials calling the plane unsafe. MEAWW

According to a senior White House official, the plan calls for Trump to fly the former Air Force One from Turkey to Mildenhall, then continue to Joint Base Andrews on the newer jet. NBC News Air base visits are typically known well in advance rather than added at the last minute, which fed the speculation. NBC News

The plane itself remains a stopgap. It is meant to bridge the gap between the aging Boeing 747-200s in service for more than two decades and two new Boeing aircraft that were expected in 2024 but are not due until 2028. The Hill

Around the plane story, the war took center stage. Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth said U.S. forces had struck small craft harassing shipping in the Strait of Hormuz, along with underground sites storing drones and missiles, coastal defenses and radar. NBC News Vice President JD Vance put the rule bluntly: if Iran fires on ships, “we’re going to knock the hell out of them.” NBC News Iran vowed to respond. Ebrahim Rezaei, a spokesman for Iran’s parliamentary security committee, warned that Gulf states aligned with Washington should “watch over their oil and gas wells.” CBS News

For businesses tracking energy prices and shipping lanes, the renewed fighting keeps the Strait of Hormuz at the center of risk. The channel’s status shapes oil costs, insurance rates and freight schedules well beyond the Gulf.

JBizNews Desk © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Body runs 748 words. Headline reworked from your pasted version. Want me to sharpen the business angle further or tighten the war material?

Honda is recalling more than 325,000 vehicles over faulty rearview image displays, which could increase the risk of a crash, according to federal regulators.

The recall affects 2018-2020 Odyssey vehicles, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) announced on Wednesday.

A total of 325,588 vehicles are covered by the recall effort.

HONDA RECALLS MORE THAN 880,000 VEHICLES OVER REAR SUSPENSION FAILURE RISK

The NHTSA said the recall was issued due to rearview cameras that may not display properly.

“Water may enter into the rearview camera, which can cause the rearview camera image to fail to display when the vehicle is in reverse,” the recall notice reads.

A display malfunction could increase the risk of a crash, the NHTSA said.

The announcement expands a previous recall, which affected certain 2019-2020 Honda Odyssey vehicles.

Owners affected by the recall may take their cars to Honda dealers, so the rearview camera can be replaced free of charge, according to the NHTSA.

Owner notification letters are expected to be mailed on Aug. 24.

HONDA RECALLS 99,000 VEHICLES OVER FLAW THAT COULD TRIGGER UNINTENDED AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This comes after Honda issued two separate recalls in recent months that included other car models.

This included more than 880,000 vehicles being recalled because a key rear suspension part can rust and fail, and nearly 99,000 cars that were recalled over a defect that could cause airbags to deploy unexpectedly during a crash.

This post was originally published here

Delta Air Lines has emerged as the winning bidder for two airport gates left behind by the collapsed Spirit Airlines at the world’s busiest airport, according to filings in Spirit’s bankruptcy case, with a federal judge scheduled to decide Wednesday whether to approve the sale.

Court filings in the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York show Delta offered $12 million for gates C4 and C6 at Hartsfield-Jackson Atlanta International Airport, along with Spirit’s former ticketing lobby and related operational space. Spirit told the court Delta submitted the highest and best offer following a competitive bidding process that included another airline.

The transaction does not involve ownership of the gates themselves. Because the City of Atlanta owns the airport, Delta would acquire Spirit’s leasehold interest, giving the carrier control of the facilities through June 30, 2031, when Spirit’s original lease was set to expire. Objections to the sale were due July 1, and the bankruptcy court is scheduled to hold a hearing on July 8.

The proposed sale represents another step in the liquidation of Spirit Airlines, which ceased operations on May 2 after 34 years in business before entering Chapter 11 bankruptcy. Since then, the airline has been selling aircraft, airport facilities, equipment and other assets to generate funds for creditors.

For Delta, however, the value of the transaction extends well beyond the $12 million purchase price.

Hartsfield-Jackson serves as the airline’s largest and most important hub. Delta already controls roughly three-quarters of the airport’s gates and carries approximately 80% of its passengers, making Atlanta the centerpiece of its domestic and international route network. In an airport where available gate space is extremely limited, even two additional gates can create opportunities to add flights, improve scheduling flexibility and strengthen connecting service.

Industry analysts say the strategic value far exceeds the cost.

Gary Leff, author of the aviation website View From the Wing, noted that the acquisition involves only two of the airport’s roughly 188 gates, cautioning against overstating its immediate competitive impact. Even so, he observed that every additional gate under Delta’s control is one less available for another carrier seeking to expand service at the nation’s busiest airport.

That competition issue has attracted attention in Washington.

Bryan Bedford, Administrator of the Federal Aviation Administration, has previously expressed concern about the loss of low-cost airline competition following Spirit’s shutdown. He has suggested that airport gate assignments deserve careful consideration because ultra-low-cost carriers have historically played an important role in keeping airfare prices competitive in many markets.

The Atlanta transaction, however, is not expected to trigger federal antitrust review because the $12 million purchase price falls below the reporting threshold that would require additional regulatory scrutiny. As a result, the bankruptcy court’s primary responsibility is determining whether the sale represents the highest value reasonably available for Spirit’s creditors.

For travelers, the implications could extend beyond one bankruptcy proceeding.

Spirit built its business around deeply discounted fares that frequently forced larger airlines to match or lower prices. With the carrier gone, many industry observers believe consumers could eventually face fewer low-cost options on routes where Spirit once competed. If Delta assumes control of additional airport capacity, those gates become unavailable to another discount airline looking to establish or expand operations in Atlanta.

For business travelers and corporations headquartered throughout the Southeast, additional Delta capacity could improve flight availability, scheduling flexibility and international connections through one of the world’s busiest aviation hubs. Leisure travelers, however, may ultimately care more about whether fewer competitors translate into higher ticket prices over time.

Delta has made clear that Atlanta remains central to its long-term growth strategy. Chief Executive Ed Bastian has repeatedly emphasized expanding the airline’s global network, and every additional gate at its largest hub provides greater flexibility to support that expansion.

The bankruptcy court’s decision on Wednesday will determine whether the lease transfer moves forward. If approved, Delta will further strengthen its position at the airport it already dominates, adding another chapter to the ongoing reshaping of the U.S. airline industry following Spirit’s collapse.

JBizNews Desk | Atlanta

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — Wall Street finished sharply mixed on Wednesday, July 8, after President Donald Trump, speaking at the NATO Summit in Ankara, Turkey, declared that the ceasefire and memorandum of understanding between the United States and Iran was “over,” reigniting fears of a broader Middle East conflict, sending oil prices sharply higher and knocking the Dow Jones Industrial Average lower.

The market’s message was clear: geopolitics is once again driving Wall Street.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 576.76 points, or 1.09%, to 52,348.39. The S&P 500 slipped 0.28% to 7,482.71, while the technology-heavy Nasdaq Composite managed to rise 0.20% to 25,870.65, supported by strength in several large technology companies. The Russell 2000 lost about 0.9%, while the CBOE Volatility Index (VIX), Wall Street’s closely watched fear gauge, climbed nearly 4% as investors sought protection against further market swings.

The day’s biggest catalyst came from Ankara.

Speaking to reporters on the sidelines of the NATO summit, Trump said he considered the ceasefire with Iran finished, dismissed further negotiations and warned that additional U.S. military action could follow. His comments came after overnight U.S. strikes on Iranian targets and renewed attacks on commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s most strategically important shipping lanes.

Investors immediately focused on oil.

Brent crude, the global benchmark, surged 5.43% to settle at $78.19 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate climbed 4.37% to $73.52 per barrel, marking one of the strongest single-day advances in weeks.

Higher oil prices tend to benefit energy producers, but they also raise transportation costs, pressure manufacturers, squeeze airline profits and eventually work their way into gasoline prices and consumer inflation. That combination weighed heavily on many industrial and consumer-focused companies that make up the Dow.

Technology stocks told a different story.

The Nasdaq managed to finish higher thanks to continued strength in several semiconductor and artificial intelligence-related companies.

Broadcom gained after Apple announced an expanded multiyear partnership expected to exceed $30 billion. The agreement calls for more than 15 billion American-made chips and includes a $1.5 billion expansion of Broadcom’s manufacturing facility in Fort Collins, Colorado, representing Apple’s largest domestic manufacturing commitment to date.

Several other technology companies also attracted buyers. Penguin Solutions rallied following its earnings report, while Alibaba, Akamai Technologies and Arista Networks also posted gains as investors continued rotating toward companies viewed as having strong long-term growth prospects.

Not every traditional safe haven moved as expected.

Gold futures fell approximately 1.6%, extending a pullback from record highs reached earlier this year. Rather than moving aggressively into precious metals, investors largely focused on energy markets and selective opportunities within technology.

The Federal Reserve also remained on investors’ radar.

Market participants continued digesting the latest Fed meeting minutes, which highlighted persistent inflation risks despite easing labor-market concerns.

Adam Phillips, Managing Director of Investments at EP Wealth Advisors, said the minutes reinforced the Federal Reserve’s cautious stance.

“The minutes demonstrated the Fed’s hawkish bias, highlighting that upside inflation risks remain while concerns around the labor market have eased,” Phillips said, adding that renewed tensions in the Middle East only increase uncertainty surrounding inflation and monetary policy.

Those concerns were echoed in the latest outlook from the International Monetary Fund, which projects oil prices to remain significantly higher next year while forecasting global inflation of 4.7% in 2026, underscoring the possibility that inflationary pressures may persist longer than many investors had hoped.

There was also notable activity outside the public markets.

Blue Origin, the aerospace company founded by Jeff Bezos, is reportedly seeking approximately $10 billion in its first outside funding round, a transaction that would value the company at roughly $130 billion. Bezos is expected to contribute about $2 billion, alongside major institutional investors.

Meanwhile, SpaceX, which entered the public markets last month under the ticker SPCX, posted a modest gain after a volatile start to life as a publicly traded company.

For business owners, investors and consumers, Wednesday’s trading served as another reminder that events halfway around the world can quickly affect everyday life at home. Rising crude oil prices often translate into higher gasoline prices, increased shipping costs, more expensive airline travel and additional inflationary pressure throughout the economy.

Wall Street’s split performance reflected exactly that reality. Technology continued attracting investment, but companies tied more closely to energy costs came under pressure. As long as tensions surrounding Iran and the Strait of Hormuz remain unresolved, energy markets are likely to remain one of the biggest forces shaping both Wall Street and Main Street.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said Wednesday that the ceasefire between the United States and Iran was over and that American forces would likely strike the country again the same night. Speaking on the sidelines of the NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey, Trump told reporters, “For me, I think it’s over,” and said continued negotiations were “a waste of time.” Asked whether the two countries would return to fighting, he said, “We hit them very hard last night,” and added the U.S. would “probably hit them hard again tonight.”

The president laid out a series of new threats. He said the U.S. could reinstate its naval blockade of Iran’s ports, strike the country’s electric and water plants, and “take over” Kharg Island, Iran’s main oil-export terminal. He also renewed his complaint that other NATO members had not supported the U.S. in the conflict. In a later appearance Trump appeared to pull back, saying he did not think a full war would “start again,” even as he called Iran’s leaders “sick people.”

The escalation followed a fresh exchange of fire. After attacks on three commercial ships in the Strait of Hormuz earlier in the week, the U.S. military struck Iranian targets overnight. U.S. Central Command said it hit more than 80 sites, including air-defense systems, coastal radar and over 60 small boats used by Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps to threaten passing tankers. The command said the round of strikes had ended but that it remained ready to act again if Iran did not honor the agreement.

Iran said it answered with drone and missile strikes on the U.S.-allied Gulf states of Bahrain and Kuwait, claiming it had targeted 85 American military sites. Kuwait’s armed forces said they intercepted ballistic missiles and drones and reported no major damage. Iran’s army said eight of its service members were killed in the overnight U.S. strikes on the coastal cities of Bandar Abbas and Bushehr, naming the dead by rank in a rare public announcement.

The threats put an already fragile deal in doubt. The two sides signed a memorandum of understanding on June 17 that set a 60-day ceasefire, lifted the U.S. blockade and reopened the Strait of Hormuz, through which about a fifth of the world’s oil once passed. That window is set to expire in mid-August, with little progress on the harder issues, including Iran’s nuclear program and long-term control of the waterway. On Tuesday, the U.S. Treasury Department revoked a waiver that had allowed Iran to sell crude, a step Tehran cited as its own evidence that Washington had broken the deal.

The market reaction was swift. Brent crude, the international benchmark, settled 5.2 percent higher at $78.02 a barrel, while West Texas Intermediate rose 4.4 percent to close at $73.52, the largest one-day jump since early June. The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell more than 800 points at its low, about 1.5 percent, days after setting a record. Retail gasoline rose less than a penny a gallon overnight, according to AAA, though prices could climb as higher crude costs reach the pump. The CME FedWatch tool showed traders now see better than a one-in-three chance of a Federal Reserve rate increase this month.

Iranian officials rejected Trump’s remarks outright. Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi said the threats were an admission that years of force and sanctions had failed, while Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi said insults would not diminish Iran’s standing. Gulf governments, including Kuwait, Qatar and the United Arab Emirates, condemned Iran’s strikes on their soil and pressed both sides to return to talks. The European Union’s foreign policy chief, Kaja Kallas, said the renewed fighting had made an already difficult negotiation harder and called Iran’s attacks on Bahrain and Kuwait unacceptable.

Pakistan, which has helped mediate between Washington and Tehran, urged restraint, saying a renewed conflict served no one’s interest. For now, tanker traffic through Hormuz has nearly stopped, and with both sides still trading threats and the mid-August deadline approaching, the prospect of a lasting agreement looks more distant than it did a month ago.

JBizNews Desk © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Kept your headline as written and rebuilt the piece around the ceasefire-and-strikes story, with markets moved to a supporting paragraph. Body runs about 670 words. Say the word if you want it tighter or the strike/threat detail expanded.

Chinese artificial intelligence startup DeepSeek is developing its own AI chip, according to people familiar with the project, a move that could reduce the company’s dependence on Nvidia and Huawei while intensifying the global race to control the technology powering the next generation of artificial intelligence.

The project, first reported by Reuters, centers on a custom chip designed primarily for AI inference — the stage where trained AI models generate answers for users — rather than the far more computationally intensive process of training new models. DeepSeek declined to comment on the report.

According to the sources, development has been underway for roughly a year. The company has quietly expanded its hiring of semiconductor engineers and held discussions with chip-design firms, contract manufacturers and memory suppliers as it works to build its own hardware.

The news immediately rippled through financial markets. Shares of Nvidia, whose graphics processors dominate the AI industry, slipped in early trading as investors weighed the possibility that another major AI developer could eventually reduce its reliance on the company’s products.

The timing is significant. U.S. export restrictions have sharply limited China’s access to Nvidia’s most advanced AI chips, pushing many Chinese technology companies to accelerate development of domestic alternatives.

DeepSeek gained international attention after releasing its R1 reasoning model, which surprised many in the technology industry with its strong performance at significantly lower costs than many competing systems. The company originally trained its models using Nvidia’s H800 processors, chips specifically designed for the Chinese market before Washington tightened export controls. Since then, it has increasingly relied on Huawei’s Ascend processors while pursuing greater technological independence.

The move also reflects a much broader shift across the AI industry.

Rather than relying entirely on off-the-shelf processors, leading AI companies are increasingly investing in custom silicon tailored specifically to their own software. OpenAI recently unveiled its first custom inference chip developed with Broadcom, while reports indicate Anthropic is evaluating similar efforts. Inside China, technology giants including Alibaba and Baidu have also invested heavily in proprietary AI processors.

The reason is simple: cost.

Every prompt submitted to an AI chatbot requires computing power. Purchasing chips from outside suppliers means paying those suppliers’ margins while competing for increasingly scarce hardware. A processor designed specifically for one company’s models can reduce operating costs, improve efficiency and provide greater control over future product development.

For businesses, the financial stakes are enormous.

Artificial intelligence is rapidly becoming one of the largest capital investment cycles in technology history. Companies are spending hundreds of billions of dollars building data centers, purchasing chips and expanding cloud infrastructure. Even modest reductions in computing costs can translate into billions of dollars in long-term savings.

Success, however, is far from guaranteed.

Designing competitive AI processors requires years of engineering, advanced manufacturing capabilities and substantial financial investment. Access to leading-edge semiconductor fabrication remains one of China’s biggest challenges under current U.S. export restrictions.

Some analysts remain skeptical about the project’s global impact.

Richard Windsor, founder of Radio Free Mobile, argued that without access to the world’s most advanced manufacturing technologies, Chinese-designed chips may struggle to compete internationally, even if they prove successful inside China’s domestic market.

DeepSeek’s hardware ambitions come as the company reportedly prepares to raise outside capital for the first time. According to recent reports, the startup is seeking approximately $7 billion in funding at a valuation between $52 billion and $59 billion, marking a significant shift after years of avoiding external investment.

For Nvidia, the development highlights the long-term consequences of export restrictions.

While the controls were designed to limit China’s access to advanced American technology, they have also encouraged Chinese companies to accelerate investment in domestic semiconductor development. Every successful homegrown AI processor reduces reliance on imported hardware and strengthens China’s own semiconductor ecosystem.

Whether DeepSeek ultimately delivers a competitive chip remains uncertain.

What is clear is that the battle for AI leadership is no longer being fought only through software. Increasingly, it is becoming a contest over who controls the chips, factories, supply chains and infrastructure that power artificial intelligence itself—a competition likely to shape the global technology industry for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Beijing

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

General Mills reported better-than-expected quarterly earnings on July 1, beating Wall Street forecasts while announcing an ambitious plan to cut $3 billion in costs by 2030 as consumers continue pulling back on grocery spending. The maker of Cheerios, Pillsbury, Betty Crocker and dozens of other household brands said the savings initiative is designed to offset inflation, improve efficiency and position the company for long-term growth.

The Minneapolis-based food giant reported adjusted earnings of 95 cents per share, topping analysts’ expectations of about 81 cents per share, while quarterly revenue came in at approximately $4.6 billion. Investors welcomed the stronger-than-expected results, sending the company’s shares sharply higher following the announcement.

“Our fourth-quarter results represented a positive finish to a challenging fiscal year,” Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Jeff Harmening said while outlining the company’s strategy for returning to sustainable growth.

Although quarterly earnings exceeded expectations, the broader picture reflected continued pressure throughout the packaged-food industry.

General Mills reported full-year net sales of $18.4 billion, down roughly 5% from the previous fiscal year, as inflation-weary shoppers continued buying fewer premium grocery products and increasingly switched to lower-priced private-label alternatives.

The company also reported a quarterly net loss driven largely by one-time accounting charges, including goodwill impairments and costs associated with the planned sale of its Brazil business. Excluding those non-cash charges, underlying operating performance remained stronger than headline earnings suggested.

The biggest announcement, however, was management’s new cost-reduction initiative.

General Mills plans to generate $3 billion in cumulative savings by fiscal 2030 through a combination of supply-chain improvements, manufacturing efficiencies, organizational restructuring and expanded use of artificial intelligence throughout its operations.

Approximately $2 billion of those savings will come from existing productivity initiatives, while the remaining savings are expected through a broader transformation program aimed at simplifying business operations worldwide.

Company executives expect approximately $750 million in savings during the coming fiscal year alone.

The aggressive cost-cutting reflects changing consumer behavior.

After several years of raising prices to offset inflation, many food manufacturers are discovering shoppers have become increasingly price-sensitive. Consumers are purchasing fewer discretionary grocery items, comparing prices more closely and choosing store brands more frequently than in previous years.

General Mills believes improving efficiency rather than relying solely on additional price increases will better position the company for future growth.

Management also plans to introduce new products emphasizing convenience, health and higher protein content while refreshing established brands to better compete for consumer spending.

One recent success has been the company’s Cheerios Protein line, which executives said has already generated approximately $100 million in sales.

Inflation continues presenting challenges.

General Mills expects ingredient and operating costs to increase between 4% and 5% during the coming fiscal year, making its cost-saving initiatives increasingly important to protecting profitability while limiting future price increases.

For consumers, the company’s results provide another indication that grocery budgets remain under pressure.

When one of America’s largest packaged-food companies reports customers are purchasing less and seeking greater value, it reinforces broader economic trends affecting households nationwide.

The company’s decision to emphasize efficiency over continued price increases could eventually help moderate grocery inflation for some products, although executives acknowledged consumers are likely to remain cautious throughout the coming year.

For investors, the results suggest General Mills is shifting from defending profitability through higher prices toward improving operations and rebuilding long-term sales growth.

The broader food industry continues undergoing similar adjustments as manufacturers balance rising costs, changing consumer preferences and increased competition from lower-priced alternatives.

Whether General Mills succeeds in achieving its ambitious savings targets while maintaining product quality and brand loyalty will likely determine how well the company performs over the next several years.

JBizNews Desk | Minneapolis

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited

Cognizant announced on Thursday, July 2, that it is deploying OpenAI’s GPT-5.5 across its cybersecurity business to help large organizations identify, verify, and remediate software vulnerabilities before attackers can exploit them. The Teaneck, New Jersey technology company (Nasdaq: CTSH) said the initiative combines GPT-5.5 with OpenAI’s Trusted Access for Cyber framework, which adds security controls, monitoring, and human oversight to enterprise AI deployments.

The work will be delivered through Cognizant’s Frontier AI Cyber Defense services and its participation in the OpenAI Daybreak Cyber Partner Program, a collaboration designed to help trusted cybersecurity firms integrate advanced AI into enterprise security operations while maintaining strict safeguards. Cognizant said every AI-assisted workflow will continue to include human review before any action is taken.

According to the company, the technology will assist security teams with reviewing software code for vulnerabilities, modeling potential attack paths, validating security findings, prioritizing risks, building threat detection systems, conducting threat hunting, and supporting incident response when cyberattacks occur.

Cognizant’s argument is not simply that artificial intelligence can discover vulnerabilities faster. Many existing cybersecurity tools already scan software for potential weaknesses. The greater challenge begins after a vulnerability is identified. Security teams must determine whether the finding is genuine, evaluate its severity, develop and test a software fix, and deploy that fix before attackers have an opportunity to exploit it.

The company believes AI can significantly reduce that timeline.

Frontier AI has changed the equation for cyber defense, but a model’s power only matters in how it is applied inside a real enterprise,” said Sandra Notardonato, Global Head of Partner Development and Influencer Relations at Cognizant. She said Cognizant’s cybersecurity teams integrate the technology directly into clients’ development and security operations to help move organizations from simply identifying risks to resolving them.

Cognizant said it employs more than 5,000 cybersecurity professionals and has spent more than a decade serving highly regulated industries including financial services, healthcare, and government, where software vulnerabilities can carry significant operational and regulatory consequences. The company said combining that human expertise with advanced AI allows it to scale vulnerability remediation while maintaining enterprise-level oversight.

Before offering the technology broadly to customers, Cognizant is deploying it internally in what it describes as a “Client Zero” strategy. Its own security teams are already using GPT-5.5 to review software code, distinguish legitimate threats from false positives, and evaluate software updates before they are deployed across the company’s internal systems and products. Cognizant said those experiences will shape future customer implementations.

OpenAI said partnerships with established cybersecurity firms can help advanced AI capabilities reach more organizations in a controlled manner.

Frontier cyber capability reaches more defenders when partners can operationalize it inside the trusted workflows enterprises already use every day,” said Colleen Kapase, Vice President of Strategic Global Partnerships and Ecosystems at OpenAI.

Both companies emphasized that the deployment includes strict access controls, comprehensive activity logging, and mandatory human oversight. Those safeguards are intended to address concerns that autonomous AI systems could introduce new security risks if allowed to operate without appropriate supervision.

The announcement comes as businesses worldwide increase spending on cybersecurity amid growing ransomware attacks, software supply-chain threats, and AI-enabled cybercrime. Technology companies are racing to integrate generative AI into enterprise security platforms in hopes of reducing the time between discovering a vulnerability and deploying a fix.

For businesses, that window is often the difference between a routine software update and a costly data breach involving customer records, operational disruptions, or ransomware demands.

Cognizant is betting that pairing OpenAI’s GPT-5.5 with thousands of experienced cybersecurity professionals will help customers close that gap more quickly while maintaining the human judgment required for enterprise security. As competition intensifies among major technology and consulting firms to deliver AI-powered cybersecurity solutions, customers are likely to judge success not by the sophistication of the AI itself, but by whether it prevents real-world cyberattacks.

JBizNews Desk | Teaneck, New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TRENTON, N.J. — Governor Mikie Sherrill signed three energy bills into law on Tuesday, July 7, while announcing one-time credits on this summer’s electric bills for every residential customer in the state. Her administration said the package, combined with actions taken over the past six months, is expected to save New Jersey ratepayers more than $1 billion annually, citing an analysis by Synapse Energy Economics.

The centerpiece of the legislative package is a first-of-its-kind policy aimed at the massive data centers powering the artificial intelligence economy.

Under the new Data Center Fair Share law, sponsored by Assemblyman Dave Bailey Jr. and Senator John Burzichelli, New Jersey will create a separate utility rate class for data centers with peak electricity demand of at least 50 megawatts. Instead of spreading the costs of new grid infrastructure across households and small businesses, those large facilities will be responsible for paying for the electric system upgrades needed to support their own operations.

The New Jersey Board of Public Utilities (BPU) has 12 months to establish the new rules.

Speaking during an event in Camden, Sherrill said the law is designed to protect everyday ratepayers.

“We’ve set them aside in a separate class of utility users, so that if we have storms like this, they will be first impacted, not normal ratepayers,” she said.

The legislation also encourages large data centers to bring additional clean energy generation onto the grid and requires them to reduce electricity usage first when demand approaches system capacity.

A second bill eliminates what supporters describe as an outdated financial incentive that allowed utilities to earn an additional return on equity simply because they participated in PJM Interconnection, the regional electric grid operator serving 13 states and the District of Columbia. Those costs were passed on to customers through transmission charges.

Supporters estimate eliminating the incentive will save ratepayers approximately $60 million annually.

The third measure, known as the Advanced Grid Technologies Act, increases state oversight of major transmission investments. Utilities will now be required to obtain a Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity before undertaking certain supplemental transmission projects.

Under the law, the BPU must act within 180 days under the standard review process or 120 days if utilities use advanced transmission technologies.

According to the governor’s office, supplemental transmission projects accounted for 79% of New Jersey’s transmission costs between 2008 and 2025, totaling approximately $14.7 billion. Citing the Rocky Mountain Institute, the administration noted that while New Jersey represents roughly 12% of PJM’s electricity demand, it accounts for nearly 22% of the regional grid’s supplemental transmission spending—the largest disparity of any state in the PJM system.

Alongside the legislation, Sherrill announced a $25 Residential Universal Bill Credit for all 3.6 million residential electric customers. Lower- and moderate-income households will receive an additional $150 through the Residential Energy Assistance Payment Program.

The Board of Public Utilities also renewed its Summer Termination Program, which prevents utility shutoffs for eligible vulnerable households during periods of extreme heat, and approved 12 new solar projects expected to generate enough electricity to power approximately 45,000 homes.

Assembly Speaker Craig Coughlin said the legislation closes a loophole that had unnecessarily increased costs for ratepayers under previous federal policy. BPU President Ben Hertz-Shargel joined the governor during the bill-signing ceremony.

Republican lawmakers criticized the package, arguing that while it increases oversight and changes cost allocation, it does not address New Jersey’s underlying electricity supply challenges by adding new power generation.

They also pointed to the size of this year’s universal bill credit. The $25 payment is significantly smaller than last year’s $100 credit, coming just days after severe July Fourth weekend storms left roughly 200,000 customers without power at the peak of the outages.

Sherrill acknowledged that the data center legislation alone will not immediately reduce electricity prices because wholesale power costs are set across the broader PJM regional market. New data centers built in neighboring states can still affect electricity prices in New Jersey, just as projects built in New Jersey can influence prices throughout the region.

Still, the governor said other states are already studying New Jersey’s approach to ensuring that the rapidly growing artificial intelligence industry pays a larger share of the infrastructure costs it creates.

For New Jersey families and small business owners facing another summer of high electricity bills, the immediate benefit comes in the form of bill credits. The longer-term impact will depend on how regulators implement the new laws over the next year and whether shifting more infrastructure costs to large energy users ultimately delivers the promised savings for ratepayers.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to remarks made Tuesday, July 7, by President Donald Trump during a meeting with Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, the United States is prepared to consider selling F-35 fighter jets to Turkey and revisiting sanctions that have blocked such a transaction for years. Trump said the administration would “certainly consider” the sale, describing Turkey as an important NATO ally while indicating the issue is now under active review.

The comments marked a significant shift in Washington’s posture toward Ankara. Rather than treating Turkey’s removal from the F-35 program as a settled matter, Trump suggested the issue could be revisited as part of broader efforts to strengthen U.S.-Turkish relations.

The dispute dates back to 2019, when the United States removed Turkey from the F-35 program after Ankara purchased Russia’s S-400 air-defense system. American officials argued that operating the Russian-made system alongside the fifth-generation stealth fighter could compromise highly sensitive military technology. Congress later reinforced that position through the Countering America’s Adversaries Through Sanctions Act (CAATSA) and subsequent defense legislation, effectively blocking future F-35 transfers while Turkey continues to possess the S-400 system.

Turkey previously invested approximately $1.7 billion in the F-35 program and had expected to receive aircraft before its participation was suspended. Several completed aircraft intended for Turkey have remained in storage in the United States since the program was halted.

Any reversal would face major political hurdles. While the White House can shape foreign policy, Congress continues to play a central role in approving major arms sales. Lawmakers from both parties have repeatedly opposed restoring Turkey’s access to the F-35 program unless Ankara permanently removes or relinquishes the Russian missile system. Several members of Congress have also raised concerns about Turkey’s regional policies, including tensions involving Greece and Cyprus.

One proposal that has circulated among policymakers would involve relocating the S-400 system to a third country, potentially creating a path toward resolving the dispute. No agreement has been reached, however, and significant diplomatic and legal questions remain.

The debate extends beyond the fighter aircraft themselves. The administration recently advanced plans for additional military sales involving F110 jet engines used in Turkey’s domestically developed KAAN fighter program, a move that also drew criticism from several lawmakers who questioned the strategic implications.

The financial stakes are substantial. The F-35 is manufactured by Lockheed Martin, while its engines are produced by Pratt & Whitney, a division of RTX. A Turkish return to the program would represent billions of dollars in potential orders for American aerospace manufacturers and thousands of companies throughout the defense supply chain. Turkey was previously both a customer and a manufacturing partner, supplying components used throughout the global F-35 production program.

For investors, the outcome could influence future revenue expectations across the U.S. defense sector. For NATO, the decision carries broader strategic implications, balancing alliance unity against longstanding security concerns surrounding Russian military technology.

For now, Trump’s remarks have reopened one of the alliance’s most contentious defense questions. Whether the proposal ultimately advances will depend not only on the White House but also on Congress, allied governments and Turkey’s willingness to address the issues that led to its removal from the F-35 program in the first place.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta Platforms told a federal court on Monday that four states are seeking $1.4 trillion in penalties over claims the company intentionally designed Facebook and Instagram to addict children and teenagers while misleading the public about the risks—an amount so enormous that it exceeds the company’s entire stock market value and would rank among the largest corporate penalties ever pursued in American history.

Meta disclosed the figure in a July 6 court filing responding to the states’ proposed method for calculating penalties if they prevail at trial. The amount had not previously been made public and exceeds Meta’s market capitalization of roughly $1.3 trillion to $1.4 trillion. The company called the proposed penalty unprecedented, arguing it has “no analog in the history of consumer protection enforcement.”

The states leading the case are California, Colorado, Kentucky, and New Jersey. Their lawsuits accuse Meta of deliberately building features into its social media platforms designed to keep young users engaged for extended periods while publicly minimizing concerns about addiction and mental health. The case is scheduled to go to trial in August before U.S. District Judge Yvonne Gonzalez Rogers in Oakland, California.

The size of the proposed penalty stems from how the states calculate damages.

Although many of the detailed court filings remain under seal, attorneys for the states said during a June hearing that the total is based on multiplying the number of alleged violations by the maximum civil penalties allowed under each state’s consumer protection laws. Because the claims involve millions of young Facebook and Instagram users over multiple years, the potential penalties rapidly compound into the trillions of dollars.

Meta strongly disputes both the legal theory and the calculation.

The company argues that “social media addiction” is not a formally recognized psychiatric diagnosis and therefore contends that its public statements denying its platforms are addictive cannot be considered false or misleading. Meta also maintains that the attorneys general have failed to produce sufficient evidence showing the company intentionally deceived consumers.

Still, the states have already scored important legal victories before trial begins.

Last month, Judge Gonzalez Rogers denied Meta’s request to dismiss the case, ruling that genuine factual disputes remain over whether the company’s platforms were intentionally designed to be addictive, whether Meta knowingly misrepresented those risks, and whether children and teenagers were specifically targeted. The judge also ruled that Meta failed to fully comply with portions of the federal Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act (COPPA), giving the states a significant procedural win heading into trial.

Following that ruling, California Attorney General Rob Bonta accused Meta of placing profits ahead of children’s safety and pledged to hold the company accountable for what he described as violations of consumer protection laws contributing to the nation’s youth mental health crisis.

The Oakland lawsuit is only one piece of a much broader legal battle facing the technology industry.

Meta, along with Snap, Alphabet, and ByteDance, faces thousands of lawsuits filed by states, school districts, families and local governments alleging that social media platforms knowingly incorporated addictive design features that contributed to worsening mental health among young users. Many of those cases also involve allegations surrounding children’s online privacy protections.

The financial exposure extends beyond the California case.

Earlier this year, New Mexico became the first state to take similar claims against Meta to trial, where a jury awarded the state $375 million after finding the company had violated consumer protection laws. A judge is still considering additional financial penalties and potential operational changes resulting from that verdict.

For investors, the proposed $1.4 trillion figure highlights the extraordinary legal risks facing one of the world’s largest technology companies. While a judgment approaching that amount appears highly unlikely, even substantially smaller verdicts—particularly if replicated by additional states—could reshape how major social media companies design products, disclose risks and interact with younger users.

For parents, however, the case centers on a simpler question: whether the social media platforms used daily by millions of teenagers were intentionally engineered to maximize engagement at the expense of children’s well-being.

The August trial will place those allegations before a federal jury, with New Jersey among the lead plaintiffs in what has become one of the largest and most closely watched consumer protection lawsuits ever brought against a technology company.

JBizNews Desk | Oakland, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump on Wednesday ordered an immediate stop to all U.S. trade with Spain, giving the instruction out loud to Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent during a press conference at the NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey. Seated beside NATO Secretary-General Mark Rutte, Trump called Spain a “wasted cause” and said the United States no longer wanted to do business with the country, including official visits.

The order followed the summit’s endorsement of a new alliance benchmark asking members to spend 5% of their gross domestic product on defense and related costs. Spain was the only NATO member to publicly reject the full target, instead negotiating flexibility in how it meets the alliance’s capability goals. Trump has singled out Madrid for months over that stance, arguing the country benefits from NATO protection while spending less than its share.

At the podium, Trump turned to Bessent and told him he did not want any trade with Spain. Bessent answered, “Yes, sir.” Trump then said to take care of it immediately and not to talk to Spanish officials, calling them “hopeless” and predicting they would come back asking to trade again. He also said Spain had treated Rutte poorly and that the secretary-general “shouldn’t carry” the country inside the alliance.

Rutte pushed back gently. He told Trump that Spain had raised its defense spending to 2% of GDP and had made a large step over the past year, though he acknowledged there were still issues to resolve. Figures from the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute show Spain spent 2.1% of GDP on defense in 2025, up from 1.4% in 2021, still trailing many European members.

The office of Spanish Prime Minister Pedro Sánchez played down the remarks, saying it viewed them as business as usual and had no plan to change what it called an excellent relationship with Washington. Sánchez, who leads a minority government, has repeatedly clashed with Trump, including over the U.S. war in Iran. Spain has refused to let the United States use the Rota and Morón military bases in the south for operations tied to that conflict, and Sánchez earlier called the U.S.-Israeli campaign against Iran a serious mistake.

Any actual trade cutoff faces a basic obstacle: Spain does not set its own trade policy. As a member of the European Union, Spain negotiates trade as part of a 27-nation customs union handled by the European Commission in Brussels. Individual member states cannot be singled out without affecting the entire single market, and such a move could trigger a coordinated response from the bloc. European Commission deputy spokesperson Olof Gill said the EU had been clear and consistent on the issue. It was also the second time Trump has instructed Bessent to halt commerce with Spain; after the first order in March, trade continued normally.

The numbers show a modest but real relationship. Trade between the two countries totaled roughly $48 billion in 2025, with the United States exporting about $26.6 billion in goods and importing about $21.3 billion, according to Census Bureau data, leaving Washington with a surplus. Spain is the world’s largest olive oil exporter and also ships auto parts, steel, chemicals, refined petroleum, and packaged pharmaceuticals to American buyers. Only about 4.9% of Spain’s goods exports go to the United States, a smaller share than for Italy or Germany, which analysts say leaves Madrid less exposed than other European economies.

Markets moved on the comments, though a separate Trump remark added pressure. Spain’s benchmark IBEX 35 index fell nearly 3% by midday in Madrid, and the yield on Spain’s 10-year government bond rose about 10 basis points to 3.5682% as prices dropped. The broader pan-European Stoxx 600 slid 1.9%, and oil prices spiked after Trump separately said he now considers the Iran ceasefire over.

Trump used the summit to press other allies as well, repeating his push for U.S. control of Greenland, which drew a firm response from Denmark, and suggesting he could pull American troops out of Europe if members did not spend more. The White House did not provide details on whether the administration is drafting formal trade restrictions against Spain or whether Trump was voicing frustration. For now, it remained unclear how an order to stop trading with a single EU member would be carried out in practice.

JBizNews Desk| Washington D.C © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Federal Trade Commission (FTC) on Monday issued warning letters to seven companies it says falsely marketed products as “Made in the USA,” and to an eighth that labeled goods “Made in Texas,” even though the products were imported in whole or in significant part.

Christopher Mufarrige, Director of the FTC’s Bureau of Consumer Protection, said consumers who pay a premium for products marketed as American-made deserve confidence that those claims are truthful. He said the agency will continue holding companies accountable if they undermine that trust through misleading origin claims.

The warning letters, made public on July 6, were sent to companies selling a wide range of products, including drums, industrial laser machinery, coordinate measuring machines and e-cigarettes. The recipients were A&F Drum Company, Z-Tech Advanced Technologies, Vtron Inc. (doing business as Vtron Lasers), Helmel Engineering Products, NebTech, Lucky Bar Holdings, and My Vape Order.

At the center of the enforcement effort is the FTC’s Made in USA Labeling Rule, which requires that products advertised as American-made be “all or virtually all” manufactured in the United States. Simply assembling imported parts domestically generally does not qualify. The overwhelming majority of a product’s components and manufacturing must originate in the United States before companies can legally make an unqualified “Made in USA” claim.

The latest warnings are part of a broader federal enforcement effort.

In March, President Donald Trump signed an executive order titled “Ensuring Truthful Advertising of Products Claiming to be Made in America,” directing the FTC to prioritize investigations involving deceptive domestic-origin claims. The order elevated enforcement of American-made labeling to one of the agency’s leading consumer-protection priorities.

The Commission has already begun acting on that directive.

Earlier this year, the FTC announced a nationwide enforcement sweep targeting companies marketing American flags, footwear and electronic dartboards using allegedly deceptive origin claims. Those cases resulted in enforcement actions requiring businesses to stop making unlawful claims and provide financial relief to affected consumers. Companies that continue violating the Made in USA Labeling Rule may face significant civil penalties.

For now, Monday’s letters stop short of formal enforcement.

Instead, they serve as official warnings urging the companies to review their marketing practices and bring their advertising into compliance. Historically, warning letters often precede stronger regulatory action if businesses fail to correct the alleged violations.

For manufacturers, retailers and distributors, the stakes are substantial.

Products marketed as American-made often command premium prices because many consumers intentionally choose to support domestic manufacturing and American jobs. If companies falsely claim domestic origin, they can gain an unfair competitive advantage over manufacturers that genuinely absorb the higher costs associated with producing goods in the United States.

The FTC emphasized that point in announcing the letters, arguing that enforcement protects not only consumers but also honest manufacturers that invest in American facilities, workers and supply chains.

The timing also carries symbolic significance.

The enforcement initiative comes as the United States approaches celebrations surrounding the nation’s 250th anniversary, with renewed attention on domestic manufacturing and “Made in America” initiatives. FTC Chairman Andrew Ferguson has repeatedly identified truthful country-of-origin advertising as a key priority for the Commission’s consumer-protection agenda.

For the companies receiving warning letters, the next step will likely involve evaluating whether their sourcing, manufacturing and supply chains fully support the marketing claims appearing on their products and websites. Many businesses manufacture products using a combination of domestic and imported components, making the distinction between “Assembled in the USA” and “Made in USA” increasingly important from both a legal and marketing perspective.

For consumers, the message is straightforward.

When shoppers choose to pay more for products advertised as American-made, regulators want to ensure those claims accurately reflect where the products were manufactured. Monday’s warning letters signal that the FTC intends to closely scrutinize those claims and, when necessary, take action to protect both consumers and businesses that play by the rules.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Elon Musk is making one of his boldest promises yet — and a famous market skeptic has already shot it down.

Musk, the chief executive of Tesla and SpaceX, wrote on X on Thursday, July 2, that machines will soon handle so much of the world’s work that people will no longer need jobs to get by. “AI+Robots will be able to do everything, resulting in universal high income,” he wrote. “Work will be optional.”

The pushback came fast. Michael Burry, the investor made famous by The Big Short for calling the 2008 housing crash, replied with a single word: “False.” Then he added, “There will be revolution first.”

Musk was responding to an essay posted the same day by fellow billionaire Chamath Palihapitiya, a venture capitalist and former Facebook executive. The piece, titled The Great Descent, argued that the cost of expertise is falling toward zero as AI tools let ordinary people tap skills that once required hiring a lawyer, an accountant or a consultant.

Musk has made a version of this pitch for years. His argument is that AI and robots will drive down the cost of nearly everything — food, housing, healthcare, energy — until governments can afford to hand citizens enough money to live well. He calls it “universal high income,” a step beyond the “universal basic income” that former presidential candidate Andrew Yang campaigned on in 2019 with his $1,000-a-month plan. Musk’s version promises not just survival, but comfort.

He has pushed the idea even further. Musk has said saving for retirement could become “irrelevant” within 20 years because there will be so much wealth to go around that no one will need a nest egg.

Burry is not buying the timeline. On Substack last week, he disclosed that he is betting against Tesla stock. Back in late January, he called Musk “an American treasure but also a desperately incentivized futurist” — a jab at the billionaire’s habit of predicting a future that happens to line up with his own companies. Burry knows something about early calls: his bet against the mid-2000s housing bubble proved right, but years too soon.

His warning about revolution points to the gap between Musk’s rosy end state and the difficult transition that could come first. The concern is that if AI displaces large numbers of workers before any broad safety net is in place, the result could be widespread social unrest rather than a smooth transition into leisure.

He is not the only heavyweight worried about the handoff. Ray Dalio, founder of the hedge fund Bridgewater Associates, has warned that AI could widen the gap between rich and poor and raise the risk of internal conflict — even civil war. On The Diary of a CEO podcast last fall, Dalio said governments will need a redistribution plan for the AI era and that it must give people more than money, since idleness itself breeds anger. JPMorgan Chase chief Jamie Dimon has likewise spoken about how sharply AI could reshape the workplace.

For everyday workers, the debate is not academic. Some companies have cited AI as one factor in workforce reductions, and the promise of a comfortable government income remains a long way from any paycheck. The question sitting under the billionaire back-and-forth is simple: who pays, and when.

A “high income” for everyone would mean moving trillions of dollars from the companies and investors who own the AI to the workers it replaces. That is a political fight, not a technical one — and critics doubt the same billionaires cheering the technology would line up to fund the redistribution. As analysts have noted, the whole vision rests on wealthy backers agreeing to a massive transfer of their own money.

Governments have tested small versions of the idea. Cash-transfer pilots and one-time stimulus checks have come and gone. But turning that into a permanent, comfortable income for entire populations would demand a rebuilt tax system and a level of political agreement that does not exist right now.

For now, the two men stand at opposite poles: Musk promising abundance and Burry warning of upheaval before it arrives. The workers caught in between are left watching the machines improve every month — and wondering which billionaire has it right.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — The International Monetary Fund (IMF) lowered its outlook for the world economy on Wednesday, July 8, trimming its 2026 global growth forecast to 3.0% and raising its inflation projection, even as it argued that the world had absorbed the shock of the Middle East war better than many had feared. Deniz Igan, who leads the World Economic Studies division of the Fund’s research department, presented the newly released update during a morning briefing in Washington.

The new figure marks a slight downgrade from the 3.1% growth forecast the IMF issued in April. The Fund expects global growth to recover to 3.4% in 2027, though that would still remain below the 3.5% average pace recorded in 2024 and 2025. On prices, it raised its 2026 headline inflation forecast by three-tenths of a percentage point to 4.7%, before projecting inflation to ease to 3.9% in 2027.

The Fund’s cautiously optimistic outlook rests on one critical assumption. Its forecast is built on expectations that the Strait of Hormuz—the narrow Persian Gulf shipping lane through which a significant share of the world’s oil supply travels—will begin reopening in mid-July and gradually return to normal conditions by March 2027. Based on that assumption, the IMF credited releases from strategic petroleum reserves, ample commercial inventories and resilient demand from the technology sector with helping the global economy withstand the conflict better than many economists had expected.

That assumption appeared to come under pressure almost immediately.

The report was released the same morning that President Donald Trump, speaking in Ankara ahead of a NATO summit, declared that the understanding between the United States and Iran was “over.” His remarks followed overnight military action after attacks on commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz. Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps said it had targeted U.S. military facilities in Bahrain and Kuwait in response, while the U.S. Treasury Department revoked the license that had allowed Iran to continue selling oil on global markets.

The contrast between the IMF’s assumptions and rapidly changing geopolitical developments was striking.

While the Fund’s baseline forecast assumes the energy shock will gradually ease, renewed tensions threaten to keep oil prices elevated and increase the risk of additional supply disruptions. Brent crude traded above $76 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) remained above $72 per barrel, extending gains as traders monitored developments in the Gulf. The IMF noted that energy prices were already running roughly 25% higher than before the conflict began on February 28. Should disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz continue, the Fund’s baseline projections could prove overly optimistic.

The regional outlook reflected those risks.

The IMF left its 2026 U.S. growth forecast unchanged at 2.3% and slightly increased its 2027 estimate to 2.2%. It reduced its outlook for the euro area to 0.9% from 1.1%, lowered Japan to 0.6%, and trimmed India, while still among the world’s fastest-growing major economies, to 6.4%. The largest downgrade came in the Middle East and Central Asia, where projected 2026 growth fell by 1.2 percentage points to just 0.7%, although the IMF expects a stronger rebound in 2027 if regional conditions stabilize.

Global trade is also expected to cool.

The IMF projects world trade growth will slow to 3.5% in 2026, down from 5% in 2025, a year boosted by companies accelerating imports ahead of higher U.S. tariffs. Trade growth is then expected to recover to 4.3% in 2027.

One subtle but significant change also stood out.

In its April forecast, released shortly after the conflict began, the IMF outlined multiple economic scenarios, including a severe case in which prolonged energy disruptions pushed inflation above 6% and significantly weakened global growth. In Wednesday’s report, however, the Fund returned to a single baseline forecast and removed those alternative downside scenarios, even as geopolitical uncertainty appears to be increasing.

For American businesses and consumers, the report offers both reassurance and caution.

The IMF continues to see the U.S. economy expanding at a healthy pace while inflation gradually moderates over the next two years. At the same time, much of that outlook depends on energy markets remaining relatively stable. Higher oil prices eventually ripple through transportation, manufacturing, shipping and retail prices, affecting everything from gasoline to groceries.

The IMF’s message is that the global economy has shown greater resilience than many expected. Whether that optimism proves justified will depend largely on events unfolding in the Middle East. As markets digested the report, investors were already watching developments in the Gulf that could reshape the very assumptions underlying the Fund’s latest forecast.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Intel confirmed Monday, July 6, that it is increasing prices on several of its computer processors, citing rising supply chain costs and continued strong demand as the artificial intelligence boom reshapes the global semiconductor industry. The move marks a significant shift for an industry where chip prices have historically fallen over time as technology improves and manufacturing becomes more efficient.

The price increases affect both consumer processors and high-end server chips used in corporate data centers, underscoring how AI-related demand is now influencing virtually every segment of the semiconductor market.

For consumers, Intel raised suggested prices on several processors in its Core Ultra 200S Plus desktop lineup. Depending on the model, prices increased by roughly $30 to $50, representing increases of approximately 10% to 17% over previous suggested retail prices.

The larger increases came in Intel’s data-center business. Several Xeon server processors now carry price hikes ranging from hundreds of dollars to well over $1,000. Intel’s flagship Xeon 6980P processor, for example, increased from $12,460 to $13,955, reflecting one of the largest price adjustments in the company’s enterprise lineup.

The reason extends far beyond Intel itself.

Artificial intelligence has triggered an unprecedented wave of investment in data centers around the world. Technology companies, cloud providers and governments continue spending billions of dollars expanding AI computing infrastructure, dramatically increasing demand for advanced memory, storage and semiconductor manufacturing capacity.

That surge has tightened supplies throughout the semiconductor industry.

Although many of Intel’s processors are not specifically designed for AI workloads, they compete for manufacturing capacity, advanced packaging and critical components with chips produced for AI applications. As demand continues rising, component costs have increased across much of the electronics supply chain.

Industry analysts say Intel is not alone.

Several semiconductor manufacturers have recently announced or signaled price increases tied to higher production costs and ongoing shortages of advanced memory components. Suppliers throughout the industry continue facing pressure as demand outpaces available manufacturing capacity for many high-performance technologies.

The ripple effects extend well beyond semiconductor companies.

Computer manufacturers, enterprise technology providers and cloud-computing companies all depend on processors whose production costs continue rising. Higher component prices eventually work their way into desktops, laptops, servers and enterprise technology purchases made by businesses around the world.

For consumers, the timing could matter.

Retail prices do not always increase immediately because many stores continue selling inventory purchased before manufacturers raised prices. However, analysts expect higher wholesale costs to gradually reach retailers over the coming weeks and months as existing inventory is replaced.

Businesses planning major technology upgrades may also face higher costs.

Organizations purchasing servers, upgrading office computers or expanding data-center capacity could see larger hardware budgets as semiconductor pricing adjusts to current market conditions.

The broader significance highlights one of the unexpected consequences of the artificial intelligence revolution.

While AI promises enormous productivity gains, it is also increasing demand for the components that power modern computing. That competition is pushing prices higher not only for specialized AI hardware but also for products used every day by businesses, schools and consumers.

Intel’s decision reflects growing confidence that demand remains strong enough to support higher pricing despite continued competition throughout the semiconductor industry. The company left prices unchanged on many products, suggesting it is focusing increases on processors experiencing the strongest demand rather than implementing broad price hikes across its entire portfolio.

As AI investment continues accelerating worldwide, industry observers expect semiconductor pricing to remain one of the most closely watched indicators of supply-chain conditions. Whether additional manufacturers follow Intel with further price increases may help determine how much more consumers and businesses ultimately pay for technology over the coming year.

JBizNews Desk | Santa Clara, Calif.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. housing market continues showing signs of improvement in inventory, but for many Americans, homeownership remains financially out of reach as mortgage rates remain stubbornly high. According to the latest housing data from Freddie Mac, the average 30-year fixed mortgage continues hovering around 6.5%, keeping monthly payments elevated even as more homes become available for sale across much of the country.

Higher borrowing costs have become the single biggest obstacle facing prospective homebuyers.

At today’s mortgage rates, financing a $400,000 home requires monthly principal and interest payments exceeding $2,500, hundreds of dollars more each month than buyers would have paid just a few years ago when mortgage rates were near historic lows.

That difference has dramatically reduced affordability, particularly for first-time buyers struggling to save for down payments while managing higher living costs.

Although housing inventory has gradually increased this year, demand has remained relatively subdued.

More homeowners have begun listing their properties, and builders continue adding new homes to the market. Sellers are also becoming more willing to negotiate prices, offer mortgage-rate buydowns and provide additional incentives to attract buyers.

Even so, elevated financing costs continue limiting affordability.

Mortgage rates closely follow movements in the 10-year U.S. Treasury yield, which remains influenced by inflation expectations. As long as inflation remains above the Federal Reserve’s target, economists expect mortgage rates to remain relatively elevated.

Another challenge continues restricting supply.

Millions of homeowners refinanced during the pandemic when mortgage rates fell below 4%, with many locking in rates closer to 3%. Those homeowners now have little incentive to sell because purchasing another home would require accepting significantly higher financing costs.

Economists refer to this as the “lock-in effect,” and it continues limiting the number of existing homes entering the market.

Despite those challenges, there are encouraging signs.

The National Association of Realtors recently reported existing-home sales improving from earlier this year, while inventory continues expanding in many markets. Slower home-price appreciation is also allowing incomes to gradually catch up after several years of rapid housing inflation.

Builders have responded by offering more incentives, including mortgage-rate assistance, closing-cost credits and upgrades designed to improve affordability without reducing advertised home prices.

Housing analysts believe those concessions could create opportunities for financially prepared buyers willing to enter the market despite higher interest rates.

For many households, however, affordability remains the deciding factor.

Higher mortgage payments affect not only purchasing decisions but also how much home buyers can qualify to finance. Even modest changes in mortgage rates can significantly alter monthly payments and purchasing power.

Financial experts generally caution buyers against waiting indefinitely for mortgage rates to return to pandemic-era lows, noting those historically low borrowing costs were largely the result of extraordinary economic conditions unlikely to return soon.

Instead, many advisers recommend purchasing when personal finances allow rather than attempting to predict future interest-rate movements.

For business leaders, the housing market remains an important economic indicator because residential real estate influences consumer spending, construction activity, banking, home improvement retailers and numerous related industries.

The next housing reports later this month will provide additional insight into whether improving inventory and moderating home-price growth are beginning to stimulate stronger buyer activity.

For now, the housing market remains caught between improving supply and stubborn affordability challenges.

More homes may finally be available, but until mortgage rates move meaningfully lower or household incomes rise further, many Americans will continue finding that owning a home remains one of the biggest financial challenges they face.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — U.S. stocks closed lower on Tuesday, July 7, after the U.S. Treasury Department revoked the license that had allowed Iran to sell oil on the world market, sending crude prices sharply higher and adding fresh pressure to a market already struggling with a broad selloff in semiconductor stocks.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 130.76 points, or 0.25%, to 52,925.15, surrendering gains after reaching another all-time intraday high earlier in the session. The S&P 500 lost 0.45% to finish at 7,503.85, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 1.16% to 25,818.69, weighed down by another steep decline in chipmakers.

Technology once again led the market lower.

Micron Technology fell 4.7%, while KLA Corp., Marvell Technology, Broadcom and Advanced Micro Devices also posted notable losses. The VanEck Semiconductor ETF, a closely watched benchmark for the industry, dropped more than 3%, extending a retreat that has accelerated over the past week.

The weakness came despite Samsung Electronics reporting record quarterly operating profit earlier in the day. Under normal circumstances, strong results from one of the world’s largest memory-chip manufacturers would have lifted sentiment across the sector. Instead, investors continued rotating out of the semiconductor companies that have fueled Wall Street’s artificial intelligence rally throughout much of the year.

Mike Bailey, director of research at FBB Capital Partners, said expectations for many AI-related companies have climbed so rapidly that even strong earnings are no longer enough to satisfy investors. As valuations have expanded, markets have become increasingly sensitive to any sign that growth may be slowing.

Energy markets added another layer of pressure.

Oil prices surged after the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) revoked the general license that had permitted Iranian oil exports. The move followed a series of attacks on commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s most important energy shipping lanes.

Brent crude rose more than 5% to above $76 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) climbed more than 5% to above $72 per barrel. Higher oil prices boosted energy shares but raised fresh concerns that rising fuel costs could eventually reignite inflation and weigh on consumers and businesses.

There were several notable company-specific moves.

Crinetics Pharmaceuticals surged 98.8% after Vertex Pharmaceuticals agreed to acquire the biotechnology company in a deal valued at approximately $10 billion. Vertex shares slipped about 2% following the announcement as investors weighed the cost of the acquisition.

Meanwhile, SpaceX, which made its public market debut on June 12, fell nearly 7% during its first trading session as a member of the Nasdaq-100 Index, a difficult start for one of the market’s newest high-profile technology stocks.

Despite Tuesday’s decline, market strategists noted that the selling remains concentrated in the companies that led the market’s gains for much of the past year. Rather than a broad-based exit from equities, investors have increasingly shifted capital into sectors such as healthcare, financials, insurance and other areas that had previously lagged the technology rally.

That rotation will be closely watched in the weeks ahead. If money continues flowing into other sectors, it could help support the broader market even as technology stocks undergo a correction. If selling spreads beyond semiconductors, however, broader market volatility could increase.

The other major variable remains oil.

As long as tensions involving Iran continue to push crude prices higher, the effects are likely to ripple well beyond Wall Street. Higher energy costs eventually feed into transportation, manufacturing, shipping and consumer prices, creating additional challenges for businesses already navigating an uncertain economic environment.

Tuesday’s trading reflected those competing forces. Investors continued taking profits in high-flying technology names while weighing the economic impact of rising geopolitical tensions and higher oil prices. Whether the current market rotation proves temporary or marks the beginning of a more sustained shift away from technology will likely depend on corporate earnings, inflation trends and developments in the Middle East over the coming weeks.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nikkei Asia reported Monday, July 6, that Apple is preparing its most ambitious iPhone rollout in years, with plans to introduce at least five new iPhone models between late 2026 and the first half of 2027. The expanded lineup comes as the technology giant works to stay ahead of a global memory chip shortage that is driving up costs across the electronics industry and putting pressure on smartphone manufacturers worldwide.

According to the report, Apple plans to launch the iPhone 18, iPhone 18 Pro, iPhone 18 Pro Max, a lower-priced iPhone 18e, and the company’s long-awaited foldable iPhone, marking Apple’s first entry into the rapidly growing foldable smartphone market.

Unlike previous years, Apple is expected to split the launches into two phases. The premium Pro models and the foldable device are expected to debut during the company’s traditional fall product event, while the standard iPhone 18 and 18e models are reportedly scheduled for release during the spring of 2027.

The strategy reflects more than product planning. It also demonstrates Apple’s ability to navigate one of the semiconductor industry’s biggest challenges: securing enough memory chips during an unprecedented supply crunch fueled by artificial intelligence.

The explosive growth of AI data centers has dramatically increased demand for advanced memory chips used in servers and high-performance computing. As cloud providers and technology companies race to expand AI infrastructure, competition for memory components has intensified, pushing prices higher throughout the global electronics supply chain.

Apple has largely insulated itself from those shortages by leveraging its enormous purchasing power. According to Nikkei Asia, the company has already secured components for approximately 80 million iPhones scheduled for production during the second half of 2026. Total iPhone production this year is expected to exceed 220 million devices, giving Apple one of the strongest supply positions in the smartphone industry.

That scale has become a major competitive advantage.

While Apple continues securing production capacity, several Chinese smartphone manufacturers—including Xiaomi, Oppo and Vivo—have reportedly reduced production targets after struggling to obtain sufficient memory supplies at acceptable prices. Industry executives told Nikkei that Apple’s purchasing leverage gives it priority access to critical components that smaller competitors often cannot match.

Even Apple, however, has begun feeling the effects of rising semiconductor costs.

The company recently increased prices on portions of its MacBook and iPad product lines as memory and storage expenses climbed. Analysts say similar cost pressures could eventually affect future iPhone pricing, particularly if semiconductor shortages continue into next year.

Much of the excitement surrounding Apple’s roadmap centers on its first foldable iPhone.

Industry reports indicate Apple has spent years refining the device, focusing heavily on reducing the visible crease that has affected competing foldable smartphones. The premium model is expected to feature a titanium frame, advanced display technology supplied by Samsung Display, and a book-style folding design with separate inner and outer screens.

Because of its complex manufacturing process, analysts expect initial production volumes to remain relatively limited. Early estimates suggest the foldable iPhone could carry a price exceeding $2,000, making it Apple’s most expensive smartphone ever.

For consumers, the broader story extends beyond new devices.

The AI boom reshaping Silicon Valley is also changing the economics of everyday electronics. As technology companies invest hundreds of billions of dollars into artificial intelligence infrastructure, competition for advanced semiconductors continues pushing manufacturing costs higher across phones, tablets, laptops and personal computers.

Apple’s ability to secure long-term supply agreements gives it advantages many competitors lack, allowing the company to continue launching products even as shortages affect other manufacturers. Whether that advantage ultimately translates into higher market share or higher consumer prices will become clearer as the new iPhone lineup begins reaching customers.

Apple has not officially confirmed the reported product roadmap and traditionally does not comment on unreleased products before its annual launch events.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino, Calif.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A report released by the National Energy Assistance Directors Association (NEADA) and the Center for Energy Poverty and Climate warns that American households are on track to pay the highest summer electric bills ever recorded, as soaring temperatures combine with rising electricity prices to strain family budgets across the country. The report, released in June and highlighted again as a dangerous heat wave grips much of the United States, projects the average household will spend approximately $792 on electricity for cooling between June and September, up more than 10% from last summer.

The increase comes as millions of Americans battle another stretch of extreme heat. Large portions of the country continue experiencing above-normal temperatures, forcing air conditioners to run longer while utilities struggle to meet growing demand.

According to NOAA, above-average temperatures are expected across much of the United States throughout the summer, increasing electricity consumption at the same time energy prices continue climbing.

“Families are getting hit from both sides,” said Mark Wolfe, Executive Director of NEADA. “Electricity prices continue to rise, and hotter summers mean households need to use more electricity simply to stay safe.”

The report estimates that summer cooling costs have climbed nearly 40% since 2020, reflecting both higher electricity prices and increased demand driven by longer and more intense heat waves.

Several factors are contributing to the rising cost of electricity, but one of the fastest-growing pressures comes from the rapid expansion of artificial intelligence.

Across the country, technology companies are building massive AI data centers that require enormous amounts of electricity to operate. Those facilities consume power around the clock, increasing demand on regional electric grids and requiring utilities to invest billions of dollars in new generation capacity, transmission lines and infrastructure upgrades.

Industry analysts say those investments are increasingly finding their way into customer utility bills.

Additional pressure comes from higher fuel costs, continued infrastructure improvements and growing electricity demand from homes, businesses and electric vehicles.

For many families, the financial strain is becoming difficult to manage.

The report estimates millions of households remain behind on their utility payments, while total consumer utility debt continues climbing nationwide. Lower-income families are particularly vulnerable because cooling is no longer considered simply a comfort but an important public health necessity during prolonged periods of extreme heat.

Health experts warn that reducing air conditioning too aggressively can create dangerous conditions, particularly for seniors, young children and individuals with chronic medical conditions.

Rather than turning cooling systems off completely, energy experts recommend practical steps that can reduce electricity consumption without compromising safety.

Simple measures include raising the thermostat by one degree, replacing dirty HVAC filters, sealing air leaks around windows and doors, closing blinds during the hottest parts of the day and using ceiling fans to improve air circulation. Even modest efficiency improvements can lower monthly electricity costs while maintaining comfortable indoor temperatures.

Federal and state assistance programs may also help qualifying households.

The U.S. Department of Energy continues supporting energy-efficiency upgrades through various grant programs designed to improve insulation, replace older cooling equipment and reduce household energy consumption. Many states also offer utility assistance programs for qualifying low-income families during periods of extreme weather.

NEADA is urging Congress to increase funding for the Low Income Home Energy Assistance Program (LIHEAP), arguing that current funding has not kept pace with rising energy costs and more frequent extreme heat events.

The organization also recommends stronger consumer protections to prevent utility shutoffs during dangerous heat waves, particularly for vulnerable populations.

For businesses, higher electricity costs present another challenge.

Restaurants, retailers, manufacturers and office buildings all face rising operating expenses as cooling costs increase during the busiest months of the year. Many companies are responding by investing in energy-efficient lighting, upgraded HVAC systems and smart-building technology designed to reduce long-term utility expenses.

The report highlights how one of the biggest economic stories of 2026—the rapid expansion of artificial intelligence—is affecting Americans in unexpected ways. While AI promises major productivity gains, the enormous electricity required to power advanced computing facilities is adding new pressure to an already strained electric grid.

For households, the message is straightforward: expect another expensive summer.

With temperatures expected to remain above normal across much of the country and electricity demand continuing to grow, energy experts encourage consumers to prepare for higher monthly utility bills while taking advantage of available conservation measures and assistance programs wherever possible.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to comments made Monday, July 6, by Panmure Liberum strategist Joachim Klement during CNBC’s Squawk Box Europe, investors are beginning to view parts of the defense industry less like traditional weapons manufacturers and more like technology companies. The shift reflects the growing importance of electronic warfare, artificial intelligence, advanced software, drones and next-generation battlefield systems in modern military operations.

For decades, defense contractors were valued primarily on their long-term government contracts, predictable cash flow and large backlogs of aircraft, ships, missiles and armored vehicles. Today, analysts say the industry’s fastest-growing opportunities are increasingly centered on technology rather than conventional hardware.

“Electronic warfare is a tech phenomenon,” Klement said during the interview, arguing that companies developing advanced software, electronic surveillance, communications systems and autonomous technologies deserve higher valuations than traditional defense manufacturers.

The comments come as defense spending continues rising around the world. Governments across Europe, North America and Asia are committing billions of dollars to modernize their militaries following growing geopolitical tensions and ongoing conflicts. Those investments are creating new opportunities for companies developing advanced military technology while also supporting established defense contractors with large order backlogs.

Investors have responded by pouring money into the sector. Shares of several major defense companies have climbed sharply over the past several years as governments increased military budgets and accelerated procurement programs. While traditional manufacturers continue benefiting from demand for aircraft, missiles and defense systems, companies with strong exposure to artificial intelligence, drones, cybersecurity and electronic warfare have attracted growing investor interest.

Analysts say the nature of warfare itself is changing. Modern conflicts increasingly rely on real-time intelligence, satellite communications, unmanned aircraft, electronic jamming, cyber capabilities and software-driven command systems. Those technologies often evolve much faster than conventional military platforms and require continuous innovation rather than decades-long production cycles.

Klement also noted that investors are becoming more selective when evaluating defense companies. Rather than treating every contractor as a beneficiary of higher military spending, investors are paying closer attention to where governments are directing new funding. Businesses positioned in rapidly growing technology segments may receive higher valuations than companies focused primarily on legacy defense programs.

He pointed to the cancellation of certain large defense programs in Europe as an example of how changing military priorities can reshape industry expectations. Even with rising defense budgets, governments continue reviewing projects to ensure they align with future operational needs and evolving battlefield requirements.

Another factor influencing recent trading has been the broader technology sector. According to Klement, some recent weakness in defense shares reflected investment flows moving into artificial intelligence-related stocks rather than deteriorating business fundamentals. Portfolio managers continue balancing exposure across sectors while seeking companies positioned to benefit from long-term technology trends.

For investors, the distinction matters. Traditional defense companies often trade based on predictable earnings and government contracts. Technology-focused defense firms may command higher valuations because of faster expected growth, recurring software revenue and continued innovation.

The broader business implications extend beyond defense. Increasing collaboration between aerospace, software developers, semiconductor companies, communications providers and artificial intelligence firms is creating new opportunities across multiple industries. As governments invest in advanced defense technologies, suppliers throughout those ecosystems also stand to benefit.

Industry observers expect defense modernization to remain a major theme over the coming decade. Whether developing autonomous systems, electronic warfare capabilities, advanced sensors or secure communications, companies delivering next-generation technologies are expected to play a growing role in military procurement.

For business leaders and investors, the message is clear: the defense industry is no longer defined solely by tanks, ships and fighter jets. Increasingly, it is being driven by software, data, artificial intelligence and electronic systems, changing how Wall Street values the companies shaping the future of national security.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to analyst reports released Tuesday, July 7, following SpaceX’s IPO quiet period, Wall Street is sharply divided over just how valuable the company can become. Brian Gesuale of Raymond James initiated coverage with a “Strong Buy” rating and an $800 price target — the highest on Wall Street and roughly 430% above where the stock traded during Tuesday’s session. If shares ever reached that level, SpaceX would carry a market value of roughly $10.5 trillion, more than double the current value of Nvidia, the world’s largest publicly traded company.

The bullish call came as several investment banks published their first research reports on the newly public company. Morgan Stanley assigned a $300 price target, highlighting SpaceX’s long-term potential in launch services, satellite communications and artificial intelligence infrastructure. Goldman Sachs set a $205 target, while UBS came in at $210. Dan Ives of Wedbush Securities issued a $190 target. The company also joined the Nasdaq-100 Index, prompting billions of dollars in automatic purchases from index funds and exchange-traded funds that track the benchmark.

SpaceX completed its blockbuster initial public offering on June 12 under the ticker SPCX, becoming one of the largest IPOs ever. After an initial rally, the shares settled into a volatile trading range as investors weighed the company’s growth prospects against its lofty valuation.

The investment case extends far beyond rockets. SpaceX now combines its reusable launch business with the rapidly expanding Starlink satellite network and xAI, the artificial intelligence company merged into the business earlier this year. Chief Executive Elon Musk has outlined plans for space-based computing infrastructure capable of supporting next-generation AI workloads, while company filings describe an addressable market measured in the tens of trillions of dollars.

Not everyone believes those projections. Aswath Damodaran, professor of finance at New York University and one of Wall Street’s leading valuation experts, has argued that even a valuation above $1 trillion stretches reasonable assumptions. He has also questioned the company’s addressable market estimates, saying investors should distinguish between long-term vision and measurable financial performance.

The financial metrics illustrate the challenge. SpaceX generated approximately $18.7 billion in revenue last year while posting a net loss of roughly $5 billion. Even after its recent pullback, the shares continue to trade at a valuation far above most established technology companies on a price-to-sales basis. Morningstar analysts have likewise projected a more gradual revenue trajectory than many of the most optimistic forecasts currently circulating on Wall Street.

Investors also face structural risks. Additional insider shares are scheduled to become eligible for sale over the coming quarters, potentially increasing supply in the market. Meanwhile, Musk retains overwhelming voting control through the company’s dual-class share structure, limiting the influence of public shareholders on corporate decisions.

The debate carries consequences well beyond professional investors. With SpaceX now included in the Nasdaq-100, millions of Americans indirectly own shares through retirement accounts, pension funds and index funds. That broad ownership has renewed discussion in Washington over valuations, corporate governance and whether highly valued growth companies should become major components of passive investment portfolios so soon after going public.

For now, the gap between Wall Street’s highest and lowest expectations remains extraordinary. One respected analyst believes SpaceX could become the first company worth more than $10 trillion. Others believe investors have already priced in years of future growth. As the company begins life as a public corporation, the market will ultimately decide which view proves closer to reality.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Tesla and BYD reported strong second-quarter delivery results in figures released during the first week of July, underscoring the continued strength of the global electric vehicle market despite intensifying competition and shifting consumer demand. The latest delivery numbers show the world’s two largest electric vehicle manufacturers continuing to battle for market share as automakers race to expand production, lower prices and introduce new technology.

The quarterly results highlight a dramatic turnaround from the cautious outlook that surrounded the EV industry earlier this year. Concerns over slowing demand, higher borrowing costs and increased competition had weighed on the sector, but second-quarter deliveries indicate consumers continue embracing electric vehicles across many major markets.

BYD once again finished the quarter as the world’s largest seller of battery-electric passenger vehicles, delivering more than 557,000 fully electric vehicles during the April-through-June period. Tesla followed with more than 480,000 vehicle deliveries, marking one of the strongest quarters in the company’s history and reinforcing its position as the world’s leading pure electric vehicle manufacturer outside China.

Although BYD maintained its lead in total battery-electric deliveries, Tesla significantly narrowed the gap compared with previous quarters. Industry analysts said the improvement reflects stronger global demand for Tesla’s Model 3 and Model Y vehicles, continued production efficiency and renewed consumer interest following recent pricing adjustments.

The rivalry between the two automakers continues to reshape the global automotive industry. Tesla remains focused exclusively on battery-electric vehicles, while BYD also sells large numbers of plug-in hybrid models, giving the Chinese automaker an even larger presence across the broader new-energy vehicle market.

Competition is expanding well beyond those two companies. Traditional manufacturers including Volkswagen, Hyundai, General Motors, Ford and several emerging Chinese brands continue investing billions of dollars in new electric models as governments around the world tighten emissions standards and consumers seek alternatives to gasoline-powered vehicles.

Pricing has become one of the industry’s biggest competitive weapons. Tesla has repeatedly adjusted prices across key markets while introducing lower-cost model configurations designed to attract additional buyers. BYD continues leveraging its vertically integrated manufacturing strategy, including in-house battery production, allowing the company to aggressively price many of its vehicles while maintaining healthy production volumes.

Industry experts say battery technology remains one of the biggest competitive advantages. BYD’s proprietary Blade Battery has helped lower manufacturing costs while improving safety and driving range. Tesla continues investing heavily in battery development, manufacturing efficiency and software capabilities, areas many analysts believe remain among its strongest long-term advantages.

The growing competition ultimately benefits consumers. Buyers today have more electric vehicle choices than ever before, with expanding model lineups across nearly every price category. Improved driving range, faster charging technology and declining battery costs continue making electric vehicles increasingly practical for both families and businesses.

Global expansion also remains a major focus. BYD continues increasing exports across Europe, Southeast Asia and Latin America while Tesla maintains manufacturing operations serving North America, Europe and Asia. Both companies are expected to remain aggressive as they compete for market share in regions where EV adoption continues accelerating.

For investors, the second-quarter delivery reports provide another reminder that the electric vehicle market remains one of the fastest-changing sectors of the global economy. Quarterly delivery figures have become one of the industry’s most closely watched performance indicators because they offer an early look at consumer demand before companies release their full financial results.

The broader business impact extends far beyond the automakers themselves. Strong EV sales support manufacturers of batteries, semiconductors, charging equipment, software, mining companies supplying critical minerals and thousands of suppliers throughout the global automotive supply chain.

While challenges remain—including pricing pressure, trade policies and continued competition—the latest delivery results suggest demand for electric vehicles remains resilient. As more manufacturers enter the market and technology continues improving, consumers are expected to benefit from greater innovation, increased affordability and a wider selection of electric vehicles than ever before.

JBizNews Desk | Global Auto Markets

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Toyota Motor North America announced Monday, July 6, that it will invest $3.6 billion to expand its San Antonio, Texas, manufacturing campus, adding a new vehicle assembly line and shifting production of its popular Tacoma pickup truck from Mexico to the United States. The company said the project will create approximately 2,000 new jobs, significantly expand production capacity and further strengthen its long-term commitment to U.S. manufacturing.

The investment represents one of Toyota’s largest manufacturing commitments in recent years and comes as automakers continue adjusting their production strategies amid higher tariffs, evolving trade policies and growing political pressure to manufacture more vehicles in the United States.

The expansion will add a new 2.5-million-square-foot assembly facility to Toyota’s existing San Antonio campus. Once completed, the company expects the site to become one of its largest truck manufacturing operations in North America, producing the Tacoma, Tundra and Sequoia under one roof.

Toyota said the transition from Mexico will occur gradually over the next several years, with Tacoma production moving from its older assembly plant in Baja California to Texas. The company emphasized that it is not abandoning Mexico, noting that Tacoma production will continue at its newer Guanajuato facility while the transition takes place.

The announcement reflects broader changes taking place throughout the global automotive industry. Rising tariffs on imported vehicles, steel, aluminum and automotive parts have encouraged manufacturers to reconsider where they build vehicles destined for American consumers. Producing more vehicles inside the United States reduces exposure to changing trade policies while shortening supply chains and transportation costs.

Toyota’s San Antonio plant already serves as one of the company’s flagship truck facilities. The campus currently assembles the full-size Toyota Tundra, including hybrid models, along with the Toyota Sequoia SUV. Adding Tacoma production transforms the facility into Toyota’s primary North American truck manufacturing hub.

The company also continues investing elsewhere on the campus. A new rear axle manufacturing facility is expected to begin operations later this year, allowing Toyota to produce additional components closer to final vehicle assembly and further localize its supply chain.

With Monday’s announcement, Toyota’s total investment in the San Antonio operation climbs to approximately $8.3 billion since construction first began in 2003. Employment at the facility is expected to grow to roughly 6,000 workers once the expansion is fully completed.

The project also delivers a major economic victory for Texas. State officials, Bexar County and the City of San Antonio assembled an incentive package valued at more than $300 million, including infrastructure improvements, tax incentives and workforce development assistance designed to secure the investment and the thousands of jobs accompanying it.

Construction is expected to begin this year, while hiring will occur in phases through the end of the decade. According to state filings, Toyota plans to add hundreds of workers annually before reaching approximately 2,000 new employees by 2030.

For consumers, the shift is unlikely to produce immediate changes. Tacoma production will continue uninterrupted during the transition, and Toyota has not announced any pricing changes related to the move. Instead, the investment reflects a long-term strategy designed to position the company for future growth while reducing manufacturing risks associated with international trade uncertainty.

Industry analysts say Toyota’s announcement could influence decisions by other global automakers evaluating where to build future vehicles. As manufacturers invest billions of dollars in new factories, electric vehicles and advanced technologies, production location has become an increasingly important competitive and political consideration.

The expansion also reinforces Texas’ growing position as one of America’s leading automotive manufacturing states. Along with Toyota, numerous suppliers and related manufacturers continue expanding throughout the region, creating additional employment opportunities beyond the assembly plant itself.

For business leaders and investors, Toyota’s decision highlights an ongoing trend reshaping American manufacturing. Companies are increasingly prioritizing domestic production, not only because of tariffs but also because of supply chain resilience, workforce availability and proximity to customers.

Whether additional automakers follow Toyota’s lead remains to be seen, but Monday’s announcement represents another significant step toward expanding vehicle manufacturing inside the United States while creating thousands of well-paying manufacturing jobs expected to support the Texas economy for decades.

JBizNews Desk | San Antonio, Texas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Samsung Electronics reported preliminary second-quarter results on Tuesday that shattered its own profit records, yet the numbers set off a global selloff in chip stocks that pulled U.S. markets down from record highs.

In an earnings guidance filing, Samsung said operating profit for the April-to-June quarter reached roughly 89.4 trillion Korean won, about $58.4 billion — a nearly 19-fold jump from the 4.7 trillion won it earned a year earlier. Revenue came in around 171 trillion won, roughly 130% higher than the same quarter in 2025. The surge was powered by record sales and soaring prices for memory chips — DRAM, high-bandwidth memory and NAND flash — that feed the world’s artificial-intelligence servers.

It was Samsung’s third straight record quarter, and the profit figure cleared Wall Street’s consensus of about 87.3 trillion won. But investors sold anyway.

Samsung shares closed nearly 7% lower in Seoul, and South Korea’s KOSPI index tumbled more than 7%. The reason was simple: the stock had already run up roughly 150% this year, so a blockbuster quarter was baked into the price. “The stock had priced in a historic quarter for months,” said Zavier Wong, a market analyst at eToro, adding that confirmation of good news is often what people sell into.

The selling crossed the Pacific. The Nasdaq Composite fell 1.16% to 25,818.69, while the S&P 500 slid 0.45% to 7,503.85. The Dow Jones Industrial Average lost 130.76 points, or 0.25%, to close at 52,925.15 after earlier touching a new all-time intraday high.

Chipmakers led the retreat. Micron closed down 4.7%, with KLA, Marvell Technology, Broadcom and AMD also falling, and the VanEck Semiconductor ETF dropped more than 3%. Adding to the pressure, Reuters reported that China’s DeepSeek is building its own AI chip, a potential new threat to Nvidia.

Beneath the one-day move sits a bigger worry: whether the AI spending boom that has driven memory prices to extraordinary levels can keep going. Samsung’s results were “dragged down by concerns that AI infrastructure spending can’t keep growing at the pace that has been driving memory prices,” Wong said. The chip rally has been the engine of this year’s stock gains, so any doubt about its staying power hits the broad market, not just tech.

Analysts flagged how high the bar has climbed. Adam Crisafulli of Vital Knowledge noted that second-quarter earnings are likely to be strong in absolute terms, but expectations are now far more bullish than they were heading into the first-quarter season, leaving little room to disappoint. Albert Yong, managing partner at Petra Capital Management, said Samsung’s strong results had largely been priced in after the share rally, and that investors remain worried about the durability of the AI boom.

For everyday Americans, the connection runs through retirement accounts. The biggest 401(k) and index-fund holdings are heavily weighted toward the same handful of chip and technology names that swung Tuesday. When a single earnings report in Seoul can knock a percentage point off the Nasdaq, it shows how concentrated the market has become around the AI trade — and how much ordinary savers are riding on it.

There were pockets of strength. Samsung’s foundry business returned to monthly profitability in June for the first time in three years, and the company has secured a $16.5 billion contract from Tesla to manufacture AI chips. Rival SK Hynix has seen its market value more than double this year on the same memory demand.

Samsung releases full second-quarter results on July 30, when investors will see exactly how much of the record profit came from the memory business and whether the mobile division absorbed higher chip costs. Until then, the market’s message is clear: even a historic earnings report is no guarantee of higher share prices when expectations have already reached extraordinary levels.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul, South Korea

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. men’s national team saw its World Cup run come to an end in front of the largest soccer audience the country has ever produced. Fox Corp. said on Tuesday, July 7, that its coverage of Monday night’s USA-Belgium round-of-16 match in Seattle drew 30 million viewers, the most-watched soccer telecast in U.S. history. Add the 12 million who watched the Spanish-language broadcast on Telemundo and Peacock, and the total American audience reached 42 million, according to preliminary Nielsen figures and Adobe Analytics data released by the networks.

That is a staggering number for a sport that spent decades on the margins of American television. It topped the record set only a week earlier, when the USA-Bosnia and Herzegovina group-stage game pulled in 26.4 million on Fox. The Belgium match peaked at 36.9 million viewers between 9:15 and 9:30 p.m. Eastern, right as Belgium pulled away in a 4-1 win that knocked the U.S. out of the tournament it is co-hosting.

The audience tells one story. The money behind it tells another.

Fox paid a reported $485 million for the English-language U.S. rights to the 2026 World Cup, a price several industry analysts have called two to three times below what those rights would fetch in an open market. The reason Fox got a bargain and is now cashing in comes down to geography. This is the first World Cup in 30 years played in U.S. time zones, which means marquee games land in prime time instead of at breakfast. Team USA’s run gave Fox its most valuable inventory of all.

Advertising rates climbed with each round. During the group stage and early knockout matches, spots ran around $300,000, sources told Front Office Sports. For later rounds, prices reached an estimated $1 million to $2 million. Fox charged close to $1 million for some commercials in Team USA’s opening games and could command more as the tournament advanced.

A new wrinkle added even more. FIFA introduced two three-minute hydration breaks per match this year, officially to protect players from summer heat. For Fox, they became a windfall. The breaks let the network run full-screen commercials inside the match itself, something soccer never allowed before. The Hollywood Reporter estimated those in-game spots sold for $200,000 to $750,000 each, and pegged the total value of the breaks across the tournament at $250 million to $600 million.

Put it all together and the two U.S. rights holders are on track for a combined $850 million in ad sales, according to estimates cited by Sportico. That is more than double the $384.3 million Fox and Telemundo booked during the 2018 tournament in Russia, the last summer World Cup.

For the sport’s American backers, Monday’s number is validation. Telemundo called its 12 million audience the largest for any U.S. men’s national team soccer match in Spanish-language history, with 6.7 million streaming on Peacock and 4.8 million watching the linear broadcast. Streaming, not just traditional TV, is carrying more of the load than in any prior tournament.

Still, it helps to keep the World Cup’s place in the American advertising market in perspective. Luke Stillman, managing director at consultancy Madison & Wall, put it bluntly: in the U.S., the World Cup is a $400 million to $500 million event inside a $60 billion to $70 billion television ecosystem. For comparison, the 2025 Super Bowl averaged 127.7 million viewers, and last month’s NBA Finals between the New York Knicks and San Antonio Spurs averaged 20.6 million on ABC and ESPN. Soccer is growing rapidly in the United States, but it has not yet reached football’s scale.

The brands showed up anyway. Official FIFA partners including Coca-Cola, Visa, Hyundai and, for the first time, Lenovo anchored the sponsor roster, while Bank of America, Verizon and American Airlines signed on as tournament sponsors. On the advertising side, Michelob Ultra, Lay’s, Home Depot, Budweiser and Quaker all ran national campaigns tied to the games.

The commercial question now is what happens without the home team. Team USA’s elimination removes the single biggest draw from Fox’s remaining schedule. The tournament runs through the July 19 final in New York and New Jersey, and later-round matches will still command premium advertising rates. But the network no longer has the one storyline that turned casual American viewers into a record-breaking audience.

For one night in Seattle, though, 42 million people proved the American appetite for soccer is real—and worth a fortune to whoever owns the broadcast.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Asian markets opened sharply lower on Wednesday, hit by a fresh wave of selling in semiconductor stocks and a jump in oil prices after the United States struck Iran overnight. The twin blows landed within hours of each other. Late Tuesday in Washington, the U.S. Treasury Department revoked the license that had allowed Iran to sell its oil on world markets, and U.S. Central Command followed with a new round of military strikes inside Iran. Together they sent crude prices up roughly 6% and rattled a region already nervous about chips.

South Korea took the hardest hit. The Kospi index plunged 3.34% to 7,400.24 shortly after the open, its lowest level since late May. Japan’s Nikkei 225 fell 1.34% to 67,341.86, sliding to a level last seen in mid-June.

The pain was concentrated in the same memory-chip giants that had led the region’s blistering 2026 rally. Samsung Electronics dropped 4.32%, extending a slide that began a day earlier when the company’s record earnings guidance failed to satisfy investors who had bet on even bigger numbers. Rival SK Hynix fell 4.77%, slipping toward the 2 million won mark. In Japan, tech-investment heavyweight SoftBank Group eased 1.18%.

One name bucked the trend. Kioxia, the Japanese memory maker, rose 1.16% at the open, a rare spot of green in an otherwise red screen.

The selloff was a second act. On Tuesday, Samsung’s “sell the news” drop was severe enough to trigger a rare circuit breaker in South Korean trading, a mechanism that briefly pauses activity when moves get too violent. Wednesday’s open picked up where that left off.

What’s driving the chip slide

The immediate trigger came from Wall Street. Overnight, the Philadelphia Semiconductor Index — the main gauge of U.S. chip stocks — fell sharply again, and the Nasdaq Composite dropped 1.16% to close at 25,818.69. The Dow Jones Industrial Average slipped 0.25% to 52,925.15 after touching a record high earlier in the day, while the S&P 500 lost 0.45% to 7,503.85.

Underneath the numbers is a bigger worry. Investors are starting to question whether the enormous sums Big Tech is pouring into artificial intelligence can keep justifying the sky-high prices of the chips that power it. Samsung’s results made the point in miniature: profit soared nearly 19-fold from a year earlier to a company record, yet the stock still fell because expectations had climbed even higher. When a record isn’t good enough, nervous investors sell.

Oil and the Iran shock

The energy story added a second layer of stress. On July 7, the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control scrapped a waiver issued only weeks ago that had let Iran sell crude oil internationally, replacing it with a far narrower authorization. The move came after a string of attacks on tankers in the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway through which a large share of the world’s oil passes.

Hours later, U.S. Central Command said it had carried out strikes inside Iran, targeting air-defense systems, command networks, coastal radar and anti-ship missile sites, and destroying several Iranian Revolutionary Guard patrol boats.

Oil markets reacted fast. West Texas Intermediate crude, the U.S. benchmark, climbed about 5.25% to roughly $72.15 a barrel, while international standard Brent crude rose about 5.7% to near $76.14. For a region that imports almost all of its energy, higher oil prices are a direct threat — they raise costs for manufacturers, squeeze household budgets, and feed inflation just as central banks had hoped to ease off.

Why it matters beyond the trading floor

For everyday consumers across Asia, the two stories connect at the wallet. Pricier oil means costlier fuel and shipping, which eventually shows up in the price of goods. And the memory chips made by Samsung, SK Hynix and Kioxia sit inside the phones, laptops, cars and data centers that people and businesses buy every day. When these companies stumble, the effects ripple through supply chains, jobs and investment plans well outside the stock market.

The bigger question now is whether Wednesday’s drop is a healthy pause after a red-hot run or the start of something deeper. South Korea’s Kospi and Japan’s Nikkei are both still up strongly for 2026, powered by the AI-driven chip boom. But with oil climbing and the U.S.-Iran conflict flaring again, the mood has turned cautious. Traders across the region will be watching two things above all in the days ahead: whether chip stocks find their footing, and how far oil runs if the standoff with Iran gets worse.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Mortgage rates edged slightly lower Tuesday, offering a modest break for homebuyers during the busiest stretch of the summer housing season. While the move may save borrowers a little money, economists say the broader outlook suggests mortgage rates are likely to remain elevated well into the future.

According to Zillow, the average interest rate on a 30-year fixed-rate purchase mortgage stood at 6.635% on July 7, down from 6.664% the previous day. The average 30-year refinance rate measured 6.728%, while the 15-year fixed mortgage averaged 5.722%.

Although the decline was small, it follows several weeks of rising borrowing costs that have kept affordability under pressure for prospective buyers.

The recent increase in mortgage rates has been driven less by changes in the Federal Reserve’s benchmark interest rate than by investors’ expectations about where monetary policy is headed.

At its June meeting, the Federal Reserve left its benchmark federal funds rate unchanged at 3.50% to 3.75%, but policymakers adopted a more hawkish tone. Updated economic projections showed the median expectation for the federal funds rate rising to 3.8% by the end of 2026, signaling that at least one additional rate increase remains possible if inflation does not continue to moderate.

That marks a significant shift from much of the past two years, when financial markets were focused almost entirely on the timing of future rate cuts.

Inflation remains the central obstacle.

The latest Consumer Price Index showed consumer prices rising 4.2% over the previous 12 months, reinforcing the Federal Reserve’s concern that inflation has not yet returned to its long-term target.

Helping offset some of that pressure was last week’s softer-than-expected employment report.

The U.S. economy added only 57,000 jobs in June, well below economists’ expectations, while payroll figures for April and May were revised lower. Slower hiring generally pushes Treasury yields lower, and because mortgage rates closely track the yield on the 10-year U.S. Treasury, weaker employment data provided modest downward pressure on borrowing costs.

Housing economists caution that buyers should not expect rates to fall dramatically anytime soon.

Selma Hepp, chief economist at Cotality, said mortgage rates are unlikely to decline meaningfully until inflation slows further and long-term Treasury yields retreat. Likewise, Robert Dietz, chief economist for the National Association of Home Builders, has said mortgage rates below 6% may not become common again until 2027.

For families shopping for a home, even small differences matter.

On a $400,000 mortgage, the difference between borrowing at 6% and 6.6% can increase monthly payments by well over $150, adding tens of thousands of dollars over the life of a 30-year loan. That affordability gap continues to sideline many first-time buyers despite a gradual increase in homes available for sale.

Regional housing markets are also beginning to diverge.

According to the latest S&P CoreLogic Case-Shiller Home Price Index, several markets that experienced rapid pandemic-era appreciation—including Tampa, Phoenix, Dallas, and Miami—have begun recording year-over-year price declines. Meanwhile, more established markets in the Northeast and Midwest, including New York, Chicago, and Boston, continue posting price gains supported by stronger local employment and more limited housing inventory.

Builders say the country’s housing shortage remains the larger structural challenge.

Industry estimates suggest the United States is still short roughly 1.2 million housing units, meaning affordability problems are unlikely to disappear simply because mortgage rates eventually decline.

For now, Tuesday’s move offers only modest relief.

Prospective buyers hoping for a return to the historically low mortgage rates of recent years will likely need to remain patient. Until inflation moves decisively lower and the Federal Reserve becomes more comfortable easing monetary policy, borrowing costs are expected to remain well above the levels that fueled the housing boom earlier this decade.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Treasury Department revoked the license that had allowed Iran to sell its oil on the world market on Tuesday, July 7, choking off a key source of revenue for Tehran after attacks on commercial ships in the Strait of Hormuz. The department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) said it withdrew the authorization because the understanding reached with Iran last month was contingent on compliance, and U.S. officials said Iran had failed to uphold its commitments.

A senior U.S. official said Iran’s actions in the Strait of Hormuz were unacceptable and warranted consequences while emphasizing that Washington remains committed to pursuing a broader diplomatic agreement if Tehran changes course.

The Treasury action effectively unwinds an arrangement that was only weeks old. Under last month’s interim agreement, Iran had been permitted to continue limited oil exports through August 21 while negotiations continued. Tuesday’s move dramatically shortens that timeline. Existing transactions must now be wound down by July 17, with any payments required to remain in blocked, interest-bearing accounts inside the United States. New oil sales under the license are no longer permitted.

The decision follows a fresh escalation in one of the world’s most important energy corridors.

According to the United Kingdom Maritime Trade Operations (UKMTO), three commercial vessels were attacked in or near the Strait of Hormuz in recent days. The incidents included damage to the Qatari liquefied natural gas carrier Al-Rekayyat, along with attacks involving an oil tanker and another commercial vessel. Dr. Majed Al Ansari, spokesperson for Qatar’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs, confirmed the incident involving the LNG carrier. U.S. military forces later responded with strikes against Iranian targets, according to U.S. Central Command, although the Treasury action stands as a separate economic response.

Energy markets reacted immediately.

Brent crude, the international benchmark, settled approximately 3% higher at $74.16 per barrel, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate (WTI) finished 2.8% higher at $70.44. Following news of the Treasury’s license revocation, prices continued climbing in after-hours trading, with Brent approaching $76 per barrel and WTI rising above $72, representing gains of roughly 5% from the previous trading session.

“Obviously today is the next level of breakaway from the memorandum of understanding,” said Bob Yawger, director of energy futures at Mizuho, describing the market’s reaction to the deteriorating relationship between Washington and Tehran.

For Iran, the financial consequences could be significant.

Oil exports remain one of the country’s primary sources of hard currency, generating billions of dollars annually. China continues to be the largest purchaser of Iranian crude, making restrictions on export sales particularly meaningful for Tehran’s already strained economy.

Maritime analysts believe the attacks may have been intended to increase pressure on Gulf shipping routes rather than simply disrupt individual vessels.

Michelle Wiese Bockmann, senior maritime intelligence analyst at Windward, said the recent incidents appear designed to destabilize shipping along the southern corridor protected by the U.S. Navy while encouraging greater reliance on routes where Iran maintains stronger influence.

For American consumers, however, the immediate concern is fuel prices.

The Strait of Hormuz carries roughly 20% of the world’s seaborne oil, making it one of the most strategically important waterways in global commerce. Any disruption to shipping through the strait can quickly affect crude prices, which eventually filter down to gasoline stations, airlines, trucking companies and businesses dependent on transportation.

Higher diesel prices are especially important because they affect freight transportation across the United States. Increased fuel costs for trucks, railroads and delivery companies often work their way into the prices consumers pay for groceries, household goods and countless everyday products.

There is also a balancing effect.

As one of the world’s largest oil producers and exporters, the United States benefits financially when global energy prices rise. Domestic producers generally earn higher revenues during periods of elevated crude prices. At the same time, households, manufacturers, airlines, shipping companies and small businesses typically face higher operating costs as fuel becomes more expensive.

Investors will now turn their attention to U.S. inventory data.

The American Petroleum Institute estimated that domestic crude stockpiles fell by roughly 399,000 barrels last week, while the Energy Information Administration is scheduled to release its official inventory report on Wednesday. Those figures will help determine whether tightening global supply is also being reflected inside the United States.

For now, the Treasury’s decision marks one of Washington’s strongest economic responses since the latest Hormuz crisis began. While U.S. officials continue to leave the door open for negotiations, the revocation of Iran’s oil-sales license sends a clear message that future sanctions relief will depend on Tehran’s actions, not simply ongoing diplomacy.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Hundreds Evacuated as Buckling Columns Trigger Massive Midtown ‘Frozen Zone’ at Mamdani’s Signature Housing Project

Construction workers converting the former Pfizer headquarters into apartments called 911 at roughly 8 a.m. on Tuesday, July 7, after they watched steel support columns begin to buckle on the 21st floor, the New York Police Department said. The workers evacuated the building on their own. Within hours, the city had emptied the tower and shut down a wide stretch of Midtown East, bringing one of New York City’s most ambitious housing redevelopment projects to a standstill.

The building at 235 East 42nd Street, at the corner of Second Avenue, is a 1960s office tower being transformed into housing as part of one of the city’s largest office-to-residential conversion projects. At a Tuesday afternoon briefing, Mayor Zohran Mamdani said two structural columns had buckled, several upper floors were sagging, and cracks had opened on the 21st floor. He described the situation as extremely serious and said the building continued shifting after city inspectors arrived.

Fire Chief John Esposito said the steel columns had begun to bend and deflect and that the structure was still moving while emergency crews remained on scene. While officials said a full collapse into surrounding streets appeared unlikely, they warned that a localized internal collapse remained possible. Fire Commissioner Lillian Bonsignore said the FDNY deployed approximately 150 firefighters and EMS personnel along with more than 50 emergency units to stabilize the situation.

The NYPD established what officials called a frozen zone, closing streets from 40th through 45th Streets between First and Third Avenues to both pedestrians and vehicles. Seven nearby buildings were evacuated as a precaution, including the Hampton Inn Manhattan Grand Central at 231 East 43rd Street, where hotel guests were removed from their rooms, and the Kennedy International School at 225 East 43rd Street, which was operating a summer camp serving approximately 400 children. The Israeli Consulate at 800 Second Avenue was also evacuated.

Authorities confirmed that no injuries were reported and that every construction worker had safely exited the building.

The implications extend far beyond a single Midtown block.

The former Pfizer headquarters is the centerpiece of 235 GC LLC’s redevelopment plan to create approximately 1,600 apartments, including more than 400 affordable housing units, in what developers and project architect Gensler have described as the largest office-to-residential conversion in New York City history. The development has become a centerpiece of the city’s effort to convert aging office towers into desperately needed housing as remote work reshapes Manhattan’s commercial real estate market.

The project is being developed by Metro Loft, led by veteran conversion developer Nathan Berman, together with David Werner Real Estate Investments. GACE Consulting Engineers serves as the project’s structural engineer. Financing totals hundreds of millions of dollars, including a $720 million construction loan provided by Madison Realty Capital in May 2025, in addition to earlier financing arranged through the Northwind Group. Any prolonged shutdown or major redesign could delay completion beyond the current 2027 target and increase project costs.

In a statement, a Metro Loft spokesperson thanked first responders, emphasized that public safety remains the company’s highest priority, and said the structural issues are confined to a limited section of one of the project’s two buildings. The company also stated that the overall structure is not believed to be at risk of complete collapse, consistent with the assessment provided by FDNY officials.

City officials offered a preliminary explanation for the failure. The building had been expanded to 37 stories, and as additional weight was added above the 21st floor, load-bearing columns experienced increased structural stress. A union tradesman at the scene, Cliff Johnson of Steamfitters Local 638, alleged that foundation work supporting the additional height had not been performed properly, though city officials have not reached any conclusions regarding the cause.

The development also carries an existing regulatory history. According to Department of Buildings records, the construction entity associated with the project received seven safety violations during 2025 totaling more than $32,000 in penalties. One citation issued in December carried a $10,000 fine for allegedly failing to notify the department of an incident involving serious injury or death.

By Tuesday evening, officials reported cautious progress. The Department of Buildings said inspectors had completed an initial assessment of the damaged area and authorized contractors to begin installing temporary shoring to stabilize the affected columns. Officials said the damaged structural members had shown no additional movement since the morning inspection. Deputy Mayor for Housing and Development Leila Bozorg told reporters around 4 p.m. that the building had remained stable for several hours, describing that development as encouraging. Residents of one evacuated building, located at 222 East 44th Street, were later allowed to return home.

Officials cautioned that stabilization work would continue overnight and that there was no timetable for reopening surrounding streets or allowing displaced residents, hotel guests and businesses to return. Governor Kathy Hochul said she remained in contact with city officials and confirmed that state building inspectors had joined the response.

For now, the Midtown project that was expected to showcase New York City’s effort to transform vacant office towers into housing has instead become a costly reminder of the engineering, financial and construction risks that accompany some of the largest redevelopment projects in the country.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two lots of Pedigree-branded dog food were recalled over the potential presence of metal and plastic.

Mars Petcare US issued the voluntary recall on July 2 for 13.2 oz cans of High Protein Chopped Chicken & Duck Flavor for dogs, according to a company announcement.

The affected products include lot codes 613C3KKCFC and 613C1KKCFC.

SHAMPOO RECALLED OVER POTENTIAL BACTERIA CONTAMINATION, INFECTION RISK

The recalled items did not meet Mars and Pedigree safety and quality standards, the company said. As part of the quality control process all Pedigree products go through, these two lots were sent to a third-party vendor for destruction.

But Mars later discovered that the product had been fraudulently diverted and sold into the U.S. marketplace.

“The potential presence of sharp metal and plastic foreign material in the cans could pose a hazard to your dog,” the company announcement reads.

The company warned that health risks to dogs ingesting sharp foreign objects can include choking and lacerations or blockages in the gastrointestinal tract.

Anyone who purchased the affected dog food is instructed not to feed it to their pet and to contact Pedigree for a replacement.

Consumers who are concerned after feeding the recalled product to their dog are urged to contact their veterinarian.

CHECK YOUR AC: 13,000 UNITS RECALLED OVER FIRE RISK

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The company said no illnesses or injuries have been reported.

“Mars is working with authorities to determine how these products entered the marketplace. We are committed to protecting pets and helping consumers identify and remove the affected products from use,” the company said.

This post was originally published here

The United Arab Emirates is pressing ahead with a multibillion-dollar plan to route its oil, gas and cargo around the Strait of Hormuz entirely, the country’s foreign trade minister said in an interview laying out the strategy in mid-June. Dr. Thani Al Zeyoudi, the UAE’s Minister of Foreign Trade, said the Gulf state is working toward what he called “zero Hormuz dependency” — and that it will keep building whether or not the waterway stays open. The National

“We’re moving toward having zero Hormuz dependency, and that’s regardless of whether it’s open or not,” Al Zeyoudi said. “It’s going to open and we hope that will happen quickly, but we will not stop the new plan.” Bloomberg

The timing is pointed. The Strait of Hormuz — the narrow channel between Iran and Oman — normally carries about a fifth of the world’s crude oil and liquefied natural gas. Iran has effectively controlled the strait since shortly after the war with the United States began on February 28, virtually shutting the passage for roughly 20% of the world’s oil. NPR That closure drove fuel, food and shipping costs higher around the globe.

A June 15 interim peace deal between Washington and Tehran is meant to reopen the strait and lift the dueling naval blockades NPR, and oil prices fell sharply on the news. But shippers remain cautious, and Iranian officials insist they will impose a transit fee once the deal’s 60-day window expires. Council on Foreign Relations That uncertainty is exactly what the UAE says it wants to design out of its economy.

At the center of the plan is a major expansion of the UAE’s eastern ports — Fujairah, Khor Fakkan and Dibba — all of which sit on the Gulf of Oman, outside the strait. Al Zeyoudi said the country also intends to build at least one new harbor along that coastline. The National

Connecting those ports to the country’s oilfields, gasfields and petroleum facilities will require new pipelines, rail lines and roads linking the eastern coast to inland sites. The National

The energy piece is moving fastest. The UAE is accelerating a second pipeline that would double crude export capacity through Fujairah and is evaluating a third petroleum line on top of that. Outlook Business Today a single 1.5 million barrel-per-day pipeline to Fujairah is the country’s only overland crude lifeline. Pipeline-journal Planned expansion could lift total capacity above 3.5 million barrels a day, according to figures cited by Reuters. Marine Insight Officials are also weighing ways to move petrochemicals, LNG and other products without touching Hormuz.

Al Zeyoudi said the projects remain in the planning stage with no disclosed timeline or price tag, but acknowledged they would require billions of dollars. Outlook Business

He was candid about the limits. Crude oil is the easy part, because it can be pushed through pipelines. Liquefied natural gas, aluminum and container imports are far harder to shift. The Liberty Daily The UAE also leans heavily on Gulf ports such as Jebel Ali for imports and regional trade, so moving more cargo east would raise transport costs Marine Insight — though the minister said expanded rail and road links should hold those costs down while Jebel Ali and Khalifa Port keep serving as hubs.

The recent shutdown was a live stress test. During the conflict the UAE kept some crude moving through its existing Fujairah pipeline and leaned harder on eastern ports israelnationalnews, while redirecting cargo through ports in countries including Egypt and India and turning to air freight to keep supply chains intact. israelnationalnews

The Emirates are not racing alone. Saudi Arabia pushed its Hormuz-bypassing East-West Pipeline to a full 7 million barrels a day during the war, diverting oil to Red Sea terminals at Yanbu. Zero Hedge Iraq is expanding its northern pipeline through Turkey, and Kuwait has held early talks with Saudi Arabia and the UAE about cross-border lines. Zero Hedge The states with the fewest options — Kuwait, Qatar and Bahrain — remain almost entirely dependent on Hormuz Council on Foreign Relations, leaving them exposed if Iran revives its threats.

For businesses and households far from the Gulf, the stakes are simple. Every barrel that can skip the strait is a barrel less vulnerable to the next standoff — and less likely to spike prices at the pump, on store shelves and in shipping contracts. Moody’s Ratings expects crude to average between $90 and $110 this year IndexBox, a reminder of how heavily the closure still weighs on the global economy.

The UAE, for its part, is hedging both ways. Even as it builds to escape the chokepoint, the government said this week that the “uninterrupted flow of traffic through the Strait of Hormuz” israelnationalnews remains essential to regional and global prosperity.

JBizNews Desk © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to a securities filing released after the market closed Monday, July 6, Rivian Automotive plans to sell 75 million new shares of Class A common stock, raising approximately $1.5 billion to help fund future growth. The offering, led by Goldman Sachs, sent Rivian shares sharply lower Tuesday as investors reacted to the dilution created by the additional stock.

The decline erased much of a recent rally that had followed stronger-than-expected vehicle delivery results. Rivian said proceeds from the offering will help fund equity contributions required under its financing agreement with the U.S. Department of Energy, which is backing construction of the company’s new manufacturing facility in Georgia. The underwriting group also received a 30-day option to purchase an additional 11.25 million shares, potentially increasing the total proceeds.

While the company’s underlying business has shown signs of improvement, issuing new shares reduces the ownership percentage of existing investors, often pressuring a stock price in the short term. That dynamic played out quickly after the announcement, with Rivian recording one of its steepest single-day declines in months.

The offering came only days after Rivian reported second-quarter deliveries of 12,194 vehicles, exceeding its own guidance of 9,000 to 11,000 units. The company also raised its full-year production outlook to between 65,000 and 70,000 vehicles, reinforcing management’s confidence in demand despite continued challenges across the electric-vehicle industry.

Rivian also provided preliminary financial results that exceeded Wall Street expectations. The company estimated second-quarter revenue between $1.55 billion and $1.65 billion, above analyst forecasts, while cash and short-term investments increased to approximately $5.3 billion at the end of June. Company officials said the recent strength in Rivian’s share price created an attractive opportunity to strengthen the balance sheet.

Much of the capital will support development of the R2, Rivian’s lower-priced sport utility vehicle designed to reach a broader segment of consumers beyond the company’s premium R1T pickup and R1S SUV. The R2 is expected to be produced at the Georgia manufacturing complex, a project supported by billions of dollars in federal financing.

Wall Street remains divided on the company’s outlook. Some analysts argue Rivian’s improving production numbers justify continued investment, while others believe the shares already reflect much of the expected recovery. The company continues to burn significant capital as it expands manufacturing capacity, making periodic equity offerings an expected part of its long-term financing strategy.

For the broader electric-vehicle industry, Rivian’s latest capital raise highlights the enormous cost of scaling production in an increasingly competitive market. Building factories, expanding supply chains and launching new vehicle platforms require billions of dollars long before they generate meaningful profits. Access to capital therefore remains one of the industry’s biggest competitive advantages.

Investors will receive a clearer picture of Rivian’s financial health when the company reports complete second-quarter earnings later this month, including updated cash flow, margins and progress toward launching the R2 platform.

JBizNews Desk | Irvine, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The United States is bombing Iran. On Tuesday, July 7, U.S. Central Command said American forces had begun launching powerful strikes against Iranian targets, and hours later a senior U.S. official said the strikes were still ongoing. Explosions were reported across southern Iran near Bandar Abbas, Qeshm Island and the port of Sirik. The fragile ceasefire that has held since last month is now on the brink of collapse, and oil prices are climbing.

CENTCOM said the strikes answered Iranian attacks on three commercial ships in the Strait of Hormuz, calling Tehran’s actions a clear violation of the ceasefire and vowing to impose heavy costs for hitting vessels crewed by civilians. A senior U.S. official told Fox News the strikes are “significantly larger” than the limited round the U.S. carried out last month. The targets inside Iran include air defense systems, coastal surveillance posts, surface-to-air and anti-ship missile sites, drone launch sites and port facilities.

President Donald Trump, speaking at a NATO summit in Ankara, referred to the broader U.S. campaign, begun February 28, as Operation Epic Fury. The United Kingdom Maritime Trade Operations center raised its threat level for the strait to severe, warning that deliberate hostile action is likely and that mine risk and Iranian naval pressure on vessels persist.

The trigger was the ships. Earlier Tuesday, a tanker was struck by a drone off Oman, a day after the Qatari liquefied natural gas carrier Al Rekayyat took an engine-room fire and a Saudi crude tanker was damaged nearby. Qatar and Saudi Arabia both condemned the attacks as assaults on international shipping and global energy supplies.

This is the gravest test yet of the memorandum of understanding that Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian signed June 17. Iran’s deputy foreign minister, in a statement via the FARS news agency, called the strikes a serious breach and said Tehran would take decisive measures. Foreign Minister Seyed Abbas Araghchi said talks on a final deal will not resume until the memorandum’s terms are met, starting with a ceasefire and an Israeli withdrawal from Lebanon. The warning followed Trump’s Monday vow to “make a deal or finish the job.”

Oil markets moved fast. Brent crude, the international benchmark, settled 3% higher at $74.16 a barrel on Tuesday, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate rose 2.8% to $70.44. Both climbed further after hours once Washington opened a second front, with Brent up 5.6% to $76.04 and WTI up 5.4% to $72.25.

That second front was economic. The Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control revoked the license that had let Iran sell oil and petrochemicals. Former U.N. ambassador Nikki Haley, on CNBC, argued Iran had been emboldened by earlier concessions, saying released frozen assets and oil waivers left Tehran collecting billions by the day.

For ordinary Americans, a crisis in a distant waterway lands at the gas pump and in the grocery aisle. The U.S. Energy Information Administration has projected wholesale gasoline running roughly 50% above pre-conflict forecasts this year, with diesel higher still. Diesel is the one to watch, because it moves the trucks and trains carrying food, packages and building supplies, so spikes reach store shelves within weeks.

One thing is keeping prices from spiking harder. OPEC+, led by Saudi Arabia, agreed over the weekend to raise production quotas again, and Saudi Aramco cut its Arab Light crude price for Asian buyers by $11 a barrel. That extra supply is why Brent, even after Tuesday’s jump, sits well below the $105 peaks of earlier in the war.

For businesses that live on fuel costs — airlines, truckers, manufacturers and small operators — the message is that the Hormuz risk never left. With U.S. strikes still underway and Iran vowing to hit back, the next move belongs to Tehran, and markets will be watching the strait for where prices head next.

JBizNews Desk © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Shares of TeraWulf Inc. soared more than 16% Monday after the company announced a 20-year lease agreement with artificial intelligence company Anthropic to develop one of the nation’s largest AI-focused data center campuses, a deal expected to generate approximately $19 billion in revenue over its initial term.

The agreement, disclosed in a filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), marks a major transformation for TeraWulf, which began as a Bitcoin mining company and is rapidly repositioning itself as a provider of AI infrastructure.

The project will be built at Justified Data Center Campus in Hawesville, Kentucky, where Anthropic will lease approximately 401 megawatts of data center capacity—enough electricity to power a mid-sized city. Construction will be completed in phases, with the first facilities expected to begin operating during the second half of 2027 and full buildout targeted for early 2028.

Anthropic also secured two optional five-year lease extensions, potentially extending the partnership for decades.

“This agreement validates our strategy and establishes a long-term revenue stream with one of the world’s leading AI companies,” said Paul Prager, TeraWulf’s Chairman and Chief Executive Officer.

The announcement represents another major milestone in the race to build the computing infrastructure needed to support artificial intelligence.

Companies developing AI models—including Anthropic, OpenAI, Google and others—require enormous amounts of computing power, fueling unprecedented demand for specialized data centers capable of housing thousands of advanced AI processors.

The Kentucky campus highlights another growing trend: repurposing former industrial sites into technology hubs.

The 750-acre property previously housed a Century Aluminum smelter before production ceased several years ago. Instead of manufacturing aluminum, the site will now host one of America’s newest AI computing centers.

Alongside the Anthropic announcement, TeraWulf also revealed plans to sell its majority stake in the Abernathy Joint Venture in Texas to an investor group led by Fluidstack for approximately $530 million. The proceeds will allow the company to concentrate capital on wholly owned AI infrastructure projects.

Investors welcomed both announcements.

The stock has already been one of Wall Street’s strongest performers this year as enthusiasm for artificial intelligence continues driving demand for power generation, data centers and high-performance computing facilities.

The deal also reflects a broader shift taking place across the digital infrastructure industry.

Many companies that once focused on cryptocurrency mining are redirecting their expertise toward AI data centers, where long-term leases with major technology companies provide more predictable revenue than the highly volatile cryptocurrency market.

For businesses, the agreement underscores the enormous investment flowing into AI infrastructure. Billions of dollars are being committed not only to software development but also to the physical facilities, electricity and networking systems required to power next-generation artificial intelligence.

For local communities, projects of this size can create construction jobs, long-term employment and new tax revenue, while transforming former industrial properties into high-value technology assets.

As competition intensifies among the world’s leading AI companies, demand for large-scale data centers is expected to remain one of the fastest-growing segments of the technology industry for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Hawesville, Kentucky

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

America’s airlines are heading into the busiest travel season of the year with a rare advantage: jet fuel prices have fallen sharply, travel demand remains strong and Wall Street expects profits to improve. But don’t expect those lower fuel costs to translate into cheaper airline tickets anytime soon.

In a July 1 research note, Bank of America raised its price targets across much of the airline industry, saying the combination of lower fuel costs, steady passenger demand and improving ticket prices should boost second-quarter earnings. While investors may benefit, travelers are unlikely to see much relief at the checkout.

The turnaround has been significant. Airline stocks rallied more than 20% in June as oil prices eased following the cease-fire in the Middle East. Jet fuel, one of the industry’s largest operating expenses, has fallen roughly 35% from its spring highs, providing a meaningful lift to airline profit margins.

Fuel is typically the second-largest expense for most airlines after labor. When fuel prices decline, carriers can generate substantially higher profits without selling a single additional ticket.

Reflecting that improved outlook, Bank of America increased its price targets on several major airlines, including Delta Air Lines, United Airlines, American Airlines, Southwest Airlines, Alaska Air Group, JetBlue Airways, Frontier Airlines and Allegiant Air.

The bank believes airlines are benefiting from an unusually favorable combination of lower costs and resilient demand.

Airfares have remained elevated despite the drop in fuel prices. According to the U.S. Travel Association’s Travel Price Index, airline fares increased sharply year over year, demonstrating that travelers continue booking flights even at higher prices.

Not every airline is benefiting equally.

Delta Air Lines and United Airlines continue to outperform many competitors thanks to their growing premium-cabin business, expanding international networks and lucrative loyalty programs. Delta’s long-standing partnership with American Express, for example, generates billions of dollars annually and provides a steady stream of high-margin revenue beyond ticket sales.

By comparison, airlines that rely more heavily on price-sensitive leisure travelers, including American Airlines and JetBlue, remain more vulnerable to shifts in consumer spending and generally carry heavier debt loads.

The industry’s pricing power has also been strengthened by limited competition.

The collapse of Spirit Airlines removed a significant amount of low-cost capacity from the market, reducing downward pressure on fares. At the same time, production delays at Boeing and Airbus continue limiting deliveries of new aircraft, preventing airlines from adding enough seats to fully meet demand.

That imbalance between supply and demand helps explain why travelers shouldn’t expect lower fares despite cheaper fuel.

Most summer tickets were sold months ago, when fuel prices were considerably higher. Airlines generally do not lower prices after seats have already been booked. Instead, the savings flow directly to their bottom line.

Meanwhile, with aircraft deliveries still constrained and demand remaining strong, airlines have little incentive to reduce prices.

Another major catalyst is the 2026 FIFA World Cup, which is driving record passenger traffic and tourism spending across host cities throughout North America. The tournament has helped keep flights full during what was already expected to be one of the busiest travel seasons in years.

Investors will soon learn whether the industry’s optimism is justified.

Delta Air Lines is scheduled to report quarterly earnings on July 10, becoming the first major U.S. airline to release results. Its comments on travel demand, pricing and booking trends will likely shape expectations for the rest of the industry. Delta CEO Ed Bastian and United CEO Scott Kirby have both recently indicated that travel demand strengthened heading into the summer.

One risk remains. If airlines become too aggressive in restoring capacity later this year because of lower fuel prices, an increase in available seats could eventually place downward pressure on fares.

For now, however, the industry continues to enjoy an unusual combination of packed airplanes, lower fuel costs and healthy consumer demand.

For travelers, the message is simple: don’t expect last-minute bargains this summer. With limited seats, strong demand and airlines focused on maximizing revenue, booking early remains the best strategy.

JBizNews Desk | Fort Worth, Texas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Artificial intelligence is reshaping more than the technology industry—it’s rapidly changing America’s electric grid. The enormous amount of electricity needed to power AI data centers is fueling a wave of consolidation across the utility sector, and the biggest example yet is NextEra Energy’s proposed $67 billion all-stock acquisition of Dominion Energy.

The companies announced the agreement in May, saying the combined business would become the world’s largest regulated electric utility and position itself to meet the exploding demand for electricity created by artificial intelligence.

The deal isn’t simply about becoming bigger. It’s about building enough power to support one of the fastest-growing industries in the world.

AI models require massive data centers packed with thousands of computer chips running around the clock. Those facilities consume enormous amounts of electricity, with some using as much power as an entire small city. Technology companies including Microsoft, Amazon, Google, Meta and others continue investing billions of dollars in new AI infrastructure, creating an unprecedented surge in electricity demand.

That demand is particularly intense in Virginia, home to the world’s largest concentration of data centers. Dominion Energy already supplies much of that region, making it one of the utilities at the center of the AI boom.

NextEra Energy, the parent company of Florida Power & Light, is already North America’s largest electric utility by market value and one of the world’s largest producers of wind and solar energy. By combining with Dominion, the company would dramatically expand its ability to serve the rapidly growing data-center market.

Together, the two companies expect to have a pipeline of roughly 130 gigawatts of large-customer demand, much of it tied to AI projects. For perspective, one gigawatt can supply electricity to hundreds of thousands of homes.

NextEra Chief Executive John Ketchum said the merger is about achieving the scale necessary to build new power plants, transmission lines and other infrastructure faster and more efficiently as electricity demand accelerates.

Building that infrastructure won’t come cheaply. The combined company expects to invest approximately $138 billion to strengthen and expand the electric grid while projecting annual earnings growth of 9% or more through 2032.

Under the terms of the agreement, Dominion shareholders would receive approximately 0.81 shares of NextEra Energy for each Dominion share they own. When completed, existing NextEra shareholders would own roughly 74.5% of the combined company, while Dominion shareholders would own the remaining stake.

The proposed merger is part of a much broader trend sweeping the utility industry.

As electricity demand rises for the first time in decades, power companies are racing to secure the capital needed to build new generation capacity. Several major utility and power-sector acquisitions have already been announced this year as companies position themselves for what many executives believe will be years of AI-driven electricity growth.

For consumers, the merger raises an important question: who ultimately pays for all of this new infrastructure?

Consumer advocates and regulators will closely examine whether the billions of dollars needed to expand the grid could eventually lead to higher electricity rates for households and small businesses. Both companies have emphasized that affordability will remain a priority as they seek regulatory approval.

The transaction still faces review from multiple federal and state regulators, a process expected to take many months. Until approvals are granted, customers should not expect any immediate changes to electric service or utility bills.

The larger story, however, extends well beyond this single merger.

Artificial intelligence is creating demand unlike anything the electric industry has experienced in decades. Utilities that once planned primarily for population growth and economic expansion are now preparing for massive new electricity loads driven almost entirely by AI computing.

For investors, the merger reflects growing confidence that electricity demand will remain strong for years. For businesses, it highlights the enormous infrastructure required to support the AI economy. And for consumers, it serves as another reminder that artificial intelligence is quietly reshaping industries far beyond Silicon Valley—including the companies that keep America’s lights on.

JBizNews Desk | Juno Beach, Florida

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TD Bank on Monday, July 6, named Jill Gateman as head of its U.S. commercial banking business, consolidating several major lending units under a single leader as the Mount Laurel, New Jersey-based bank sharpens its focus following a costly regulatory overhaul. The bank announced the appointment in a statement, with Leo Salom, president and chief executive of TD Bank U.S., praising Gateman’s track record inside the company.

“Jill is an exceptional leader who has been instrumental in advancing TD’s Commercial Banking business,” Salom said.

Under the new structure, TD is folding its Corporate, Commercial, Small Business and Regional Banking segments together beneath Gateman’s leadership. That gives her oversight of a broad portfolio that includes corporate and regional commercial banking, small business lending, treasury management, government banking, middle-market banking, asset-based lending, franchise finance, commercial real estate, healthcare lending and equipment finance. In practical terms, she now leads the division that finances businesses of nearly every size, from small local companies to large corporations.

Gateman is a familiar leader inside TD. She joined the Canadian-owned bank in 2023 to oversee its middle-market, asset-based and sponsor-backed finance businesses, and in 2024 she was promoted to co-head of U.S. commercial banking. Monday’s announcement places the combined operation under her sole leadership, streamlining what had previously been a shared management structure.

The leadership change comes as TD continues working through one of the most challenging periods in its history. The bank spent the past two years responding to a U.S. money-laundering scandal that resulted in billions of dollars in penalties and federal restrictions on future growth, including a cap on the size of its U.S. assets. The crisis prompted leadership changes across the organization and a renewed focus on strengthening compliance, improving oversight and simplifying operations. Consolidating commercial banking under one executive reflects that strategy.

TD Bank remains one of the country’s largest financial institutions. Known by its slogan “America’s Most Convenient Bank,” it ranks among the 10 largest U.S. banks by assets and serves more than 10 million customers through approximately 1,100 locations across the Northeast, Mid-Atlantic, Washington, D.C., the Carolinas and Florida. Its U.S. headquarters are located in Mount Laurel, New Jersey, making it one of the state’s largest financial employers.

For business owners and communities, the appointment carries significance beyond an executive promotion. Commercial banking provides the financing that helps small businesses expand, manufacturers purchase equipment, healthcare providers invest in new technology and municipalities manage public funds. The executive leading that division plays an important role in determining how efficiently businesses can access capital and financial services.

By bringing those operations under one experienced leader, TD is signaling that it wants a more coordinated approach to serving commercial customers while maintaining the stronger controls regulators now expect.

The appointment also marks another step in TD’s effort to move beyond its regulatory challenges and refocus on long-term growth. Commercial banking remains one of the bank’s core businesses, and leadership believes a streamlined structure will position the company to better serve customers while operating under heightened regulatory oversight.

As TD works to rebuild momentum, Gateman will oversee one of the bank’s most important business lines, balancing growth opportunities with the stronger compliance standards the institution has committed to maintaining.

JBizNews Desk | Mount Laurel, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Emmanuel Macron of France and Syrian President Ahmed al-Sharaa announced a sweeping package of economic and infrastructure agreements on Tuesday, July 7, at a reconstruction forum in Damascus — hours after two bombs tore through a nearby street, wounding at least 18 people and laying bare the security risk hanging over Syria’s push to rebuild. The Élysée Palace said Macron was already at the presidential palace when the explosions hit and was unharmed. The visit went ahead as planned.

The economic message was the whole point of the trip. Macron arrived Monday night with a delegation of French business leaders, the first French president to visit Syria in 18 years and the first Western leader since Bashar al-Assad was ousted in December 2024. He came to sign deals — and to signal that France wants a front-row seat in a rebuild that could run into the hundreds of billions of dollars.

At the center of the package was a framework declaration for comprehensive cooperation and a major maritime, air transport and logistics agreement with French shipping giant CMA CGM, whose chairman and CEO Rodolphe Saadé joined the trip. CMA CGM already holds a 30-year contract to develop the Port of Latakia, signed in 2025 for €230 million, and later committed another €200 million to expand the port’s handling capacity. The new deal pushes the company into air cargo handling at Damascus airport.

Macron also put France’s name on Syria’s financial plumbing. He said France would provide technical assistance directly to the Central Bank of Syria and help restructure a banking sector shattered by 14 years of war. “We want to continue working on the restructuring of the banking sector,” Macron said. Additional protocols covered water treatment and energy projects in Homs province, civil aviation, and a memorandum with the French Development Agency to rebuild state institutions. The two countries also agreed to restore full diplomatic ties and reappoint ambassadors.

For al-Sharaa, the pitch to investors was geography. He framed Syria as a future transit hub linking the Mediterranean, the Gulf and Iraq — and tied it directly to the disruption in global shipping. “Syria has a strategic location linking the Mediterranean with the Gulf and Iraq, and is only a few hours by sea from Marseille,” he said. “After the Strait of Hormuz crisis, the world realized the value of safe and stable corridors here.”

That line matters well beyond Damascus. With traffic through the Strait of Hormuz still choked, companies and governments are hunting for alternative routes to move oil and goods between Europe and the Middle East. Syria is betting its coastline can become one of them.

Al-Sharaa laid out a long shopping list for foreign capital: modernized airports and air-navigation systems, offshore energy exploration, upgraded electricity and water networks, university hospitals, food processing, digital infrastructure and a rebuilt civil registry. “Our industrial cities are ready to become a platform for your investments,” he told the room. “We are building a modern investment environment governed by the rule of law and strong institutions.”

Energy is already drawing interest. Syria has signed a memorandum with TotalEnergies, U.S.-based ConocoPhillips and QatarEnergy to explore for oil and gas in its territorial waters. TotalEnergies chief Patrick Pouyanné was also part of Macron’s delegation.

The groundwork was laid over the past year. Macron pushed Europe and the United States to drop most sanctions on Syria, and the European Union lifted its economic penalties in May 2025. Clearing those barriers is what lets French and other Western firms sign contracts at all.

But Tuesday’s blasts underscored why many companies are still holding back. The two explosions — caused by devices planted in a garbage bin and a parked car, according to Syria’s Interior Ministry — went off near the Four Seasons Hotel, where Macron had spent the night. They came less than a week after a café bombing killed around 10 people in the same city. No group claimed responsibility for either attack.

That is the hard math for investors. Syria needs hundreds of billions of dollars, and it has already signed memorandums with several countries and companies — but many of those pledges have yet to become actual projects. Reconstruction money tends to wait for stability, and stability is exactly what Tuesday’s bombs called into question.

Macron tried to keep the focus on the opportunity. He said France would set up expanded joint economic committees, working alongside Gulf countries, to support the rebuild. “There are also many opportunities for our partnership,” he said. Whether Western capital follows the handshakes will depend less on the deals signed inside the palace than on the streets outside it.

JBizNews Desk | Damascus

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to remarks made Tuesday, July 7, by President Donald Trump during a bilateral meeting with Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan in Ankara, Trump renewed his call for the United States to control Greenland and warned that Washington could reconsider its military presence in Europe if NATO allies continue resisting U.S. priorities. The comments came shortly after Trump arrived in Turkey for the annual NATO summit, immediately raising geopolitical and market concerns across Europe.

Trump argued that Denmark does little for Greenland. “Greenland doesn’t help Denmark. Denmark doesn’t spend money to really help Greenland, but it’s an important part for the United States,” he said. He repeated his claim that the island is “surrounded by China ships and Russian ships,” then added that the United States “could remove all of our soldiers out of Europe.”

Asked whether additional American troops could leave Europe, Trump declined to make a commitment. “Well, we’re going to see,” he told reporters. He linked his frustration to what he described as insufficient NATO support during the recent conflict with Iran and said the Greenland dispute had damaged his relationship with the alliance.

For business, the issue extends well beyond geopolitics. Investors are increasingly focused on who will finance Europe’s expanding defense commitments and which companies stand to benefit from a new era of military spending.

European defense stocks have rallied into the summit as investors anticipate higher defense budgets across the continent. A Goldman Sachs basket of European defense companies recovered roughly 17% from its late-June 2026 low ahead of the gathering. On Monday, Fincantieri surged 12.84% to €12.30, while Leonardo, Saab, Hensoldt, Rheinmetall, Thales, Dassault Aviation and Safran also posted gains.

Germany’s Rheinmetall, Europe’s largest defense contractor, traded near €1,121.80 after climbing more than 15% during the past week, although the shares remain well below earlier highs following Germany’s cancellation of its F126 frigate program. The volatility underscores the risks facing investors as governments rapidly reshape military procurement priorities.

The broader spending trend continues to strengthen. NATO members have committed to increasing defense expenditures toward 5% of GDP over the coming decade. According to figures cited by NATO Secretary-General Mark Rutte, non-U.S. members increased military spending 20% last year to $574 billion, while Germany alone boosted defense expenditures 24% to $114 billion. Rutte has warned that manufacturers are now struggling to keep pace with demand.

The summit is also producing new commercial opportunities. Lockheed Martin and Rheinmetall announced plans to jointly produce ATACMS missiles in Germany, marking the first production of the system outside the United States. NATO leaders also outlined more than $40 billion in planned investments over the next five years to strengthen anti-drone capabilities. Belgium is preparing a €3.1 billion air-defense purchase that includes 20 Skyranger systems produced by Rheinmetall, pending final government approval.

Analysts increasingly believe Europe will rely more heavily on domestic defense manufacturers. Analysts Adrien Rabier and Douglas Harned of Bernstein estimate that while U.S. companies still account for roughly 60% of European defense procurement, that balance is likely to shift toward European suppliers over time. They identify BAE Systems, Dassault Aviation, Rheinmetall and Thales among the companies best positioned to benefit from the trend. Berenberg analyst George McWhirter continues to rate Rheinmetall a Buy with a €2,100 price target.

The economic implications extend beyond defense contractors. If the United States reduces its military commitment to Europe, governments across the continent could face difficult budget decisions as higher defense spending competes with funding for healthcare, education and other public services. Businesses operating across Europe are also watching closely, as greater geopolitical uncertainty could influence investment decisions and cross-border trade.

Turkey also has significant commercial interests tied to the summit. Reports indicate Trump and Erdoğan discussed potential agreements involving F-35 fighter aircraft and related defense equipment, creating possible opportunities for both Turkey’s defense industry and major U.S. aerospace manufacturers.

European leaders sought to lower tensions following Trump’s remarks. Danish Prime Minister Mette Frederiksen reiterated that Greenland is not for sale and called on allies to respect Denmark’s sovereignty. Finnish President Alexander Stubb urged cooperation among Arctic allies, emphasizing the strategic importance of maintaining unity within NATO.

With defense spending accelerating, geopolitical tensions rising and investors closely watching every announcement from Ankara, the outcome of the summit could influence both global security policy and defense-sector markets for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to a July 2026 research note from J.P. Morgan, gold’s historic bull run has stalled, and Wall Street is now arguing over how much further the metal can fall. As of early July, gold traded near $4,100 an ounce — down about 29% from the record of roughly $5,590 it set in late January, its worst stretch in years. Greg Shearer, head of base and precious metals at J.P. Morgan, described the metal as stuck in a “technical no-man’s land,” caught between buyers and sellers with neither side willing to commit.

The reversal has been swift. Gold slipped below the $4,000 mark in late June for the first time since November 2025, capping a four-month pullback. That is a sharp turn for an asset that gained 66% in 2025 and kept climbing into January, powered by geopolitical fear, trade uncertainty and worries about the independence of the Federal Reserve.

What changed is the outlook for interest rates. Under Fed Chair Kevin Warsh, markets have shifted from expecting rate cuts to bracing for possible hikes, driven partly by energy-fueled inflation from the Middle East conflict. Higher rates and a stronger dollar hurt gold, which pays no interest, because investors can earn more holding cash or Treasuries instead. At the same time, an easing of some Middle East tensions and a rush back into technology and AI stocks pulled money out of safe-haven assets.

Central banks, long the backbone of gold’s rise, also stepped back. After buying at a torrid pace for years, official institutions turned into net sellers early in 2026. Türkiye alone sold about 60 tons in March, and net reported purchases slowed sharply in the first quarter, according to World Gold Council data.

The bears now have the momentum. Analysts at OCBC Bank expect prices to keep drifting lower into year-end on rising Treasury yields and a firm dollar. Technical traders point to the break below $4,000 as a warning that the easy money has been made.

But plenty of big names still see the sell-off as a pause, not an ending. J.P. Morgan maintains a year-end target near $6,000 an ounce. UBS told clients gold could recover toward $5,200 over the next year, calling the drop a buying opportunity. Goldman Sachs has kept a target around $5,400. Their case rests on the same long-term forces that drove the rally: heavy government debt, central-bank diversification away from the dollar, and lingering geopolitical risk. Strategists at Barclays argued that even with screens flashing “overvalued,” a durable premium above the metal’s roughly $4,000 fair value suggests this is not a bubble bursting.

For everyday investors, the swing matters more than the Wall Street debate. Gold sits in millions of retirement accounts and exchange-traded funds as portfolio insurance, and the past few months are a reminder that even so-called safe assets can drop hard and fast. For gold-mining companies, stabilizing prices around current levels would still leave healthy margins for low-cost producers, supporting jobs and cash flow, while a deeper slide would squeeze weaker miners and stall new projects.

Notably, even after the correction, gold remains one of the better-performing assets of 2026, still ahead for the year. The next moves will hinge on the Fed’s late-July meeting, fresh inflation data and whether central banks return as buyers. For now, the metal that spent two years defying gravity is finally testing where the floor is.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Twenty-eight New Jersey employers have earned spots on U.S. News & World Report’s 2026–2027 Best Companies to Work For list, highlighting the state’s continued strength in industries ranging from healthcare and pharmaceuticals to finance and manufacturing.

The annual rankings, released by U.S. News & World Report, evaluated approximately 3,900 public and private companies across 14 industries, recognizing only the highest-performing employers based on employee experience and workplace quality.

Among the New Jersey companies recognized is Horizon Blue Cross Blue Shield of New Jersey, reflecting the state’s reputation as a major hub for healthcare, life sciences and insurance.

Unlike many workplace rankings that rely heavily on employer submissions, the U.S. News ratings are based on publicly available employee feedback, independent data and expert analysis. Companies were evaluated on compensation, benefits, work-life balance, career advancement, job stability, workplace culture and overall employee satisfaction.

To qualify, private companies were required to employ at least 1,000 people, generate more than $500 million in annual revenue, and receive a significant number of verified employee reviews. Public companies were selected from the nation’s largest corporations by market value.

This year’s rankings also introduced new categories recognizing employers that support family caregivers and those offering exceptional internship programs, reflecting changing workforce priorities as companies compete for talent.

The recognition comes as employers nationwide continue adapting to a rapidly changing workplace shaped by artificial intelligence, hybrid work models and evolving employee expectations. Companies that provide competitive benefits, flexible work arrangements and opportunities for professional growth are increasingly viewed as having an advantage in attracting and retaining skilled workers.

For New Jersey, the results reinforce the state’s position as one of the country’s leading business centers. Home to many of the world’s largest pharmaceutical, healthcare, financial and logistics companies, the Garden State continues to compete aggressively for top talent with neighboring New York and Pennsylvania.

A strong workplace reputation can also translate into measurable business benefits. Companies recognized as top employers often experience lower employee turnover, stronger recruitment and higher productivity, reducing hiring costs while strengthening long-term performance.

For job seekers, the rankings provide another resource when evaluating potential employers, particularly in a competitive labor market where workplace culture and flexibility have become as important as salary for many professionals.

The complete list of recognized companies is available through the U.S. News & World Report careers rankings.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A 37-story Midtown Manhattan tower under construction began buckling Tuesday morning, forcing the evacuation of at least nine surrounding buildings and shutting down a busy stretch of East 42nd Street a block from Grand Central Terminal. The Fire Department of New York said it received a call at 7:57 a.m. on July 7 reporting bricks falling from the 21st floor of the building at 235 East 42nd Street. When crews arrived, they determined that two structural columns had buckled. No injuries have been reported.

At an afternoon news conference, Mayor Zohran Mamdani said the structure remained unstable, warning that one of the columns had continued to move even after city officials reached the scene. “The building remains unstable,” Mamdani said, adding that engineers were assessing the situation “minute by minute.” The New York Police Department closed East 42nd Street between Second and Third Avenues to all foot and vehicle traffic, snarling one of the city’s busiest corridors near the Chrysler Building and the United Nations.

The high-rise is no ordinary construction site. It is the former global headquarters of Pfizer, which occupied the building for decades before selling it, and it is now the centerpiece of one of the largest office-to-residential conversions in New York City history. Construction workers on the 21st floor spotted the columns beginning to give way around 8 a.m. and were safely evacuated, according to police. City structural engineers from the Department of Buildings are investigating a report that a steel beam was compromised, a complaint the site safety manager filed the same morning.

The developer behind the project, Metro Loft Management, said it was working closely with the Department of Buildings to understand the full scope of the problem. “The safety of our workers and the public has always been, and remains, our top priority,” the firm said in a statement. Metro Loft, owned by real estate investors David Werner and Nathan Berman, is converting the aging tower — along with an adjoining building — into a rental complex of roughly 1,500 to 1,600 apartments. The architecture firm Gensler, which is leading the design, has described the building’s mixed 1960s-era structural systems as a uniquely difficult retrofit, with crews racing to pour a new floor every few days to hit a 2026 opening.

The building carries a history of code problems. City records show it has multiple active violations and tens of thousands of dollars in fines, with some complaints dating back years. What caused Tuesday’s failure will not be known until emergency trusses are installed and inspectors can examine the structure, the buildings commissioner said.

Beyond the immediate danger, the incident lands at a sensitive moment for New York’s real estate market. Office-to-residential conversions have been championed by city and state leaders as a rare fix for two problems at once: a glut of outdated, half-empty office towers and a severe shortage of housing that has pushed rents to punishing levels. The 42nd Street project has been held up as the flagship of that movement — billed as the biggest conversion the city has ever attempted, adding more than a dozen new stories atop the original tower.

Tuesday’s scare is likely to sharpen questions about the risks and costs hidden inside those ambitions. Converting a six-decade-old office building into modern apartments means cutting new window openings, removing interior structure and re-engineering floors that were never designed for residential use — delicate, expensive work on bones that are often unpredictable. When it goes smoothly, it turns dead office space into hundreds of homes and construction jobs. When it does not, as the buckling columns on 42nd Street showed, it can halt a neighborhood and put lives at risk.

The property’s ownership reflects how much institutional money rides on these deals. When the building last traded, in 2018, it was purchased for a reported $363.5 million by a group that included Alexandria Real Estate Equities, Deutsche Bank and the State of Wisconsin Investment Board, alongside Werner. Interior demolition began in 2024, with completion targeted for 2027.

For now, the priority is keeping the structure standing and the surrounding blocks clear. A school and a hotel were among the buildings emptied as a precaution, and commuters were urged to avoid the area. City officials said assessments would continue through the evening as engineers worked to stabilize the tower.

This is a developing story.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Rogers Communications has agreed to acquire the remaining 25% stake in Maple Leaf Sports & Entertainment (MLSE) for approximately C$4.35 billion (US$3.1 billion), giving the Canadian telecommunications giant full ownership of one of the world’s most valuable sports and entertainment companies.

The transaction, announced Monday, values MLSE at approximately C$17.4 billion, making it one of the highest-valued sports organizations globally. The seller is Kilmer Sports, the investment company of longtime MLSE Chairman Larry Tanenbaum.

The acquisition gives Rogers complete ownership of an empire that includes the NHL’s Toronto Maple Leafs, NBA’s Toronto Raptors, MLS’s Toronto FC, the CFL’s Toronto Argonauts, the AHL’s Toronto Marlies, and Scotiabank Arena, one of Canada’s premier entertainment venues.

“This is a defining moment for Rogers,” said Tony Staffieri, President and Chief Executive Officer of Rogers Communications. “Bringing Canada’s leading communications company together with Canada’s premier sports and entertainment organization creates long-term value for our customers, fans and shareholders.”

The deal completes a multi-year strategy.

Rogers first became an MLSE owner in 2012, when it purchased a 37.5% stake alongside BCE Inc. Last year, Rogers acquired BCE’s ownership interest, increasing its position to 75%. The company has now exercised its option to purchase Tanenbaum’s remaining interest and assume full control.

The transaction also strengthens Rogers’ position as Canada’s dominant sports media company.

In addition to owning MLSE, Rogers already controls the Toronto Blue Jays, Rogers Centre, and Sportsnet, the country’s largest sports television network. Full ownership allows the company to further integrate professional sports, broadcasting, advertising and digital media under one corporate umbrella.

Industry analysts say the strategy reflects a growing trend among media companies seeking to control both premium sports content and the platforms used to distribute it.

Professional sports franchises have become some of the world’s fastest-appreciating assets, fueled by escalating media rights agreements, sponsorship revenue and global fan engagement. Recent franchise sales across the NBA, NFL and other leagues have pushed team valuations to record levels.

Rogers said it plans to finance the acquisition using existing liquidity and credit facilities. The company has also indicated it may sell a minority interest in portions of its combined sports and media business over the next year while retaining operational control.

The transaction remains subject to approval by the NHL, NBA, MLS, CFL, and other league authorities before closing later this year.

For fans, little is expected to change immediately. Team operations, schedules and ticket availability will continue as normal. However, the acquisition gives Rogers greater flexibility to expand streaming services, develop new digital experiences and capitalize on growing demand for live sports content.

For investors, the deal reinforces the enduring value of premium sports franchises, which continue attracting billions of dollars despite broader economic uncertainty. As live sports remain one of the few television products that consistently draw massive real-time audiences, ownership of both teams and media rights has become an increasingly valuable long-term business strategy.

JBizNews Desk | Toronto

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

More Americans are choosing road trips, regional getaways and day excursions over expensive long-distance vacations this summer, creating an unexpected boost for local restaurants, retailers, attractions and small businesses. The trend, highlighted in a new Associated Press report published July 3, comes as higher travel costs encourage families to vacation closer to home while still spending on leisure activities.

According to AAA, a record 72.2 million Americans were expected to travel at least 50 miles during the extended Independence Day holiday period, making it one of the busiest summer travel seasons on record. Nearly 85% of those travelers were expected to drive rather than fly, keeping more tourism dollars within local communities.

For many small businesses, that shift is translating into stronger sales.

Tourist towns, regional attractions and locally owned restaurants report that families are replacing overseas vacations and cross-country trips with shorter drives that still allow them to enjoy time away while keeping costs under control.

In Asheville, North Carolina, river tubing operator Zen Tubing expanded seasonal hiring after seeing reservations rebound. Visitors are increasingly arriving from nearby states for day trips, spending money not only on outdoor activities but also at local restaurants, breweries and retail shops before returning home.

The same pattern is emerging in cities hosting the 2026 FIFA World Cup.

In Kansas City, retailers and restaurants have benefited from thousands of soccer fans traveling for matches and fan events. Local business owners say the city’s relatively affordable hotels, dining and entertainment have attracted visitors looking for lower-cost alternatives to larger metropolitan destinations.

Consumers remain cautious, however.

Higher prices for airfare, hotels, food and gasoline continue to influence travel decisions. Rather than eliminating vacations altogether, many households are shortening trips, staying closer to home and focusing spending on experiences that fit tighter budgets.

Economists say that trend may actually benefit many small businesses.

Instead of tourism dollars flowing overseas or to major destination resorts, more spending is staying within regional economies. Restaurants, gift shops, family attractions, hotels, campgrounds, wineries, roadside businesses and entertainment venues are seeing increased traffic from travelers taking shorter trips.

The shift also comes during a busy year for domestic tourism. Along with the FIFA World Cup, communities across the country are preparing events leading up to America’s 250th anniversary, creating additional opportunities for local businesses to capture visitor spending.

For small business owners, the summer could provide an important economic lift following several years of inflation, higher operating costs and cautious consumer spending. Businesses located within a few hours’ drive of major population centers appear especially well positioned to benefit.

For consumers, the trend demonstrates that meaningful vacations do not necessarily require expensive flights or international travel. Many families are discovering that nearby destinations can deliver memorable experiences while helping stretch household budgets.

As Americans continue balancing higher living costs with a desire to travel, one clear winner is emerging: local businesses that depend on regional tourism.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Six Flags Great Adventure has unveiled Shoreline Pier, a new Jersey Shore-inspired section of the park designed to attract more families and encourage visitors to spend more time—and money—at New Jersey’s largest theme park. The new attraction officially opened over the holiday weekend at the Jackson, New Jersey, resort.

The expansion recreates the sights and atmosphere of a classic Jersey Shore boardwalk, complete with family rides, midway games, entertainment, shopping and boardwalk-style food.

The centerpiece is Hypno Twister, a spinning thrill ride that reaches speeds of nearly 35 mph, sending riders forward and backward while simulating the motion of ocean waves. Other new attractions include Barrels O’ Fun, a family spinning coaster, Flying Scooters, Wave Swinger, and Super Roundup, giving visitors five attractions designed for both children and adults.

Unlike major roller coaster additions aimed primarily at thrill seekers, Shoreline Pier focuses on families looking to experience attractions together, a strategy Six Flags believes will increase repeat visits and broaden its customer base.

“We wanted to create an experience where families can enjoy rides together while capturing the nostalgia of the Jersey Shore,” park officials said during the opening.

The investment comes as regional tourism remains strong. With many Americans choosing shorter vacations and road trips this summer, destinations within driving distance are benefiting from increased visitor traffic.

For Six Flags, the timing could not be better.

Higher airline fares and travel costs have encouraged more families to seek affordable entertainment closer to home, making regional theme parks an attractive option. Industry analysts say family-focused attractions generally generate higher spending on food, games, merchandise and repeat visits than standalone thrill rides.

Shoreline Pier also expands the park’s entertainment offerings beyond rides. The area includes nightly live performances, classic boardwalk games, expanded dining options and new retail shops designed to recreate the atmosphere of New Jersey’s famous seaside amusement piers.

The addition is part of Six Flags’ broader strategy to transform Great Adventure into a multi-day destination. Visitors can now combine the theme park with Hurricane Harbor, the Wild Safari, and overnight accommodations at the Savannah Sunset Resort, encouraging guests to extend their stay.

Tourism remains a major economic driver for New Jersey, supporting thousands of jobs across hospitality, retail and entertainment. Investments like Shoreline Pier help strengthen the state’s appeal as a destination for both residents and out-of-state visitors looking for affordable summer experiences.

For families planning a day trip this summer, Shoreline Pier delivers a familiar slice of the Jersey Shore—without the beach traffic.

JBizNews Desk | Jackson, New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce Launches Hands-On AI Platforms Certification to Help Students, Employees and Businesses Save Time, Reduce Costs, Increase Productivity and Grow Revenue

EATONTOWN, N.J. — The next essential workplace skill has arrived.

Twenty years ago, knowing how to use Microsoft Word, Excel, Outlook and email separated job candidates from the competition. Today, those programs are standard requirements in nearly every workplace.

Now, the same transformation is happening with today’s leading AI platforms.

Employers increasingly expect workers to know how to use platforms such as ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Microsoft Copilot, Grok, Perplexity, Meta AI and Mistral to write documents, analyze spreadsheets, create presentations, automate repetitive tasks, communicate with customers and dramatically improve productivity.

The payoff is significant.

According to PwC’s 2026 Global AI Jobs Barometer, workers skilled in today’s leading AI platforms earn an average of 62% more than comparable workers without those skills. After analyzing more than one billion job postings across six continents, PwC concluded that AI platform skills have become one of the fastest-growing drivers of higher salaries, promotions and career advancement.

To help individuals and businesses prepare for this workplace transformation, the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, drawing on more than 20 years of workforce development, executive education and employer partnerships, is hosting the JBiz AI Operations Summit on July 13–14, 2026, at the Sheraton Eatontown in New Jersey.

The intensive two-day certification program is designed for everyone.

Whether you’re preparing to enter the workforce, applying for your first office job, working as a secretary or administrative assistant, building your career, changing professions, supervising employees or running your own business, learning today’s leading AI platforms can immediately increase your productivity and long-term earning potential.

Unlike technical courses designed for software developers, the summit focuses entirely on practical workplace applications that participants can begin using the very next day.

Participants will receive hands-on training using today’s leading AI platforms, including ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Microsoft Copilot, Grok, Perplexity, Meta AI and Mistral, and learn how to:

Save Time

  • Automate repetitive tasks.
  • Complete reports, emails and presentations in minutes instead of hours.
  • Organize meetings, schedules and daily workflows more efficiently.

Increase Productivity

  • Produce higher-quality work in less time.
  • Analyze spreadsheets and business data faster.
  • Improve communication across every department.

Reduce Costs

  • Streamline administrative work.
  • Eliminate unnecessary manual processes.
  • Improve operational efficiency across the organization.

Increase Revenue

  • Create stronger marketing campaigns.
  • Improve customer service and client communications.
  • Generate better sales materials, proposals and business presentations.
  • Free employees to focus on higher-value work that drives business growth.

Upon successful completion, every participant will receive an AI Platforms Certification from the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, recognizing practical proficiency in today’s leading workplace AI platforms.

An Investment With Immediate ROI

For employers, this is more than employee training—it’s a business investment.

Equip your workforce with practical AI platform skills that help your company:

  • Save time.
  • Reduce operating costs.
  • Increase employee productivity.
  • Improve customer service.
  • Produce higher-quality work.
  • Strengthen decision-making.
  • Increase sales.
  • Grow revenue.
  • Build a more competitive organization.

The result is a workforce that delivers measurable value every day.

For employees, the benefits are equally compelling.

These practical skills strengthen résumés, improve job performance, increase confidence, position workers for promotions and create opportunities for higher-paying positions throughout their careers.

The Numbers Tell the Story

The demand for AI platform skills continues to accelerate.

  • 62% average salary premium for workers with AI platform skills (PwC).
  • Up to 118% salary premium in customer-facing industries (PwC).
  • 8× faster growth in demand for AI platform skills than the overall job market (PwC).
  • 7.5 hours saved every week by professionals using AI platforms (London School of Economics).
  • 2.3 hours saved every workday through AI-assisted tasks (GoTo Workplace Survey).
  • 8%–15% greater chance of receiving a job interview when AI platform skills appear on a résumé (University of Oxford, shared by the World Economic Forum).

“Every generation has a workplace skill that becomes essential,” said Duvi Honig, Founder and CEO of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce. “Yesterday it was Word, Excel, Outlook and email. Today it’s learning how to use today’s leading AI platforms. Whether you’re entering the workforce, working as a secretary, advancing your career or growing a business, these are practical skills that help people save time, increase productivity, reduce costs, increase revenue and become more valuable in today’s economy.”

JBiz AI Operations Summit

July 13–14, 2026
Sheraton Eatontown
Eatontown, New Jersey

Every participant who completes the two-day program will earn an AI Platforms Certification from the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce.

For registration and corporate or group discounts:

Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce
212-659-5270 ext. 104
Esther@OJChamber.com
www.OJChamber.com

About the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce

For more than 20 years, the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce has helped businesses and individuals grow through workforce development, executive education, certification programs, government partnerships and business advocacy. Through the JBiz AI Operations Summit, the Chamber continues its mission of equipping today’s workforce with practical, in-demand skills that help businesses save time, reduce costs, increase productivity, grow revenue and compete in the modern economy, while advancing its mission of “Uniting the World Through Commerce.”

Wall Street opened Tuesday, July 7, with a split personality. The Dow Jones Industrial Average pushed to a fresh all-time high, up about 187 points, or 0.3%, shortly after the bell, while the tech-heavy Nasdaq Composite fell around 0.6% and the S&P 500 slipped roughly 0.1%. Driving the caution was a jolt from the Middle East: the British maritime agency UKMTO said Tuesday that an “unknown projectile” struck an oil tanker and started a fire off the coast of Oman, near the Strait of Hormuz, on Monday — reviving fears about the world’s most important oil chokepoint just as tensions there had begun to ease.

The strike pushed crude higher. Brent crude, the global benchmark, rose 0.63% to $72.45 a barrel, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate gained 0.57% to $68.94. The move interrupted a stretch of falling oil prices and reminded traders that the U.S.-Iran conflict, and the shipping lane carrying about a fifth of the world’s oil, remain a live risk.

Beneath the surface, money kept rotating. For a second straight session, investors pulled out of the artificial-intelligence trade that has led the market all year and moved into steadier corners like healthcare, banks and the biggest technology names.

The moves built on a strong start to the week. On Monday, the Dow closed at a record 53,055.91, the S&P 500 finished at 7,537.43 and the Nasdaq ended at 26,121.16. The small-cap Russell 2000 was the early bright spot Tuesday, edging up about 0.4%.

Market movers

The pain was concentrated in chipmakers. Micron Technology dropped about 5%, and KLA, Marvell Technology, Broadcom and AMD all fell, dragging the VanEck Semiconductor ETF down more than 3%. On the other side, Eli Lilly climbed more than 2%, while JPMorgan Chase and Microsoft advanced as buyers favored steady earners.

Walmart rose about 1% after the retailer said it was cutting prices on staples including ground beef and Coca-Cola products — a welcome sign for shoppers watching grocery bills. Rivian Automotive sank more than 10% after announcing plans to sell 75 million new shares, a move that dilutes existing holders. Amazon ticked up after reports it is seeking to raise at least $25 billion through a bond sale. And SpaceX, Elon Musk’s rocket company, officially joined the Nasdaq-100 on Tuesday, less than a month after its record-breaking June debut.

Analysts were busy. Goldman Sachs started coverage of SpaceX with a Buy rating and a $205 price target, while UBS and Stifel also launched with Buy calls at $210 and $190. JPMorgan reiterated its Overweight rating on Apple and lifted its target to $345 from $325. Deutsche Bank upgraded First Solar to Buy with a $272 target, and Scotiabank raised Cloudflare to Outperform, boosting its target to $300 from $225. Not every call was upbeat: Bank of America cut Adobe to Underperform with a $190 target, and Erste Group downgraded Broadcom to Hold.

Commodities and volatility

Oil was the standout, climbing on the Hormuz scare. Otherwise the mood stayed mostly calm. The Cboe Volatility Index, Wall Street’s “fear gauge,” had closed near a low 15.6 on Monday and ticked only modestly higher as stocks opened, suggesting traders saw the tanker strike as a worry to watch rather than a reason to flee.

The day ahead

There is fresh data to digest. The Commerce Department reported Tuesday that the U.S. trade deficit widened sharply in May to $77.6 billion, from a revised $54.6 billion in April, as exports fell 3.2% and imports rose 3.3%. Investors are also looking to Wednesday, when the Federal Reserve releases minutes from its first meeting under new Chair Kevin Warsh — a document that could offer clues on when, or whether, interest rates will fall this year. Overseas, leaders are gathering for a NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey, where President Donald Trump is pressing European allies to spend more on their own defense.

For now, the market’s message is one of rotation rather than retreat: as long as the economy holds up, investors seem willing to keep buying — just not the same stocks that carried them here.

JBiz Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Thousands of Americans on Medicare have lost their prescription drug coverage this year after failing to pay premiums that, in some cases, were as little as $8. A new investigation by KFF Health News, published Monday, found many seniors were unaware they owed anything after plans that previously charged $0 monthly premiums quietly introduced small monthly fees for 2026.

The issue centers on Wellcare’s Value Script plan, the nation’s largest standalone Medicare Part D prescription drug plan with nearly 6 million members. In dozens of states, enrollees who paid no premium in 2025 suddenly owed small monthly payments this year. Many say they never realized the change until their prescription coverage had already been canceled.

Under current Medicare rules, insurers can terminate prescription drug coverage after members miss premium payments during a grace period. Even relatively small unpaid balances can result in cancellation.

One Nevada enrollee reportedly lost coverage after owing just $8.10 over three months. Another beneficiary lost coverage after missing less than $30 in premium payments.

For many seniors, the financial consequences extend far beyond the missed payments. Once coverage is terminated, most beneficiaries cannot enroll in another Medicare drug plan until the annual open enrollment period, with new coverage generally not beginning until January 1 of the following year. Those who go without qualifying prescription coverage for more than 63 days may also face a permanent Medicare late-enrollment penalty, increasing their prescription costs for life.

Many affected seniors believed their premiums were still being deducted automatically from their Social Security checks. However, because their plans charged $0 the previous year, automatic deductions had stopped. When premiums increased for 2026, many members needed to actively restart those deductions but were unaware of the requirement.

Wellcare said it notified affected members through mailed notices, emails, phone calls and text messages regarding the premium changes.

The situation highlights how even minor administrative changes can create significant financial and health risks for older Americans, particularly those living on fixed incomes who depend on uninterrupted access to medications for chronic conditions such as heart disease, diabetes, high blood pressure and respiratory illnesses.

The investigation also underscores the complexity of the Medicare Part D system. Although Medicare provides prescription drug coverage, the plans themselves are administered by private insurance companies that determine premiums, billing procedures and enrollment policies within federal guidelines.

Consumer advocates say beneficiaries should carefully review annual plan notices each fall, even if they expect their coverage to remain unchanged. A plan that carried no monthly premium one year may charge a premium the next, creating payment obligations that many retirees may overlook.

For Medicare beneficiaries, the lesson is simple but important: never assume a plan remains free from year to year. Confirm your monthly premium directly with your insurer, verify how payments are being made, and make sure automatic deductions remain active if applicable. Spending a few minutes reviewing your coverage could prevent the loss of prescription benefits and avoid permanent financial penalties.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SpaceX officially joins the Nasdaq-100 Index before Tuesday’s opening bell, triggering billions of dollars in automatic stock purchases as index funds and exchange-traded funds (ETFs) rebalance their portfolios to include the aerospace company.

The addition comes less than a month after Elon Musk’s company made its public market debut, making it one of the fastest companies ever added to the Nasdaq-100 following an initial public offering.

Because more than $800 billion is tied to the Nasdaq-100 through mutual funds and ETFs, fund managers tracking the index are required to purchase SpaceX shares regardless of valuation or market conditions.

Analysts estimate the inclusion could generate tens of billions of dollars in buying demand across passive investment funds, with the Invesco QQQ Trust alone expected to purchase billions of dollars’ worth of SpaceX stock.

Unlike active fund managers, index funds simply mirror the benchmark they follow. When a company joins the Nasdaq-100, those funds automatically buy the stock while slightly reducing holdings in every other company already in the index.

The timing makes SpaceX’s inclusion particularly noteworthy.

Only a small percentage of the company’s shares are currently available for public trading, meaning a large wave of mandatory buying is entering a relatively limited supply of stock. That imbalance between demand and available shares could contribute to increased price volatility in the short term.

SpaceX joins an index that already includes many of the world’s largest technology companies, including Apple, Microsoft, Nvidia, Amazon, Alphabet, and Meta Platforms.

The company’s rapid inclusion reflects both its enormous market capitalization and Nasdaq’s accelerated process for adding newly listed companies that quickly rank among the exchange’s largest businesses.

For investors who own Nasdaq-100 index funds through retirement accounts or brokerage portfolios, the change happens automatically. Millions of Americans will become indirect SpaceX shareholders without making any investment decisions themselves.

History, however, suggests that joining a major index does not guarantee future gains.

While some companies continue rising after inclusion, others experience temporary price spikes driven by forced buying before normal trading resumes. Investors will also be watching for insider share lockups to expire in the coming months, potentially increasing the number of shares available for sale.

Longer term, SpaceX’s valuation will depend less on index flows and more on the performance of its underlying businesses, including its launch services, Starlink satellite internet network, and future commercial space initiatives.

For Wall Street, Tuesday’s addition represents one of the largest index rebalancing events of the year and another milestone in the continued expansion of passive investing, where trillions of dollars automatically flow into the market based on index membership rather than individual stock selection.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two trading teams at Millennium Management, one of the world’s largest hedge funds, generated an estimated $3.7 billion in profits during June, underscoring how a handful of specialized traders can produce enormous returns by capitalizing on stock market index changes.

According to a Bloomberg report published Monday, the teams—led by Glen Scheinberg in New York and Pratik Madhvani in Dubai—accounted for more than half of Millennium’s estimated $6.6 billion in pre-fee profits for the month.

Their success came from a strategy known as index rebalancing, one of Wall Street’s most lucrative but least understood trading opportunities.

Major indexes such as the S&P 500, Nasdaq-100, and Russell indexes periodically add and remove companies. Because trillions of dollars are invested in index funds and exchange-traded funds (ETFs) that track those benchmarks, fund managers must buy newly added stocks and sell companies being removed.

Professional trading firms attempt to anticipate those transactions before they occur, profiting from the predictable buying and selling pressure created when index funds adjust their portfolios.

June proved especially profitable because several major index rebalancing events occurred almost simultaneously, creating unusually large trading volumes across global markets.

Millennium, which manages approximately $89 billion in assets through more than 330 independent trading teams, posted an estimated 4.1% return during June, bringing its gain for the year to roughly 10.5%, according to the Bloomberg report.

The results demonstrate the firm’s unique business model.

Rather than relying on a single investment strategy, Millennium allocates capital across hundreds of specialized portfolio managers who focus on everything from equities and bonds to commodities, currencies and quantitative trading. Strong performers receive additional capital, while underperforming teams often see assets reduced or are replaced.

For investors, the story highlights the growing influence of passive investing.

Today, trillions of dollars flow automatically into index funds through retirement accounts, pension plans and ETFs. While these investments offer low costs and broad diversification for long-term investors, they also create predictable trading patterns that sophisticated hedge funds can exploit.

Some market experts argue that index arbitrage improves market efficiency by providing liquidity during large portfolio adjustments. Others contend it allows sophisticated firms to profit from predictable trades generated by passive investors.

Either way, June’s results demonstrate the enormous sums at stake.

Just two teams inside one hedge fund generated nearly $4 billion in a single month by identifying and trading around scheduled changes in major stock indexes.

For individual investors, the takeaway is not to chase these strategies but to recognize how modern financial markets operate. Behind the scenes, some of Wall Street’s largest firms use sophisticated technology, leverage and quantitative models to capitalize on market events that most investors never notice.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Seven members of the OPEC+ alliance, led by Saudi Arabia and Russia, agreed on Sunday, July 5, to increase oil production by another 188,000 barrels per day beginning in August, according to a statement released by OPEC. On the surface, it was the group’s fifth consecutive monthly production increase. Beneath that decision, however, is a growing battle over the future of the nearly 70-year-old oil cartel—one that could ultimately send crude prices sharply lower and deliver significant savings to consumers.

Only a few months ago, the world faced the opposite problem.

The conflict that erupted in late February involving the United States, Israel and Iran disrupted shipping through the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway that normally carries roughly one-fifth of the world’s oil supply. Energy markets reacted immediately. Brent crude, the international benchmark, surged to $138 per barrel on April 7, its highest level since 2022, while fears of prolonged supply shortages sent fuel prices soaring around the globe.

Today, the picture has changed dramatically.

Commercial traffic has resumed through the Strait of Hormuz, production is returning, and crude prices have largely erased their wartime gains. On Monday, July 6, Brent crude traded near $71.70 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) hovered around $68.40, almost exactly where both benchmarks stood before the conflict began.

Several energy analysts now believe prices may have further to fall.

The pressure is coming from inside OPEC itself.

During the conflict, Gulf producers with limited export routes—including Iraq, Kuwait and Iran—were forced to sharply reduce production after shipping through the Persian Gulf became constrained. Saudi Arabia was better positioned because it continued exporting significant volumes through its East-West Pipeline to the Red Sea port of Yanbu, allowing it to maintain a much larger share of production.

Now that exports have resumed, countries that lost months of revenue want to increase production aggressively.

Iraq has publicly indicated it wants authorization to pump as much as 5 million barrels per day, with a longer-term objective of reaching 7 million barrels daily. Iraqi officials have also suggested the country could reconsider its membership in OPEC if larger production quotas are not approved.

That threat highlights the organization’s growing dilemma.

To keep member nations satisfied, OPEC may need to permit significantly higher production, increasing global supply and driving oil prices lower. But limiting production to support higher prices risks encouraging frustrated members to leave the organization altogether, weakening the cartel’s influence over world energy markets.

It is a difficult balancing act.

Saudi Arabia remains OPEC’s dominant producer and effectively controls the group’s direction. Flooding the market too quickly could send prices sharply lower, reducing revenues for every member. Holding production back, however, risks internal divisions that could permanently weaken the alliance.

Signs of that pressure are already emerging.

State-owned Saudi Aramco recently reduced official selling prices for its flagship crude grades destined for Asian buyers, one of its most aggressive pricing moves in years. The reductions reflect increasing competition for market share as additional barrels begin returning to global markets.

Demand trends are adding another layer of uncertainty.

Higher oil prices earlier this year accelerated investment in electric vehicles, renewable energy and energy efficiency across many countries. Some analysts believe a portion of that lost oil demand may never fully return, even as prices moderate.

According to JPMorgan commodities strategist Natasha Kaneva, the market now faces the prospect of previously constrained oil supplies returning just as global consumption growth begins slowing—a combination that could create a significant supply surplus.

Several forecasters believe that scenario could push prices considerably lower over the next several years.

Capital Economics economist Kieran Tompkins has suggested oil could average around $60 per barrel next year, with prices potentially falling toward $50 later in the decade. Some market analysts have argued that if OPEC loses control of production discipline altogether, prices could temporarily decline to $40 per barrel.

For oil-producing nations, that would represent a painful financial blow.

Saudi Arabia is widely estimated to require oil prices near $91 per barrel to balance its national budget, while several other producing countries depend heavily on petroleum revenues to fund government spending and economic development.

For consumers, however, lower oil prices would be welcome news.

Cheaper crude typically leads to lower gasoline and diesel prices, reduced airline fuel costs, lower shipping expenses and slower inflation across much of the economy. Because transportation costs affect nearly every product consumers purchase, sustained declines in oil prices often ripple throughout supply chains and eventually reach household budgets.

The larger story extends beyond this month’s production increase.

For decades, OPEC has exercised enormous influence over global oil markets by carefully managing supply. Today, growing internal disagreements, shifting energy demand and changing geopolitical realities are testing that influence as never before.

Whether the organization preserves its unity or fractures under competing national interests could determine not only the future of global energy markets, but also what consumers pay at the gas pump for years to come.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Starbucks shares fell more than 3% Monday after slipping below a key technical support level closely watched by Wall Street traders, signaling that the coffee giant’s recent rally may be losing momentum despite continued improvements in the company’s business.

The stock dropped below its 50-day moving average, a widely followed market indicator used to measure a stock’s intermediate trend. Technical analysts often view a move below that level as a bearish signal, suggesting sellers are beginning to gain control.

Starbucks traded near $102 after falling from recent highs around $109, although the stock remains well above where it traded late last year.

Despite Monday’s decline, the company’s fundamentals remain considerably stronger than its recent chart performance suggests.

During its latest quarterly earnings report, Starbucks reported $9.53 billion in revenue while adjusted earnings exceeded Wall Street expectations. Global comparable store sales also increased, with North America delivering its strongest customer traffic in several years.

CEO Brian Niccol has continued executing the company’s turnaround strategy, focusing on faster service, improved store operations and rebuilding customer loyalty.

Starbucks also recently addressed one of its biggest long-term uncertainties by restructuring its China business through a multibillion-dollar transaction designed to improve profitability while reducing operational risk.

Wall Street remains largely positive on the company.

Several analysts continue to rate Starbucks a Buy, with price targets above current trading levels, reflecting confidence that improving operations can support future earnings growth.

Still, investors face several challenges.

Coffee prices remain elevated, labor costs continue rising and inflation has pressured restaurant margins throughout the industry. At the same time, Starbucks faces growing competition from rapidly expanding specialty coffee chains and regional drive-thru operators targeting younger consumers.

Monday’s decline appears driven more by market trading patterns than by new company-specific developments.

Technical indicators currently suggest the stock may continue trading within a relatively narrow range until investors receive additional information, likely when Starbucks reports its next quarterly earnings later this month.

For long-term investors, Monday’s pullback serves as a reminder that even companies reporting improving financial results can experience short-term volatility as traders react to technical signals and broader market sentiment.

The next major catalyst for Starbucks shares will likely come when management updates investors on customer traffic, profit margins and the continued progress of its turnaround strategy.

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street investors have built a record number of bearish bets against Hertz Global Holdings after the rental car company’s stock lost nearly 60% of its value in just a few weeks, reflecting growing concerns about weakening profits, falling used-car prices and the company’s financial outlook.

New short-interest data released Monday showed bearish positions against Hertz reached an all-time high following the company’s June 24 announcement that sharply lowered its profit expectations and unveiled a new financing plan to strengthen its balance sheet.

Short selling is a strategy in which investors borrow shares and sell them, hoping to buy them back later at a lower price. A record level of short interest typically signals that professional investors expect further declines.

Hertz’s problems began after management warned that falling used-vehicle prices would significantly reduce the value of its rental fleet—a critical source of profits for rental car companies when vehicles are sold after leaving service.

The company also lowered its second-quarter earnings outlook, citing faster-than-expected vehicle depreciation and weaker-than-anticipated resale values across the used-car market.

To raise additional capital, Hertz announced plans to secure approximately $400 million through a combination of new debt and an equity offering.

As part of the financing, the company made millions of shares available for investors participating in the transaction, contributing to the surge in short-selling activity.

The market reacted swiftly.

Shares fell more than 40% immediately following the announcement and have continued sliding, making Hertz one of Wall Street’s worst-performing stocks over the past month.

Several analysts also reduced their price targets after the earnings warning, pointing to continued pressure on vehicle values, higher financing costs and uncertainty surrounding the company’s turnaround strategy.

The latest decline marks another dramatic swing for Hertz shareholders.

Earlier this year, the stock became one of Wall Street’s most volatile “meme” stocks after a short squeeze briefly sent shares sharply higher before the rally quickly reversed.

Despite the stock’s decline, Hertz continues operating normally through its Hertz, Dollar, and Thrifty rental brands, serving millions of travelers worldwide.

For investors, however, the company illustrates the challenges facing the rental car industry.

Unlike most businesses, rental car companies rely heavily on the resale value of their vehicle fleets. When used-car prices fall, profits can deteriorate rapidly, even if rental demand remains relatively stable.

With record levels of investors now betting against Hertz, the company faces increasing pressure to stabilize earnings and restore investor confidence.

Whether management’s turnaround plan succeeds—or bearish investors prove correct—will likely depend on how quickly used-car prices recover and whether Hertz can improve profitability during the second half of the year.

JBizNews Desk | Estero, Florida
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Microsoft announced Monday that it will eliminate approximately 4,800 jobs, or about 2.1% of its global workforce, as the company accelerates its push into artificial intelligence while streamlining operations across several divisions. The deepest reductions will come from its Xbox gaming business, where executives acknowledged the unit has struggled with profitability amid rising hardware costs and slowing console demand.

The layoffs were confirmed in a memo to employees from Amy Coleman, Microsoft’s chief people officer, who said the cuts are part of a broader organizational restructuring rather than a direct replacement of workers with AI.

“The roles eliminated today are not being replaced by AI,” Coleman wrote, adding that employees will need to continue developing new skills as Microsoft’s business evolves.

The biggest impact falls on Xbox. In a separate memo, Xbox CEO Asha Sharma told employees the gaming division is undergoing what she called its most significant restructuring ever. Approximately 1,600 positions are being eliminated immediately, with total reductions expected to reach 3,200 jobs by the end of Microsoft’s 2027 fiscal year—nearly one-fifth of the Xbox workforce.

Sharma said the gaming business has been operating with significantly lower profit margins than competing platforms and faces mounting pressure from sharply higher hardware costs. Memory chips used in gaming consoles have become more expensive as global demand for AI data centers continues to surge, squeezing margins throughout the gaming industry.

As part of the overhaul, Microsoft also plans to spin off four gaming studios into separate ownership while shifting more resources toward higher-growth software and AI businesses.

The reductions extend beyond Xbox. Sales, consulting and corporate operations are also being trimmed, including approximately 600 jobs in Washington state, home to Microsoft’s Redmond headquarters. Before the layoffs, Microsoft employed roughly 220,000 people worldwide.

The restructuring comes as Microsoft prepares one of the largest capital spending programs in corporate history. The company has told investors it expects to invest approximately $190 billion during 2026 to expand AI infrastructure, cloud computing capacity and data centers that power products including Copilot, Azure AI and enterprise AI services.

Microsoft has also launched new initiatives that embed thousands of engineers directly inside customer organizations to accelerate AI deployment, underscoring where future hiring and investment are being directed.

The announcement reflects a broader trend sweeping the technology sector. Rather than replacing workers directly with AI, many companies are shifting budgets away from traditional business units and toward artificial intelligence infrastructure, software development and cloud services.

Industrywide, more than 150,000 technology jobs have reportedly been eliminated during the first half of 2026 as companies including Amazon, Meta, Oracle and others continue restructuring while increasing AI investment.

Wall Street has largely rewarded companies that aggressively invest in AI, even as they reduce headcount elsewhere. Microsoft shares were little changed following the announcement, while investors continue watching whether the company’s enormous AI spending will generate stronger long-term revenue growth.

For businesses, Microsoft’s restructuring reinforces a growing reality across corporate America: companies are increasingly redirecting investment toward AI while demanding greater productivity from existing employees. The result is a workforce that must continually adapt as employers prioritize automation, cloud computing and AI-driven services.

The message extends well beyond Microsoft. Businesses across nearly every industry are evaluating staffing needs, retraining employees and investing heavily in AI tools designed to improve efficiency, reduce costs and remain competitive in an increasingly technology-driven economy.

JBizNews Desk | Redmond, Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Alibaba has ordered employees to stop using Anthropic’s Claude artificial intelligence tools, placing Claude Code on an internal list of restricted software and directing engineers to switch to Alibaba’s own coding assistant, Qoder, beginning July 10. The move, first reported by the South China Morning Post, marks a significant escalation in the growing competition between two of the world’s leading AI developers.

According to people familiar with the directive, Alibaba classified Claude Code as a “high-risk” application because of what it described as potential security and “back-door” concerns. Employees who previously relied on Anthropic’s software for programming assistance have been instructed to transition to Qoder, Alibaba’s internally developed AI coding platform.

The decision follows weeks of rising tensions between the two companies.

In June, Anthropic submitted a letter to the U.S. Senate Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, alleging that operators connected to Alibaba’s Qwen artificial intelligence division carried out what it described as the largest known AI model distillation attack against Claude.

Anthropic claimed approximately 25,000 accounts generated nearly 28.8 million conversations with Claude over several weeks in an effort to reproduce the model’s capabilities. Alibaba has denied the allegations.

At the center of the dispute is a rapidly emerging issue within artificial intelligence known as model distillation.

The technique allows developers to train smaller AI systems by studying responses produced by more advanced models. Supporters argue it can improve efficiency and reduce computing costs, while critics contend unauthorized large-scale use may improperly copy years of expensive research and development.

Anthropic maintains that using Claude in this manner violates its terms of service and infringes on its intellectual property.

The conflict intensified further after users reported discovering code inside Claude Code that appeared designed to identify whether certain users were located in China or connected to Chinese AI laboratories.

The discovery, widely discussed on online developer forums, prompted renewed scrutiny of Anthropic’s software.

Anthropic acknowledged the experimental feature and said it had already decided to remove it in a future software update. Company representatives described the functionality as part of an effort to detect unauthorized account resellers and misuse of the platform rather than to monitor ordinary users.

Neither company has publicly expanded on the dispute beyond previously issued statements.

The internal policy represents a sharp shift for Alibaba.

Earlier this year, the company actively encouraged employees to experiment with leading AI assistants, reimbursing developers for subscriptions to outside platforms including Claude, OpenAI’s ChatGPT and Google Gemini. Many engineers reportedly relied heavily on Claude Code because of its strong reputation for software development and debugging.

Under the new policy, employees are expected to migrate to Alibaba’s own AI ecosystem.

The dispute also reflects a broader geopolitical divide emerging across the artificial intelligence industry.

Anthropic has reportedly briefed U.S. policymakers on concerns involving foreign access to advanced AI systems while tightening access restrictions for users in mainland China and other regions. Those measures include expanded identity verification requirements and additional safeguards designed to prevent unauthorized commercial use of Claude.

For businesses, the implications extend beyond one corporate disagreement.

Artificial intelligence is becoming increasingly intertwined with national security, trade policy and technology competition between the United States and China. Companies operating internationally may soon face growing restrictions over which AI platforms employees are permitted to use, depending on corporate ownership, regulatory requirements and geopolitical considerations.

For software developers, the dispute highlights how quickly the AI landscape is changing. Tools that only months ago were viewed simply as productivity software are increasingly becoming strategic assets at the center of global technology competition.

The battle between Alibaba and Anthropic illustrates a broader shift now unfolding across the AI industry: competition is no longer focused solely on building the most capable models, but also on controlling access to them.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

LG Electronics reported record preliminary second-quarter results on Tuesday, July 7, saying operating profit surged approximately 147% from a year earlier to 1.57 trillion Korean won ($1.02 billion), according to the company’s regulatory filing. Quarterly revenue climbed 14.9% to 23.82 trillion won, also a record for the April-to-June period, highlighting a remarkable turnaround after last year’s tariff-driven slowdown.

The South Korean electronics giant said strong demand for its premium home appliances, televisions and automotive components fueled the record performance.

Sales of high-end refrigerators, washing machines and other household appliances remained strong, while overseas demand for air conditioners increased during the summer cooling season. LG also cited continued growth in its vehicle-components division, which has become an increasingly important contributor to earnings as automakers expand their use of advanced electronics.

The momentum extended well beyond one quarter.

For the first six months of 2026, LG generated a record 47.56 trillion won in revenue and 3.25 trillion won in operating profit, already surpassing the company’s total operating profit for all of 2025.

The dramatic improvement reflects both stronger business conditions and an easier comparison with last year.

During the second quarter of 2025, LG’s operating profit fell sharply to roughly 639 billion won as higher U.S. tariffs, softer consumer demand and rising manufacturing costs squeezed margins across its appliance business.

This year, those pressures have eased considerably.

LG has indicated it is recovering certain U.S. import duties through tariff-refund programs after determining some previously paid tariffs qualified for reimbursement. Those recoveries provided an additional boost to earnings while reversing costs that weighed heavily on last year’s results.

At the same time, the company spent the past year restructuring portions of its global manufacturing network, improving supply-chain efficiency and shifting production to better manage future tariff exposure.

Chief Executive Jae-cheol Ryu has also accelerated LG’s transformation away from relying primarily on highly competitive consumer electronics toward higher-margin businesses capable of generating steadier profits.

Those include subscription services for home appliances, software platforms built into LG televisions, automotive electronics and advanced cooling systems used in artificial intelligence data centers.

That strategy is helping reduce the company’s dependence on traditional television and appliance sales while creating recurring revenue streams that investors generally value more highly.

For consumers, the results carry mixed implications.

Strong sales of premium products suggest buyers continue spending on higher-end appliances despite broader economic uncertainty. Meanwhile, lower tariff-related costs could help reduce some pricing pressure across selected product lines, although manufacturers continue facing higher labor, logistics and component expenses.

The results also demonstrate how significantly U.S. trade policy can influence multinational manufacturers.

Just one year ago, tariffs substantially reduced LG’s profitability. Today, a combination of stronger sales, operational improvements and tariff recoveries has helped produce the strongest quarterly performance in company history.

For investors, the next milestone comes later this month when LG releases its complete earnings report, including business-segment performance and net income. Analysts will closely examine how much of the record profit came from sustainable operating improvements versus one-time tariff recoveries.

The broader takeaway is clear: LG’s strategy of emphasizing premium products, expanding higher-margin businesses and improving operational efficiency is delivering results at a time when global consumer demand remains uneven.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul, South Korea

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Samsung Electronics reported record quarterly earnings on Tuesday, July 7, forecasting operating profit of approximately 89.4 trillion Korean won ($58.4 billion) for the April-to-June quarter, according to the company’s official earnings guidance. The figure represents roughly 19 times the profit reported a year earlier and marks the largest quarterly operating profit in Samsung’s history, underscoring the extraordinary demand for artificial intelligence-related semiconductor chips.

Despite the historic results, investors reacted cautiously.

South Korea’s benchmark Kospi index opened sharply lower, falling about 1.6%, while Samsung shares dropped nearly 5% in early trading. The market’s response reflected growing investor concern that much of the AI-driven optimism has already been priced into technology stocks after an exceptional rally this year.

The company continues benefiting from surging demand for advanced memory chips used in artificial intelligence servers and high-performance computing. Samsung’s high-bandwidth memory business has become one of the biggest beneficiaries of the global AI boom as cloud providers and technology companies continue investing billions of dollars in new data centers.

Samsung’s projected operating profit exceeded analyst expectations of roughly 84 trillion won, while quarterly revenue reached approximately 171 trillion won, representing another significant increase from a year earlier.

The results confirm that demand for AI infrastructure remains exceptionally strong.

Memory chips have become one of the most valuable components inside AI systems, and Samsung remains one of the world’s largest producers alongside fellow South Korean manufacturer SK Hynix. Strong pricing for advanced memory products has helped offset weakness in several of Samsung’s traditional consumer electronics businesses.

Market movers

Analysts say Tuesday’s market reaction was driven less by Samsung’s earnings and more by investor expectations.

After semiconductor stocks posted enormous gains throughout 2026, many investors chose to lock in profits following the earnings announcement. The classic “sell the news” reaction has become increasingly common after major technology companies report results that, while impressive, may not significantly exceed already elevated expectations.

Several market strategists noted that Samsung’s earnings could still provide broader support for South Korea’s technology sector if investors regain confidence that AI-related spending remains sustainable.

Elsewhere in South Korea, shares of Hanwha Ocean fell sharply after Germany’s ThyssenKrupp Marine Systems was selected as the preferred bidder for Canada’s next submarine program, disappointing investors who had anticipated a major contract for the Korean shipbuilder.

Japan’s markets were more resilient.

The Nikkei 225 remained relatively stable while the broader Topix continued trading near record levels, supported by a weaker Japanese yen that continues benefiting the country’s exporters.

Wall Street also provided a positive backdrop.

On Monday, the Dow Jones Industrial Average closed above 53,000 for the first time, while the S&P 500 and Nasdaq Composite also finished higher as semiconductor shares extended recent gains. Strong performances from major U.S. chip companies helped reinforce optimism surrounding continued AI investment.

Commodities and volatility

Energy markets remained relatively calm despite ongoing geopolitical concerns.

Brent crude traded near $71.70 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) hovered around $68.40, close to pre-conflict levels. Lower oil prices continue easing inflation concerns for many Asian economies that rely heavily on imported energy.

Meanwhile, the Cboe Volatility Index (VIX) remained subdued, indicating investors continue viewing broader market risks as relatively contained.

What’s next

Investors now turn their attention to several major developments later this week.

SK Hynix is preparing for its planned Nasdaq listing, one of the year’s most closely watched semiconductor offerings, while markets also await the release of minutes from the Federal Reserve’s latest policy meeting under Chair Kevin Warsh.

Those developments could influence global technology stocks, interest-rate expectations and investment flows into Asian markets.

For businesses and investors alike, Samsung’s record profit highlights the enormous economic impact artificial intelligence continues having across the semiconductor industry. At the same time, Tuesday’s market reaction serves as a reminder that extraordinary earnings alone may no longer be enough to sustain the sector’s remarkable rally.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul, South Korea

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump pardoned 11 people on Friday, July 3, 2026, among them a staffing-company executive once tied to the Jack Abramoff lobbying scandal and nine men the White House said were prosecuted for helping drivers strip federal emissions controls off their vehicles, according to a list released Friday evening by a White House official.

The best-known name is Adam Kidan, a former business partner of the disgraced Washington lobbyist Jack Abramoff. Kidan pleaded guilty in 2005 to fraud and conspiracy tied to the purchase of a fleet of SunCruz gambling boats and was sentenced in 2006 to nearly six years in prison. The case grew out of the early-2000s influence scandal that reached Capitol Hill, the Interior Department, and officials in President George W. Bush’s administration.

What the White House chose to emphasize, however, was Kidan’s second act in business. After his 2009 release, he took a job at a staffing agency, founded Chartwell Staffing Solutions, and now serves as president of Empire Workforce Solutions. The White House credited his firms with placing more than 250,000 people in entry-level jobs. Kidan, a Republican donor, was also among the hosts of a March fundraiser at Trump’s Mar-a-Lago resort for a Long Island congressional candidate, according to Newsday. A message left with his business was not returned Friday.

The larger business story sits with the other nine pardons. Each stemmed from Clean Air Act cases involving drivers, mechanics, and sellers convicted of disabling emissions-monitoring systems or selling the “defeat devices” used to bypass them. Trump announced that group first on his Truth Social account, writing that he was honoring people who were, in his view, punished by the prior administration for “fixing their car.” The White House framed the cases as examples of burdensome regulations that hurt small operators, highlighting Army veteran Tim Clancy, whose business it said was effectively destroyed by the enforcement actions.

The clemency comes just days after a policy move with broader implications for the automotive repair industry. Earlier in the week, Trump signed a “Freedom to Fix” memorandum directing the Environmental Protection Agency to expand consumers’ and independent repair shops’ ability to repair and modify their own vehicles. The memorandum calls for independent mechanics to receive the same diagnostic and repair information available to franchised dealerships and seeks to curb the California Air Resources Board’s authority over certain aftermarket emissions-related parts. The EPA said the current system places unnecessary burdens on independent businesses and limits consumer choice.

For the aftermarket parts and independent repair industry, that policy shift may carry greater long-term significance than the individual pardons themselves. Thousands of independent repair shops, diesel mechanics, tuners, and aftermarket parts suppliers have argued for years that aggressive federal and California emissions enforcement exposed small businesses to criminal liability while steering customers toward dealership service departments. A regulatory approach that expands repair rights while pardoning individuals convicted under earlier enforcement policies signals a meaningful shift in federal priorities. It also sets up a potential conflict with California, which has long exercised significant influence over national vehicle emissions standards.

Another recipient was Jack Harvard, a Texas rancher and former mayor of Plano during the 1980s who had been convicted of bank fraud. The White House said the pardon recognized his conduct after serving his sentence, including protecting endangered wildlife on his ranch and allowing U.S. military and NATO forces to train there without charge. Officials did not provide additional details about his case.

The full list released by the White House included Joshua Davis, Matt Geouge, Jonathan Achtemeier, Tim Clancy, Ryan Lalone, Wade Lalone, Barry Pierce, Aaron Rudolf, Adam Kidan, Mackenzie Spurlock, and Jack Harvard.

The pardons continue a broader pattern during Trump’s second term of making frequent use of presidential clemency. Supporters have described the emissions-related pardons as relief for mechanics and small-business owners affected by regulatory enforcement, while critics have pointed to the inclusion of political donors and high-profile business figures. For the staffing industry, independent repair shops, and the automotive aftermarket, the clemency actions underscore an administration signaling a lighter regulatory approach toward business.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) fired missiles at two commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz early Tuesday, according to U.S. officials, damaging both ships and marking the latest escalation in one of the world’s most strategically important shipping lanes. The attack comes as commercial traffic had begun returning to normal following weeks of regional tensions and raises fresh concerns about global energy supplies and shipping security.

One of the vessels struck was identified as the Al Rekayyat, a liquefied natural gas tanker owned and managed by Nakilat, Qatar’s state-backed LNG shipping company. According to reports, the tanker was transiting the mouth of the Strait of Hormuz in the Gulf of Oman when it was struck on the port side near the engine room. A fire broke out after the impact, sending smoke through part of the vessel. Crew members reported that everyone aboard was accounted for and no fatalities or injuries were immediately reported.

The United Kingdom Maritime Trade Operations (UKMTO) also received reports of a commercial tanker being struck by an unidentified projectile approximately eight nautical miles east of Limah, Oman. The agency said a fire was reported aboard the vessel, although there were no immediate indications of environmental damage.

The attack represents a significant escalation in a waterway through which roughly one-fifth of the world’s seaborne oil and liquefied natural gas shipments pass each day. The Strait of Hormuz remains the most critical maritime chokepoint for global energy markets, linking oil and natural gas producers in the Persian Gulf with customers across Asia, Europe and North America.

Energy traders had recently become more optimistic as shipping volumes gradually recovered and crude oil prices retreated from earlier highs. Before Tuesday’s attack, Brent crude had been trading near pre-conflict levels while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) also moved lower as concerns about supply disruptions eased and OPEC+ continued increasing production.

That optimism could now be tested.

Any renewed threat to commercial shipping through Hormuz has the potential to increase insurance costs, delay cargo movements and place upward pressure on global oil and natural gas prices. Even short-lived disruptions in the strait can ripple through supply chains, affecting transportation costs, manufacturing expenses and consumer prices around the world.

The incident carries particular significance for Qatar, one of the world’s largest exporters of liquefied natural gas. LNG shipments leaving Qatar’s Ras Laffan export complex depend on safe passage through the Strait of Hormuz before reaching customers in Europe and Asia. Any sustained disruption to that route could have consequences for global energy markets at a time when demand for natural gas remains elevated.

Shipping companies and commercial operators are expected to closely monitor security conditions in the region before determining whether to continue normal transit schedules or adopt additional safety measures. Maritime security organizations have repeatedly warned that commercial vessels operating in the Gulf face elevated risks during periods of heightened regional tension.

Financial markets are also expected to react as investors evaluate the potential impact on oil prices, shipping companies and energy producers. Previous disruptions involving the Strait of Hormuz have often resulted in increased volatility across energy, transportation and insurance sectors.

The latest incident also raises broader geopolitical concerns as governments seek to prevent additional escalation in the region. Diplomatic efforts aimed at reducing tensions now face renewed uncertainty following an attack involving commercial shipping in one of the world’s busiest maritime corridors.

For businesses and consumers, developments in the Strait of Hormuz extend well beyond the Middle East. Energy prices influence everything from gasoline and diesel fuel to airline tickets, shipping costs, manufacturing expenses and household utility bills. Any sustained increase in oil or LNG prices could eventually work its way into the broader economy.

Maritime authorities continue monitoring the situation while shipping companies evaluate operational risks in the region. The coming days will likely determine whether the attack proves to be an isolated incident or the beginning of renewed instability affecting one of the world’s most vital energy corridors.

JBizNews Desk | Strait of Hormuz

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump arrived in Turkey on Monday for this week’s NATO Summit, where he is expected to pressure alliance members to accelerate military spending and follow through on commitments made at last year’s summit.

Ahead of the meetings, U.S. Ambassador to NATO Matt Whitaker said the administration expects allies to move quickly toward the alliance’s new goal of spending 5% of gross domestic product (GDP) on defense and related security programs.

“President Trump fully expects that all allies will step up immediately and get on the path to 5%,” Whitaker told reporters before the summit opened.

The new benchmark, agreed to in principle last year, calls for 3.5% of GDP to be spent on core military capabilities and an additional 1.5% on broader security investments, including cyber defense, military infrastructure and defense-related industries.

For businesses, the summit carries significant economic implications.

Higher defense budgets across Europe are expected to generate billions of dollars in new contracts for aerospace companies, defense manufacturers, cybersecurity firms and suppliers throughout the United States and Europe.

NATO Secretary-General Mark Rutte has identified increased defense production as one of the summit’s top priorities, arguing that allied nations must expand manufacturing capacity to replenish weapons stockpiles while continuing military support for Ukraine.

A draft summit declaration also calls for approximately €70 billion ($80 billion) in military assistance to Ukraine during 2026, with additional funding expected in 2027.

The spending surge is already creating opportunities for U.S. manufacturers. Just days before the summit, the Trump administration approved the sale of more than $700 million worth of GE Aerospace F110 jet engines to Turkey, highlighting how increased defense spending is translating into new export orders.

While countries including Poland, Germany and the Baltic nations have accelerated military investment, U.S. officials say several NATO members continue to lag behind agreed targets.

Trump has repeatedly argued that European allies should assume a greater share of NATO’s financial burden, allowing the United States to focus more resources on emerging global security challenges.

Beyond geopolitics, the outcome of this week’s summit could have lasting effects on the defense industry. Increased military spending typically supports demand for aircraft, missiles, radar systems, cybersecurity services, shipbuilding and advanced manufacturing, benefiting thousands of companies throughout the defense supply chain.

For investors and manufacturers, NATO’s spending commitments represent one of the largest long-term growth opportunities in the global defense sector. Whether member nations convert those commitments into actual contracts will be closely watched by markets in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara, Turkey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

When leaders of all 32 NATO members meet in Ankara, Turkey, the biggest business story on the table won’t be troops or treaties. It will be money — specifically, the roughly $300 billion in European orders for American-made military equipment that NATO Secretary General Mark Rutte has been highlighting to the White House. Rutte displayed that figure during a June 24 Oval Office meeting with President Donald Trump, pairing it with the claim that the buying wave is creating tens of thousands of U.S. factory jobs. He credited the American president directly for the shift.

That pitch is the commercial engine behind this week’s gathering. In a report prepared for the summit, the Congressional Research Service said allied leaders are expected to announce tens of billions of dollars in new defense contracts in Ankara, while outlining Rutte’s three priorities: raising allied defense spending, expanding transatlantic defense-industrial production, and sustaining support for Ukraine. Rutte has described a “sea change” in how European governments approach military budgets since Trump returned to office.

The spending numbers are substantial. According to NATO‘s own accounting, European allies and Canada increased defense spending by 20% in 2025 and together spent more than $574 billion, adjusted to 2021 prices. Those increases stem from the pledge reached at last year’s summit in The Hague, where every member except Spain committed to spending 5% of GDP on defense by 2035 — 3.5% for core military capabilities and 1.5% for security-related investments such as infrastructure and cybersecurity. The Ankara meeting is where governments are expected to show how those commitments will translate into real procurement.

A significant share of those contracts is expected to benefit American manufacturers. U.S. defense companies dominate many of the categories NATO is urgently seeking to expand, including air and missile defense systems, precision-guided munitions, and combat aircraft, after the war in Ukraine exposed major shortages across Europe. NATO’s new capability targets call for a fivefold increase in air defense, while officials have warned that ammunition stockpiles remain insufficient across much of the alliance. That backlog is the “$300 billion” Rutte continues to reference, pointing directly to U.S. production lines and manufacturing jobs. Germany, now Europe’s largest defense spender at roughly $120 billion in 2025, has more than doubled its military budget since 2022.

For the first time, the defense industry itself takes center stage. The full day of the summit’s opening session is dedicated to the NATO Summit Defence Industry Forum, which organizers say will run longer than the leaders’ own formal meeting. One of the key initiatives under discussion is what NATO describes as a “front door” for industry—an AI-enabled platform designed to help companies navigate the alliance’s procurement process more efficiently. Jason Israel, a senior fellow at the Center for European Policy Analysis and a former National Security Council defense-policy director, has pointed to joint purchasing and interoperability as essential goals while cautioning that NATO’s procurement system was never designed to move at today’s pace.

The political backdrop remains complicated. Trump has pushed for more than increased military spending, repeatedly calling for greater allied “loyalty.” He has threatened to reduce the U.S. military presence in Europe, floated annexing Greenland—a semiautonomous territory of NATO ally Denmark—and questioned whether the United States should defend members he believes are not contributing enough. Former NATO Secretary General Jens Stoltenberg wrote in his memoir that the alliance nearly fractured during the 2018 summit amid disputes with Trump, warning that NATO’s collective-defense guarantee loses credibility if an American president openly questions it. Fresh disagreements following the recent U.S.-Iran conflict, in which several allies declined to participate, have added new strains ahead of the Ankara meeting.

Hosting duties fall to Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, whose relationship with Trump could help keep the American president engaged despite broader disagreements within the alliance. Turkey also has its own commercial interests. Its drone manufacturers have become major suppliers across Europe, yet Ankara has been excluded from parts of the European Union’s joint procurement efforts. Rutte has repeatedly argued that limiting Turkish participation raises costs and slows defense production.

Despite the political friction, public support for NATO remains strong in the United States. A Chicago Council on Global Affairs survey conducted June 5–7 found that roughly two-thirds of Americans favor maintaining or increasing the nation’s commitment to the alliance. Whether that support translates into signed contracts—and how many of those contracts go to American manufacturers—will be the key measure of the summit’s success.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara, Turkey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Bitcoin rebounded Monday after President Donald Trump publicly embraced cryptocurrency during the rollout of the new Trump Accounts savings program, helping reverse an earlier selloff and lifting prices back above $63,000.

Speaking at a White House event, Trump said he has become “a big crypto guy,” arguing that the United States must remain competitive with China in the rapidly growing digital asset industry.

“If we don’t have it, China is going to have it,” Trump said, adding that he believes cryptocurrency “has a lot of life” ahead.

His comments helped improve investor sentiment after Bitcoin had fallen more than 2% earlier in the day.

The cryptocurrency’s recovery came despite fresh selling pressure from Strategy (formerly MicroStrategy), one of the world’s largest corporate holders of Bitcoin.

In a regulatory filing Monday, Strategy disclosed it sold approximately $216 million worth of Bitcoin between June 29 and July 5, marking its second round of Bitcoin sales this year. The company still owns approximately 843,775 Bitcoin, making it by far the largest publicly traded corporate holder of the cryptocurrency.

The sales surprised investors because Strategy and Executive Chairman Michael Saylor had long promoted a strategy of accumulating Bitcoin rather than selling it.

Some Wall Street analysts viewed the move as a negative signal for crypto markets, while others said the sales appear to be part of the company’s broader capital management strategy rather than a loss of confidence in Bitcoin.

Meanwhile, Trump’s crypto-friendly remarks added another layer to an administration that has increasingly embraced digital assets.

The comments came during the launch of Trump Accounts, a new tax-advantaged savings program established under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act. The program provides eligible children born between 2025 and 2028 with a $1,000 federal seed investment, while families can contribute additional money annually.

Although asked whether Bitcoin could eventually become an investment option inside the accounts, Trump stopped short of making any commitment.

Under current law, the accounts invest in a low-cost S&P 500 index fund, and adding cryptocurrency would likely require congressional approval rather than an administrative change.

Trump’s position on digital assets has shifted dramatically over the past several years. In 2019, he criticized cryptocurrencies, saying they were “not money.” Since returning to office, however, he has positioned the United States as a supporter of digital asset innovation and has repeatedly argued that America should lead the industry rather than allow China to dominate it.

Bitcoin remains one of the world’s most volatile financial assets, frequently moving thousands of dollars in a single trading session as investors react to economic data, government policy, institutional buying and selling, and regulatory developments.

For investors, Monday’s trading highlighted how quickly sentiment can change. A corporate Bitcoin sale pushed prices lower early in the session, while a few supportive comments from the president helped reverse much of the decline only hours later.

As cryptocurrencies continue moving further into the financial mainstream, investors can expect government policy, institutional activity and political developments to remain major drivers of Bitcoin prices.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Oil prices have fallen all the way back to where they stood before the United States and Iran went to war, erasing months of wartime gains and weakening one of Tehran’s most powerful sources of economic leverage. The decline accelerated Sunday after the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries and its allies agreed to add another 188,000 barrels a day to their production target beginning in August, marking the fourth straight monthly increase and signaling that the world’s biggest exporters are confident supplies will remain ample.

The seven countries still bound by quotas — Saudi Arabia, Russia, Iraq, Kuwait, Algeria, Kazakhstan and Oman — have now returned about 940,000 barrels a day to the market since the war between the United States and Iran began on February 28. That is close to 1% of all the oil the world burns in a day. The United Arab Emirates walked away from the alliance in the spring so it could pump freely, and its exports have since climbed to a record of roughly 3.7 million barrels a day.

For American families, the timing could hardly be better. Crude has slid all the way back to where it sat before the fighting started. West Texas Intermediate, the U.S. benchmark, traded near $68 a barrel late last week, while Brent, the global standard, hovered around $72. Both sit at their lowest levels since February 27 — the day before the war — and cheaper crude usually reaches the gas pump within a few weeks. That means relief for drivers heading home from the July 4 weekend and lower fuel bills for airlines.

The turnaround is remarkable. When Iran choked off the Strait of Hormuz this winter — the narrow channel that carries about a fifth of the world’s seaborne oil — prices jumped and forecasters warned of a real crisis. OPEC’s own output tumbled to 33.13 million barrels a day in May from 42.77 million in February. But tanker traffic through the strait has been climbing back, Saudi Arabia has restored shipments to about 90% of prewar levels, and a memorandum of understanding between Washington and Tehran aimed at ending the war has calmed nerves.

Now the worry is a glut, not a shortage. Norbert Rücker, head of economics at Swiss bank Julius Baer, said the market is settling into a “new-old normal” of ample supply and fierce competition among producers. Goldman Sachs expects Gulf exports to return to prewar levels by the end of July and sees Brent ending the year near $80.

There is one place the shelves are still bare: the world’s emergency reserves. Crude in the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve fell by 5.5 million barrels in the week ended June 26 to 325.7 million barrels, its lowest level since May 1983, according to the Department of Energy. The reserve has been cut nearly in half since 2021, drained to keep oil flowing during the Hormuz crunch as part of a coordinated release organized by the International Energy Agency.

That gap is exactly why the current glut matters far beyond the gas station. The faster the United States and its partners can buy up cheap crude and refill their tanks, the less power Iran holds the next time it threatens to close the strait. A country with full storage can shrug off a blockade; a country running on fumes cannot. Cheaper oil, in other words, hands Washington leverage at the negotiating table just as talks with Tehran gain steam.

Refilling those reserves will not happen overnight. Patrick De Haan, head of petroleum analysis at GasBuddy, has cautioned that stockpiles remain thin enough that markets could still panic if the peace deal wobbles or the strait shuts again. And with governments focused on keeping prices low, few are in a rush to bid aggressively for barrels to top off their reserves right now.

For now, though, the direction is clear. Ample supply, recovering shipments and a fragile but holding truce have pulled oil off its wartime highs and put money back in the pockets of ordinary consumers. Whether the calm lasts depends on a peace deal that neither side has fully signed — and on a strait that Iran has closed before and could close again.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two of the largest unions representing federal workers sued the Defense Department on Thursday, July 2, arguing the Pentagon acted illegally when it stripped collective bargaining rights from most of its civilian workforce earlier this year. The lawsuit, brought by the American Federation of Government Employees and the National Federation of Federal Employees, says the department violated the Administrative Procedure Act and asks a federal court to throw out the order that ended the contracts.

At the center of the case is an April 9 memo from Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth, who gave department leaders 24 hours to cancel nearly all collective bargaining agreements covering civilian employees. The unions argue the Pentagon reversed a long-standing policy “without any reasoned explanation” and misread the executive order it used to justify the move. Because the department acted arbitrarily, the complaint says, the memo “must be vacated and set aside.”

The dispute traces back to an order signed last year by President Donald Trump, which let agencies with national security missions suspend collective bargaining. Several agencies moved quickly to cancel union contracts. The Defense Department did not. For roughly a year it kept honoring its agreements, then abruptly changed course in April in what the lawsuit calls an “unexplained U-turn.” The unions note the legality of the underlying order is still being fought in multiple courts and say the Pentagon never explained why it could not simply wait for that litigation to finish.

The complaint describes a rollout that was, in its words, “chaotic.” In many cases there was almost no communication at all. Some union leaders learned by phone that their contracts were gone, others got emails or letters, and some received nothing, describing agency officials who “went radio silent.” The filing says managers at facilities across the country began telling employees the union no longer existed, a message the unions call false and damaging.

The practical fallout is landing on workers. The Defense Department has stopped accepting grievances filed under the canceled agreements, removing one of the main ways civilian employees resolve disputes over pay, discipline, and working conditions. The lawsuit points to one Army facility where an employee was placed on a performance improvement plan the unions describe as a likely prelude to firing. With her contract terminated, the complaint says, she has no way to challenge it.

For the unions, the fight is also about staffing a workforce the military depends on. “The Trump administration unilaterally and illegally stripping collective bargaining rights from DoD workers only serves to weaken morale, harm recruitment and retention,” NFFE National President Randy Erwin said in a statement. He argued that decades of unionized civilian work have never harmed national security and said the locals were proud to join AFGE in the challenge.

Hegseth has made his position plain. Pressed by lawmakers in April about canceling the contracts, he said he “fundamentally believes the ‘Department of War’ should not be subject to collective bargaining. Full stop.” He made the remark during testimony before the House Armed Services Committee on April 29, adding that the department already does a strong job providing competitive pay and benefits across the workforce.

The lawsuit lands as Congress keeps pushing back. The House Armed Services Committee recently adopted an amendment barring the Pentagon from using fiscal 2027 funds to carry out the president’s order. Whether it survives is unclear—a nearly identical provision was stripped from last year’s defense bill after Senate Republicans balked at clashing with the White House. The issue is expected to resurface as House and Senate negotiators hammer out the final 2027 defense authorization.

The stakes are large. Rep. Sarah Elfreth (D-Md.) said the president’s order wiped out bargaining rights for more than 1.5 million federal employees, including a wide swath of Defense Department civilians, calling it the most aggressive anti-union move by any president in U.S. history.

The Defense Department employs hundreds of thousands of civilians who repair aircraft, manage supply chains, run depots, and handle logistics that keep the armed forces running. Those jobs compete with private employers for skilled workers, and the unions argue that gutting workplace protections will make it harder to recruit and retain employees at a time when the department is already struggling to fill technical positions. The case now heads to federal court, where a judge will determine whether the Pentagon acted lawfully—and whether hundreds of thousands of civilian employees will regain their collective bargaining agreements.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks pushed higher Monday, July 6, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average finishing at an all-time high as a rally in semiconductor shares carried the market into a new trading week. The gains came as President Donald Trump rang the opening bell from the Oval Office and formally launched his new Trump Accounts children’s savings program, using the moment to again point to record stock prices as proof his economic agenda is working. Falling oil prices and a rebound in Bitcoin added to the upbeat tone following the Independence Day weekend.

The Dow climbed 155.84 points, or 0.29%, to close at a record 53,055.91, marking its first close above 53,000 and setting another intraday high. The S&P 500 gained 0.72% to finish at 7,537.43, while the Nasdaq Composite advanced 1.12% to 26,121.16. The gains extended last week’s rally, when all three major indexes posted solid advances.

Market movers

Technology stocks once again led Wall Street higher.

The Technology Select Sector SPDR ETF rose nearly 2%, helped by a 7% jump in Western Digital and a 2.8% gain in Teradyne. AMD surged 6.6%, Broadcom climbed 3.7%, Intel added 1.5%, Apple gained 1.3%, and Micron Technology rose 0.9% as investors continued pouring money into companies tied to artificial intelligence and semiconductor manufacturing.

Nvidia edged higher after manufacturing partner Hon Hai Precision Industry (Foxconn) signaled that AI-related demand remains strong.

Analyst upgrades also fueled buying.

Morgan Stanley raised price targets on Lam Research, Applied Materials, and KLA Corporation, sending each stock higher. Meanwhile, Bank of America increased its price target on IBM to $330, citing stronger revenue expectations. IBM gained 3.4%, making it one of the Dow’s top performers.

Boeing led the Dow with a 3.55% gain, followed by Goldman Sachs, up 3.28%. On the downside, Amgen fell 2.32%, while Disney and Merck each lost about 2%.

One of the session’s biggest winners was TeraWulf, which soared more than 16% after announcing a 20-year agreement with Anthropic to supply data center capacity in Kentucky. The long-term contract is expected to generate more than $19 billion in revenue over its lifetime.

Comcast also finished higher after its Sky division agreed to acquire the television operations of Britain’s ITV.

Commodities and volatility

Oil prices continued moving lower as global supply concerns eased.

Saudi Aramco sharply reduced the official selling price of its flagship Arab Light crude for Asian buyers, marking one of the largest price cuts in years as Gulf producers compete for market share following the reopening of the Strait of Hormuz. Brent crude traded below $72 per barrel, erasing nearly all of the gains recorded during the recent Middle East conflict.

Bitcoin also recovered after an early decline.

The cryptocurrency climbed roughly 1.8% to around $63,850 after Trump described himself as “a big crypto guy” during the Trump Accounts launch. Earlier in the session, Bitcoin had weakened after Strategy disclosed it had sold approximately $216 million worth of the digital asset.

Overall market volatility remained relatively subdued as investors continued rotating into technology shares while monitoring interest rates, oil prices and corporate earnings.

Looking ahead

Investors will now turn their attention to another busy week for technology markets.

SpaceX, which recently completed its public listing under the ticker SPCX, is scheduled to join the Nasdaq-100, prompting index funds to purchase shares as part of the benchmark’s rebalancing.

Investors will also watch earnings and guidance from major semiconductor companies, including Samsung Electronics, for additional clues about global demand for AI chips and technology spending.

John Stoltzfus, chief investment strategist at Oppenheimer Asset Management, said U.S. equities could continue climbing if economic fundamentals remain healthy.

“So long as the stateside fundamentals that benefited investors in the first half remain intact or improve, there’s upside to equities ahead,” Stoltzfus wrote, while cautioning investors to expect periods of market volatility.

For now, Wall Street’s momentum remains firmly intact, with record highs, continued strength in artificial intelligence investments, and easing energy prices helping support investor confidence heading into the heart of earnings season.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

.

Over 700 governmental agency rules will be eliminated under a comprehensive reform program released by the Trump administration on Friday.

The Trump administration’s Office of Information and Regulatory Affairs ( OIRA ) released its 2026 regulatory plan, which included 702 deregulatory actions, an increase from the 482 that the previous administration had listed.

OMB, which is a division of the White House’s Office of Management and Budget ( OMB), made it clear that the agency’s unified regulatory agenda for this year aims to repeal laws that are preventing economic growth.

The main objective of this regulation strategy is to improve American ‘ lives. This report provides the most fundamental information about how the Trump administration promotes economic growth, careers, and affordability, according to Mark Paoletta, general counsel serving as OIRA executive.

SUPERSONIC CIVILIAN FLIGHTS IN US SKIES ATTEND SWIFT RETURN WITH A QUICK STEP.

Paoletta added that according to OIRA, the 2026 regulation plan will result in significantly higher regulation cost savings than the previous record set.

In Governmental Year 2025, the President’s striking deregulatory initiatives saved Americans$ 210.9 billion in costs, according to Paoletta, a level of regulatory savings unmatched in American history. With a projected cost saving of$ 1.5 trillion, the fiscal year 2026 will surpass even that figure.

Definitely DISCLOSED OF US MARKET AS A PERSONAL RESOURCE OF CHINA-LINKED Linked VEHICLES

A wide range of rules are changed throughout the national agencies in the regulation strategy for 2026. For instance, the Environmental Protection Agency ( EPA ) announced that it would revisit emissions standards for light- and medium-duty vehicles from the era of the carbon dioxide and that it would repeal those standards for power plants using fossil fuels.

The USDA announced that it would work with retailers to develop new requirements for the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program ( SNAP ) to deter fraud and abuse.

Additionally, USDA intends to update the definition of qualified foods within the system to reflect the president’s nutrition goals and update the work requirements for able-bodied adults enrolled in SNAP. A proposed law would eliminate obsolete inspection procedures and modernize food safety inspections.

WHITE HOUSE LAYS OUT FIXES FOR AFFORDABILITY HOUSING PURPOSE

A new framework will be put in place to ensure the safe dissemination of U.S. artificial intelligence ( AI ) technology around the world, according to the Commerce Department’s Bureau of Industry and Security ( BIS), which regulates export controls and looks to support national security and the defense industrial base.

Additionally, BIS intends to reduce the trade restrictions on drones that are put in place for some U.S. allies and partners, and to include metal in the administration’s national security tariffs.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

This post was originally published here

The 2026 FIFA World Cup is turning into a spending bonanza for the North American cities hosting it. Card purchases across the tournament’s 16 host cities rose 5.4% from a year earlier during the June 10 to June 28 stretch, with spending by out-of-town visitors jumping 17.4%, according to a report from the Bank of America Institute. Behind those numbers are soccer fans opening their wallets like rarely before—some laying out a few thousand dollars, others spending as much as $150,000 to follow their teams across the United States, Canada and Mexico.

The tickets alone can cost a small fortune. On FIFA’s official sales platform, seats for the 104-match tournament have ranged from about $60 to nearly $11,000, with prices adjusting based on demand. For the July 19 final at MetLife Stadium, top-tier seats that started around $6,700 climbed to $10,990, while the priciest Front Category seats reached roughly $33,000. On the resale market, premium seats for marquee knockout matches were listed for about $20,000 on StubHub as of July 2.

Add flights, hotels, rental cars, meals and merchandise, and the trip quickly balloons. Fans interviewed near matches said their total costs ranged from about $2,500 for a single-city visit to as much as $150,000 for supporters purchasing FIFA hospitality packages and following the tournament from city to city. Many described the experience as a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity worth every dollar.

The biggest financial winner is FIFA itself. In a study prepared with the World Trade Organization, soccer’s governing body projected the tournament would generate $80.1 billion in gross economic activity worldwide, including $30.5 billion in the United States alone. FIFA, which operates as a nonprofit organization, says tournament revenue is reinvested into growing the sport globally and has defended its dynamic ticket pricing by citing extraordinary demand.

For host cities, the payoff has been substantial, though uneven. A report from FCM Consulting found that 13 of the 16 host cities have experienced hotel rate increases of at least 80% compared with a year ago. In Guadalajara, average room rates climbed from about $90 last summer to $511, while Boston led U.S. markets at roughly $611 per night and Houston averaged about $205.

Even with higher room rates, not every hotel has benefited equally. Before kickoff, the American Hotel & Lodging Association reported that roughly 80% of host-city hotels were seeing bookings below expectations, with many operators pointing to visa delays and geopolitical uncertainty for softer-than-expected international travel.

That matters because overseas visitors typically spend significantly more than domestic travelers. The U.S. Travel Association estimates international visitors spend more than $5,000 each during their trips, more than $200 above the average domestic traveler. Domestic fans, however, have accounted for much of the tournament traffic, while short-term rental analytics firm AirDNA reported that a surge of new listings has limited earnings for many property owners despite strong demand.

The soaring prices have also sparked criticism. New York officials partnered with Global Citizen to host a free Central Park watch party for 50,000 fans during the final, while host cities from Atlanta to Los Angeles have organized free fan festivals for supporters unable to afford stadium tickets. Even NJ Transit faced backlash after initially proposing a $150 round-trip fare from Penn Station to MetLife Stadium on game days before reducing the price to $98. Andrew Giuliani, who leads the White House task force overseeing the tournament, has said ticket prices are simply too high.

With the knockout rounds underway and the championship scheduled for July 19, the biggest matches are expected to generate another wave of last-minute travel and consumer spending. Whether host cities ultimately realize the long-term economic gains projected by organizers remains an open question. A study by the University of Toronto found that host cities experienced a net economic loss in 12 of the last 14 World Cups, highlighting the difference between short-term spending booms and lasting financial benefits.

For now, however, the numbers are difficult to ignore. Spending is breaking records, businesses across host cities are benefiting from an influx of visitors, and fans continue paying unprecedented prices for the chance to witness soccer’s biggest tournament in person.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The new head of the Federal Reserve is making clear that one of his signature goals — trimming the central bank’s enormous bond portfolio — will be a slow, careful project rather than a quick fix. Speaking Wednesday at the European Central Bank’s annual central-banking forum in Sintra, Portugal, Fed Chairman Kevin Warsh reiterated his preference to scale back the Fed’s bond holdings while stressing that any move would come only after extensive public preparation.

Warsh summed up the timeline with a characteristic line. “It’ll take us more than 18 weeks to bring it down to size,” he said, noting that it took the central bank roughly 18 years to build a balance sheet he believes has grown so large it “borders on fiscal policy.” The message was clear: no sudden moves, but a deliberate direction of travel.

The balance sheet in question is vast. The Fed’s holdings ballooned from about $800 billion before the 2008 financial crisis to nearly $9 trillion at their 2022 peak, swelling each time the central bank bought bonds to support the economy. Three years of runoff brought it back to roughly $6.7 trillion before the Fed resumed slow growth after stress in funding markets late last year. Warsh has long argued that this bond-buying, known as quantitative easing, distorted markets and disproportionately benefited holders of financial assets.

For ordinary Americans, this arcane-sounding debate has real consequences. The size of the Fed’s balance sheet influences long-term interest rates, which in turn shape mortgage rates, auto loans, business borrowing costs, and even the returns available on savings accounts. Shrinking it too quickly could push borrowing costs higher, making home loans and financing more expensive at a time when affordability is already stretched. That is precisely why Warsh is emphasizing patience.

There are technical dangers as well. Draining money from the banking system without care can destabilize the short-term funding markets that keep the financial system operating smoothly. The Fed learned that lesson in 2019, when an earlier effort to reduce its holdings caused a sudden disruption in money markets and forced policymakers to reverse course. Warsh acknowledged that history directly, saying any future reduction must be gradual and carefully managed.

Not everyone at the Fed agrees with his objective. Governor Michael Barr has argued that aggressively shrinking the balance sheet could weaken bank resilience, interfere with money-market functioning, and increase financial risks. Because major policy changes require broad agreement among Federal Open Market Committee members, Warsh will need to build consensus rather than act alone, another reason the process is expected to unfold over several years.

The balance-sheet strategy is only one part of Warsh’s broader agenda since becoming chairman. He has also signaled support for lighter regulation, less reliance on detailed forward guidance from the Fed, and a fresh look at how the central bank communicates inflation and monetary policy. At the June policy meeting, the Fed left its benchmark interest rate unchanged between 3.5% and 3.75%, and Warsh notably declined to publish his own future rate projections, marking a subtle departure from previous leadership.

The broader economic backdrop may give him flexibility. Economic growth has remained resilient, while easing energy prices following the de-escalation of tensions in the Middle East have helped reduce some inflation pressures. Although the White House has continued pressing for lower interest rates, Warsh has repeatedly emphasized that the Federal Reserve will make its decisions independently and based on economic data rather than political considerations.

For businesses and consumers, the near-term message is one of stability. Warsh has made clear he does not intend to abruptly withdraw liquidity from financial markets. Instead, he wants markets, lenders, and borrowers to have ample warning before any meaningful changes occur. That predictability allows companies planning investments and families considering major purchases to prepare without the shock of sudden policy shifts.

The longer-term picture is a Federal Reserve gradually reducing the extraordinary role it assumed during years of financial crises and pandemic-era intervention. Warsh believes the central bank expanded far beyond its traditional mission and that unwinding that footprint is necessary for healthier financial markets. As he emphasized in Sintra, restoring a smaller balance sheet will be measured in years, not months, with careful communication guiding every step.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

With the last of the federal electric-vehicle subsidies now stripped away, the case for going electric increasingly comes down to plain math — and a growing pile of real-world data is telling buyers the most expensive part of the car lasts far longer than they feared.

The timing matters. On Thursday, July 2, 2026, Tesla reported through its investor-relations release from Austin, Texas that it delivered 480,126 vehicles in the second quarter, its strongest Q2 ever and a 25% jump from a year earlier. But the strength was overseas. In the United States, Cox Automotive estimates Tesla’s sales fell about 20% after the $7,500 federal tax credit for new EVs expired on September 30, 2025 under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act. The companion $4,000 used-EV credit is gone too, and the federal tax break for home chargers lapsed on June 30, 2026 — less than a week ago. For American shoppers, the government’s thumb is off the scale.

That is exactly why battery durability has become the number that counts. For years, buyers treated the battery like a ticking clock, bracing for a $5,000-to-$20,000 replacement before the loan was paid off. New fleet data says that fear was overblown for most drivers.

On April 28, 2026, telematics company Geotab published an analysis of more than 22,700 electric vehicles across 21 makes and models and found batteries lose an average of just 2.3% of capacity a year. At that pace, a typical pack still holds about 80% of its original range after eight years — above the 70% floor most warranties guarantee. Geotab tracks battery health by measuring energy in during charging and out during driving, building a long-term trend rather than leaning on a single lab test.

Recurrent, a research firm pulling data from more than 30,000 EV drivers, reached the same conclusion from another angle. Liz Najman, the firm’s director of market insights, said cars with 150,000 miles or more still carrying their original battery are holding at least 83% of their original range. She describes battery aging as an “S curve” — a quick early dip, a long flat middle, then a steeper drop near the very end. Most of the wear people dread happens in the first few years, then nearly stalls.

Individual high-mileage cars back it up. Davide Giacobbe, co-founder and chief executive of Voltest, which tests used EV batteries for dealerships, said he has checked vehicles with 300,000 miles on the odometer still holding around 75% of capacity. “That is almost 500,000 kilometers,” he said. “I challenge you to do 500,000 kilometers in an internal-combustion car.” He noted that cheaper lithium iron phosphate (LFP) packs, now spreading across mainstream models, are aging even better than the older nickel manganese cobalt (NMC) chemistry.

The research is not all reassuring, and the warnings carry a price tag. Geotab pinpointed the biggest thing that shortens battery life, and it is in the driver’s control: heavy reliance on high-power DC fast charging above 100 kilowatts. Cars leaning on the fastest public chargers were projected to keep about 76% of capacity after eight years, versus 88% for cars charged mostly at lower power. Extreme heat speeds wear too. That gap changes the math for delivery fleets and long-haul commuters who live on fast chargers.

For the businesses built around cars — dealers, lenders and insurers — the durability data reshapes how a used EV should be priced. If the battery routinely outlasts the rest of the vehicle, a used electric car should be valued on mileage, accident history and software support, the same way a gas car is, rather than on a worst-case assumption that the pack is about to die. With no federal credits left to prop up sticker prices, the used market is where affordability now lives — and steadier resale values would firm up lease terms and lower the risk lenders price into EV loans.

Adam George of Cox Automotive said the rare early battery failures that do occur are almost always covered defects, not normal wear. “That’s what warranties are for,” he said, likening it to a blown engine on a gas car. Nearly every EV sold in the U.S. since 2012 carries a battery warranty of at least eight years or 100,000 miles.

The takeaway is not that EV batteries never wear out. It is that they wear out far more slowly than the market assumed — and in a post-subsidy market, that durability may do more to sell electric cars than any tax credit ever did.

JBizNews Desk | Austin, Texas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.